Digitized Automation for a Changing World

AS Series Module Manual

www.deltaww.com
 AS Series Module Manual
Revision History
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1st The first version was published. 2 0 1 6 / 11 / 3 0
1. Chapter 1: Added information concerning new models
AS08AD-B and AS08AD-C.
2. Chapter 2: Added information concerning new models
AS08AD-B andAS08AD-C.
3. Chapter 3: Updated information concerning CR#23-24
and software ne w screenshots.
4. Chapter 4: Updated information concerning CR#35-
2nd 54/CR#210-225 and software ne w screenshots. 2017/07/07
5. Chapter 5: Updated information concerning CR#1-
4/CR#210-217 and software ne w screenshots.
6. Chapter 6: Updated information concerning CR#210-
217 and software new s creenshots.
7. Chapter 7: Updated information concerning theoretical
calibration and software new screenshots
8 . C h a p t e r 8 : U p d a t e d i n f o r m a t i o n c o n c e r n i n g n e w FW 2 . 0 .
1. Chapter 1: Added information concerning new models
AS06RTD-A and AS08TC-A and installation information
updated in section 1.3.1.
3rd 2. Chapter 5: Added information concerning new model 2018/02/09
AS06RTD-A.
3. Chapter 6: Added information concerning new models
AS08TC-A.
1. Chapter 1: Added information concerning ambient air
temperature-barometric pressure-altitude.
2. Chapter 2: Added information concerning filter average,
cable length and resistance. Updated section 2.2.4
CR#23-38 and section 2.2.5 CR#43-74.
3. Chapter 3: Added information concerning cable length
and resistance. Updated section 3.2.1 analog to digital
conversion range, output impedance and section 3.2.4
CR17-20 and CR#21-36.
4. Chapter 4: Added information concerning filter average,
cable length and resistance. Updated section 4.2.1
analog to digital conversion range, output impedance
4th and 4.2.4 CR#31-21. 2 0 1 8 / 11 / 2 6
5. Chapter 5: Updated section 5.2.1 JPt100 range, section
5.2.4-5.2.5 added notes on CR, updated section 5.2.6
PID information, revised section 5.2.7 control mode.
6. Chapter 6: Section 6.2.1 revised type B range, added a
note, section 6.2.4-6.2.5 added notes on CR, revised
CR# for the records, updated section 6.2.6 PID
information and revised section 6.2.7 control mode.
7. Chapter 7: Section 7.2.4 added notes on CR.
8 . C h a p t e r 8 : N e w f u n c t i o n s i n n e w FW 2 . 0 2 .
9. Chapter 9: Updated section 9.2.5 output impedance
information and added sections 9.2.7.1-9.2.7.9 for new
f u n c t i o n s a d d e d a n d o p e r a t i o n a l e xa m p l e s .
1. Chapter 7: Revised contents of CR#0 and #59 in
5th section 7.2.4. 2019/1/29
2. Chapter 8: Deleted a note in section 8.6.4.
6th 1. Chapter 5: Updated wiri ng information in section 5.2.8. 2019/5/10
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1. Chapter 1: Added model information including AS02PU-
A, AS04PU-A, AS02HC-A, AS04SIL-A and AS-FPFN02
2. Chapter 2: Updated section 2.2.1 specification, 2.2.4
and 2.2.5 CR table, and 2.4 adding a new error code.
3. Chapter 3: Updated section 3.2.4 CR table and 3.4
adding a new error code.
4. Chapter 4: Updated section 4.2 specification, 4.2.4 CR
table and 4.4 adding a new error code.
5. Chapter 5: Updated section 5.2 specification, 5.2.4 and
5.2.5 CR table, and 5.4 adding a new error code.
6. Chapter 6: Updated section 6.2.4 and 6.2.5 CR table.
7th 2 0 1 9 / 11 / 2 9
Added D MPID instruction supporting firmware versions
and section 6.4 adding a new error code.
7. Chapter 7: Updated section 7.2.4 and 7.2.5 CR table
and 7.5 adding a new error code.
8. Chapter 8: Added a new error code in section 8.7.2.2.
9. Chapter 9: Updated AS-F2AD specifications in sections
9 . 2 . 4 a n d 9 . 2 . 5 . D e l e t e d S M 111 0 a n d S R 1 5 4 0 i n
section 9.2.7. Added AS-FPFN02 information in
sections 9.2.8 and 9.3.5.
1 0 . C h a p t e r 11 : N e w c h a p t e r i n t r o d u c i n g p o s i t i o n i n g
modules AS02PU-A and AS04PU-A.
1. Chapter 1: Updated section 1.1 to include software
information for new AX series PLC, updated AS02HC-A
specifications and added AS-FOPC02 information.
Added an installation note in section 1.3.4.
2. Chapter 2: New chapter introducing digital input/output
modules.
3. Chapter 3 – 7: Added DIADesigner+ and Hardwa re
Configuration information.
4. Chapter 8: Updated CR#120 default value and input
values 100 to 105 of CR200 command set in section
8.2.4.
5. Chapter 9: Added AS-FPEN02 and AS04SIL-A
information, added LED indicator information of
8th EtherNet/IP in section 9.4.2, and added error LED 2020/04/30
indicator information of AS00SC M- A in section 9.7.2.2.
6. Chapter 10: Updated software images in section 10.2.7
and 10.2.7.2, updated section 10.2.7.7, added AS-
FPFN02 installed on AS00SC M-A information in section
10.2.8, added AS-FOPC02 product information in
sections 10.2.9 and 10.3.6, updated LED indicator
information of AS-FEN02 in section 10.3.4.
7. Chapter 12: Updated response time and input isolation
specifications in section 12.2.1.
8. Chapter 13: New chapter introducing IO link
communication module, AS04SIL-A.
9. Chapter 14: New chapter introducing high speed
counter modules AS02PU and AS04PU.
1. Chapter 1: Updated AS02/04PU-A module descriptions
2. Chapter 3-8: Added DIADesigner-AX software o peration
3. Chapter 9: Updated sections 9.7.2.2 and 9.7.2.3
9th 2020/10/30
AS00SCM Error LED Indicators
4. Chapter 10: Deleted EtherNet/IP Adapter information in
section 10.2.9.
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
5. Chapter 13: Added filter time in section 13.2.1 and
added 13.3.2.5 Application-specific API for
Communications of IO-Link Devices.
6. C h a p t e r 1 4 : A d d e d t h e p r o c e s s i m a g e s o f t h e Ti m i n g t o
Count in section 14.2.5 Pulse Input Counting.
1. Chapter 1: Added new product information for AS02ADH-A
and AS-FFTP01.
2. Chapter 6: Added Ma xi mum Measurable Range in
functional specifications and Conversion Details in
section 6.21. Added a label description in profile in
section 6.2.2.
3. Chapter 7: Added more applicable sensor types in,
including C, U, L and TXK. Added Conversion Details in
section 7.2.1. Added a label description in Profile in
section 7.2.2 Added compatible firmware versi ons and
more descriptions on control mode in section 7.2.7.
4. Chapter 8: Added W eight in functional specifications in
section 8.2.1. Added a label description in Profile in
section 8.2.2. Added new CRs, CR#400 to #479 in section
8.2.4. Added a new illustration for zero point tracking in
section 8.2.5. Updated the software images in section
8.3.2, 8.3.3 and 8.4. Added troubleshooting for diver
board failure in section 8.6.2.
5. Chapter 9: Updated Introduction and added applicable
PLC CPU for AS00SCM-A in RTU mode in section 9.1.
10th Updated Knob Function in section 9.2.3. Updated Modbus 2021/08/20
information and added software images in sections 9.3.1,
9.3.1.1 and 9.3.1.2. Updated UD Link information, added
software images in section 9.3.2, and added new
description for SC MSoft in section 9.3.2.2. Added more
d e s c r i p t i o n s a n d e xa m p l e f o r a p p l i c a t i o n s o f A S 0 0 S C M- A
in RTU mode in section 9.4.2. Deleted software image
from manufacturer R in section 9.4.2.6. Added Network
Security information in section 9.4.2.7. Added error code
16#1304 in section 9.7.2.1, updated error codes 16#1506
in section 9.7.2.2 and updated 16#1502 in section
9.7.2.1.
6. Chapter 10: Updated supported firmware and software
versions in section 10.2.7.1. Updated Features in
section 10.2.7.2. Added a new section for IP Setting in
section 10.2.7.4. Updated information in Data Mapping
through EtherNet/IP Adapter in section 10.2.7.6. Updated
software images (from manufacturer R) and descriptions
i n E xa m p l e o f C o n n e c t i n g t o 3 r d P a r t y P L C S c a n n e r
through EIP Builder in section 10.2.7.7. Updated
supported firmware and software ve rsions in section
10.2.8.1. Updated Features in section 10.2.8.2. Updated
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
information in Configuring the Data Length for I/O
M o d u l e (W o r k s w i t h A S 3 0 0 ) i n s e c t i o n 1 0 . 2 . 8 . 4 . U p d a t e d
applicable modules in section 10.2.8.6. Updated
software images (from manufacturer S) and PROFINET
D e v i c e E xa m p l e ( A d a p t e r ) i n s e c t i o n 1 0 . 2 . 8 . 8 . U p d a t e d
features for AS-FOPC02 in section 10.2.9.2. Added
Modbus TCP Specifications and OPC UA Specifications
in section 10.2.9.3. Added SR information for AS300 in
s e c t i o n 1 0 . 2 . 9 . 4 . A d d e d S e t t i n g U T C Ti m e i n O P C U A
Slave information in section 10.2.9.6. Added Network
Security information in section 10.2.9.7. Added The
C o p y r i g h t I n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t t h e U s e d E xt e r n a l S o f t w a r e
Sources in 10.2.9.8. Added a new section 10.2.10 for
AS-FFTP01. Updated AS-FPFN02 LED information in
section 10.3.5.
7. Chapter 12: Updated information in Special Features in
section 12.2.4. Updated software images in section 12.3.
8. Chapter 13: Updated AS PLC CPU firm ware vers ion in
section 13.1. Updated application-specific API
information in section 13.3.2.5. Updated 16#FF21~
16#FF25 in IO-Link Event Code table in section 13.5.
9. Chapter 14: Updated the receiving data length to 32 bits
in section 14.1.1. Move the input/output information to
section 14.3. Updated software images in section 14.4.
10.Chapter 15: Added a new chapter for High-speed analog
module AS02ADH.
1. C h a p t e r 1 : A d d e d n e w p r o d u c t i n f o r m a t i o n f o r A S - F E C AT.
Added information about DIADesigner software. Added
supported firmware versions for AS04AD-A, AS08AD-B,
AS08AD-C, AS06 XA-A, AS04RTD-A and AS06RTD-A.
2. Chapter 2: Updated information for specifications of
input/output isolation voltage.
3. Chapter 3: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Added Built-in moving average and
proportional filter function in section 3.1.1. Added
supported firmware versions and updated information for
11 t h 2022/05/16
specifications of conversion time as well as isolation in
section 3.2.
4. Chapter 4: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Updated information for specifications of
isolation in section 4.2.
5. Chapter 5: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Added supported firmware versions and
updated information for specifications of conversion time
as well as isolation in section 5.2.
6. Chapter 6: Added information about DIADesigner
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
software and Ni120. Added supported firmware versions
and updated information for specifications of conversion
time as well as isolation in section 6.2.
7. Chapter 7: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Updated information for specifications of
r e s o l u t i o n , i s o l a t i o n a n d m a xi m u m m e a s u r a b l e r a n g e i n
section 7.2.
8. Chapter 8: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Updated information for specifications of
maximum filter and average weights in section 8.2.1.
Updated the contents of CR8 and CR67 in section 8.2.4.
Updated the contents of filtering function in section
8.2.5.
9. Chapter 9: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Updated information for CANopen mode (AS-
FCOPM) in section 9.4.1.
10. Chapter 10: Update isolation information. Updated
IOPS/IOCS information in section 10.2.8.4. Added
supported firmware version for AS-FOPC02 in section
10.2.9.1 and updated contents in sections 10.2.9.5,
10.2.9.6, and 10.2.10.4, where the descriptions of OPC
UA Client should be OPC UA Server instead. Added log
section for AS-FFTP01 and updated contents (OPC UA,
F T P, L o g , W e b , a n d M Q T T ) i n s e c t i o n 1 0 . 2 . 1 0 . A d d e d
n e w p r o d u c t i n f o r m a t i o n f o r A S - F E C AT i n s e c t i o n
1 0 . 2 . 11 .
1 1 . C h a p t e r 11 : U p d a t e d i n f o r m a t i o n f o r s p e c i f i c a t i o n s o f
i s o l a t i o n i n s e c t i o n 11 . 1 . 2 .
12. Chapter 12: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Updated information for specifications of
input/output isolation voltage in section 12.2.
13. Chapter 13: Updated information for specifications of
isolation in section 13.2.1.
14. Chapter 14: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Updated information for specifications of
input/output isolation voltage in section 14.2.
15. Chapter 15: Added information about DIADesigner
software. Updated information for specifications of
isolation in section 15.2.
1. Chapter 1: Added information about new digital modules
a n d E t h e r C AT r e m o t e I O m o d u l e s , a n d u p d a t e d
information on remote IO modules in section 1.1.
12th Updated information on ambient air temperature- 2 0 2 4 / 0 4 / 30
barometric pressure-altitude and added specifications of
durability and flammability rating of plastic case in
section 1.2. Added Section 1.2.2.4 Installation
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
Instructions to Meet E MC Standards and section 1.2.2.5
Cables.
2. Chapter 2: Added information on models 16AM10N-
B / 1 6 A N 0 1 T- B / 1 6 A N 0 1 P - B / 3 2 A M 1 0 N - B / 3 2 A N 0 2 T- B a s
well as section 2.4 W iring Digital Input/Output Modules
a n d s e c t i o n 2 . 5 W i r i n g D i g i t a l I n p u t / O u t p u t Te r m i n a l s .
3. Chapter 3: Updated the description on terminal block
wiring in section 3.2.7.
4. Chapter 4: Updated the description of CR#1-4 in section
4.2.4 and the description on terminal block wiring in
section 4.2.6
5. Chapter 5: Updated the description on terminal block
wiring in section 5.2.6.
6. Chapter 6: Updated the description on terminal block
wiring in section 6.2.8.
7. Chapter 7: Added the notes on measured temperature
e xceeding the rated input range in section 7.2.1 and
updated the description on terminal block wiring in
section 7.2.8.
8. Chapter 8: Updated information on CR#201 in section
8.2.4, and the chart of steps to adjust points in section
8.3.1, and added section 8.4 Making Adjustments by
DIADesigner-AX.
9. Chapter 9: Updated the information in section 9.1 and
moved the information on supported versions and I/O
modules from section 9.1 to sections 9.3 and 9.4. In
section 9.2.1, replaced UD Link with user-defined
communication format and added topology type in
Ethernet communication interface. Updated the
information on restoring to default settings with knobs in
section 9.2.3.1, and added sections 9.4.2.7 Network
Diagnostic, 9.4.2.8 DLR Network and 9.4.2.9 Address
Allocation, as well as webpage setting information in
section 9.4.3 and DIADesigner-AX information in section
9.6.1
10. Chapter 10: In section 10.2.7, updated the AS-FEN02-
related information such as firmware version (V1.04),
EtherNet/IP specifications and webpage function, and
added sections 10.2.7.10 Network Diagnostic and
1 0 . 2 . 7 . 11 D L R N e t w o r k . I n s e c t i o n 1 0 . 2 . 8 , r e p l a c e d t h e
contents on AS-FPFN02 with the description of
CPU/RTU/COM modes in section 10.2.8.1, updated
section 10.2.8.2 for updated firmware versions, and
added sections 10.2.8.3 PN modules and PN slots,
1 0 . 2 . 8 . 5 I n d i c a t o r s a n d 1 0 . 2 . 8 . 9 - 1 0 . 2 . 11 f o r t h e
e xa m p l e s o f A S - F P F N 0 2 W o r k i n g i n C P U / R T U / C O M
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
m o d e s . I n s e c t i o n 1 0 . 2 . 1 0 , u p d a t e d t h e m a xi m u m
connection number and its note in section 10.2.10.3, and
the information on node-RED editor in section 10.2.10.8.
I n s e c t i o n 1 0 . 2 . 11 , u p d a t e d M o d b u s T C P s p e c i f i c a t i o n s .
In section 10.3.4, updated some of the parts of AS-
FEN02 and their descriptions.
11. Chapter 12: Updated the description on terminal block
wiring in section 12.2.5, and added section 12.4
DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration).
12. Chapter 13: Added version information related to
DIADesigner-AX in section 13.1 and the settings in
DIADesigner-AX in section 13.3.3, as well as section
13.3.2 Basic Functions in DIADesigner-AX and section
13.4.6 Using AX-3 Series CPU as Upper Device.
13. Chapter 14: Added section 14.4 Operation in
DIADesigner-AX and section 14.6 DIADesigner-AX
(Hard ware Configuration).
14. Chapter 15: Updated the information on the record
function in section 15.1.1 and the description on terminal
block wiring in section 15.2.6, and added section 15.4
DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration).
 AS Series Module Manual

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 1-7

1.2.1 General Specifications .................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 EMS Standards .............................................................................. 1-8

1.3 Installation ...................................................................................... 1-11

1.3.1 Installing a Module ....................................................................... 1-11
1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block ............................................ 1-13
1.3.3 Changing a Module....................................................................... 1-14
1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card ..................................... 1-15
1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module ............................................................. 1-16

Chapter 2 Digital Input / Output Modules

2.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Digital Input/Output Module Profiles ................................................ 2-4

2.3 Digital Input/Output Module Terminals ........................................... 2-16

2.4 Wiring Digital Input/Output Modules .............................................. 2-24

2.4.1 Wiring AS08AM10N-A ................................................................... 2-24
2.4.2 Wiring AS08AN01P-A .................................................................... 2-25
2.4.3 Wiring AS08AN01R-A .................................................................... 2-26
2.4.4 Wiring AS08AN01T-A .................................................................... 2-27
2.4.5 Wiring AS16AM10N-A/AS16AM10N-B.............................................. 2-28
2.4.6 Wiring AS16AN01R-A .................................................................... 2-29
2.4.7 Wiring AS16AN01T-A/AS16AN01T-B ............................................... 2-30
2.4.8 Wiring AS16AN01P-A/AS16AN01P-B ............................................... 2-31
2.4.9 Wiring AS16AP11R-A .................................................................... 2-32
2.4.10 Wiring AS16AP11T-A .................................................................... 2-33
2.4.11 Wiring AS16AP11P-A .................................................................... 2-34
2.4.12 Wiring AS32AM10N-A ................................................................... 2-35
2.4.13 Wiring AS32AM10N-B ................................................................... 2-37
2.4.14 Wiring AS32AN02T-A .................................................................... 2-38

i
 2.4.15 Wiring AS32AN02T-B .....................................................................2-41
2.4.16 Wiring AS64AM10N-A ....................................................................2-42
2.4.17 Wiring AS64AN02T-A .....................................................................2-44
2.5 Wiring Digital Input/Output Terminals ........................................ 2-47
2.5.1 Wiring Digital Input Terminals ........................................................2-47
2.5.2 Wiring Digital Output Terminals ......................................................2-50

Chapter 3 Analog Input Module AS04/08AD

3.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Characteristics............................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 3-3

3.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 Profile .......................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 3-6
3.2.4 AS04AD Control Register ................................................................ 3-6
3.2.5 AS08AD Control Registers ..............................................................3-11
3.2.6 Functions .....................................................................................3-17
3.2.7 Wiring .........................................................................................3-20
3.2.8 LED Indicators ..............................................................................3-24

3.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 3-24

3.3.1 Initial Setting ...............................................................................3-24
3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module....................................................3-27
3.3.3 Online Mode .................................................................................3-28
3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ..............................................3-29
3.3.5 Parameters ..................................................................................3-30

3.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ..................................... 3-34

3.4.1 Initial Setting ...............................................................................3-34
3.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module....................................................3-37
3.4.3 Online Mode .................................................................................3-38
3.4.4 Parameters ..................................................................................3-39

3.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 3-41

3.5.1 Error Codes ..................................................................................3-41
3.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure .............................................................3-42

ii
Chapter 4 Analog Output Module AS04DA

4.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 4-2

4.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 4-3

4.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Control Registers ........................................................................... 4-6
4.2.5 Functions ...................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.6 Wiring ........................................................................................ 4-12
4.2.7 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 4-14

4.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft...................................................................... 4-14

4.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 4-14
4.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module ................................................... 4-17
4.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 4-18
4.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 4-19
4.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 4-20

4.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ..................................... 4-23

4.4.1 Initial Setting .......................................................................... 4-23
4.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module ............................................... 4-26
4.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................ 4-27
4.4.4 Parameters.............................................................................. 4-28

4.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 4-30

4.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 4-30
4.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 4-30

Chapter 5 Analog Input / Output Module AS06XA

5.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 5-2

5.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 5-3

5.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 5-7
5.2.4 Control Registers ........................................................................... 5-8
5.2.5 Functions .................................................................................... 5-13
5.2.6 Wiring ........................................................................................ 5-20

iii
 5.2.7 LED Indicators ..............................................................................5-22

5.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 5-23

5.3.1 Initial Setting ...............................................................................5-23
5.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module....................................................5-26
5.3.3 Online Mode .................................................................................5-27
5.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ..............................................5-28
5.3.5 Parameters ..................................................................................5-29

5.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ..................................... 5-34

5.4.1 Initial Setting ...............................................................................5-34
5.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module....................................................5-37
5.4.3 Online Mode .................................................................................5-38
5.4.4 Parameters ..................................................................................5-39

5.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 5-41

5.5.1 Error Codes ..................................................................................5-41
5.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure .............................................................5-42

Chapter 6 Temperature Measurement Module AS04/06RTD

6.1 Overview ............................................................................................... 6-2

6.1.1 Characteristics .................................................................................... 6-2

6.2 Specifications and Functions ................................................................. 6-3

6.2.1 Specifications ..................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Profile ............................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .................................................................... 6-7
6.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers .................................................................. 6-8
6.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers .................................................................6-12
6.2.6 Functions ..........................................................................................6-17
6.2.7 Control Mode .....................................................................................6-20
6.2.8 Wiring ..............................................................................................6-20
6.2.9 LED Indicators ...................................................................................6-23

6.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ........................................................................ 6-24

6.3.1 Initial Setting ....................................................................................6-24
6.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module.........................................................6-27
6.3.3 Online Mode ......................................................................................6-28
6.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ...................................................6-29
6.3.5 Parameters .......................................................................................6-30

6.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ......................................... 6-33

6.4.1 Initial Setting ....................................................................................6-33

iv
 6.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module ........................................................ 6-35
6.4.3 Online Mode ..................................................................................... 6-36
6.4.4 Parameters....................................................................................... 6-37

6.5 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 6-39

6.5.1 Error Codes ...................................................................................... 6-39
6.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ................................................................. 6-40
6.5.3 State of the Connection ..................................................................... 6-41

Chapter 7 Temperature Measurement Module AS04/08TC

7.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 7-4

7.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 7-8
7.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers ............................................................... 7-8
7.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers ............................................................. 7-12
7.2.6 Functions .................................................................................... 7-18
7.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................... 7-21
7.2.8 Wiring ........................................................................................ 7-31
7.2.9 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 7-32

7.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft...................................................................... 7-33

7.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 7-33
7.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module................................................... 7-36
7.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 7-37
7.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 7-38
7.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 7-39

7.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ..................................... 7-42

7.4.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 7-42
7.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module................................................... 7-45
7.4.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 7-46
7.4.4 Parameters ................................................................................. 7-47

7.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 7-49

7.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 7-49
7.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 7-50

v
Chapter 8 Load Cell Module AS02LC

8.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 8-2

8.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.2 Profile .......................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals............................................................... 8-4
8.2.4 Control Registers ........................................................................... 8-5
8.2.5 Functions .....................................................................................8-13
8.2.6 Wiring .........................................................................................8-19

8.3 Making Adjustments ........................................................................ 8-20

8.3.1 Steps to adjust points ...................................................................8-20
8.3.2 Adjustment settings / LC Wizard .....................................................8-21
8.3.3 Adjustment Settings / Calibrational Commands ................................8-24
8.3.4 LED Indicators ..............................................................................8-27

8.4 Making Adjustments by DIADesigner-AX ......................................... 8-28

8.4.1 Steps to Adjust Points ...................................................................8-28
8.4.2 Parameter Settings in LC Wizard .....................................................8-29
8.4.3 LED Indicators ..............................................................................8-33

8.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 8-33

8.5.1 Initial Setting ...............................................................................8-33
8.5.2 Checking the Version of a Module ...................................................8-36
8.5.3 Online Mode .................................................................................8-37
8.5.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ..............................................8-38
8.5.5 Parameters ..................................................................................8-39

8.6 Basic Operation in DIADesigner-AX ................................................. 8-42

8.6.1 Creating a New Project ..................................................................8-42
8.6.2 Adding a Module ...........................................................................8-44
8.6.3 Parameters - Configuring the Module...............................................8-46
8.6.4 I/O Mapping .................................................................................8-49
8.6.5 Status .........................................................................................8-50
8.6.6 Information ..................................................................................8-50

8.7 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 8-51

8.7.1 Error Codes ..................................................................................8-51
8.7.2 Troubleshooting Procedure .............................................................8-52

vi
Chapter 9 Serial Communication Module AS00SCM

9.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 9-2

9.2 Specification, Function and Wiring .................................................... 9-3

9.2.1 The functional specifications ................................................................. 9-3
9.2.2 Dimensions and Profile ........................................................................ 9-4
9.2.3 Knob Functions ................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.4 Wiring ............................................................................................... 9-8

9.3 COM mode ....................................................................................... 9-10

9.3.1 Modbus ............................................................................................ 9-10
9.3.2 UD Link ........................................................................................... 9-20
9.3.3 CANopen Mode ................................................................................. 9-28

9.4 RTU Mode ........................................................................................ 9-31

9.4.1 CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM) ............................................................... 9-32
9.4.2 EtherNet/IP Mode.............................................................................. 9-36
9.4.3 Remote Module Setting ...................................................................... 9-53

9.5 Normal Exchange Area .................................................................... 9-56

9.6 Application ...................................................................................... 9-58

9.6.1 Modbus ............................................................................................ 9-58
9.6.2 UD Link ........................................................................................... 9-75
9.6.3 Remote IO Application (AS-FCOPM) ..................................................... 9-90
9.6.4 Remote IO Application (AS-FEN02) Through EIP Builder......................... 9-97
9.6.5 Remote IO Application (Multiple AS-FEN02) .......................................... 9-99

9.7 Error Codes .................................................................................... 9-100

9.7.1 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Communication Module ..... 9-101
9.7.2 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module ................ 9-102

Chapter 10 Function Cards

10.1 Introduction .................................................................................... 10-2

10.2 Specification and Function ............................................................... 10-2

10.2.1 AS-F232 ..................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.2 AS-F422 ..................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.3 AS-F485 ..................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.4 AS-F2AD ..................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.5 AS-F2DA ..................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.6 AS-FCOPM .................................................................................. 10-4
10.2.7 AS-FEN02 ................................................................................... 10-5

vi i
 10.2.8 AS-FPFN02................................................................................. 10-19
10.2.9 AS-FOPC02 ................................................................................ 10-31
10.2.10 AS-FFTP01 ................................................................................. 10-38
10.2.11 AS-FECAT .................................................................................. 10-65

10.3 Profiles and Dimensions ................................................................ 10-75

10.3.1 AS-F232 .................................................................................... 10-75
10.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA............................................ 10-75
10.3.3 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................. 10-75
10.3.4 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................. 10-76
10.3.5 AS-FPFN02................................................................................. 10-77
10.3.6 AS-FOPC02 ................................................................................ 10-78
10.3.7 AS-FFTP01 ................................................................................. 10-79
10.3.8 AS-FECAT .................................................................................. 10-80

10.4 Wiring ........................................................................................... 10-82

10.4.1 AS-F2AD .................................................................................... 10-82
10.4.2 AS-F2DA .................................................................................... 10-83
10.4.3 Topology of AS-FEN02, AS-FOPC02, AS-FPFN02 and AS-FECAT ......... 10-84
10.4.4 Topology of AS-FFTP01 ................................................................ 10-85

10.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................................................... 10-86

10.5.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 10-86

Chapter 11 DeviceNet Master Scanner Module AS01DNET-A

11.1 Introduction of AS01DNET-A ........................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Feature........................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Specifications ...............................................................................11-2

11.2 Components of AS01DNET-A ........................................................... 11-3

11.2.1 Profile and Dimensions ..................................................................11-3
11.2.2 Components .................................................................................11-4
11.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave） .................................................11-4
11.2.4 DeviceNet Connector .....................................................................11-4
11.2.5 Address Switch .............................................................................11-5
11.2.6 Function Switch ............................................................................11-5
11.2.7 Digital Displayer ...........................................................................11-5

11.3 DeviceNet Network Communication ................................................ 11-6

11.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate ...............11-6
11.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure ............................................11-6
11.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor ...................... 11-10

viii
 11.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power .................................................. 11-11

11.4 Master /Slave Mode ....................................................................... 11-12

11.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode ................................................ 11-12
11.4.2 Installation ................................................................................. 11-13
11.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC ............................................. 11-14
11.4.4 Bit-strobe Command ................................................................... 11-16
11.4.5 Network Node Status Display ....................................................... 11-17
11.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and Slaves ....... 11-17
11.4.7 Application Example .................................................................... 11-18
11.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram .......................... 11-28
11.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting ............................................... 11-35
11.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via Software .... 11-38

11.5 RTU Mode ...................................................................................... 11-50

11.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode)....................................... 11-50
11.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU) ......... 11-51
11.5.3 Installation ................................................................................. 11-52
11.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode) ........................................... 11-54
11.5.5 Application Example .................................................................... 11-81
11.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting ............................................ 11-90

11.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft ............................. 11-96

Chapter 12 Positioning Modules AS02/04PU

12.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 12-2

12.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................. 12-2

12.2 Specifications and Functions ........................................................... 12-3

12.2.1 Specifications .............................................................................. 12-3
12.2.2 Profile......................................................................................... 12-5
12.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................. 12-6
12.2.4 Special Features .......................................................................... 12-8
12.2.5 Notes on Wiring ........................................................................... 12-8
12.2.6 External Wiring for AS02PU-A ........................................................ 12-9
12.2.7 External Wiring for AS04PU-A ....................................................... 12-10

12.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft.................................................................... 12-11

12.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 12-11
12.3.2 Checking Module Version ............................................................. 12-13
12.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 12-15
12.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 12-16
12.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 12-18
12.3.6 Normal Exchange Area ................................................................ 12-20

ix
12.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ................................... 12-21
12.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 12-21
12.4.2 Checking Module Version ............................................................. 12-23
12.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 12-24
12.4.4 Parameters ................................................................................ 12-25
12.4.5 Normal Exchange Area ................................................................ 12-28

12.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 12-28

12.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 12-28
12.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 12-28
12.5.3 State Codes (Axis 1 - 4) .............................................................. 12-28

Chapter 13 I/O Link Communication Modules AS04SIL

13.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 13-2

13.1.1 Firmware and Software Versions .....................................................13-2

13.2 Specification and Wiring .................................................................. 13-2

13.2.1 Specifications ...............................................................................13-2
13.2.2 Profile .........................................................................................13-5
13.2.3 Wiring .........................................................................................13-6

13.3 Functions ......................................................................................... 13-8

13.3.1 Basic Functions in ISPSoft ..............................................................13-8
13.3.2 Basic Functions in DIADesigner-AX ................................................ 13-14
13.3.3 Application Functions................................................................... 13-22

13.4 Application Examples .................................................................... 13-27

13.4.1 Using AS Series CPU as Upper Device ............................................ 13-27
13.4.2 Using AH Series CPU or Non-Delta Master PLC as Upper Device ........ 13-28
13.4.3 Application of AS Special Remote Mode ......................................... 13-29
13.4.4 Application of Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode ..................... 13-41
13.4.5 Application of CANopen DS301 Mode ............................................. 13-43
13.4.6 Using AX-3 Series CPU as Upper Device ......................................... 13-49

13.5 IO-Link Event Code Table .............................................................. 13-54

13.6 Module Status Codes ..................................................................... 13-56

Chapter 14 High-Speed Counter Module AS02HC

14.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 4-2

14.1.1 Characteristics............................................................................... 4-2

x
14.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 4-3
14.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 4-3
14.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 4-6
14.2.3 Terminals ...................................................................................... 4-7
14.2.4 Wiring .......................................................................................... 4-8
14.2.5 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 4-11

14.3 Operation ........................................................................................ 4-12

14.3.1 Parameter Settings ...................................................................... 4-12
14.3.2 Pulse Input Counting .................................................................... 4-13
14.3.3 SSI Input Counting ...................................................................... 4-16
14.3.4 Z-Phase Function Setting .............................................................. 4-22
14.3.5 List of Dedicated API Instructions ................................................... 4-23
14.3.6 The impact of AS CPU Status on AS02HC-A ..................................... 4-24

DIADesigner
Parameter Settings ..................................................................... 14-25
Pulse Input Counting ................................................................... 14-26
SSI Input Counting ..................................................................... 14-29
Z-Phase Function Setting ............................................................. 14-35
List of Dedicated API Instructions .................................................. 14-35

ISPSoft
Initial Setting ............................................................................. 14-37
Checking Module Version ............................................................. 14-40
Online Mode ............................................................................... 14-41
Import and Export a Parameter File ............................................... 14-42
Parameters ................................................................................ 14-43
Normal Exchange Area ................................................................ 14-44

Initial Setting ............................................................................. 14-45

Chercking Module Version ............................................................ 14-48
Online Mode ............................................................................... 14-48
Parameters ................................................................................ 14-49
Normal Exchange Area ................................................................ 14-51

Error Codes ................................................................................ 14-52

Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 14-53

xi
Chapter 15 High-Speed Analog Input Moudle AS02ADH

15.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 15-2

15.1.1 Characteristics..............................................................................15-2

15.2 Specifications and Functions ........................................................... 15-3

15.2.1 Specifications ...............................................................................15-3
15.2.2 Profile .........................................................................................15-6
15.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ..............................................................15-7
15.2.4 AS02ADH Control Register .............................................................15-8
15.2.5 Functions ................................................................................... 15-11
15.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 15-23
15.2.7 LED Indicators ............................................................................ 15-27

15.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................................................... 15-28

15.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 15-28
15.3.2 Checking Module Version ............................................................. 15-31
15.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 15-32
15.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 15-34
15.3.5 Parameters Setting ..................................................................... 15-35

15.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ................................... 15-39

15.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 15-39
15.4.2 Checking Module Version ............................................................. 15-41
15.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 15-42
15.4.4 Parameters Setting ..................................................................... 15-43

15.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 15-48

15.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 15-48
15.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 15-49

* All the Windows screenshots are used with permission from Microsoft.

xi i
 1
Chapter 1 Introduction

Table of Contents
1.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Specifications ......................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.1 General Specifications ......................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 EMC Standards ................................................................................... 1-8
1.3 Installation .......................................................................................... 1-11
1.3.1 Installing a Module ........................................................................... 1-11
1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block ................................................. 1-13
1.3.3 Changing a Module ........................................................................... 1-14
1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card .......................................... 1-15
1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module ................................................................. 1-16

1-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.1 Overview
_1 This manual introduces the use of special modules. The special modules are the digital input/output modules,

analog input/output modules, temperature measurement modules, load cell modules, and network modules.

For software operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner or DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If you are using AS Series

PLC CPU, refer to ISPSoft User Manual or DIADesigner Manual for more information. The new software

DIADesigner-AX only supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to AX-3 User Manual

for more information on software operation.

The following table shows the module descriptions.

Classification Model Name Description

AS08AM10N-A 24VDC, 4.2mA, 8 inputs, spring-clamp terminal block

5 ~ 30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM, 8 outputs, Sourcing output ,

AS08AN01P-A
spring-clamp terminal block

10 ~ 240VAC/5 ~ 24VDC, 2A/output, 8A/COM, 8 outputs, relay,

AS08AN01R-A
Spring-clamp terminal block

5 ~ 30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM, 8 outputs, sinking output,

AS08AN01T-A
spring-clamp terminal block

AS16AM10N-A 24VDC, 4.2mA, 16 inputs, spring-clamp terminal block

24VDC, 4.2mA, 16 inputs, spring-clamp terminal block

AS16AM10N-B
(slim series)

5 ~ 30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM, 16 outputs, sourcing output ,

AS16AN01P-A
Spring-clamp terminal block

Digital I/O 5 ~ 30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM, 16 outputs, Sourcing output ,

module AS16AN01P-B spring-clamp terminal block

(slim series)

10 ~ 240VAC/5 ~ 24VDC, 2A/output, 8A/COM, 16 outputs, relay,

AS16AN01R-A
spring-clamp terminal block

5 ~ 30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM, 16 outputs, sinking output,

AS16AN01T-A
spring-clamp terminal block

5 ~ 30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM, 16 outputs, sinking output,

AS16AN01T-B Spring-clamp terminal block,

(slim series)

24VDC, 4.2mA, 8 inputs, 5 ~ 30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM, 8

AS16AP11P-A
outputs, sourcing output , spring-clamp terminal block

24VDC, 4.2mA, 8 inputs, 10 ~ 240VAC/5 ~ 24VDC, 2A/point,

AS16AP11R-A
8A/COM, 8 outputs, relay, spring-clamp terminal block

1-2
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

Classification Model Name Description

24VDC, 4.2mA, 8 inputs, 5 ~ 30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM, 8
AS16AP11T-A 1_
outputs, sinking output, spring-clamp terminal block

AS32AM10N-A 24VDC, 4.2mA, 32 inputs, MIL connector

AS32AM10N-B 24VDC, 4.2mA, 32 inputs, Spring-clamp terminal block

5 ~ 30VDC, 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM, 32 outputs, sinking output,

AS32AN02T-A
MIL connector

5 ~ 30VDC, 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM, 32 outputs, sinking output,

AS32AN02T-B
Spring-clamp terminal block

AS64AM10N-A 24VDC, 4.2mA, 64 inputs, MIL connector

5 ~ 30VDC, 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM, 64 outputs, sinking output,

AS64AN02T-A
MIL connector
4-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits
AS04AD-A
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V, 0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel (FW V1.02 or later: 1 ms/channel)
8-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits
AS08AD-B
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel (FW V1.02 or later: 1 ms/channel)
8-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits
AS08AD-C
0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel (FW V1.02 or later: 1 ms/channel)
4-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 12 bits
AS04DA-A
-10 to +10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA
Analog
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel
input/output
4-channel analog input module
module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V, 0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel (FW V1.02 or later: 1 ms/channel)
AS06XA-A
2-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 12 bits
-10 to +10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel
2-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V, 0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
High-speed conversion time: 2 µs
AS02ADH-A
Full isolation (the analog channels are isolated from one another.)
Logging function enable/disable: 2000 data per channel, peak
records
Filtering: Low-pass filter, band-pass filter
4-channel, 2-wire/3-wire RTD
Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-
Temperature
Ni1000 / Cu50 / Cu100 / 0–300Ω / 0–3000Ω input impedance and
measurement AS04RTD-A
Ni120 (FW V1.06 or later)
module
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (16 bits)
Conversion time: 200 ms/channel

1-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Classification Model Name Description

6-channel, 2-wire/3-wire RTD
_1 Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-
Ni1000 / Cu50 / Cu100 / 0–300Ω / 0–3000Ω input impedance and
AS06RTD-A
Ni120 (FW V1.06 or later)
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (16 bits)
Conversion time: 200 ms/channel
4-channel thermocouple
Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, and -100 to +100 mV
AS04TC-A
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (24 bits)
Conversion time: 200 ms/channel
8-channel thermocouple
Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, and -100 to +100 mV
AS08TC-A
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (24 bits)
Conversion time: 200 ms/channel
2-channel, 4-wire/6-wire load cell sensor
Eigenvalue applicable to a load cell: 1, 2, 4, 6, 20, 40, 80 mV/V
Load cell
AS02LC-A Highest accuracy: 0.04% of full-scale
module
ADC Resolution : 24 bits
Conversion time: 2.5–400 ms (nine options to choose from)
2-axis positioning control
5-24 VDC, 1 (A/B/Z phase) differential input, maximum hardware
bandwidth for input: 200 kHz;
AS02PU-A 24 VDC, 5 mA, 5 external inputs, maximum hardware bandwidth
for input: 1 kHz;
5 VDC, 2-axis (4 points) high-speed differential outputs, maximum
bandwidth for output: 200 kHz;
4-axis positioning control
Positioning /
24 VDC, 5mA, 6 inputs, maximum hardware bandwidth for input: 1
counter
AS04PU-A kHz;
module
5-30 VDC, 0.1A, 4-axis (8 points) NPN output, maximum
bandwidth for output: 100 kHz;
2-channel high-speed counters
Input methods for the 2-channel are pulse-input (max. at 200 kHz)
and SSI communication interface input (max. at 1.25 MHz)
AS02HC-A
Incrementing / decrementing encoder input
4-point high-speed open collector output, 5-30 VDC, 0.1A,
work with high speed differential output
Serial communication module, 2x communication ports, applicable
AS00SCM-A
Network to communication cards, supporting MODBUS protocols
module AS01DNET-A DeviceNet communication port, functioning as master or slave
AS04SIL-A IO-Link module, built-in with 4 IO-Link communication ports
AS00SCM-A
+ Network module with AS-FCOPM function cards
AS-FCOPM
AS00SCM-A
Remote I/O
+ Network module with AS-FEN02 function cards
module
AS-FEN02
DeviceNet remote IO slave, its right side connects with AS Series
AS01DNET-A
extension modules, including digital modules, analog modules,
(RTU)
temperature modules, etc.
EtherCAT remote I/O module with built-in high-speed I/O points
EtherCAT
remote I/O ASRTU-EC16AP1TA 8 inputs, 24VDC, 5mA, 2-channel high-speed counters (counting
module
mode: pulse, pulse+direction and A/B phase), input frequency: up

1-4
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

Classification Model Name Description

to 200kHz.
1_
8 outputs (NPN), 5-30VDC, 0.5A, 2-channel high-speed output

axes, output frequency: up to 200kHz.

Its right side connects with AS series extension modules such as

digital modules, analog modules, temperature measurement

modules, and load cell modules.

For details on specifications and operations, see ASRTU-EC

Series Operation Manual.

EtherCAT remote I/O module with built-in high-speed I/O points

8 inputs, 24VDC, 5mA, 2-channel high-speed counters (counting

mode: pulse, pulse+direction and A/B phase), input frequency: up

to 200kHz.

8 outputs (PNP), 5-30VDC, 0.5A, 2-channel high-speed output

ASRTU-EC16AP1PA axes, output frequency: up to 200kHz.

Its right side connects with AS series extension modules such as

digital modules, analog modules, temperature measurement

modules, and load cell modules.

For details on specifications and operations, see ASRTU-EC

Series Operation Manual.

4 built-in digital inputs

2 SSI interfaces for absolute encoder signal input

1 RS-485 interface supporting the master mode and RS-485 free

protocol

ASRTU-EC02SSNA Its right side connects with AS series extension modules such as

digital modules, analog modules, temperature measurement

modules, and load cell modules.

For details on specifications and operations, see ASRTU-EC

Series Operation Manual.

AS-F232 Serial communication port, RS232, functioning as master or slave
AS-F422 Serial communication port, RS422, functioning as master or slave
AS-F485 Serial communication port, RS485, functioning as master or slave
CANopen communication port, supporting DS301, AS series
AS-FCOPM
remote modules, and Delta servo systems
Function 2-channel analog input, 0–10 V (12 bits), 4–20 mA (11 bits),
AS-F2AD
cards Conversion time: 3 ms/channel
2-channel analog input, 0–10 V, 4–20 mA (12 bits),
AS-F2DA
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel
2x Ethernet ports, supporting data exchange, supporting
AS-FEN02 MODBUS TCP, EtherNet/IP Adapter, AS series remote control,
and DLR function

1-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Classification Model Name Description

2x Ethernet ports, supporting data exchange, supporting
_1 AS-FPFN02
PROFINET Device (adapter)
2x Ethernet ports, supporting data exchange, supporting OPC UA
AS-FOPC02
Server, only available for AS300 Series PLC CPU
1x Ethernet port, supporting FTP Server, OPC UA Server, MQTT
AS-FFTP01 Client, Web Server, Data log, only available for AS300 Series PLC
CPU
2x Ethernet ports, supporting data exchange (before EtherCAT
Master enabled), MODBUS TCP Server (1 connection), EtherCAT
AS-FECAT
Master 16-axes point-to-point positioning control (only available for
Delta drive), only available for AS 300 Series PLC CPU

1-6
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.2 Specifications
1.2.1 General Specifications 1_

Item Specifications

Operating temperature -20 to +60°C

Storage temperature -40 to +80°C
5–95%
Operating humidity
No condensation
5–95%
Storage humidity
No condensation
Work environment No corrosive gas
Installation location In a control box
Pollution degree 2

Ingress protection
IP20
(IP ratings)

EMC (electromagnetic
Refer to Chapter 7 for more information.
compatibility)
Tested with:
5 Hz ≦ f ≦ 8.4 Hz, constant amplitude 3.5 mm
8.4 Hz ≦ f ≦ 150 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g
Vibration resistance
Duration of oscillation: 10 sweep cycles per axis on each direction of the three
mutually perpendicular axes
International Standard IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-6 (TEST Fc)
Tested with:
Half-sine wave
Strength of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Shock resistance
Shock direction: The shocks on each direction per axis, of the three mutually
perpendicular axes (for a total of 18 shocks)
International Standard IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-27 (TEST Ea)
Safety Conforms to IEC 61131-2, UL508
Ambient air Operating: 1013 ~ 795hPa (0 ~ 2000 m)
temperature-barometric
pressure-altitude Storage: 1013 ~ 660hPa (0 ~ 3500 m)

Plug-in and pull-out: 100 times at least.

Condition: Each insertion action is counted as one time, and the skew of
internal pins must be avoided during insertion and extraction.
Applicable to: All AS series modules with the removable terminal block,
Durability functional card slot, SD card slot, Ethernet port, USB port, or extension module
port.
Insertion force: 700g for the removable terminal, 220g for other communication
ports and slots
Extraction force: 1000g for the removable terminal, 20g for other
communication ports and slots
Flammability rating of
UL94V-0
plastic case

1-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.2.2 EMC Standards

_1 1.2.2.1 EMI

Port Frequency Range Level (Normative) Reference Standard

Enclosure port 30-230 MHz 40 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak

(radiated)

(measured at a
230-1000 MHz 47 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak
distance of 10

meters) IEC 61000-6-4

79 dB (μV) quasi-peak
0.15-0.5 MHz
AC power port 66 dB (μV) average

(conducted) 73 dB (μV) quasi-peak

0.5-30 MHz
60 dB (μV) average

1.2.2.2 EMS

Environmental
Reference Standard Test Test Level
Phenomenon

Electrostatic Contact ±4 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
Discharge Air ±8 kV

Radio Frequency 2.0-2.7 GHz 1 V/m

80% AM,
Electromagnetic Field 1.4-2.0 GHz 3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 1 kHz
Amplitude
sinusoidal 80-1000 MHz 10 V/m
Modulated

Power Frequency 60 Hz 30 A/m

IEC 61000-4-8
Magnetic Field 50 Hz 30 A/m

1-8
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.2.2.3 Conducted Immunity Test

1_
Radio
Fast Transient High Energy
Environmental Phenomenon Frequency
Burst Surge
Interference

Reference Standard IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6

Interface/Port Specific Interface/Port Test Level Test Level Test Level

Shielded cable 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
Data communication
Unshielded cable 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V

2 kV CM
AC I/O (unshielded) 2 kV 10 V
1 kV DM

Digital and analog I/O Analog or DC I/O

1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
(unshielded)

All shielded lines (earth) 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V

2 kV CM
AC power 2 kV 10 V
1 kV DM
Equipment power
0.5 kV CM
DC power 2 kV 10 V
0.5 kV DM

AC I/O and AC auxiliary 2 kV CM

2 kV 10 V
I/O power and power 1 kV DM

auxiliary power output DC I/O and DC auxiliary 0.5 kV CM

2 kV 10 V
power 0.5 kV DM

1.2.2.4 Installation Instructions to Meet EMC Standards

You must install an AS Series PLC in a control box. The control box protects the PLC and isolates

electromagnetic interference generated by the PLC.

1. Control box

 Use a conductive control box. Remove the paint on the plate bolts to ensure good contact between

the inner plate and the control box.

 Connect the control box with a thick wire to ensure that the control box is well-grounded, even if

there is high-frequency noise.

 Minimize the distance between the door of the control box and the PLC to prevent radio waves from

leaking. You can also prevent radio waves from leaking by putting an EMI gasket on the painted

surface.

1-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. Connecting a power cable and a ground

_1 Connect the PLC system power cable and the ground as described below.

 Ground any point on the aluminum rail, and the modules with ground terminals.

 Twist the ground and the power cable together so that the noise flowing through the power cable is

passed to the ground. However, the ground and the power cable do not need to be twisted if you

install a filter on the power cable.

1.2.2.5 Cables

 Shielded cables are recommended for connecting digital I/O modules and analog I/O modules including

temperature modules.

 Use the shielded cable to do the single-point grounding.

1-10
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.3 Installation
1.3.1 Installing a Module 1_

1. Push the clip rings if they are out as the image 1 shown. Push the module to the desire position until you
hear a click to finish installation.
2. Link the I/O modules on the right side of the PLC and make sure they are hooked together. Push the
modules into the DIN rail until you hear a click.
3. After you installed the module, fasten the screws on the modules to secure the module on the DIN rail.

1 2

If there is a vibration source near the installation site, install anti-vibration baffles on the sides of the AS Series
modules for better stabilization, such as the gray baffles show below.

1 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Install the baffles:

1. Hook the baffle onto the DIN rail and press it down as the directional arrow shows below.
_1

2. Use screws to secure the baffle.

3. The completed baffle installation is as shown below.

1-12
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block

Install a removable terminal block on the module as illustrated below. 1_

 Installation

Align the terminal block at the port, and press it into the CPU.

 Removal

Push the clips inward as the arrow 1 shown to release the terminal block and then pull it up as the arrow
2 shown.

1 1

1-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.3.3 Changing a Module

_1 1. Take the removable terminal block out of the module, and then pull the clip out from the DIN rail as
shown below.

2. Remove the module.

3. Slide the new module in as shown below.

1-14
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card

 Installation 1_

Push the extension card into the extension card slot until you hear a click.

Note: before the installation begin, you need to check if the pin arrangement and appearance are normal. If

there is any bent or missing pin, you need to change to a new card. You should also check the PLC card slot

to make sure everything is ok.

 Removal

Press the tab labeled PUSH to release the extension card, and then remove the extension card.

1-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module

_1 Connect a communication cable to the port on a CPU module, and make sure that the connector of the cable

is properly seated in the port.

 Installation

1. Firmly seat one side of the wiring module first.

2. Press the driver board in the direction indicated by arrow 1, and make sure that the groove is

attached to the DIN rail.

 Removal

1. Push the wiring module in the direction indicated by arrow 1.

2. Pull the wiring module in the direction indicated by arrow 2.

1-16
 2
Chapter 2 Digital Input/Output Modules
Table of Contents

2.1 General Specifications .................................................. 2-2

2.2 Digital Input/Output Module Profiles ........................... 2-4
2.3 Digital Input/Output Module Terminals ..................... 2-16
2.4 Wiring Digital Input/Output Modules ......................... 2-24
2.4.1 Wiring AS08AM10N-A ................................................................ 2-24
2.4.2 Wiring AS08AN01P-A ................................................................ 2-25
2.4.3 Wiring AS08AN01R-A ................................................................ 2-26
2.4.4 Wiring AS08AN01T-A ................................................................ 2-27
2.4.5 Wiring AS16AM10N-A/AS16AM10N-B .......................................... 2-28
2.4.6 Wiring AS16AN01R-A ................................................................ 2-29
2.4.7 Wiring AS16AN01T-A/AS16AN01T-B ........................................... 2-30
2.4.8 Wiring AS16AN01P-A/AS16AN01P-B ........................................... 2-31
2.4.9 Wiring AS16AP11R-A ................................................................ 2-32
2.4.10 Wiring AS16AP11T-A ................................................................. 2-33
2.4.11 Wiring AS16AP11P-A ................................................................. 2-34
2.4.12 Wiring AS32AM10N-A ................................................................ 2-35
2.4.13 Wiring AS32AM10N-B ................................................................ 2-37
2.4.14 Wiring AS32AN02T-A ................................................................ 2-38
2.4.15 Wiring AS32AN02T-B ................................................................ 2-41
2.4.16 Wiring AS64AM10N-A ................................................................ 2-42
2.4.17 Wiring AS64AN02T-A ................................................................ 2-44
2.5 Wiring Digital Input/Output Terminals ...................... 2-47
2.5.1 Wiring Digital Input Terminals .................................................... 2-47
2.5.2 Wiring Digital Output Terminals .................................................. 2-50
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

General Specifications
 Electrical specifications for the inputs on digital input/output modules
(The signals passing through the inputs are 24 VDC signals.)
08AM10 16AM10 16AM10 32AM10 32AM10 64AM10 16AP11 16AP11 16AP11
Module name
N-A N-A N-B N-B N-A N-A R-A T-A P-A
Number of
8 16 16 32 32 64 8 8 8
inputs
_2 Connector type Removable terminal block MIL connector Removable terminal block
Input type Digital input
Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/
24 VDC, 4.2 mA
current
Input
5.6kΩ
impedance
OFF→
>15 VDC
Action ON
level ON→
<5 VDC
OFF
OFF→
< 20 us
Response ON
time ON→
< 200 us
OFF
Software filter
Setting range: 0 ~ 25 ms; default: 10 ms
time
Varies according to the filter time; for example when the filter is 1 ms, the maximum
Maximum input
input frequency is 500 Hz, when 2 ms, 250 Hz.
frequency
Note: CPU scan time also affects the maximum input frequency.
Input isolation
500 VAC
voltage
Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.
Weight 100 g 117 g 110 g 125 g 100 g 140 g 138 g 120 g 120 g

 Electrical specifications for the outputs on a digital input/output module

Model 08AN 16AN 16AP 08AN 16AN 16AN 16AP 08AN 16AN 16AN 16AP
Item 01R-A 01R-A 11R-A 01T-A 01T-A 01T-B 11T-A 01P-A 01P-A 01P-B 11P-A
Number of outputs 8 16 8 8 16 16 8 8 16 16 8
Connector type Removable terminal block
Output form Relay-R Transistor-T (sinking) Transistor-P (sourcing)
10–240 VAC /
Voltage/ current 5–30 VDC 5–30 VDC
5–24 VDC
<250uA (@V1.00A0)
Leakage current 0uA <10uA
<10uA (@V1.00A1)
Resistance 2A/output, 8A/COM 0.5A/output, 4A/COM 0.5A/output, 4A/COM
Maximum Inductance Life cycle curve*2 12 W (24 VDC) 12 W (24 VDC)
load
20 W (24 VDC)
Bulb 2 W (24 VDC) 2 W (24 VDC)
100 W (230 VAC)
Maximum Resistance 1 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz

2-2
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

Model 08AN 16AN 16AP 08AN 16AN 16AN 16AP 08AN 16AN 16AN 16AP
Item 01R-A 01R-A 11R-A 01T-A 01T-A 01T-B 11T-A 01P-A 01P-A 01P-B 11P-A
output Inductance 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz
frequency
*1
Bulb 1 Hz 10 Hz 10 Hz
OFF→ON 10 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
Maximum
Response ON→OFF 10 ms 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
time 2_
Output isolation
1500 VAC 500 VAC
voltage
Weight 120 g 158 g 138 g 100 g 122 g 113 g 120 g 100 g 123 g 112 g 120 g

Model
32AN02T-B 32AN02T-A 64AN02T-A
Item
Number of outputs 32 32 64
Removable terminal
Connector type MIL connector
block
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage 5–30 VDC
Leakage current <10uA
Resistance 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM
Maximum
Inductance N/A
load
Bulb N/A

Maximum Resistance 100 Hz

output Inductance N/A
frequency*1 Bulb N/A
Maximum OFF→ON
Response 0.5 ms
time ON→OFF

Output isolation voltage 500 VAC

Weight 127 g 100 g 142 g

*1: The scan cycle affects the frequency.

*2: The life cycle curve is shown below.

120VAC Resistive
3000
30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
2000
240VAC Inductive(cosψ = 0.4)
1000
120VAC Inductive(cosψ =0.4)
Operation(X10 )

500
3

300
200

100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms )
30
20

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)

2-3
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

Digital Input/Output Module Profiles

 AS08AM10N-A/AS08AN01P-A/AS08AN01R-A/AS08AN01T-A
28.2 89

08AM 1
7
7
IN

_2
S/S
PWR
S/S
IN
0 0
1
2

98.3
1 2

88
3
2 4
5
3
6

3
4 7

6
4
7

8 5

6 75
25

08AN 08AN 08AN

OUT OUT OUT

C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR PWR
C0 C0 C0
OUT OUT OUT
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1
1 2 1 2 1 2
3 3 3
2 4 2 4 2 4
5 5 5
3 3 3
6 6 6
7 4 7 7
4 4

5 5 5

6 6 6

7 7 7

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
Input/output LED If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
2
indicator If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
Removable terminal The inputs are connected to sensors.
3
block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Arrangement of the
4 input/output Arrangement of the terminals
terminals
5 Terminal block clip Secures the terminal block
6 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
External module
7 Connects the modules
port
8 Label Nameplate

2-4
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

 AS16AM10N-A/AS16AN01P-A/AS16AN01R-A/AS16AN01T-A/AS16AP11P-A/AS16AP11R-A/
AS16AP11T-A
38.2 95

16AM 1
7
7
IN IN

S/S

S/S
S/S

S/S
PWR
2_
0 1
IN
0 2

98.3
1

88
2 3 2
3
4 5 4
5
6 7

8 9
6
7 3
10 11 8
9

4
12 13 10
11
14 15 12
13
8 14
15 5
6 75
35

16AN 16AN 16AN 16AP 16 AP 16AP

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT

C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0 C0

PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR

1 C0 C0 0 1 C0 C0 C0
0
OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN
0 0 1 0 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 4 5 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
4 5 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
3
4 5 6 7 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 4
6 7 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
5 3 3 3 3
C1 C1 6 7 C1 C1 3 3 6
6 6 6 6
6
7 7 7 7 7
7 8 9 8 9 4 4 4 4 4 4
8 9
OUT OUT OUT
8 0 5 5 0 5 5 0
8 8 10 11 5 5
10 11 10 11
9 1 1 1
9 9
12 13 10 2 6 6 2 6 6 2
12 13 10 12 13 10 6 6
11 3 3
11 11 3
14 15 12 7 7 4 7 4
14 15 12 14 15 12 7 7 4
13 5 5
13 13 5
14 6 6
14 14 6
15 7 7
15 15 7

Unit: mm

2-5
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

 AS16AM10N-B/AS16AN01P-B/AS16AN01T-B

28.2 95

16 AM 1
7
IN IN
7
PWR

2
IN
0 1 0
1

98.3
_2
2 3 2

88
3
4 5 4
5
6 7

3
6
7
8 9

8
10 11
9
12 13

14 15 4
8 5
6 75
25

1 6AM 1 6AN 16A N

IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT

C0 C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR PWR
0 1 0 1
IN O UT OUT
0 1 0 2 3 0 2 3 0
1 1 1
2 3 2 4 5 2 4 5 2
3 3 3
4 5
4
6 7
4
6 7
4
5 5 5
6 7 C1 C1 C1 C1
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 9 8 9 8 9
8 8 8
10 11 10 11 10 11
9 9 9
12 13 12 13 12 13

14 15 14 15 14 15

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
Input/Output LED If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
2
indicator If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
Removable terminal The inputs are connected to sensors.
3
block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Arrangement of the
4 input/output Arrangement of the terminals
terminals
5 Terminal block clip Secures the terminal block
6 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
External module
7 Connects the modules
port
8 Label Nameplate

2-6
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

 AS32AM10N-A
28.2 92

32AM
X0 LED
1
X1 LED

7 2
7
39
3
PWR

IN
0
4
1

2_

98.3
2

88
3
4
5
6
7
5
8
9
10
11
12

8
1
13
14
15

6 75
25
Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
X0/X1 LED
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented inputs.
Indicator switch
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B, UC-ET020-24B,
3 ML connector
UC-ET030-24B
Power LED
4 Indicates the power status of the module
indicator
5 Input LED indicator LED indicator is ON during input.
6 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail.
External module
7 Connects the modules.
port
8 Label Nameplate

2-7
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

 AS32AM10N-B

28.2 93 .5

3 2A M 1
X0 L ED

8 2
X1 L ED

2
8
3
4
PWR

IN
0
1

98.3
_2
2

88
5
3
4
5
6
7

8
9

9 36
6

25 7 75

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
2 X0/X1 LED indicator switch Switches the LED indicators to their represented inputs.
3 Removable terminal block The inputs are connected to switches or sensors.
4 Power LED indicator Indicates the power status of the module
5 Input LED indicator LED indicator is ON during input.
6 Terminal block screw Secures the terminal block
7 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
8 Extension module port Connects the modules
9 Label Nameplate

2-8
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

 AS32AN02T-A
28.2 92

32AN
Y0 LED
1
Y1 LED

7 2
7
39
3
PWR

OUT
0
4

2_
1

98.3
2

88
3
4
5
6
7
5
8
9
10
11
12
1

8
13
14
15

6 75
25
Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
Y0/Y1 LED
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented outputs.
indicator switch
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24D, UC-ET020-24D,
3 ML connector
UC-ET030-24D
Power LED
4 Indicates the power status of the module
indicator
Output LED
5 LED indicator is ON during output.
indicator
6 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
External module
7 Connects the modules
port
8 Label Nameplate

2-9
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

 AS32AN02T-B

28.2 93 .5

3 2AN
Y0 LED
1
8 2
Y1 LED

2
8
3
4
PWR

OUT
0
1

98.3
_2
2

88
5
3
4
5
6
7

8
9

9 36
6

25 7 75

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
Y0/Y1 LED indicator
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented outputs.
switch
Removable terminal The outputs are connected to the loads (e.g. a contactor or solenoid valve) to
3
block be driven.
4 Power LED indicator Indicates the power status of the module
5 Output LED indicator LED indicator is ON during output.
Removable terminal
6 Secures the removable terminal block
block screw
7 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
Extension module
8 Connects the modules
port
9 Label Nameplate

2-10
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

 AS64AM10N-A
38.2
92

64AM 1
0 1 0 1

2
8
0 1

3 8
40 2

P WR
4
IN
X1 X2
0
5
2_
1

98.3
2

88
3
4
5
6
7
6
X0 X3 8
9
10
11
12
2 40

9
13
14
15

7 75
35
Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
LED indicator
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented inputs.
switch 1
LED indicator
3 Switches the LED indicators to their represented inputs.
switch 2
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B, UC-ET020-24B,
4 ML connector
UC-ET030-24B
Power LED
5 Indicates the power status of the module
indicator
6 Input LED indicator If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
7 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
External module
8 Connects the modules
port
9 Label Nameplate

2 - 11
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

 AS64AN02T-A
38.2 92

64AN 1
0 1 0 1

0 1
2
8
3 8
40 2

P WR
4
O UT
Y1 Y2
0
1 5
_2
98.3
2

88
3
4
5
6
7
6
Y0 Y3 8
9
10
11
12
2 40

9
13
14
15

7 75
35

Unit: mm
Number Name Description
1 Model name Model name of the module
LED indicator
2 Switches the LED indicators to their represented outputs.
switch 1
LED indicator
3 Switches the LED indicators to their represented outputs.
switch 2
For the external I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24D, UC-ET020-24D,
4 ML connector
UC-ET030-24D
Power LED
5 Indicates the power status of the module
indicator
Output LED
6 If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
indicator
7 DIN rail clip Secures the DIN rail
External module
8 Connects the modules
port
9 Label Nameplate

 ML connector, extension cable, and wiring modules

1. Extension cable UC-ET010-24D (1M) / UC-ET020-24D (2M) / UC-ET030-24D (3M)

Length
19 2 0
#1
3 9 40 2

1 2
1
39 40
#2
1 2 2
21 2 2
500 -
+10m m

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

Connects a digital input/output module and an external terminal
1 IDC 40-pin terminal
module.
Connects the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A/UB-10-
2 IDC 20-pin terminal
OR16A/UB-10-OR16B

2-12
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2. I/O connecting cables UC-ET010-24B (1M) / UC-ET020-24B (2M) / UC-ET030-24B (3M)

Length

39 40 39 40

1 2 1 2
2_
Number Name Description
Connects an external terminal module and a wiring module UB-10-
1 IDC 40-pin terminal
ID32A, and UB-10-OT32A

3. AS32AM10N-A/AS64AM10N-A and the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A, UB-10-ID32A

 UB-10-ID16A
67.0

4
87.0
3
2
53.6

Unit: mm

 UB-10-ID32A

113

1
87

2
4 53.6

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

UB-10-ID16A: 20-pin ML connector Connects the external terminal module and a
1
UB-10-ID32A: 40-pin ML connector wiring module
2 Terminals Input/Output terminals for wiring
3 Clip Hangs the external terminal module on a DIN rail
4 Set screw Fixes the base

2-13
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

4. AS332T-A/AS64AN02T-A and the external terminal modules UB-10-ID16A, UB-10-OR16A, and UB-
10-OT32A.

 UB-10-ID16A
67.0

_2 6
87.0
7
2
53.6

Unit: mm

 UB-10-OR16A
113

1
3
4
87
5
55.3
7
2

6
Unit: mm

 UB-10-OT32A
113

1
87

2
7 53.6

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

UB-10- ID16A /OR16A: 20-
pin ML connector Connects the external terminal module and a wiring
1
UB-10-OT32A: 40-pin ML module
connector
2 Terminals Input/Output terminals for wiring
3 2-pin power input terminal Power input terminal for wiring
4 Output LED indicator LED indicator is ON during output.
5 Relay output Relay output
6 Clip Hangs the external terminal module on a DIN rail
7 Set screw Fixes the base

2-14
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

 Spring clamp/MIL connector terminal block UB-10-IO32D for AS32AM10N-A/AS32AN02T-A

24 . 35
23. 6

1
2_

101
2 26.9
33.7

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Terminal block for output Terminal block
2 40-pin MIL connector Connects the module and the wiring module

2-15
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

Digital Input/Output Module Terminals

AS08AM10N-A AS08AN01P-A

08AM 08AN

_2
IN OUT

C0
PWR PWR
C0
IN OUT
0 0 0 0
1 1
1 2 1 2
3 3
2 4
2 4
5 5
3 3
6 6

4 7 4 7

5 5

6 6

7 7

AS08AN01R-A AS08AN01T-A

08AN 08AN

OUT OUT

C0 C0
PWR PWR
C0 C0
OUT OUT
0 0 0 0
1 1
1 2 1 2
3 3
2 4 2 4
5 5
3 3
6 6
4 7 7
4

5 5

6 6

7 7

2-16
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

AS16AM10N-A AS16AN01P-A

16AM 16AN

IN IN OUT OUT

C0 C0 2_
PWR PWR
0 1
IN OUT
0 1 0 2 3 0
1 1
2 3 2 4 5 2
3 3
4 5 4 6 7 4
5 5
6 7 C1 C1
6 6
7 7
8 9 8 9

8 10 11
8
10 11
9 9
12 13 10 12 13 10
11 11
14 15 12 14 15 12
13 13
14 14
15 15

AS16AM10N-B AS16AN01P-B

16AM 16AN

IN IN OUT OUT

C0 C0
PWR PWR
0 1
IN OUT
0 1 0 2 3 0
1 1
2 3 2 4 5 2
3 3
4 5 6 7 4
4
5 5
6 7 C1 C1
6 6
7 7
8 9 8 9

8 10 11 8
10 11
9 9
12 13 12 13

14 15 14 15

2-17
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

AS16AN01R-A AS16AN01T-A

16AN 16AN

_2
OUT OUT OUT OUT

C0 C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR
C0 C0 0 1
OUT OUT
0 1 0 2 3 0
1 1
2 3 2 4 5 2
3 3
4 5 6 7 4
4
5 5
6 7 C1 C1
6 6
7 7
8 9 8 9

8 10 11 8
10 11
9 9

12 13 10 12 13 10
11 11
14 15 12 14 15 12
13 13
14 14
15 15

AS16AN01T-B AS16AP11P-A

16AN 16AP

OUT OUT IN OUT

C0 C0 C0
PWR PWR
0 1 C0
OUT IN
2 3 0 0 0 0
1 1
4 5 2 1 1 2
3 3
6 7 4 2 2 4
5 5
C1 C1 3 3
6 6
7 7
8 9 4 4
OUT
10 11 8 0
5 5
9 1
12 13 6 6 2
3
14 15 7 7 4
5
6
7

2-18
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

AS16AP11R-A AS16AP11T-A

16AP 16AP

IN OUT IN OUT

C0
PWR
C0
PWR
2_
C0 C0
IN IN
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1
1 1 2 1 1 2
3 3
2 2 4 2 2 4
5 5
3 3 3 3
6 6
7 7
4 4 4 4
OUT OUT
5 5 0 0
5 5
1 1
6 6 2 6 6 2
3 3
7 7 4 7 4
5 5
6 6
7 7

AS32AM10N-A AS32AM10N-B
- -
S/S S/S S/S S/S
1.15 1.14 32AM 1.15 1.14
32AM
X0 LED 1.13 1.12 X0 LED 1.13 1.12
X1 LED X1 LED
1.11 1.10 1.11 1.10
2
1.9 1.8 1.9 1.8
1.7 1.6 1.7 1.6
39
1.5 1.4 PWR
1.5 1.4
PWR
1.3 1.2 1.3 1.2
IN IN
0 1.1 1.0 0 1.1 1.0
1 1
2 - - 2 S/S S/S
3
4
S/S S/S 3
4
0.15 0.14
5 0.15 0.14 5 0.13 0.12
6 6
7 0.13 0.12 7 0.11 0.10
8
0.11 0.10 8
0.9 0.8
9 0.9 0.8 9 0.7 0.6
10
11 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4
1
12
13
0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2
14
0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0
15
36

0.1 0.0

2-19
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

AS32AN02T-A AS32AN02T-B
- -
C0 C0 C0 C0
32AN 1.15 1.14 32AN 1.15 1.14
Y0 LED
Y1 LED 1.13 1.12 Y0 LED
Y1 LED 1.13 1.12
1.11 1.10 2 1.11 1.10
1.9 1.8 1.9 1.8
1.7 1.6 1.7 1.6
_2
39

PWR
1.5 1.4 PWR
1.5 1.4
OUT
0 1.3 1.2 OUT
0 1.3 1.2
1
1.1 1.0 1
2
1.1 1.0
2
3 - - 3 C0 C0
4 4
5 C0 C0 5 0.15 0.14
6
6
7
0.15 0.14 7 0.13 0.12
8
0.13 0.12 8
0.11 0.10
9 0.11 0.10 9 0.9 0.8
10
11 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
12
1
13 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4
14
0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2
15 36
0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0

0.1 0.0

AS64AM10N-A AS64AN02T-A
- - 2.0 2.1 - - 2.0 2.1
S/S0 S/S0 2.2 2.3 C0 C0 2.2 2.3
1.15 1.14 2.4 2.5 1.15 1.14 2.4 2.5
64AM 64AN
0 1 01 1.13 1.12 2.6 2.7 0 1 01
1.13 1.12 2.6 2.7
0 1
1.11 1.10 2.8 2.9 0 1 1.11 1.10 2.8 2.9
1.9 1.8 2.10 2.11 1.9 1.8 2.10 2.11
40 2 1.7 1.6 2.12 2.13 40 2 1.7 1.6 2.12 2.13
PWR
1.5 1.4 2.14 2.15 PWR
1.5 1.4 2.14 2.15
X1 X2
IN
0 1.3 1.2 S/S S/S Y1 Y2
OUT
0 1.3 1.2 C1 C1
1 1
2 1.1 1.0 - - 2 1.1 1.0 - -
3 3
4 - - 3.0 3.1 4 - - 3.0 3.1
5
S/S0 S/S0 3.2 3.3 C0 C0 3.2 3.3
5
6 6
7
0.15 0.14 3.4 3.5 0.15 0.14 3.4 3.5
7

Y0 Y3 8
X0 X3 8
9 0.13 0.12 3.6 3.7 10
9
0.13 0.12 3.6 3.7
10
11 0.11 0.10 3.8 3.9 11
12
0.11 0.10 3.8 3.9
2 40
0.9 0.8 3.10 3.11 0.9 0.8 3.10 3.11
12
2 40 13
13
14

0.7 0.6 3.12 3.13 0.7 0.6 3.12 3.13

14 15
15

0.5 0.4 3.14 3.15 0.5 0.4 3.14 3.15

0.3 0.2 S/S1 S/S1 0.3 0.2 C1 C1
0.1 0.0 - - 0.1 0.0 - -

2-20
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

 ML connector and the wiring module

1. AS32AM10N-A/AS64AM10N-A

 The wiring module: UB-10-ID16A

TB1
2_
TB2

#1

#2

AS32AM10N-A/ AS64AM10N-A
TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -

 The wiring module: UB-10-ID32A

AS series terminals:
Upper
X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
row
Lower
X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/S
row

2-21
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2. AS32AN02T-A/AS64AN02T-A and the wiring modules:

 UB-10-ID16A

TB1

_2 TB2

#1

#2

AS332T-A
TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -
#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -

 UB-10-OT32A

AS series terminals:
Upper
Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14  
row
Lower
Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0
row
 UB-10-OR16A

Terminals:
GND +24
V
C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 C3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17

AS series terminals:
GND +24V
C0 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 C1 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 C2 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 C3 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.14 Y0.15

2-22
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

3. AS32AM10N-A/AS32AN02T-A and the wiring modules:

 UB-10-IO32D

2_

2-23
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

Wiring Digital Input/Output Modules

This section illustrates how to wire digital input/output modules. The wiring diagrams below also illustrate how
the power supplies are connected to S/S, and C0. If you need more information about the wiring of digital
input/output terminals, refer to Section 2.5 in this manual.

2.4.1 Wiring AS08AM10N-A

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
_2 Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 4.2 mA

IN
08AM S/S

S/S

IN
0
PWR

IN
1
0 0
1
1 2 2
3
2 4

3
5 3
6

4 7
4
5

6 5
7

2-24
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.4.2 Wiring AS08AN01P-A

Output form Transistor-P (sourcing)
Output voltage/current 5~30VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM

O UT
08AN C0
2_
C0

OUT
0
C0
PWR
C0 1
OUT
0 0
1
1 2 2
3
2 4

3
5 3
6

4 7
4
5

6
5
7

2-25
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.4.3 Wiring AS08AN01R-A

Output form Relay-R
Output voltage/current 10~240 VAC, 5~24 VDC, 2A/output, 8A/COM

O UT
08AN C0
_2
C0

OUT
0
C0
PWR
C0 1
OUT
0 0
1
1 2 2
3
2 4

3
5 3
6

4 7
4
5

6
5
7

2-26
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.4.4 Wiring AS08AN01T-A

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM

OUT
08AN C0
2_
C0

OUT
0
C0
PWR
C0 1
OUT
0 0
1
1 2 2
3
2 4
5 3
3
6

4 7
4
5

6
5
7

2-27
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.4.5 Wiring AS16AM10N-A/AS16AM10N-B

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 4.2 mA

IN
16AM S/S
_2 S/S
S/S
S/S
IN IN
0
PWR
1
IN
2
0 1 0
3
1
2 3 2 4
3
4 5 4
5
6 7
5 6
6

9
7 7
8

8 8
10 11
9 9
12 13 10
11 10
14 15 12
11
13
14 12
15
13
14
15

2-28
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.4.6 Wiring AS16AN01R-A

Output form Relay-R
Output voltage/current 10~240 VAC, 5~24 VDC, 2A/output, 8A/COM

O UT
16AN C0 2_
C0
C0
C0
OUT OUT
0
C0 C0
PWR
1
C0 C0
2
OUT
0 1 0 3
1
2 3 2 4
3
4 5 5
4

6 7
5 6
6
7 7
8 9

8
8
10 11
9 9
12 13 10
11 10
14 15 12 11
13
14 12
15
13
14
15

2-29
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.4.7 Wiring AS16AN01T-A/AS16AN01T-B

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM

OUT
C0
_2 16AN
C0
0
1
OUT OUT 2
C0 C0 3
PWR
0 1 4
OUT
0
5
2 3
1 6
4 5 2
3 7
6 7 4
5 C1
C1 C1
6 C1
7
8 9
8
10 11 8
9
9
12 13 10 10
11
14 15 12
11
13
12
14
15 13
14
15

2-30
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.4.8 Wiring AS16AN01P-A/AS16AN01P-B

Output form Transistor-P (sourcing)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM

OUT
C0
16AN C0 2_
0
1
OUT OUT 2
C0 C0
3
PWR
0 1
4
OUT 5
2 3 0
1 6
4 5 2
3
7
6 7 4
5 C1
C1 C1
6 C1
7
8 9 8
10 11
8 9
9
12 13 10 10
11
11
14 15 12
13 12
14
15
13
14
15

2-31
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.4.9 Wiring AS16AP11R-A

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 4.2 mA
Output form Relay-R
Output voltage/current 10~240 VAC, 5~24 VDC, 2A/output, 8A/COM

_2 IN OU T
16AP S/S
C0
S/S
C0
IN OUT
0
C0
PWR
0
C0 1
IN
0 0 0 1
1 2
1 1 2
3 2
2 2 4 3
5
3 3
6 3
4 4
7 4
OUT
5 5 0 4
1
5
6 6 2
3 5
7 7 4
6
5
6 6
7
7
7

2-32
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.4.10 Wiring AS16AP11T-A

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 4.2 mA
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM

IN O UT 2_
16AP S/S
C0
S/S
C0
IN OUT
0
C0
PWR
0
C0 1
IN
0 0 0 1
1 2
1 1 2
3 2
2 2 4 3
5
3 3
6 3
4 4
7 4
OUT
5 5 0 4
1 5
6 6 2
3 5
7 7 4 6
5
6 6
7 7
7

2-33
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.4.11 Wiring AS16AP11P-A

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 4.2 mA
Output form Transistor-P (sourcing)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.5A/output, 4A/COM

_2 IN OUT
16AP S/S
C0
S/S
C0
IN OUT
0
C0
PWR
0
C0 1
IN
0 0 0 1
1 2
1 1 2
3 2
2 2 4 3
5
3 3
6 3
4 4
7 4
OUT
5 5 0 4
1 5
6 6 2
3 5
7 7 4 6
5
6 6
7 7
7

2-34
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.4.12 Wiring AS32AM10N-A

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 4.2 mA

32AM 2_
X0 LED S/S S/S
X1 LED
1.15 1.14
1.13 1.12
1.11 1.10
39 1.9 1.8
PWR 1.7 1.6
IN 1.5 1.4
0
1
1.3 1.2
2 1.1 1.0
3
4
5 S/S S/S
6
0.15 0.14
7
0.13 0.12
8
9
0.11 0.10
10 0.9 0.8
11
0.7 0.6
12
1
13 0.5 0.4
14
0.3 0.2
15
0.1 0.0

 Wiring external terminal modules

1. UB-10-ID16A (Only connected to the cables of group #2 below.)

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 5 mA

Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20

TB1 1 2 #2
TB2 500+10mm 1 2
-
Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)

TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -

2-35
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2. UB-10-ID32A
Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 5mA

Length

39 40 39 40
Length:
UC-ET010-24B(1M)
_2 UC-ET020-24B(2M)
1 2 1 2 UC-ET030-24B(3M)

Up per row X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
L ower row X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/S

Note:
UB-10-ID32A can be used with both AS Series and DVP Series. The indications printed on the UB-10-ID32A
board is for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference
table below. Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.
Upper AS X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1. 12 X1.14 S/S S/S
row DVP X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 X30 X32 X34 X36 S/S S/ S

Lower DVP X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 X31 X33 X35 X37 S/S S/ S
r ow AS X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0. 13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/ S

2-36
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.4.13 Wiring AS32AM10N-B

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 4.2 mA

IN
S/S
S/S 2_
1.15

32AM 1.13
1.14

X0 LED 1.12
X1 LED
1.11
2 1.10
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
PWR 1.5
1.4
IN 1.3
0
1 1.2
1.1
2
3 1.0
S/S
4
5 S/S
0.15
6
7
0.14
0.13
8 0.12
9 0.11
0.10
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
36 0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1

0.0

2-37
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.4.14 Wiring AS32AN02T-A

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM

OU T

_2 32AN
Y0 LED
Y1 LED
C0 C0
1.1 5 1 .14
1 .1 3 1 .12
39 1.11 1 .10
PWR 1.9 1 .8
1.7 1 .6
OUT
0 1.5 1 .4
1
1.3 1 .2
2
3 1 .1 1 .0
4
5 C0
C0
6
0.1 5 0 .14
7
0 .1 3 0 .12
8
0.11 0 .10
9
10 0.9 0 .8
11 0.7 0 .6
12
1 0.5 0 .4
13
14 0.3 0 .2
15 0 .1 0 .0

 Wiring external terminal modules

1. UB-10-ID16A (Only connected to the cables of group #1 below.)
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.1 A

Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
TB1
1 2 #2
TB2
500+10mm 1 2
-
Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)

TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -

#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -

2-38
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2. UB-10-OR16A (Only connected to the cables of group #1 below.)

Output form Relay-R
Output voltage/current Less than 250 VAC, 30 VDC, 2A

Length
19 20
39 40 #1 Length:
1 2 UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
19 20 UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG) 2_
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
-

GND +24V

C0 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 C1 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 C2 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 C3 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.14 Y0.15

Note:
UB-10-OR16A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications printed on the UB-10-OR16A
board is for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference
table below. Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.
AS C0 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 C1 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 C2 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 C3 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.14 Y0.15
DVP C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 C3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17

2-39
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

3. UB-10-OT32A
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.1 A

Length

39 40 39 40
Length:
UC-ET010-24B(1M)
_2 UC-ET020-24B(2M)
1 2 1 2 UC-ET030-24B(3M)

Upper row Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14
Lower row Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0

Note:
UB-10-OT32A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications printed on the UB-10-OT32A
board is for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference
table below. Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.
Upper AS Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14  

row DVP Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 Y30 Y32 Y34 Y36  

Lower DVP Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 Y11 Y13 Y15 Y17 Y21 Y23 Y25 Y27 Y31 Y33 Y35 Y37 C0 C0

row AS Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0

2-40
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.4.15 Wiring AS32AN02T-B

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM

OUT
C0
C0

32AN 1 .15
1.1 4 2_
Y0 LED 1.13
Y1 LED 1 .1 2
1.11
2 1.1 0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
PWR
1.5
1.4
OUT 1.3
0
1.2
1
1.1
2 1.0
3 C0
4 C0
5 0.15
6 0.14
0.13
7
0.12
8 0.11
0.10
9
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
36 0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0

2-41
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.4.16 Wiring AS64AM10N-A

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 4.2 mA

_2 64AM
0 1 01 2 .0 2 .1
0 1 S /S 0 S /S 0 2 .2 2.3
1. 15 1 .1 4 2 .4 2 .5
1. 13 1 .1 2 2 .6 2.7

40 2 1. 11 1 .1 0 2 .8 2 .9
1.9 1 .8 2 .1 0 2.11
PWR
1.7 1 .6 2.1 2 2.1 3
IN
0 1.5 1 .4 2 .1 4 2.1 5
X1 X2
1 1.3 1 .2 S /S 1 S/S 1
2
1 .1 1 .0
3
3 .0 3.1
4
5 S /S 0 S/S 0 3 .2 3 .3
6 0. 15 3 .5
0 .1 4 3 .4
7
0. 13 0 .1 2 3 .6 3 .7
X0 X3 8 0. 11 0 .1 0 3 .9
3 .8
9
0.9 0 .8 3 .1 0 3 .11
10
11 0.7 0 .6 3 .1 2 3 .1 3

2 40
12 0.5 0 .4 3 .1 4 3 .1 5
13
0.3 0 .2 S /S 1 S /S 1
14
15 0 .1 0 .0

 Wiring external terminal modules

1. UB-10-ID16A (Only connected to the cables of group #2 below.)
Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 5mA

Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2
19 20
TB1
1 2 #2
TB2
500+10mm 1 2
-
Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)

TB1 X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 S/S -
#2
TB2 X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 S/S -

2-42
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2. UB-10-ID32A
Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage/current 24 VDC, 5mA

Length

39 40 39 40
Length:
UC-ET010-24B(1M) 2_
UC-ET020-24B(2M)
1 2 1 2 UC-ET030-24B(3M)

Upp er row X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.1 0 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
Lower row X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/S

Note: UB-10-ID32A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications printed on the UB-10-ID32A
board is for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference
table below. Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.
AS X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10 X0.12 X0.14 X1.0 X1.2 X1.4 X1.6 X1.8 X1.10 X1.12 X1.14 S/S S/S
Upper
row DVP X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 X30 X32 X34 X36 S/S S/S

Lower DVP X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 X31 X33 X35 X37 S/S S/S

row AS X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11 X0.13 X0.15 X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.7 X1.9 X1.11 X1.13 X1.15 S/S S/S

2-43
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.4.17 Wiring AS64AN02T-A

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.1A/output, 3.2A/COM

OUT
_2
64AN
0 1 01 2 .0 2 .1
0 1 C0 C0 2 .2 2.3
1 .15 1.14 2 .4 2.5
1 .13 1.12 2 .6 2.7

40 2
1 .11 1.10 2 .8 2.9
1 .9 1 .8 2.1 0 2.11
PWR
1 .7 1 .6 2.1 2 2.1 3
OUT 1 .5
0 1 .4 2.1 4 2.1 5
Y1 Y2
1 1 .3 1 .2 C1 C1
2 1 .0
1.1
3
4 3 .0 3 .1
5 C0 C0 3 .2 3.3
6 0 .15 0.14 3 .4 3.5
7
0 .13 0.12 3 .6 3.7
Y0 Y3 8
0 .11 0.10 3 .8 3.9
9
0 .9 0 .8 3.1 0 3.11
10
11 0 .7 0 .6 3.1 2 3.1 3
12 0 .5 0 .4
2 40 3.1 4 3.1 5
13
14
0 .3 0 .2 C1 C1
15 0.1 0 .0

2-44
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

 Wiring external terminal modules

1. UB-10-ID16A (Only connected to the cables of group #1 below.)
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.1 A

Length
19 20
39 40 #1
1 2 2_
19 20
TB1
1 2 #2
TB2
500+10mm 1 2
-
Length:
UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)

TB1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 C0 -

#1
TB2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 C0 -

2. UB-10-OR16A (Only connected to the cables of group #1 below.)

Output form Relay-R
Output voltage/current Less than 250 VAC, 30VDC, 2A

Length
19 20
39 40 #1 Length:
1 2 UC-ET010-24D(1M)(28AWG)
19 20 UC-ET020-24D(2M)(28AWG)
UC-ET030-24D(3M)(28AWG)
1 2 #2
500+10mm 1 2
-

GND +24V

C0 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 C1 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 C2 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 C3 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.14 Y0.15

Note:
UB-10-OR16A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications printed on the UB-10-OR16A
board is for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference
table below. Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.
AS C0 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 C1 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 C2 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 C3 Y0.12 Y0.13 Y0.14 Y0.15
DVP C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 C3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17

2-45
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

3. UB-10-OT32A
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Output voltage/current 5~30 VDC, 0.1 A

Length

39 40 39 40
Length:
UC-ET010-24B(1M)
_2 UC-ET020-24B(2M)
1 2 1 2 UC-ET030-24B(3M)

Up per row Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14
Lowerro w
Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0

Note:
UB-10-OT32A can be used with AS Series and DVP Series. The indications printed on the UB-10-OT32A
board is for DVP Series. For the definitions of terminal connections for AS Series, you can see the reference
table below. Or refer to the enclosed sticker for AS Series.
Upper AS Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10 Y0.12 Y0.14 Y1.0 Y1.2 Y1.4 Y1.6 Y1.8 Y1.10 Y1.12 Y1.14  

row DVP Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 Y30 Y32 Y34 Y36  

Lower DVP Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 Y11 Y13 Y15 Y17 Y21 Y23 Y25 Y27 Y31 Y33 Y35 Y37 C0 C0

row AS Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11 Y0.13 Y0.15 Y1.1 Y1.3 Y1.5 Y1.7 Y1.9 Y1.11 Y1.13 Y1.15 C0 C0

2-46
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

Wiring Digital Input/Output Terminals

2.5.1 Wiring Digital Input Terminals
2.5.1.1 Sinking and Sourcing
The input signal is the 24 VDC power input. Sinking and sourcing are the current driving capabilities of a circuit.
They are defined as follows.

 Sinking=The current flows into  Souring=The current flows from 2_

terminal X terminal X

X 0.0 S /S

2 4 V DC 2 4 V DC
4.2 mA 4.2 mA

S /S X 0. 0

2.5.1.2 Relay Type

 Sinking

I/O
X0.0
In t ern a l circu it

Internal c irc uit

S/S
+
24VDC

 Sourcing

I/O
X0.0
I n te rn al circu it

Internal c irc uit

S/S
+
24VDC

2-47
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

2.5.1.3 Open-collector Type

 Sinking (NPN transistor whose collector is open)

I/O
+Vcc
X0.0
In t er na l circ uit

I nternal circuit

_2 0V S/S

+
PNP 24VDC

 Sourcing (PNP transistor whose collector is open)

I/O
+ Vcc X0.0
In t ern a l circu it

I nternal circuit

0V S/S
+
24VDC
NPN

2.5.1.4 Two-wire Proximity Switch

Use the two-wire proximity switch whose leakage current IL is less than 1.5 mA when the switch is OFF. If the
leakage current is greater than 1.5 mA, connect the divider resistance Rb using the formula below.
6
Rb ≤ (k Ω)
IL − 1.5
 Sinking

I/O
IL X0.0

Rb I nternal circuit

+ S/S

24 VDC
Two-wire proximit y switc h

2-48
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

 Sourcing
I/O
IL
X0.0

Rb Int ernal c irc uit

S/S
+
24VD C
Two-wire proximity switch 2_

2.5.1.5 Three-wire Switch

 Sinking

I/O
X0.0
Three-wire switch

Int ernal circuit

S/S

+
24VD C

 Sourcing

I/O
X0.0
Three-wire switch

I nternal circuit

S/S

+
24V DC

2.5.1.6 Optoelectronic Switch

 Sinking

I/O
X0.0

Above Internal c irc uit

15VDC
S/S
+
24VDC
Optoelect ronic swit ch

2-49
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

 Sourcing

I/O
X0.0

Above
I nternal c irc uit
15VDC
S/S
+
_2 24VDC
Opt oelect ronic s wit ch

2.5.1.7 Differential Input

5V Shielded cable 10k

SG
X0.3+
4.7k
X0.3-
GND 5V
10k
SG 0

2.5.2 Wiring Digital Output Terminals

2.5.2.1 Output Circuits
There are three types of output units. They are relay outputs, transistor outputs, and differential outputs.

1. Relay output

10~240VAC 5~24VDC
2A 2A

2. Transistor output

I / O( S ink ) I /O (Sou rce )

C0
Y 0. 0
+ 5~3 0VDC + 5~3 0VDC
0. 5A 0. 5A

C0 Y 0. 0

2-50
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

3. Differential output

ASDA-A2 ASDA-A2
S hielded c able Shielded cable
2k
Y0.3+ HS IG N 46 SI GN 36
FP 100k FP Y 0.0 +
Y0.3- /H SI G N 40 Y 0.0 - /S IGN 37
2k

2_
2.5.2.2 Relay Output Circuit
Relay terminals have no polarity. They can be used with alternating current that passes through a load, or with
direct current that passes through a load. The maximum current that can pass through every relay terminal is
2A, and refer to each product specification for the maximum current that can pass through every common
terminal. Life cycle curve: The lifetime of a relay terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the
power factor cosψ, the time constant t), and the current passing through the terminal. The relation is shown in
the life cycle curve below.

120VAC Resistive
3000
30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
2000
240VAC Inductive(cosψ = 0.4)
1000
120VAC Inductive(cosψ =0.4)
Operation(X10 )

500
3

300
200

100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms )
30
20

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)

 Relay output circuit

2-51
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

① Direct-current power supply

② Emergency stop using an external switch.

Fuse: to protect the output circuit, a fuse having a breaking capacity between 5 A to 10 A is connected
③
to the common terminal.
④ Alternating-current power supply
A relay or a solenoid valve is used as a DC load. A diode is connected in parallel to absorb the surge
voltage that occurs when the load is OFF.
_2 Relay out put
Relay /Solenoid valv e

⑤
V DC power s upply

D: 1N4001 diode
An electromagnetic contactor is used as an AC load. A resistor and a capacitor are connected in
parallel with the contactor to absorb the surge voltage that occurs when the load is OFF.
Relay output
Elect romagnetic cont actor

Y0. 7

⑥ A C power supply

A bulb (incandescent lamp) is used as a DC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the
surge current that occurs when the load is ON.
Relay out put

VDC power supply

⑦ A bulb (neon lamp) is used as an AC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the surge
current that occurs when the load is ON.

Mutually exclusive output: For example, Y0.3 controls the clockwise rotation of the motor, and Y0.4
○
8 controls the counterclockwise rotation of the motor. This interlock circuit and the program in the PLC
ensure that there are protective measures if an abnormal condition occurs.

2-52
 Ch a pt er 2 D ig i ta l I np ut /O ut pu t M od u l es

2.5.2.3 Transistor Output Circuit (NPN)

2_

High - powe r
Low -p owe r Fre qu en tl y ON / OF F
Y +
D Y +
VDC
VDC
ZD D

C C
D : 1N4001 di ode D: 1N 4001 d io de
[ Figu re 1 ] ZD : 9V Zen er, 5W
[ F ig ur e 2 ]

① Direct-current power supply

② Emergency stop

③ Fuse
The output terminals of a transistor module are open-collector output terminals. If Y0.0/Y0.1 is a pulse
train output terminal of a transistor module, the output current passing through its output pull-up
resistor must be greater than 0.1 A to ensure that the transistor module operates normally.
④
1. A diode is connected to absorb the surge voltage: used in low-power situations (see Figure 1).
2. A diode and Zener are connected to absorb the surge voltage: used in high-power and power-
on/off frequently situations (see Figure 2).
⑤ A bulb (incandescent lamp), used as a resistive load.
Mutually exclusive output: For example, Y0.2 controls the clockwise rotation of the motor, and Y0.3
⑥ controls the counterclockwise rotation of the motor. This interlock circuit and the program in the PLC
ensure that there are protective measures if an abnormal condition occurs.
Connect a NTC thermistor (negative temperature coefficient) in series when a bulb (incandescent
⑦
lamp) is used as a resistive load.

2-53
 A S S e r i e s M o d u l e Ma n u a l

MEMO

_2

2-54
 3
Chapter 3 Analog Input Module

AS04/08AD

Table of Contents
3.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Specifications and Functions .......................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 3-6
3.2.4 AS04AD Control Register ................................................................ 3-6
3.2.5 AS08AD Control Registers ............................................................. 3-11
3.2.6 Functions .................................................................................... 3-17
3.2.7 Wiring ........................................................................................ 3-20
3.2.8 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 3-24
3.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft .................................................................. 3-24
3.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 3-24
3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module................................................... 3-27
3.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 3-28
3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 3-29
3.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 3-30
3.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) .................................. 3-34
3.4.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 3-34
3.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module................................................... 3-37
3.4.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 3-38
3.4.4 Parameters ................................................................................. 3-39
3.5 Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 3-41
3.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 3-41
3.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 3-42
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for analog-to-digital modules, their operation, and their programming.

In this chapter, “module” refers to the analog-to-digital modules AS04AD-A, AS08AD-B, and AS08AD-C.
For software operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner or DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If you are using AS Series

PLC CPU, refer to ISPSoft User Manual or DIADesigner Manual for more information. The new software

DIADesigner-AX only supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to AX-3 User Manual

for more information on software operation.

_3
3.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Select a module based on its practical application.

AS04AD-A: Has four channels. A channel can receive either voltage or current input.

AS08AD-B: Has eight channels. A channel can receive voltage input.

AS08AD-C: Has eight channels. A channel can receive current input.

(2) High-speed conversion

Analog signals are converted to digital signals at a rate of 2 ms per channel. (FW V1.02 or later: 1

ms/channel)

(3) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: The error range for both voltage input and current input is ±0.2% at ambient

temperature of 25° C. The number of voltage/current inputs that are averaged

is 100.

(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG of ISPSoft or Hardware Configuration of DIADesigner without spending time writing

programs to set registers to manage functions.

(5) Built-in moving average and proportional filter function.

3-2
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

3.2 Specifications and Functions

3.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module Name AS04AD-A AS08AD-B AS08AD-C

Number of Inputs 4 8 8

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage input/Current input Voltage input Current input
Conversion

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%) 3_

Connector Type Removable terminal block

Conversion Time 2 ms/channel (FW V1.02 or later: 1 ms/channel)

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.

Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VAC

Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VAC

Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VC

Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VAC

Weight 145g

 Functional specifications

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range -10 V ~ +10 V 0 V ~ 10 V ±5 V 0V~5V 1V~5V

Rated Conversion K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Range K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V
Hardware Input Limit*1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V
K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384

Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%

Hardware Resolution 16 bits

Input Impedance 2MΩ

Absolute Input
±15 V
Range*3

3-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the

input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a

conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input

signal is 10.15 V, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The

module uses the upper limit value (32387) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

_3
Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA

Rated Conversion K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~
Range K+2000 K32000 K32000

Hardware Input
-20.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA -0.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA 3.81 mA ~ 20.19 mA
Limit*1
K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384

Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%

Hardware Resolution 16 bits

Input Impedance 250Ω

Absolute Input
±32 mA
Range*3

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the

input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a

conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input

signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The

module uses the upper limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

3-4
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

3.2.2 Profile
 AS04AD-A

38.2 95

04AD 1
7
7
V 1+ V 2+
P WR
I1 + I2 +

V I1- V I2- E RR 2

98.3
A D

88
V 3+ V 4+

I3 + I4 +

V I4-
3
V I3-

8 S LD S LD

AG 2 4V
4
3_
0V

9 5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Status of the power supply

POWER LED Indicator ON: the power is on.

OFF: the power is off.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blinking: A minor error exists in the module.

Analog-to-digital conversion status

Analog to Digital
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

Removable Terminal Inputs are connected to sensors.

3
Block Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals

5 Terminal Block Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Nameplate

3-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04AD-A AS08AD-B AS08AD-C

04AD 08AD 08AD

V 1+ V 2+ V1+ V2+ I1+ I2+

P WR PWR PWR
I1 + I2 + V1- V2- I1- I2-

V I2- E RR ERR

_3
V I1- V3+ V4+ ERR I3+ I4+
A D A D A D
V 3+ V 4+ V3- V4- I3- I4-

I3 + I4 + V5+ V6+ I5+ I6+

V I3- V I4- V5- V6- I5- I6-

S LD S LD V7+ V8+ I7+ I8+

V7- V8- I7- I8-

AG 2 4V AG 24V AG 24V

0V 0V 0V

3.2.4 AS04AD Control Register

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup
1: -10 V to +10 V

Channel 2 mode setup 2: 0 V–10 V

2
3: -5 V to +5 V

4: 0 V–5 V R/W 1
Channel 3 mode setup
3
5: 1 V–5 V

6: 0 mA–20 mA
Channel 4 mode setup
4 7: 4 mA–20 mA

8: -20 mA to +20 mA

3-6
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

5 Channel 1 offset

6 Channel 2 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Channel 3 offset

8 Channel 4 offset

9 Channel 1 gain

10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain
3_
12 Channel 4 gain

Channel 1 average
13
times

Channel 2 average
14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Channel 3 average
15
times

Channel 4 average
16
times

Channel 1 filter
17
average percentage
Range: 0–3
Channel 2 filter
18 Unit: ±10%
average percentage
1: ±10% R/W 1
Channel 3 filter
19 2: ±20%
average percentage
3: ±30%
Channel 4 filter
20
average percentage

0: 2 ms

1: 4 ms

Channel sampling 2: 10 ms

cycle 3: 15 ms
21 R/W 0
(sampling/integration 4: 20 ms
time) 5: 30 ms

6: 40 ms

7: 50 ms

3-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

8: 60 ms

9: 70 ms

10: 80 ms

11: 90 ms

12: 100 ms

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

_3 bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4
22 Channel Alarm Setup R/W 0

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

23 The minimum scale When the format is set to integer in HWCONFIG,

-10.0
24 range for channel 1 the scale range is invalid.

25 The minimum scale For analog-digital modules, it is much more

-10.0
26 range for channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital values

27 The minimum scale to floating-point values for earier understanding.

-10.0
28 range for channel 3 Here you can set the minimum and maximum scale

29 The minimum scale ranges of corresponding floating-point values for

-10.0
30 range for channel 4 channels.

31 For example, if the scale range for an analog to R

The maximum scale
10.0
32 range for channel 1 digital input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates the

maximum value is +10.0 V and the minimum value

33 The maximum scale
is -10.0 V. 10.0
34 range for channel 2
If the scale range for an analog to digital input
35 The maximum scale
channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the maximum 10.0
36 range for channel 3
value is 20 mA and the minimum value is 4 mA.
37
The maximum scale
Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP 10.0
38 range for channel 4
(API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use floating-

3-8
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

point operations when a conversion range needs to

edit.

Instructions for peak values

16#0101: record the peak value again for channel

16#0102: record the peak value again for channel

16#0104: record the peak value again for channel 3_

3

16#0108: record the peak value again for channel

16#010F: record the peak values again for

channels 1–4
201 Instruction Set W 0
16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

The maximum peak

210 0
value for channel 1

The maximum peak

211 0
value for channel 2
Integer format; the maximum peak value for analog
R
The maximum peak
212 inputs 0
value for channel 3

The maximum peak

213 0
value for channel 4

3-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

The minimum peak

214 0
value for channel 1

The minimum peak

215 0
value for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak value for analog
R
The minimum peak inputs
216 0
value for channel 3

The minimum peak

217 0
_3 value for channel 4

The time to record for

222 1
channel 1

The time to record for

223 Unit: 10 ms 1
channel 2
Range: 1–100 R/W
The time to record for
224 Time to record the digital value for the channel 1
channel 3

The time to record for

225 1
channel 4

The number of records

240 0
for channel 1

The number of records

241 0
for channel 2
Range: 0–500, display the current records R
The number of records
242 0
for channel 3

The number of records

243 0
for channel 4
4000~
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1 R --
4499
4500~ Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2 R --
4999
5000~ Records for channel 3 500 records for channel 3 R --
5499
5500~ Records for channel 4 500 records for channel 4 R --
5999

3-10
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

3.2.5 AS08AD Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format
3_
1 Channel 1 mode setup

AS08AD-B
2 Channel 2 mode setup
0: closed

1: -10 V to +10 V
3 Channel 3 mode setup 2: 0 V–10 V

3: -5 V to +5 V

4 Channel 4 mode setup 4: 0 V–5 V

5: 1 V–5 V R/W 1

5 Channel 5 mode setup

AS08AD-C

6 Channel 6 mode setup 0: closed

1: -20 mA to +20 mA

2: 0 mA–20 mA
7 Channel 7 mode setup
3: 4 mA–20 mA

8 Channel 8 mode setup

9 Channel 1 offset

10 Channel 2 offset

11 Channel 3 offset

12 Channel 4 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
13 Channel 5 offset

14 Channel 6 offset

15 Channel 7 offset

16 Channel 8 offset

3 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

17 Channel 1 gain

18 Channel 2 gain

19 Channel 3 gain

20 Channel 4 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
21 Channel 5 gain

22 Channel 6 gain

23 Channel 7 gain
_3
24 Channel 8 gain

25 Channel 1 average times

26 Channel 2 average times

27 Channel 3 average times

28 Channel 4 average times

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
29 Channel 5 average times

30 Channel 6 average times

31 Channel 7 average times

32 Channel 8 average times

Channel 1 filter average

33
percentage

Channel 2 filter average

34
percentage

Channel 3 filter average

35
percentage
Range: 0–3
Channel 4 filter average
36 Unit: ±10%
percentage
1: ±10% R/W 1
Channel 5 filter average
37 2: ±20%
percentage
3: ±30%
Channel 6 filter average
38
percentage

Channel 7 filter average

39
percentage

Channel 8 filter average

40
percentage

3-12
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: 2 ms

1: 4 ms

2: 10 ms

3: 15 ms

4: 20 ms

Channel Sampling Cycle 5: 30 ms

41 (Sampling/Integration 6: 40 ms R/W 0

Time) 7: 50 ms 3_
8: 60 ms

9: 70 ms

10: 80 ms

11: 90 ms

12: 100 ms

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4

bit4: channel 5

bit5: channel 6
42 Channel Alarm Setup R/W 0
bit6: channel 7

bit7: channel 8

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

43 The minimum scale range When the format is set to integer in

44 for channel 1 HWCONFIG, the scale range is invalid.
R -10.0
45 The minimum scale range For analog-digital modules, it is much more

46 for channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital

3-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

47 The minimum scale range values to floating-point values for earier

48 for channel 3 understanding. Here you can set the minimum

and maximum scale ranges of corresponding

49 The minimum scale range
floating-point values for channels.
50 for channel 4
For example, if the scale range for an analog
51 The minimum scale range
to digital input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates
52 for channel 5
the maximum value is +10.0 V and the
53 The minimum scale range minimum value is -10.0 V.
_3
54 for channel 6 If the scale range for an analog to digital input

55 The minimum scale range channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the

56 for channel 7 maximum value is 20 mA and the minimum

value is 4 mA.
57 The minimum scale range

58 for channel 8
Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP
59 The maximum scale range
(API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use
60 for channel 1
floating-point operations when a
61 The maximum scale range conversion range needs to edit.
62 for channel 2

63 The maximum scale range

64 for channel 3

65 The maximum scale range

66 for channel 4
R 10.0
67 The maximum scale range

68 for channel 5

69 The maximum scale range

70 for channel 6

71 The maximum scale range

72 for channel 7

73 The maximum scale range

74 for channel 8

3-14
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

Instructions for peak values

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for 3_

channel 4

16#010F: record the peak values again for

channels 1-4
201 Instruction Set W 0
16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

The maximum peak value

210 0
for channel 1

The maximum peak value

211 0
for channel 2

The maximum peak value

212 0
for channel 3 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R
The maximum peak value analog inputs
213 0
for channel 4

The maximum peak value

214 0
for channel 5

The maximum peak value

215 0
for channel 6

3-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

The maximum peak value

216 0
for channel 7

The maximum peak value

217 0
for channel 8

The minimum peak value

218 0
for channel 1

The minimum peak value

219 0
_3 for channel 2

The minimum peak value

220 0
for channel 3

The minimum peak value

221 0
for channel 4 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R
The minimum peak value analog inputs
222 0
for channel 5

The minimum peak value

223 0
for channel 6

The minimum peak value

224 0
for channel 7

The minimum peak value

225 0
for channel 8

The time to record for

222 1
channel 1

The time to record for Unit: 10 ms

223 1
channel 2 Range: 1–100
R
The time to record for Time to record the digital value for the
224 1
channel 3 channels

The time to record for

225 1
channel 4

3-16
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

3.2.6 Functions

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

3 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.

Disconnection Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4 mA–
4
Detection 20 mA or 1 V–5 V.
3_
If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware can
Channel Detect and
5 receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable
Alarm
this function.

The Limit Detections

6 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels.
for Channels

Records for

Channels
7 Save the analog curves for channels
(Applicable for

AS04AD)

8 Scale Range When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range.

1. Enable/Disable a channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time is

2 ms X (the number of channels). For firmware V1.02 or later, an analog signal is converted into a digital
signal at a rate of 1 ms per channel. The total conversion time is 1 ms X (the number of channels). If a

channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.

2. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

Example:

A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The

corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to -

100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100.

3-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Original signals
1 0V S igna ls aft er t he ca libration

-32 000 -31900

3200 0 32100
Digita l v alue (X)

-10V

Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal

_3
3. Average

This function is achived by moving average. You can set the average times between 1–100. It is a steady

value obtained from the sum of the recorded values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to
unavoidable external factors, however, you may observe violent changes in the average value. Use the

filtering function to exclude acute pulses from the sum-up and equalization, so that the computed average

value is not affected by the acute recorded values. Set the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the

unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to

obtain the average value, but if you set the filter range to 1, for example, the system excludes the bottom

10% and top 10% of the values and averages only the remaining values to obtain the average value. For

instantance, set the average value to 100 and set the filter percentage to 3. When there are 100 pieces of

data collected, the system arranges the collected data according to their values from large to small and

then excludes the bottom 30% and top 30% of the values (60 pieces of data) and averages only the

remaining values (40 pieces of data) to obtain the average value.

Quantity

Range for filter percentage

Present measured value

4. Disconnection detection

Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20 mA or 1–5 V. If a module that can

receive inputs between 4–20 mA or from 1–5 V is disconnected, the input signal exceeds the range of

allowable inputs, so the module produces an alarm or a warning.

3-18
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

5. Channel detection

If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this

function so that the module does not produce an alarm or a warning when the input signal exceeds the

input range.

6. Limit detections for channels

This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to

peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel 3_

Maximum valu e

Mini mu m va lue

Time

7. Records for channels (applicable for AS04AD)

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data

points and the recording time is 10 ms.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

8. Scale range

You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has

a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For

example, if the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0,

and the LSP scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to

+10 V, as the example below shows.

3-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Analog value

10 V

Rated output range

-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
_3 Scale range

3.2.7 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the

module must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that is

not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable

connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) To wire a terminal block, use single-core cables or multi-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22 AWG

with pin-type connectors smaller than 1 mm in diameter, which are covered with an insulation tube as

below. Moreover, use only copper conducting wires that can withstand temperatures above 60°C-75°C.

< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG

(5) Notes on two-wire, three-wire, and four-wire connections:

 Two-wire connection/three-wire connection (passive transducer): connect the transducer and

the analog input module to the same power circuit.

 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply so

do not connect it to the same power circuit as the analog input module.

(6) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.

3-20
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

 AS04AD-A External wiring

AG
*6
4-wir e: v ol tage inp ut
CHX
-10 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed cabl e *1 1M
+ V I+
+ 2 4V 250 CH1
- *3 I1 +
0V 1M
VI 1-
*4
FE
*6 AG
4-wir e: c urr ent inp ut CHX
-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Shi eld ed c abl e *1 1M
V 2+
+ *2 25 0 CH2
+ 24 V I2 +
- 1M
0V V I2 -

*4

2-wi re: cu rrent i np ut

FE 3_
4 mA ~ +2 0m A
*6 AG
+ 2 4V CHX
Shi eld ed c abl e *1
+ 1M
V 3+
- *2 25 0 CH3
I3 +
1M
0V V I3 -
*4
FE
3-wi re: vo ltag e inpu t
-1 0 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed c abl e *1 *6 AG

+ 2 4V CH X
+ 1M
V4 +
25 0 CH4
0V - I 4+
1M
*4 V I4 -

FE

3-wi re: cur rent i npu t

-2 0m A~ + 20 m A *6 AG
Shi eld ed c abl e *1 CHX
+ 24 V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
25 0 CH1
I1 +
0V -
1M
V I1 -
*4
FE
*5

+ 15 V
0V D C /D C
24 VD C AG
24 V C on ve rt e r
-15 V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–4) must be short-circuited.

*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*5. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.

*6. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

3-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 AS08AD-B External wiring

4 -w ire vo lt ag e inp u t AG
-10 V~ + 10 V Sh ield ed c ab le* 1 *5
CHX 1M
+ 2 4V +
V 1+
- *2 1M
0V V1 -

*3
FE

3 - wire v olt ag e in pu t
-1 0 V~ + 10 V S hie ld ed ca b le* 1 *5 AG

_3
CH X
+ 2 4V + 1M
V2 +
0V -
1M
V 2-
*3
FE

*4

+ 1 5V
0V D C / DC
2 4 VD C C on ve rte r AG
2 4V
-1 5V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*3. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*4. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.

*5. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

3-22
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

 AS08AD-C External wiring

4 -w ire cu rren t in pu t AG
*4
-2 0m A~ + 2 0m A Sh ield ed cab le* 1
CHX
1M
+ 2 4V +
I1 +
- 2 50 1M
0V I1 -

*2
FE
2- w ire curre nt in pu t
4m A~ + 20 m A
+ 24 V
Sh ield ed cab le* 1 *4 AG
+
CHX
1M
-
I2 +
250 1M
3_
0V I2 -
*2
FE

3 -w ire cu rren t inp ut

-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Sh ield ed cab le* 1
*4 AG
+2 4 V + CH X
1M
I 3+
0V - 25 0 1M
I3 -
*2
FE
*3

+ 1 5V
0V D C /D C
2 4 VD C C on ve rt e r AG
2 4V
-1 5V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*3. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.

*4. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

3-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.2.8 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.
_3
Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Analog to Digital Analog-to-digital conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

3.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

The following example uses the AS04AD-A module.

3.3.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

3-24
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

3_

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

3-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_3

(4) Choose a parameter, set the values, and click OK.

3-26
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the

parameters while the CPU module is running.

3_

3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

3-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

_3

3.3.3 Online Mode

(1) Click Online Mode on the toolbar.

3-28
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

3_

3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

3-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

_3

3.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input formats of the channels

3-30
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(2) The CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

3_

(3) The CH1-CH4 calibration settings

3-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(4) The average filter settings

_3

(5) The sampling time settings

3-32
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(6) The channel detection settings

3_

3-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration)

The following example uses AS04AD-A.

3.4.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start DIADesigner-AX, click New Project, and then Project+Device to create a new project.

_3

(2) Add modules in:

➀ Double-click Hardware Configuration
➁ Select the + section and drag and drop the module that you want to add from the Product List to the +
section.
or ➂ Right-click Delta_Localbus Master to see the context meun and then double-click Add Device to
add devices manually or double-click Scan for Devices.

3-34
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(3) Select modules:

➀ Double-click the module name in the Hardware Configuration area.
or ➁ Double-click the module name shown in the node.

3_

(4) Module parameter setting page:

3-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) After setting is complete, select the module and click Login on the tool bar to download the settings to the
modules.

_3

3-36
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

3.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) Select the module and click the Information tab to see the module information.

(2) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can find the Module Revision
from the Parameters tab.

3_

3-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.4.3 Online Mode

(1) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can monitor all configuration
parameters. Vaules in the column of Prepared Value are configurable online. After editing the values in
the Prepared Value column, click Write Parameter to confirm the change.

_3

(2) You can monitor the values, status, error codes in each channel from the I/O Mapping tab.

(3) You can monitor the current status and error codes from the Status tab.

3-38
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

3.4.4 Parameters
(1) You can set up the value format to Integer or Floating for Channel 1 to 4.

(2) You can set up the values for Channel 1 to 4.

3_

(3) You can set up the calibrations for for Channel 1 to 4.

(4) You can set up the average filtering for Channel 1 to 4.

3-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) You can set up the sampling time.

(6) You can set up the channel detect and alarm settings.

_3

3-40
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

3.5 Troubleshooting
3.5.1 Error Codes

Error A  D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking 3_

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180A
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180B
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF
16#180C
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180D
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 7 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180E
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 8 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180F
the hardware can receive.

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

3-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

_3 Check the signal received by channel 1
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 3.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 4.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 5.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 6.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 7 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 7.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 8 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 8.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

3-42
 4
Chapter 4 Analog Output Module AS04DA

Table of Contents
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.1 Characteristics ........................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Specifications and Functions .......................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................. 4-3
4.2.2 Profile ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ........................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Control Registers ........................................................................ 4-6
4.2.5 Functions ................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.6 Wiring ..................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.7 LED Indicators .......................................................................... 4-14
4.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft .................................................................. 4-14
4.3.1 Initial Setting ........................................................................... 4-14
4.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module ............................................... 4-17
4.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................. 4-18
4.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File .......................................... 4-19
4.3.5 Parameters .............................................................................. 4-20
4.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) .................................. 4-23
4.4.1 Initial Setting ........................................................................... 4-23
4.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module ............................................... 4-26
4.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................. 4-27
4.4.4 Parameters .............................................................................. 4-28
4.5 Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 4-30
4.5.1 Error Codes.............................................................................. 4-30
4.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ......................................................... 4-30
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4.1 Overview
An analog output module receives four 12-bit blocks of digital data from a CPU module. The module converts

the digital data into analog signals (voltage or current). For software operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner or

DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If you are using AS Series PLC CPU, refer to ISPSoft User Manual or

DIADesigner Manual for more information. The new software DIADesigner-AX only supports AX Series PLC

CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to AX-3 User Manual for more information on software operation.

4.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Select a module based on its practical application.

AS04DA-A: Has four channels. A channel can send either voltage or current output.

_4 (2) High-speed conversion

Digital signals are converted to analog signals at a rate of 2 ms per channel.

(3) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: The error range for both voltage output and current output is ±0.2% at ambient

temperature of 25 °C.

(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG of ISPSoft or Hardware Configuration of DIADesigner without spending time writing

programs to set registers to manage functions.

4-2
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

4.2 Specifications and Functions

4.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications
Module Name AS04DA-A

Number of Outputs 4

Digital-to-Analog
Voltage input/Current input
Conversion

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

Conversion Time 2 ms/channel

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another. 4_
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VAC

Weight 145 g

 Functional specifications
Digital-to-Analog
Voltage Output
Conversion

Rated Output Range ±10 V 0 V~10 V ±5 V 0 V~5 V 1 V~5 V

K-32000 K-32000 K0 K0
Conversion Range ~ K0~K32000 ~ ~ ~
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000

Hardware Output Range -10.1V~10.1V -0.1V~10.1V -5.05V~5.05V -0.05V~5.05V 0.95V~5.05V

Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)

Error Rate (Full

±0. 5%
Temperature Range)

Linearity error
±0.05%
(Room Temperature)

Linearity error (Full

±0.05%
Temperature Range)

Hardware Resolution 12 bits

4-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Digital-to-Analog
Voltage Output
Conversion

Output Impedance ≧1 kΩ ≧500 Ω

Digital-to-Analog Conversion Current Output

Rated Output Range 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA

K0
~
Conversion Range
K32000

Hardware Output Range -0.2 mA to +20.2 mA 3.8 mA–20.2 mA

Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)
_4 Error Rate
±0.5%
(Full Temperature Range)

Linearity Error (Room

±0.03%
Temperature)

Linearity error (Full

±0.03%
Temperature Range)

Hardware Resolution 12 bits

Output Impedance ≦550 Ω

4-4
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

4.2.2 Profile
38.2 95

04DA 1
7
7
VO1 VO2
P WR
IO1 IO2

AG AG E RR 2

98.3
D A

88
SLD SLD

VO3 VO4

3
IO3 IO4

8 AG AG

SLD SLD

4
24V

0V

9 5
6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

4_
1 Model Name Model name of the module

Status of the power supply

POWER LED Indicator ON: the power is on.

OFF: the power is off.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blinking: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital-to-Analog conversion status

Digital-to-Analog
Blinking: conversion is in process.
conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

Removable Terminal
3 Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Block

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals

5 Terminal Block Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Nameplate

4-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04DA-A

04DA

VO1 VO2
P WR
IO1 IO2

AG AG E RR
D A
SLD SLD

VO3 VO4

IO3 IO4

AG AG

SLD SLD

24V

_4 0V

4.2.4 Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating-point format

0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup R/W
1: -10 V to +10 V (default)

2: 0 V–10 V
2 Channel 2 mode setup R/W
3: -5 V to +5 V

4: 0 V–5 V 1
3 Channel 3 mode setup R/W
5: 1 V–5 V (Not support calibration)

6: 0 mA–20 mA

4 Channel 4 mode setup 7: 4 mA–20 mA (Not support calibration) R/W

8: 1 V–5 V (Supports calibration only with firmware

4-6
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

V1.02 or later)

9: 4 mA–20 mA (Supports calibration only with

firmware V1.02 or later)

5 Channel 1 offset

6 Channel 2 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Channel 3 offset

8 Channel 4 offset

9 Channel 1 gain

10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain

12 Channel 4 gain 4_
Retaining an output
13
sent by channel 1

Retaining an output 0: when the PLC stops, the value of the analog output
14
sent by channel 2 is reset to 0.
R/W 0
Retaining an output 1: when the PLC stops, the value of the analog output
15
sent by channel 3 is retained.

Retaining an output
16
sent by channel 4

Refreshing the time for

17 an output sent by 0
channel 1

Refreshing the time for

Range: 10–3200 (100 ms–32000 ms)
18 an output sent by 0

channel 2 Unit: 10 ms

Refreshing the time for Any value less than 10 is processed as 0. Any value R/W

19 an output sent by larger than 3200 is processed as 3200. 0

channel 3 Set the value to 0 to disable this function.

Refreshing the time for

20 an output sent by 0
channel 4

21 R
The minimum scale
When the format is set to integer in HWCONFIG, the -10.0
22 range for channel 1 R

4-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

23 scale range is invalid. R

The minimum scale
-10.0
24 range for channel 2 R
For analog-digital modules, it is much more convenient

25 The minimum scale if the system can convert digital values to floating-point R
-10.0
26 range for channel 3 values for easier understanding. Here you can set the R

27 minimum and maximum scale ranges of corresponding R

The minimum scale
-10.0
28 floating-point values for channels. R
range for channel 4

29 For example, if the scale range for an analog to digital R

The maximum scale
input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates the maximum 10.0
30 range for channel 1 R
value is +10.0 V and the minimum value is -10.0 V.
31 The maximum scale R
If the scale range for an analog to digital input channel 10.0
32 range for channel 2 R
is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the maximum value is 20
33 The maximum scale R
_4 34 range for channel 3
mA and the minimum value is 4 mA.
R
10.0

Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP (API0217)

35 R
The maximum scale and set SM685 to ON to use floating-point
10.0
36 range for channel 4 R
operations when a conversion range needs to edit.

0: warning

1: alarm

37 Channel alarm setup bit0: error in the power supply R/W 0

bit1: error in the module hardware

bit2: error in calibration

4.2.5 Functions

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

When a module stops running, the system can retain the signal sent by the
3 Retain an Output
module.

Refresh Time for an

4 Refresh the analog output value according to the value of the fixed slope.
Output

5 Scale Range You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point.

4-8
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

1. Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time is

2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total

conversion time.

2. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

Note:

To make the calibration via the formula above for 1 V-5 V or 4 mA-20 mA output, please use mode 8 or mode
4_
9. Refer to the channel mode setup description in Section 4.2.4 Control Registers for details.

Example 1:

The corresponding digital value of original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If Offset is 200 and

Gain is still default 1000, then the corresponding digital value of -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31800 to

+32200 according to the formula.

Original signals
10V Signals after the calibration

-32000 -31800
32000 32200

Input digital value (X)

-10V

Voltage (Y)
Measured analog signal output

Example 2:

The corresponding digital value of original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If Offset is default 0

and Gain is 8000, then the corresponding digital value of -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -4000 to +4000

according to the formula.

4-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Signals after the calibration

10V Original signals

-32000 -40 00
4000 32 000
Input digital value (X)

_4 -10V

Voltage (Y)

Measured analog signal output

3. Retain an Output

When a module stops running, the system can retain the signal sent by the module.

The output is retained:

Input si gnal

Output signal

Module s tops runni ng Tim e

4-10
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

The output is not retained:

Anal og si gnal

Output signal

Modul e stops r unning Tim e

4. Refresh time for an Output 4_

Set the refresh time for an output and the system updates the value of the slope (m) accordingly.

Anal og si gnal

Max imum output

Mi ni mum output Time

When the analog output signal changes, the system updates the value of the analog output according to the

value set in the slope, as shown in the image below.

Analog si gnal

Time

4 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5. Scale Range

You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has a

corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For example, if

the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0, and the LSP

scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to +10 V, as the

example below shows.

Analog value

10 V

Rated output range

_4
-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range

4.2.6 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the digital-to-analog module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the output signal cables that are connected to the

AS04DA-A must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install or bound the cable to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a

load that is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) To wire a terminal block, use single-core cables or multi-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22 AWG

with pin-type connectors smaller than 1 mm in diameter, which are covered with an insulation tube as

below. Moreover, use only copper conducting wires that can resist temperatures above 60 °C-75 °C.

< 1mm 8-10mm 24-22AWG

(5) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.

4-12
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

 External wiring

Voltage output
- 10V~+1 0V *4
CHX
VO1 CH1
*2
IO1
AC m otor driv e, Shielded c able* 1 AG
AG
recorder, SL D
proportioning v alv e

Current output *4
CHX
0 mA ~20 mA
VO4 CH4
IO4
AG
AG
AC motor driv e, Shielded cable*1 SLD
recorder,
proporti oni ng v al ve *3
FE

+15 V
DC/DC
24VDC
0V
2 4V C on ve rte r
AG 4_
-15V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

having a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*3. Connect the SLD to FE, and connect both the FE and the terminal to the ground terminal.

*4. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

4-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4.2.7 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital-to-analog conversion status

Digital to Analog
3 Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
_4 OFF: conversion has stopped.

4.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

4.3.1 Initial Setting
(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

4-14
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

4_

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

4-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_4
(4) Choose a parameter, set the values, and click OK.

4-16
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note you cannot download the parameters

cannot be downloaded.

4_

4.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

4-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the
hardware are displayed.

_4

4.3.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

4-18
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(2) Right-click the module and click on Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

4_

4.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

4-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import save parameters.

_4

4.3.5 Parameters
(1) The output formats of the channels

4-20
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(2) The CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

4_

(3) The CH1–CH4 calibration settings

4-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(4) The output settings

_4

(5) The alarm settings

4-22
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

4.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration)

The following example uses AS04DA-A.

4.4.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start DIADesigner-AX, click New Project, and then Project+Device to create a new project.

4_

(2) Add modules in:

➀ Double-click Hardware Configuration
➁ Select the + section and drag and drop the module that you want to add from the Product List to the +
section.
or ➂ Right-click Delta_Localbus Master to see the context menu and then double-click Add Device to
add devices manually or double-click Scan for Devices.

4-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) Select modules:

➀ Double-click the module name in the Hardware Configuration area.
or ➁ Double-click the module name shown in the node.

_4
(4) Module parameter setting page:

4-24
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(5) After setting is complete, select the module and click Login on the tool bar to download the settings to the
modules.

4_

4-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) Select the module and click the Information tab to see the module information.

(2) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can find the Module Revision
from the Parameters tab.

_4

4-26
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

4.4.3 Online Mode

(1) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can monitor all configuration
parameters. Values in the column of Prepared Value are configurable online. After editing the values in
the Prepared Value column, click Write Parameter to confirm the change.

4_

(2) You can monitor the values, status, error codes in each channel from the I/O Mapping tab. You can also
set a new value in the column of Prepared Value and press Ctrol+F7 on the keyboard to write the new
values in.

(3) You can monitor the current status and error codes from the Status tab.

4-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4.4.4 Parameters
(1) You can set up the value format to Integer or Floating for Channel 1 to 4.

(2) You can set up the values for Channel 1 to 4.

_4

(3) You can set up the calibrations for Channel 1 to 4.

(4) You can set up the average filtering for Channel 1 to 4.

4-28
 Ch a pt er 4 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(5) You can set up the sampling time.

(6) You can set up the channel detect and alarm settings.

4_

4-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4.5 Troubleshooting
4.5.1 Error Codes

Error D  A LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

_4 Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

4.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

4-30
 5
Chapter 5 Analog Input/Output Module

AS06XA

Table of Contents

5.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 5-2

5.1.1 Characteristics ........................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Specifications and Functions ......................................................... 5-3
5.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Profile ...................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ........................................................... 5-7
5.2.4 Control Registers ....................................................................... 5-8
5.2.5 Functions .................................................................................5-13
5.2.6 Wiring .....................................................................................5-20
5.2.7 LED Indicators ..........................................................................5-22
5.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................................................. 5-23
5.3.1 Initial Setting ...........................................................................5-23
5.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module ...............................................5-26
5.3.3 Online Mode .............................................................................5-27
5.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ..........................................5-28
5.3.5 Parameters ..............................................................................5-29
5.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ................................. 5-34
5.4.1 Initial Setting ...........................................................................5-34
5.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module ...............................................5-37
5.4.3 Online Mode .............................................................................5-38
5.4.4 Parameters ..............................................................................5-39
5.5 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 5-41
5.5.1 Error Codes ..............................................................................5-41
5.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure .........................................................5-42

5-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the analog input/output module, its operation, and its

programming. On the analog input/output module, four channels receive analog signals (voltage or current),

and converts those signals into 16-bit digital signals. In addition, the analog input/output module receives two

blocks of 16-bit digital data from a CPU module, and converts the digital data into analog signals (voltage or

current). The analog input/output module sends the analog signals by two channels. For software operation,

ISPSoft, DIADesigner or DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If you are using AS Series PLC CPU, refer to

ISPSoft User Manual or DIADesigner Manual for more information. The new software DIADesigner-AX only

supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to AX-3 User Manual for more information

on software operation.

5.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Use the AS06XA-A analog input/output module, based on its practical application.

CH1–CH4: A channel can receive either voltage or current inputs.

_5 CH5–CH6: A channel can send either voltage or current outputs.

(2) High-speed conversion

The conversion rate is 2 ms per channel. (For FW V1.02 or later, upgraded to 1 ms/channel)

(3) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: At ambient temperature of 25° C.

Input: The error range for both voltage and current input is ±0.2%.

Output: The error range for both voltage and current output is ±0.02%.

(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG of ISPSoft or Hardware Configuraiton of DIADesigner without spending time writing

programs to set registers to manage functions.

5-2
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

5.2 Specifications and Functions

5.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module Name AS06XA-A

Number of Analog 4 inputs

Inputs/Outputs 2 outputs

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage input/Current input/Voltage output/Current output
Conversion

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

Conversion Time 2ms/channel (FW V1.02 or later, upgraded to 1ms/channel)

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC 5_
Isolation between the 24 VDC and the ground: 500 VAC

Weight 145 g

 Functional specifications for the analog-to-digital conversion

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range -10 V ~ +10 V 0 V ~ 10 V ±5 V 0V~5V 1V~5V

K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0
Rated Conversion Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V
Hardware Input Limit*1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V
K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384

Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%

Hardware Resolution 16 bits

Input Impedance 2MΩ

Absolute Input Range*3 ±15 V

5-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the

input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the conversion limit and a conversion

limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input signal is 10.15 V,

exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the upper

limit value (32384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA

Rated Conversion K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~
Range K+2000 K32000 K32000

Hardware Input
_5 Limit*1
-20.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA -0.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA 3.81 mA ~ 20.19 mA

K-32384 K-384 K-384

Conversion Limit*2 ~ ~ ~
K32384 K32384 K32384

Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%

Hardware Resolution 16 bits

Input Impedance 250Ω

Absolute Input
±32 mA
Range*3

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the

input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the conversion limit and a conversion

limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input signal is 0 mA,

exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the upper

limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

5-4
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

 Functional specifications for the digital-to-analog conversion

Digital-to-Analog
Voltage Output
Conversion

Rated Output Range ±10 V 0 ~ 10 V ±5 V 0~5V 1~5V

K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0
Conversion Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.1 V -0.1 V -5.05 V -0.05 V 0.95
Hardware Output Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
+10.1 V 10.1 V +5.05 V +5.05 V 5.05 V

Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)

Error Range
±0.5%
(Full temperature range)

Linearity Error
±0.05%
(Room Temperature)

Linearity Error
±0.05% 5_
(Full Temperature Range)

Hardware Resolution 12 bits

Permissible load
≧1kΩ ≧500Ω
impedance

Digital-to-Analog
Current Output
Conversion

Rated Output Range 0–20 mA 4–20 mA

Conversion Range K0~K32000 K0~K32000

Hardware Output Range -0.2 mA to 20.2 mA 3.8–20.2 mA

Error Range
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)

Error Range
±0.5%
(Full Temperature Range)

Linearity Error
±0.03%
(Room Temperature)

Linearity Error
±0.10%
(Full Temperature Range)

5-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Digital-to-Analog
Current Output
Conversion

Hardware Resolution 12 bits

Permissible Load
≦550 Ω
Impedance

5.2.2 Profile

38.2 95

1
7
7

2
98.3
88

8 3

4
9
5

_5 35
6 75

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Operating status of the module

RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Conversion status
Analog-to-Digital
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

Inputs are connected to transducers.

3 Removable Terminal Block
Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

5-6
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

Number Name Description

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals

5 Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Nameplate

5.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS06XA-A

06X A

5_

V1+ V2+
P WR
I1+ I2+

VI1- VI2- E RR
A D
V3+ V4+

I3+ I4+

VI3- VI4 -

VO1 VO2

IO1 IO2

AG 24V

0V

5-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.2.4 Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed
1 Input channel 1 mode setup
1: -10 V to +10 V (default)

2: 0–10 V
2 Input channel 2 mode setup
3: -5 to +5 V
R/W 1
4: 0–5 V
3 Input channel 3 mode setup
5: 1–5 V

6: 0–20 mA
_5 4 Input channel 4 mode setup 7: 4–20 mA
8: -20 mA to +20 mA
5 Input channel 1 offset

6 Input channel 2 offset

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Input channel 3 offset

8 Input channel 4 offset

9 Input channel 1 gain

10 Input channel 2 gain

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Input channel 3 gain

12 Input channel 4 gain

Input channel 1 average

13
times

Input channel 2 average

14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Input channel 3 average
15
times

Input channel 4 average

16
times

5-8
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

Input channel 1 filter

17
average percentage
Range: 0–3
Input channel 2 filter
18 Unit: ±10%
average percentage
1: ±10% R/W 1
Input channel 3 filter
19 2: ±20%
average percentage
3: ±30%
Input channel 4 filter
20
average percentage

0: 2 ms

1: 4 ms

2: 10 ms

3: 15 ms

4: 20 ms

Input channel sampling 5: 30 ms

21 cycle 6: 40 ms R/W 0 5_
(sampling/integration time)
7: 50 ms

8: 60 ms

9: 70 ms

10: 80 ms

11: 90 ms
12: 100 ms

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4
22 Input channel alarm setup R/W 0

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

5-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: closed
Output channel 1 mode 1: -10 V to +10 V (default)
23
setup
2: 0–10 V

3: -5 V to +5 V R/W
1
4: 0–5 V
Output channel 2 mode 5: 1–5 V
24
setup 6: 0–20 mA

7: 4–20 mA

25 Output channel 1 offset

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
26 Output channel 2 offset

27 Output channel 1 gain

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
28 Output channel 2 gain

Retain the output sent by 0: When the PLC stops, the value of the
29
channel 1 analog output is reset to 0.
_5 R/W 0
Retain the output sent by 1: When the PLC stops, the value of the
30
channel 2 analog output is retained.

Refresh the time for Range: 10–3200 (100 ms–32000 ms)

31 R/W 0
output sent by channel 1 Unit: 10 ms

Any value less than 10 is read as 0. Any value

Refreshing the time for an
32 larger than 3200 is read as 3200. R/W 0
output sent by channel 2
Set the value to 0 to disable this function.

33 The minimum scale range

When the format is set to integer in -10.0
34 for input channel 1
HWCONFIG, the scale range is invalid.
35 The minimum scale range For analog-digital modules, it is much more
-10.0
36 for input channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital
37 The minimum scale range values to floating-point values for easier
-10.0
38 for input channel 3 understanding. Here you can set the minimum
R
39 The minimum scale range and maximum scale ranges of corresponding
-10.0
40 for input channel 4 floating-point values for channels.

41 The minimum scale range For example, if the scale range for an analog
-10.0
42 for output channel 1 to digital input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates

43 the maximum value is +10.0 V and the

The minimum scale range
minimum value is -10.0 V. -10.0
44 for output channel 2

5-10
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

45 The maximum scale range If the scale range for an analog to digital input
10.0
46 for input channel 1 channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the

47 The maximum scale range maximum value is 20 mA and the minimum

10.0
48 for input channel 2 value is 4 mA.

49 The maximum scale range Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP
10.0
for input channel 3 (API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use
50
floating-point operations when a
51 The maximum scale range
conversion range needs to edit. 10.0
52 for input channel 4

53 The maximum scale range

10.0
54 for output channel 1

55 The maximum scale range

10.0
56 for output channel 2

Instructions for peak values

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1
5_
16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

channel 4

16#010F: record the peak values again for

channels 1–4
201 Instruction Set W 0
16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

5 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

The maximum peak value

210
for channel 1

The maximum peak value

211
for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R -
analog inputs
The maximum peak value
212
for channel 3

The maximum peak value

213
for channel 4

The minimum peak value

214
for channel 1

The minimum peak value

215
for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R -
The minimum peak value analog inputs
216
for channel 3

The minimum peak value

_5 217
for channel 4

The time to record for

222
channel 1

The time to record for

223 Unit: 10 ms
channel 2
Range: 1–100 R/W 1
The time to record for Time to record the digital value for the
224
channel 3 channels

The time to record for

225
channel 4

The number of records for

240
channel 1

The number of records for

241
channel 2
Range: 0–500, display the current records R 0
The number of records for
242
channel 3

The number of records for

243
channel 4
4000
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1
~4499
R -
4500
Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2
~4999

5-12
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

5000
Records for channel 3 500 records for channel 3
~5499
5500
Records for channel 4 500 records for channel 4
~5999

5.2.5 Functions

Set modes of operation and parameters with HWCONFIG utility software built into ISPSoft.

 Analog input

Item Function Description

1. Enable or disable a channel.

1 Enable/Disable a Channel
2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

3 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.

Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is

4 Disconnection Detection
4–20 mA or 1–5 V. 5_
If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware

5 Channel Detect and Alarm can receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You

can disable this function.

Limit Detections for

6 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels
Channels

7 Records for Channels Save the analog curves for channels.

8 Scale Range When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range.

1. Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time

is 2 ms X (the number of channels). For firmware V1.02 or later, an analog signal is converted into a digital

signal at a rate of 1 ms per channel. The total conversion time is 1 ms X (the number of channels). If a

channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.

2. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs which can be received by the hardware. The formula is:

5-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Example:

A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The

corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to

-100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100. When the

input voltage is 0 V, the digital value becomes -100. When the input voltage is 10.0 V, the digital value

becomes 32100.

Gain = 1000, Offset = -100

Signals after the calibration

10
Original signals
(X2, Y2)
(10V, 32100)

-10V
10V Voltage (X)
(X1, Y1) Input analog v alue
(0V, 100)

-10

_5 (Y)
Digital value

3. Average

You can set the average value between 1–100. It is a steady value obtained from the sum of the recorded

values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you may

observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude acute pulses from the
sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded values. Set

the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the system sums

up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the filter range to 1, for

example, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and averages only the

remaining values to get the average value. For instance, set the average value to 100 and set the filter

percentage to 3. When there are 100 pieces of data collected, the system arranges the collected data

according to their values from large to small and then excludes the bottom 30% and top 30% of the values

(60 pieces of data) and averages only the remaining values (40 pieces of data) to obtain the average value.
Quantity

Range for filter percentage

Present measured value

5-14
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

4. Disconnection detection

Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20 mA or 1–5 V. If a module which can

receive inputs between 4–20 mA or between 1–5 V is disconnected, the input signal exceeds the range of

allowable inputs, so the module produces an alarm or a warning.

5. Channel Detection

If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this

function so that the module does not produce an alarm or a warning when the input signal exceeds the

input range.

6. Limit detections for channels

This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to

peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

Maximum valu e
5_

Mini mu m va lue

Time

7. Records for Channels

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data

points and the recording time is 10 ms.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

5-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8. Scale range

When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range. The analog output mode of a channel

has a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For

example, if the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0,

and the LSP scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to

+10 V, as the example below shows.

Analog value

Rated output range

-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range
_5
 Analog Output

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

①
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

② Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

When a module stops running, the system retains the signal sent by the
③ Retain an Output
module.

Refresh Time for an Refresh the analog output value according to the value of the fixed slope.
④
Output

⑤ Scale Range You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point.

① Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time

is 2 ms X (the number of channels). For firmware V1.02 or later, an analog signal is converted into a digital

signal at a rate of 1 ms per channel. The total conversion time is 1 ms X (the number of channels). If a

channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.

5-16
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

② Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs which can be received by the hardware. The formula is:

Example:

A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The

corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to

200 and the gain to 1000, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -31800 to +32200.

Original signals
1 0V S igna ls aft er t he ca libration

-32 000 -31800

3200 0 32200
Digita l v alue (X)

5_
-10V

Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal

③ Retain an Output
When a module stops running, the system retains the signal sent by the module.

The output is not retained:

Analog signal

Output signal

Time

5-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

④ Refresh Time for an Output

Set the refresh time for an output and the system updates the value of the slope (m) accordingly.

Anal og si gnal

Max imum output

Mi ni mum output Time

When the analog output signal changes, the system updates the value of the analog output according to
_5 the value set in the slope, as shown in the image below.

Analog si gnal

Time

*The output conversion time and the input channel sampling cycle are the same.

5-18
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

⑤ Scale Range

You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has

a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For

example, if the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0,

and the LSP scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to

+10 V, as the example below shows.

Analog value

10 V

Rated output range

-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range

5_

5-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.2.6 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the

AS06XA-A must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that

is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a

cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) To wire a terminal block, use single-core cables or multi-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22
AWG with pin-type connectors smaller than 1 mm in diameter, which are covered with an insulation

tube as below. Moreover, use only copper conducting wires that can withstand temperatures above

60 °C-75 °C.
_5
< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG

(5) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100
ohm.

(6) Notes on two-wire, three-wire, and four-wire connections:

 Two-wire connection/three-wire connection (passive transducer): connect the transducer and

the analog input module to the same power circuit.

 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply, so

do not connect it to the same power circuit as the analog input module.

5-20
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

 External wiring

(1) AS06XA-A

AG
4-wire: vo lt ag e inp ut *8
-10 V~ +1 0V
Sh ield ed cabl e *1 C HX -I
1M
+ V1 +
+2 4V 25 0 CH 1
- *3 I1+
0V 1M
VI1 -
*6
FE

*8 AG
4-wire: cu rrent i np ut C HX -I
-20 mA~ + 20 mA Sh ield ed cabl e *1 1M
V 2+
+ *2 25 0 CH2
+ 24 V I2 +
- 1M
0V VI 2-

*6
2-wi re: cur rent in put FE

4 mA ~+ 20 mA
*8 AG
+ 24V Sh ield ed cabl e *1 CH X-I
+ 1M
V 3+
- *2
25 0 CH3
I3 +
1M
0V VI 3-
*6
FE
3-wir e: vol tage in put
-10 V~ +1 0V Sh ield ed cabl e *1 *8 AG

+2 4V C HX -I

5_
+ 1M
V4 +
2 50 C H4
0V - I 4+
1M
*6 V I4 -
FE

3-wire: cu rrent i np ut
-2 0m A~ +2 0m A *8 AG
Sh ield ed cabl e *1 C HX -I
+ 2 4V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
2 50 C H1
I1 +
0V - 1M
V I1 -
*6
FE
AC motor dr ive,
rec order, Vol tage o utput
-10 V~+ 1 0V *8
proportioning v alv e C HX-O
VO1 C H5
*5
IO1
AG
Sh ield ed cabl e *4 * 6 AG
FE

AC motor dr ive, *8
rec order, Current output CH X-O
proportioning v alv e 0m A~2 0m A
VO2 CH6
IO2
AG
AG
Sh ield ed cabl e *4 * 6
FE
*7
+1 5V
0V D C /D C
24 VD C AG
24 V C o nv ert er
-15 V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–4) must be short-circuited.

*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

having a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

5-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

*4. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE and to the ground terminal.

*5. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.

*6. The wording “CHX-I” indicates that you can use those five wiring methods for every input channel. The

wording “CHX-O” indicates that you can use those two wiring methods for every output channel.

5.2.7 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

_5 Analog-to-Digital Conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

5-22
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

5.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

5.3.1 Initial Setting
(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

5_

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

5-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

_5

5-24
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the

parameters while the CPU module is running. 5_

5-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

_5

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

5-26
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

5.3.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

5_
(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

5-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

_5

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

5-28
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

5.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input modes of the channels

(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings 5_

5-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) Input CH1–CH4 calibration

(4) Input average filter

_5

5-30
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

(5) Input sampling time

(6) Input channel detection and alarm settings

5_

5-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(7) Output CH1-CH2 mode settings

(8) Output CH1-2 calibration

_5

5-32
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

(9) Output Settings

5_

5-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration)

The following example uses AS06XA-A.

5.4.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start DIADesigner-AX, click New Project, and then Project+Device to create a new project.

_5

(2) Add modules in:

➀ Double-click Hardware Configuration
➁ Select the + section and drag and drop the module that you want to add from the Product List to the
+ section.
or ➂ Right-click Delta_Localbus Master to see the context menu and then double-click Add Device to
add devices manually or double-click Scan for Devices.

5-34
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

(3) Select modules:

➀ Double-click the module name in the Hardware Configuration area.
or ➁ Double-click the module name shown in the node.

(4) Module parameter setting page:

5_

5-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) After setting is complete, select the module and click Login on the tool bar to download the settings to
the modules.

_5

5-36
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

5.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) Select the module and click the Information tab to see the module information.

(2) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can find the Module
Revision from the Parameters tab.

5_

5-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.4.3 Online Mode

(1) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can monitor all
configuration parameters. Values in the column of Prepared Value are configurable online. After editing
the values in the Prepared Value column, click Write Parameter to confirm the change.

_5 (2) You can monitor the values, status, error codes in each channel from the I/O Mapping tab. You can also
set a new value in the column of Prepared Value and press Ctrol+F7 on the keyboard to write the new
values in.

(3) You can monitor the current status and error codes from the Status tab.

5-38
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

5.4.4 Parameters
(1) You can set up the value format to Integer or Floating for Channel 1 to 4.

(2) You can set up the values for Channel 1 to 4.

(3) You can set up the calibrations for Channel 1 to 4.

5_

(4) You can set up the average filtering for Channel 1 to 4.

5-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) You can set up the sampling time.

(6) You can set up the channel detect and alarm settings.

_5 (7) You can set up the output channel mode for Channel 1 and 2.

(8) You can set up the calibrations for output Channel 1 and 2.

(9) You can set up the output settings for output Channel 1 and 2.

5-40
 Ch a pt er 5 An a l og I n pu t/O ut p ut M o du l e A S0 6 X A

5.5 Troubleshooting
5.5.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code indicator indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF 5_
16#180A
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180B
the hardware can receive.

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

5-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 3.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 4.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.
_5
When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

5-42
 6
Chapter 6 Temperature Measurement

Module AS04/06RTD
Table of Contents
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 Characteristics ................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Specifications and Functions .............................................................. 6-3
6.2.1 Specifications .................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 Profile ............................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ................................................................. 6-7
6.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers ............................................................... 6-8
6.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers ............................................................. 6-12
6.2.6 Functions ...................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.7 Control Mode ................................................................................ 6-20
6.2.8 Wiring .......................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.9 LED Indicators ............................................................................... 6-23
6.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 6-24
6.3.1 Initial Setting ................................................................................ 6-24
6.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................... 6-27
6.3.3 Online Mode .................................................................................. 6-28
6.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................... 6-29
6.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................... 6-30
6.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ...................................... 6-33
6.4.1 Initial Setting ................................................................................ 6-33
6.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................... 6-35
6.4.3 Online Mode .................................................................................. 6-36
6.4.4 Parameters ................................................................................... 6-37
6.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 6-39
6.5.1 Error Codes................................................................................... 6-39
6.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure .............................................................. 6-40
6.5.3 State of the Connection .................................................................. 6-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.1 Overview
This section describes the specifications for temperature measurement modules, their operation, and their

programming. The AS04/06RTD is a temperature measurement module that converts the temperatures

received from four/six thermocouples into digital signals. You can select either Celsius or Fahrenheit as the

unit of measurement. For software operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner or DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If

you are using AS Series PLC CPU, refer to ISPSoft User Manual or DIADesigner Manual for more information.

The new software DIADesigner-AX only supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to

AX-3 User Manual for more information on software operation.

6.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Select a sensor based on its practical application.

Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100/LG-Ni1000/Cu50/Cu100/0–300 Ω/0–3000 Ω sensor and for FW

V1.06, Ni120 is also available.

(2) High-speed conversion

Two-wire/Three-wire configuration: 200 ms/channel

(3) High accuracy

_6 Conversion accuracy: The error range of the input is ±0.1% at ambient temperature of 25°C ±5 °C.

(4) Disconnection detection

When a sensor is disconnected, the AS04RTD produces an alarm or a warning.

(5) PID control

An object’s temperature can be maintained through PID control actions.

(6) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG of ISPSoft or Hardware Configuration of DIADesigner without spending time writing

programs to set registers to manage functions.

6-2
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.2 Specifications and Functions

6.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module AS04RTD-A AS06RTD-A

Number of Analog
4 6
Inputs

2-Wire & 3-Wire:

Pt100: DIN 43760-1980 JIS C1604-1989; 100 Ω 3850 PPM/°C

Pt1000: DIN EN60751; 1 kΩ 3850 PPM/°C

Applicable Sensor Ni100/Ni1000: DIN 43760

JPt100: JIS C1604-1989

LG-Ni1000

Cu50/Cu100

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

Pt100/Ni100/Ni120/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100

25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.1% of full scale.

-20° C to 60° C/-4° F to 140° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall Accuracy 6_
LG-Ni1000; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.1% of full scale.

Cu50; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±4% of full scale.

Cu100; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±2% of full scale.

Resolution 0.1°C / 0.1°F

Conversion Time Two-wire/Three-wire configuration: 200 ms/channel

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by

optocouplers.

Isolation Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VAC

Isolation between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VAC

Isolation between an analog circuit and the digital circuit: 500 VAC

Isolation between the 24 VDC and the ground: 500 VAC

Weight 115 g 125 g

6-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Functional specifications

Analog-to-Digital
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Input Impedance
Conversion

Pt100: -180° C to +800° C Pt100: -292° F to +1,472° F

Ni100: -80° C to +170° C Ni100: -112° F to +338° F
Ni120: -80° C to +320° C Ni120: -112° F to +608° F
Rated Measurement Pt1000: -180° C to +800° C Pt1000: -292° F to +1,472° F
0–300 Ω
Ni1000: -80° C to +170° C Ni1000: -112° F to +338° F
Range*1 0–3000 Ω
JPt100: -180° C to +500° C JPt100: -292° F to +932° F
LG-Ni1000: -50° C to +180° C LG-Ni1000: -58° F to +356° F
Cu50: -50° C to +150° C Cu50: -58° F to +302° F
Cu100: -50° C to +150° C Cu100: -58° F to +302° F
Pt100: -200°C to 850°C Pt100 : -328°F to 1,562°F
Ni100: -100°C to 180°C Ni100: -148°F to 356°F
Ni120: -80° C to +320° C Ni120: -112° F to +608° F
Maximum Pt1000: -200°C to 850°C Pt1000 : -328°F to 1,562°F
0–320 Ω
Ni1000: -100°C to 180°C Ni1000 : -148°F to 356°F
Measurable Range *2 0–3200 Ω
JPt100: -200°C to 510°C JPt100 : -328°F to 950°F
LG-Ni1000: -60°C to 200°C LG-Ni1000 : -76°F to 392°F
Cu50: -50°C to 150°C Cu50 : -58°F to 302°F
Cu100: -50°C to 150°C Cu100 : -58°F to 302°F
Average function Range: 1-100

Self-diagnosis Disconnection detection

*1: If any of these limits are exceeded, device functionality should not be assumed, damage may occur and

reliability may be affected.

*2: If the to be measured temperature exceeds the upper/lower limit, it only shows the maximum / minimum

_6 value.
Conversion details
Centigrade (°C)

Maximum measurable Integer value range Floating point value range

Sensor type
range after digital conversion after digital conversion

Pt100 -200°C ~ 850°C K-2000 ~ K8500 -200.0 ~ 850.0

Ni100 -100°C ~ 180°C K-1000 ~ K1800 -100.0 ~ 180.0

Ni120 -80°C ~ 320°C K-800 ~ K3200 -80.0 ~ 320.0

Pt1000 -200°C ~ 850°C K-2000 ~ K8500 -200.0 ~ 850.0

Ni1000 -100°C ~ 180°C K-1000 ~ K1800 -100.0 ~ 180.0

JPt100 -200°C ~ 510°C K-2000 ~ K5100 -200.0 ~ 510.0

LG-Ni1000 -60°C ~ 200°C K-600 ~ K2000 -60.0 ~ 200.0

Cu50 -50°C ~150°C K-500 ~ K1500 -50.0 ~ 150.0

Cu100 -50°C ~ 150°C K-500 ~ K1500 -50.0 ~ 150.0

0~300Ω 0 ~ 320Ω K0 ~ K32000 0.0 ~ 320.00

0~3000Ω 0 ~ 3200Ω K0 ~ K32000 0.0 ~ 3200.0

6-4
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

Fahrenheit (°F)

Maximum measurable Integer value range Floating point value range

Sensor type
range after digital conversion after digital conversion

Pt100 -328°F ~ 1,562°F K-3280 ~ K15620 -328.0 ~ 1562.0

Ni100 -148°F ~ 356°F K-1480 ~ K3560 -148.0 ~ 356.0

Ni120 -112°C ~ 608°C K-1120 ~ K6080 -112.0 ~ 608.0

Pt1000 -328°F ~ 1,562°F K-3280 ~ K15620 -328.0 ~ 1562.0

Ni1000 -148°F ~ 356°F K-1480 ~ K3560 -148.0 ~ 356.0

JPt100 -328°F ~ 950°F K-3280 ~ K9500 -328.0 ~ 950.0

LG-Ni1000 -76°F ~ 392°F K-760 ~ K3920 -76.0 ~ 392.0

Cu50 -58°F ~ 302°F K-580 ~ K3020 -58.0 ~ 302.0

Cu100 -58°F ~ 302°F K-580 ~ K3020 -58.0 ~ 302.0

0 ~ 300Ω 0 ~ 320Ω K0 ~ K32000 0.0 ~ 320.00

0 ~ 3000Ω 0 ~ 3200Ω K0 ~ K32000 0.0 ~ 3200.0

6_

6-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2.2 Profile

38.2 95

04RT D 1
7 7

98.3
88
3
8

4
9
5

6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Operating status of the module

RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

_6
ON: a serious error exists in the module.
2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Conversion status
Analog-to-Digital
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

The inputs are connected to transducers.

3 Removable Terminal Block
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

4 Arrangement of the Input/Output Yerminals Arrangement of the terminals

5 Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Name plate

6-6
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04RTD-A AS06RTD-A

0 4R T D 06RTD

L1+ L1- L1+ L1-

PWR P WR
S LD I 1- L2+ L2-

L2+ L2- ERR SLD I12 - E RR

A D A D
S LD I 2- L3+ L3-

L3+ L3- L4+ L4-

S LD I 3- I 56- I34-

L4+ L4- L5+ L5-

S LD I 4- L6+ L6-

24V SLD 24V

0V 0V

6_

6-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup 1: 0–300 Ω (default)

2: 0–3000 Ω

3: Pt100
2 Channel 2 mode setup
4: JPt100

5: Pt1000
R/W 1
6: Ni100
3 Channel 3 mode setup
7: Ni1000

8: LG-Ni1000

9: Cu50
4 Channel 4 mode setup
10: Cu100
_6
11: Ni120 (FW V1.06 or later)

5 Channel 1 offset

6 Channel 2 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Channel 3 offset

8 Channel 4 offset

9 Channel 1 gain

10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain

12 Channel 4 gain

13 Channel 1 average times

14 Channel 2 average times

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
15 Channel 3 average times

16 Channel 4 average times

17 Channel 1 filter average percentage Range: 0–3 R/W 1

6-8
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

18 Channel 2 filter average percentage Unit: ±10%

19 Channel 3 filter average percentage

20 Channel 4 filter average percentage

0: Fahrenheit
21 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4
22 Channel alarm setup R/W 0

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

16#0101: record the peak value 6_

again for channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value

again for channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value

again for channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value

again for channel 4

201 Instruction set W 0
16#010F: record the peak values

again for channels 1–4

16#0201: enable recording for

channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for

channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for

channel 3

6-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

16#0208: enable recording for

channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for

channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for

channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for

channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for

channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for

channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for

channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

210 The maximum peak value for channel 1 -

211 The maximum peak value for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum -
R
212 The maximum peak value for channel 3 peak value for analog inputs -
_6 213 The maximum peak value for channel 4 -

214 The minimum peak value for channel 1 -

215 The minimum peak value for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak -

value for analog inputs R

216 The minimum peak value for channel 3 -

217 The minimum peak value for channel 4 -

222 The time to record for channel 1 Unit: 10 ms 1

223 The time to record for channel 2 Range: 1–100 1

R/W
224 The time to record for channel 3 The time to record the digital 1

225 The time to record for channel 4 value for the channels 1

240 The number of records for channel 1 0

241 The number of records for channel 2 Range: 0–500, display the current 0
R
242 The number of records for channel 3 records 0

243 The number of records for channel 4 0

4000-
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1 R --
4499

6-10
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

4500-
Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2 R --
4999

5000-
Records for channel 3 500 records for channel 3 R --
5499

5500-
Records for channel 4 500 records for channel 4 R --
5999

6_

6 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup
1: 0–300 Ω (default)

2 2: 0–3000 Ω
Channel 2 mode setup
3: Pt100 1

3 Channel 3 mode setup 4: JPt100

5: Pt1000
R/W
4 Channel 4 mode setup 6: Ni100

7: Ni1000
5 Channel 5 mode setup 8: LG-Ni1000

9: Cu50

10: Cu100
_6 6 Channel 6 mode setup
11: Ni120 (FW V1.06 or later)

7 Channel 1 offset

8 Channel 2 offset

9 Channel 3 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
10 Channel 4 offset

11 Channel 5 offset

12 Channel 6 offset

13 Channel 1 gain

14 Channel 2 gain

15 Channel 3 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
16 Channel 4 gain

17 Channel 5gain

18 Channel 6 gain

19 Channel 1 average times Range: 1–100 R/W 10

6-12
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

20 Channel 2 average times

21 Channel 3 average times

22 Channel 4 average times

23 Channel 5 average times

24 Channel 6 average times

Channel 1 filter average

25
percentage

Channel 2 filter average

26
percentage

Channel 3 filter average

27
percentage Range: 0–3
R/W 1
Channel 4 filter average Unit: ±10%
28
percentage

Channel 5 filter average

29
percentage

Channel 6 filter average

30
percentage

0: Fahrenheit
6_
31 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4

32 Channel alarm setup bit4: channel 5 R/W 0

bit5: channel 6

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

6-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

bit10: error in calibration

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

channel 4

16#110: record the peak values again for

channels 5

16#120: record the peak values again for

channels 6

16#013: record the peak values again for

channels 1-6

16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

201 Instruction set W 0
16#0204: enable recording for channel 3
_6
16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#0210: enable recording for channels 5

16#0220: enable recording for channels 6

16#023F: enable recording for channels 1-6

16#0301: disable recording for channel 1

16#0302: disable recording for channel 2

16#0304: disable recording for channel 3

16#0308: disable recording for channel 4

16#0310: disable recording for channel 5

16#0320: disable recording for channel 6

16#033F: disable recording for channel1-6

16#0501: restore default settings, clear

setting values in the Flash

16#0502: restore default settings, do not

clear setting values in the Flash

6-14
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

The maximum peak value for

210 -
channel 1

The maximum peak value for

211 -
channel 2

The maximum peak value for

212 -
channel 3 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R
The maximum peak value for analog inputs
213 -
channel 4

The maximum peak value for

214 -
channel 5

The maximum peak value for

215 -
channel 6

The minimum peak value for

216 -
channel 1

The minimum peak value for

217 -
channel 2

The minimum peak value for

218 -
channel 3 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R

219
The minimum peak value for analog inputs
-
6_
channel 4

The minimum peak value for

220 -
channel 5

The minimum peak value for

221 -
channel 6

222 The time to record for channel 1 1

223 The time to record for channel 2 Unit: 100 ms 1

224 The time to record for channel 3 Range: 1–100 1

R/W
225 The time to record for channel 4 The time to record the digital value for the 1

226 The time to record for channel 5 channels 1

227 The time to record for channel 6 1

The number of records for

240 0
channel 1
Range: 0–200, display the current records R
The number of records for
241 0
channel 2

6-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

The number of records for

242 0
channel 3

The number of records for

243 0
channel 4

The number of records for

244 0
channel 5

The number of records for

245 0
channel 6

4000

- Records for channel 1 200 records for channel 1 R -

4199

4500

- Records for channel 2 200 records for channel 2 R -

4699

5000

- Records for channel 3 200 records for channel 3 R -

5199

5500

_6 - Records for channel 4 200 records for channel 4 R -

5699

6000

- Records for channel 4 200 records for channel 5 R -

6199

6500

- Records for channel 4 200 records for channel 6 R -

6699

6-16
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.2.6 Functions
Use the HWCONFIG utility software built into ISPSoft to set modes of operation and parameters.

 Analog input

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Unit of Measurement Select the unit of measurement: Fahrenheit or Celsius.

3 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

4 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.

Disconnection If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If
5
Detection the input is open-circuited, the module produces an alarm or a warning.

If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware can
Channel Detection
6 receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable
and Alarm
this function.

Limit Detections for

7 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels.
Channels

Records for 6_
8 Save the analog curves for channels.
Channels

9 PID Algorithm PID control modes

1. Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 200 ms per channel. If a channel is not used,

you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.

2. Unit of Measurement

Select the unit of measurement, Fahrenheit or Celsius, according to your needs.

3. Calibration

 To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

(𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺)
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
1000

6-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Example:

If the gain is 1000 and the offset is 0, the corresponding value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C is 0–1000.

If you change the offset to 100, the calibrated value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C becomes 100–1100.

O
Original signals
100 C Signals af ter the calibration

-320 00
0 100 1000 110 0
D igital v alue (X)

I nput analog value (Y)

4. Average

You can set the average value between 1–100. It is a steady value obtained from the sum of the recorded

values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you

may observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude the acute pulses

from the sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded

values. Set the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the

system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the
_6 filter range to 1, for example, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and

averages only the remaining values to obtain the average value.

Quantity

Range for filter percentage

Present measured value

5. Disconnection Detection

If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If the input is open-circuited, the

module produces an alarm or a warning.

6-18
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6. Channel Detection

If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this

function so that the module does not produce an alarm or a warning when the input signal exceeds the

input range.

7. Limit Detections for Channels

This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to

peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

Maximum valu e

Mini mu m va lue

Time

8. Records for Channels

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data

points for AS04RTD-A and up to 200 data points for AS06RTD-A and the recording time is 100 ms. The

following uses AS04RTD-A as an example to demonstrate.

6_
Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

9. PID control

PID algorithm is available for every channel. With its auto tuning function, parameters such as Kp, Ki, Kd

and more can be calculated and therefore temperature control can be achieved. You can also use

DMPID instruction to calculate relative parameters by entering the parameters in the endpoints of

corresponding instruction image and you can then obtain the output values from the output endpoints.

Note: DMPID instruction is availbe for AS04RTD-A (V1.04 or later), AS06RTD-A (V1.00 or later), AS

Series PLC (V1.06 or later) and AS-SCM (V2.04 or later).

6-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2.7 Control Mode

1. Refer to section 7.2.7 for more details on how to use DMPID instruction.

2. When using PID parameters to set up control registers: PID control registers of AS04RTD-A are
retainable; however PID control registers of AS06RTD-A are not retainable.

6.2.8 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the
ASRTD Series must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load
which is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,

or a cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) To wire a terminal block, use single-core cables or multi-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22 AWG
with pin-type connectors smaller than 1 mm in diameter, which are covered with an insulation tube as
_6 below. Moreover, use only copper conducting wires that can withstand temperatures above 60°C-75°C.

< 1mm 8-10mm 24-22AWG

(5) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 20 ohm.

6-20
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

 External wiring

(1) AS04RTD-A

0~ 300Ω, 0~ 3000Ω Ni 10 0 , N i 12 0 , P t10 0 ,

N i100 /Ni120/ Ni1000/ Pt 100/P t100 0 JPt10 0 , C u 5 0, C u1 0 0,
C u50/C u100/J Pt 100/ LG-Ni1000 Ni 10 0 0, P t1 0 00 ,
CH1 LG -Ni 10 0 0* 3

L1 +
L 1- A DC

I1-
*2 INA
S hielded cab le * 1 SLD
2 -Wi re AG

CH2

L2+
L2-
I2-
S hielded cab le * 1 AG
3 -Wi re

*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors, and keep them away from power cables

and other cables that generate noise.

*2. If using two-wire temperature sensors, Ln- and In- must be short-circuited (where n is between 1–4). 6_
*3. There are two different internal excitation currents. If you are using a Ni100 temperature sensor, a

Pt100 sensor, a JPt100, a Cu50/Cu100, or a 0~300 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation
current is 1.5 mA. If you are using a Ni1000 temperature sensor, a Pt1000 temperature sensor, a LG-

Ni1000 sensor, or a 0~3000 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current is 0.2 mA.

Note: When using a three-wire temperature sensor, the cables should be the same length (less than 200

meter) and with a resistor less than 20 ohm.

6-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) AS06RTD-A

0~ 300Ω, 0~ 3000Ω Ni 10 0 , N i 12 0 , P t10 0 ,

N i100 /Ni120/ Ni1000/ Pt 100/P t100 0 JPt10 0 , C u 5 0, C u1 0 0,
C u50/C u100/J Pt 100/ LG-Ni1000 Ni 10 0 0, P t1 0 00 ,
LG -Ni 10 0 0* 3
CH1
L1 +
L 1- A DC

SLD INA

2 -Wi re S hielde d c able *1

CH 2
L2+
L2 -
*2
I12-

3 -Wi re S hielde d c able *1 AG

*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors and keep them away from power cables and

other cables that generate noise.

*2. Terminal “I12-“ indicates “ I1- & I2-“, terminal “I34-“ indicates “ I3- & I4-“, and terminal “I56-“ indicates
_6 “ I5- & I6-“. If you use two-wire temperature sensors, Ln- and In- must be short-circuited (where n is

between 1–6).

*3. There are two different internal excitation currents. If you are using a Ni100 temperature sensor, a

Pt100 sensor, a JPt100, a Cu50/Cu100, or a 0~300 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation

current is 1.0 mA. If you are using a Ni1000 temperature sensor, a Pt1000 temperature sensor, a LG-

Ni1000 sensor, or a 0~3000 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current is 0.2 mA.

Note: When using a three-wire temperature sensor, the cables should be the same length (less than 200

meter) and with a resistor less than 20 ohm.

6-22
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.2.9 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Analog-to-Digital Conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

6_

6-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

6.3.1 Initial Setting
The following users AS04RTD-A as an example to demonstrate.

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

_6

6-24
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

6_

6-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the

parameters while the CPU module is running.

_6

6-26
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

6_

6-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.3.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

_6

(3) View the module status.

6-28
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Setting dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

(2) Click Import in the Device Setting dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

6_

6-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input modes of the channels

(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

_6

6-30
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

(3) Input CH1-CH4 calibration

(4) Input average filter

6_

6-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) Temperature measurement

(6) Input channel detection and alarm settings

_6

6-32
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration)

The following example uses AS04DTD-A.

6.4.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start DIADesigner-AX, click New Project, and then Project+Device to create a new project.

(2) Add modules in:

➀ Double-click Hardware Configuration
➁ Select the + section and drag and drop the module that you want to add from the Product List to the +
section.
6_
or ➂ Right-click Delta_Localbus Master to see the context meun and then double-click Add Device to
add devices manually or double-click Scan for Devices.

6-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) Select modules:

➀ Double-click the module name in the Hardware Configuration area.
or ➁ Double-click the module name shown in the node.

(4) Module parameter setting page:

_6

6-34
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

(5) After setting is complete, select the module and click Login on the tool bar to download the settings to the
modules.

6.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) Select the module and click the Information tab to see the module information.

6_

(2) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can find the Module Revision
from the Parameters tab.

6-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.4.3 Online Mode

(1) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can monitor all configuration
parameters. Vaules in the column of Prepared Value are configurable online. After editing the values in
the Prepared Value column, click Write Parameter to confirm the change.

(2) You can monitor the values, status, error codes in each channel from the I/O Mapping tab.

_6

(3) You can monitor the current status and error codes from the Status tab.

6-36
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.4.4 Parameters
(1) You can set up the value format to Integer or Floating for Channel 1 to 4.

(2) You can set up the values for Channel 1 to 4.

(3) You can set up the calibrations for for Channel 1 to 4.

6_

(4) You can set up the average filtering for Channel 1 to 4.

6-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) You can set up the temperature measurement units.

(6) You can set up the channel detect and alarm settings.

_6

6-38
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.5 Troubleshooting
6.5.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180A
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF
16#180B
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of inputs that

6_
16#180C
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180D
the hardware can receive.

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

6-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 3.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 4.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 5.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 6.
_6 range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

6-40
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

6.5.3 State of the Connection

State of connection
Channel value
L+ L- I-

● ● ● Maximum value for the channel

● ● Maximum value for the channel

● ● Maximum value for the channel

● Maximum value for the channel

● ● Maximum value for the channel

● Maximum value for the channel

● Minimum value for the channel*1

●: Disconnection

*1: for AS06RTD Series: in the modes of 0-300Ω and 0-3000Ω, it cannot detect I- state of connection.

6_

6-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

MEMO

_6

6-42
 7
Chapter 7 Temperature Measurement
Module AS04/08TC

Table of Contents
7.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 7-4

7.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 7-8
7.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers ............................................................... 7-8
7.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers ............................................................. 7-12
7.2.6 Functions .................................................................................... 7-18
7.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................... 7-21
7.2.8 Wiring ........................................................................................ 7-31
7.2.9 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 7-32

7.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 7-33

7.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 7-33
7.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 7-36
7.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 7-37
7.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 7-38
7.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 7-39

7.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ..................................... 7-42

7.4.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 7-42
7.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 7-45
7.4.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 7-46
7.4.4 Parameters ................................................................................. 7-47

7.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 7-49

7.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 7-49
7.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 7-50

7-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the ASTC-A module, its operation, and its programming. The

AS04TC-A is a temperature measurement module that converts temperatures received from thermocouples

(type J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, C, U, L, or TXK with ±100 mV voltage inputs) into digital signals. You can select

either Celsius (resolution: 0.1° C) or Fahrenheit (resolution: 0.1° F) as the unit of measurement. For software

operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner or DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If you are using AS Series PLC CPU,

refer to ISPSoft User Manual or DIADesigner Manual for more information. The new software DIADesigner-AX

only supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to AX-3 User Manual for more

information on software operation.

An introduction to thermocouples

A thermocouple uses the Seebeck effect to measure differences in temperature. Generally speaking, a

thermocouple consists of two conductors of different materials that produce a voltage at the point where the

two conductors contact. The voltage produced depends on the difference of temperature between the

junctions with other parts of those conductors, and it ranges from several dozen microvolts to several

thousand microvolts. Because the voltage is so low, it needs to be amplified.

Differential operations are used to eliminate external noise. Thermocouples are more stable than thermistors,

resistance thermometers, and thermal resistors, so thermocouples are widely used in industrial applications.

A thermocouple consists of a circuit having two wires of different metals or metal alloys welded together or

joined at both ends. One of the junctions—normally the cold junction—is maintained at a known reference

temperature, and the other junction is at the temperature to be sensed. A temperature gradient across the

junction of the wires gives rise to an electric potential according to the Seebeck effect. The voltage produced

is proportional to the difference of temperature between the junctions with other parts of those conductors.
_7
The voltage can be derived from the following equation.

T2
V =∫
T1
(Q A − QB )dT
(A)

where QA and QB are the thermopowers (Seebeck coefficient) of the metals A and B, and T1 and T2 are the
temperatures of the two junctions.

Principle of operation
Because QA and QB are almost unrelated to temperature, formula (A) above can be approximated as in

equation (B).

V=α(T2- T1) (B)

7-2
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

There are two types of thermocouple thermometers: wrapped thermocouples and bare thermocouples. A

wrapped thermocouple is wrapped in protective metal, and is similar to an electric spoon in appearance.

Wrapped thermocouples are used to measure temperature of liquid, and bare thermocouples are used to

measure temperature of gas.

7.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Select a sensor based on its practical application.

Type J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, C, U, L, or TXK thermocouples, with ±100 mV voltage inputs.

(2) Select a module based on its practical application.

AS04TC-A: Has four channels. Inputs received by a channel are temperatures.

AS08TC-A: Has eight channels. Inputs received by a channel are temperatures.

(3) High-speed conversion

A temperature is converted into a digital signal at a speed of 200 ms per channel.

(4) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: the error range is ±0.5% of the input at ambient temperature of 25 °C ±5 °C.

(5) Disconnection detection

When a sensor is disconnected, the module produces an alarm or a warning.

(6) PID control

7_
An object’s temperature can be maintained through PID control actions.

(7) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG of ISPSoft or Hardware Configuration of DIADesigner without spending time writing

programs to set registers to manage functions.

7-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.2 Specifications and Functions

7.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module Name AS04TC-A AS08TC-A

Number of Analog Inputs 4 8

Applicable Sensor Type J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, C, U, L, or TXK with ±100 mV voltage inputs

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

25° C/77° F: The error range allowed is ±0.5% of full scale.

Overall Accuracy
-20° C to +60° C/-4° F to +140° F: the error range allowed is ±1% of full scale.

Resolution 0.1°C / 0.1°F

Conversion Time 200 ms/channel

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by
optocouplers.
Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation between analog channels: 120 VAC

Weight 115g 125g

_7

7-4
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

 Functional specifications

Analog-to-Digital
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Voltage Input
Conversion

Type J: -100° C to +1,200° C Type J: -148° F to +2,192° F

Type K: -100° C to +1,350° C Type K: -148° F to +2,462° F
Type R: 0° C to 1,750° C Type R: 32° F to 3,182° F
Type S: 0° C to 1,750° C Type S: 32° F to 3,182° F
Type T: -150° C to +400° C Type T: -238° F to +734° F
Rated Input Range*1 Type E: -150° C to +980° C Type E: -238° F to +1,796° F ±100 mV
Type N: -150° C to +1,300° C Type N: -238° F to +2,372° F
Type B: 200° C to +1,800° C Type B: 392°F to 3,272°F
Type C: 0°C to 2,320°C Type C: NA
Type U: -200°C to 600°C Type U: -328°F~1,112°F
Type L: -200°C to 900°C Type L: -328°F~1,652°F
Type TXK: -200°C~800°C Type TXK: -328°F~1,472°F
Type J: -210° C to +1,200° C Type J: -346° F to +2,192° F
Type K: -250° C to +1,350° C Type K: -418° F to +2,462° F
Type R: -50° C to 1,760° C Type R: -58° F to 3,200° F
Type S: -50° C to 1,760° C Type S: -25° F to 3,200° F
Type T: -250° C to +400° C Type T: -418° F to +752° F
Maximum
Type E: -250° C to +1000° C Type E: -418° F to +2,372° F ±100 mV
Measurable Range*2 Type N: -250° C to +1,300° C Type N: -418° F to +2,372° F
Type B: 20° C to +1,800° C Type B: 68°F to 3,272°F
Type C: 0°C to 2,320°C Type C: NA
Type U: -200°C to 600°C Type U: -328°F~1,112°F
Type L: -200°C to 900°C Type L: -328°F~1,652°F
Type TXK: -200°C~800°C Type TXK: -328°F~1,472°F

Average Function Range: 1-100

Self-Diagnosis Disconnection detection

*1: If the measured temperature exceeds the rated input range, device functionality and reliability may be 7_
affected.

*2: If the temperature to be measured exceeds the upper/lower limit, it only shows the maximum /minimum

value.

7-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Conversion details

Centigrade (°C)

Sensor Integer value range Floating point value range

Rated input range
type after digital conversion after digital conversion
J -100°C ~ 1200°C K-1000 ~ K12000 -100.0 ~ 1200.0
K -100°C ~ 1,350°C K-1000 ~ K13500 -100.0 ~ 1350.0
R 0°C ~ 1,750°C K0 ~ K17500 0.0 ~ 1750.0
S 0°C ~ 1,750°C K0 ~ K17500 0.0 ~ 1750.0
T -150°C ~ 400°C K-1500 ~ K4000 -150.0 ~ 400.0
E -150°C ~ 980°C K-1500 ~ K9800 -150.0 ~ 980.0
N -150°C ~ 1,300°C K-1500 ~ K13000 -150.0 ~ 1300.0
B 200°C ~ 1,800°C K2000 ~ K18000 200.0 ~ 1800.0
C 0°C ~ 2320°C K0 ~ K23200 0.0 ~ 2320.0
U -200°C ~ 600°C K-2000 ~ K6000 -200.0 ~ 600.0
L -200°C ~ 900°C K-2000 ~ K9000 -200.0 ~ 900.0
TXK -200°C ~ 800°C K-2000 ~ K8000 -200.0 ~ 800.0
±100mV -100mV ~ 100mV K-10000 ~ K10000 -100.00 ~ 100.00

Fahrenheit (°F)
Sensor Integer value range Floating point value range
Rated input range
type after digital conversion after digital conversion
J -148°F ~ 2,192°F K-1480 ~ K21920 -148.0 ~ 2192.0
K -148°F ~ 2,462°F K-1480 ~ K24620 -148.0 ~ 2462.0
R 32°F ~ 3,182°F K320 ~ K31820 32.0 ~ 3182.0
S 32°F ~ 3,182°F K320 ~ K31820 32.0 ~ 3182.0
T -238°F ~ 752°F K-2380 ~ K7520 -238.0 ~ 752.0
E -238°F ~ 1,796°F K-2380 ~ K17960 -238.0 ~ 1796.0
N -238°F ~ 2,372°F K-2380 ~ K23720 -238.0 ~ 2372.0
_7 B 392°F ~ 3,272°F K3920 ~ K32720 392.0 ~ 3272.0
C NA NA NA
U -328°F ~ 1112°F K-3280 ~ K11120 -328.0 ~ 1112.0
L -328°F ~ 1652°F K-3280 ~ K16520 -328.0 ~ 1652.0
TXK -328°F ~ 1472°F K-3280 ~ K14720 -328.0 ~ 1472.0
±100mV -100mV ~ 100mV K-10000 ~ K10000 -100.00 ~ 100.00

7-6
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.2.2 Profile

38.2 95

04TC 1
7
7

98.3
88
3
8

4
9 5

6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Operating status of the module

RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Conversion status
Analog-to-Digital
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator 7_
OFF: conversion has stopped.

The inputs are connected to transducers.

3 Removable Terminal Block
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals

5 Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module connecting set Connects the modules

8 Ground clip

9 Label Nameplate

7-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04TC-A AS08TC-A

0 4 TC 08 TC

I1 + I1+ I 1-
PWR PWR
SLD I1- I2+ I 2-

I2 + ERR I3+ I 3- ERR

A D A D
SLD I2- I4+ I 4-

I3 + I5+ I 5-

SLD I3- I6+ I 6-

I4 + I7+ I 7-

SLD I4- I8+ I 8-

2 4V SLD 24V

0V 0V

7.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed
_7 1 Channel 1 mode setup 1: -100 mV to +100 mV

2: J-Type

3: K-Type
2 Channel 2 mode setup
4: R-Type

5: S-Type
3 Channel 3 mode setup 6: T-Type
R/W 1
7: E-Type

8: N-Type

9: B-Type

10: C-Type
4 Channel 4 mode setup
11: U-Type

12: L-Type

13: TXK-Type

7-8
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

5 Channel 1 offset

6 Channel 2 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Channel 3 offset

8 Channel 4 offset

9 Channel 1 gain R/W

10 Channel 2 gain R/W

Range: -32768 to +32767 1000
11 Channel 3 gain R/W

12 Channel 4 gain R/W

Channel 1 average
13
times

Channel 2 average
14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Channel 3 average
15
times

Channel 4 average
16
times

Channel 1 filter average

17
percentage

Channel 2 filter average

18
percentage Range: 0–3
R/W 1
Channel 3 filter average Unit: ±10%
19
percentage

Channel 4 filter average 7_

20
percentage

0: Fahrenheit
21 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

22 Channel alarm setup bit2: channel 3 R/W 0

bit3: channel 4

0: warning

1: alarm

7-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

bit11: error in CJC temperature

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

channel 4
16#010F: record the peak values again for

channels 1–4

201 Instruction set 16#0201: enable recording for channel 1 W 0

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for channel 4

_7 16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

The maximum peak

210 -
value for channel 1

The maximum peak

211 -
value for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R
The maximum peak analog inputs
212 -
value for channel 3

The maximum peak

213 -
value for channel 4

The minimum peak

214 Integer format; the minimum peak value for -
value for channel 1 R
analog inputs
215 The minimum peak -

7-10
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

value for channel 2

The minimum peak

216 -
value for channel 3

The minimum peak

217 -
value for channel 4

The time to record for

222 1
channel 1

The time to record for Unit: 100 ms

223 1
channel 2 Range: 1–100
R/W
The time to record for The time to record the digital value for the
224 1
channel 3 channels

The time to record for

225 1
channel 4

The number of records

240 0
for channel 1

The number of records

241 0
for channel 2
Range: 0-500, display the current records R
The number of records
242 0
for channel 3

The number of records

243 0
for channel 4

4000
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1 R -
~4499

4500 7_
Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2 R -
~4999

5000
Records for channel 3 500 records for channel 3 R -
~5499

5500
Records for channel 4 500 records for channel 4 R -
~5999

7 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

1 Channel 1 mode setup 0: closed

1: -100 mV to +100 mV
2 Channel 2 mode setup
2: J-Type
3 Channel 3 mode setup
3: K-Type

4 Channel 4 mode setup 4: R-Type

5: S-Type
5 Channel 5 mode setup
6: T-Type
6 Channel 6 mode setup R/W 1
7: E-Type
7 Channel 7 mode setup 8: N-Type

9: B-Type

10: C-Type

8 Channel 8 mode setup 11: U-Type

12: L-Type

13: TXK-Type

9 Channel 1 offset

10 Channel 2 offset
_7 11 Channel 3 offset

12 Channel 4 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
13 Channel 5 offset

14 Channel 6 offset

15 Channel 7 offset

16 Channel 8 offset

17 Channel 1 gain

18 Channel 2 gain

19 Channel 3 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
20 Channel 4 gain

21 Channel 5 gain

22 Channel 6 gain

7-12
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

23 Channel 7 gain

24 Channel 8 gain

25 Channel 1 average times

26 Channel 2 average times

27 Channel 3 average times

28 Channel 4 average times

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
29 Channel 5 average times

30 Channel 6 average times

31 Channel 7 average times

32 Channel 8 average times

Channel 1 filter average

33 R/W
percentage

Channel 2 filter average

34 R/W
percentage

Channel 3 filter average

35 R/W
percentage

Channel 4 filter average

36 R/W
percentage Range: 0–3
1
Channel 5 filter average Unit: ±10%
37 R/W
percentage

Channel 6 filter average

38 R/W
percentage

Channel 7 filter average

39
percentage
R/W 7_
Channel 8 filter average
40 R/W
percentage

0: Fahrenheit
41 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2
42 Channel alarm setup R/W 0
bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4

bit4: channel 5

bit5: channel 6

7-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

bit6: channel 7

bit7: channel 8

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

bit11: error in CJC temperature

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

channel 4

16#0110: record the peak value again for

channel 5

16#0120: record the peak value again for

channel 6

16#0140: record the peak value again for

201 Instruction set channel 7 W 0

_7 16#0180: record the peak value again for

channel 8

16#01FF: record the peak value again for

channels 1-8

16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#0210: enable recording for channel 5

16#0220: enable recording for channel 6

16#0240: enable recording for channel 7

16#0280: enable recording for channel 8

7-14
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

16#02FF: enable recording for channels 1-8

16#0301: disable recording for channel 1

16#0302: disable recording for channel 2

16#0304: disable recording for channel 3

16#0308: disable recording for channel 4

16#0310: disable recording for channel 5

16#0320: disable recording for channel 6

16#0340: disable recording for channel 7

16#0380: disable recording for channel 8

16#03FF: disable recording for channels 1-8

16#0501: restore default settings, clear setting

values in the Flash

16#0502: restore default settings, do not clear

setting values in the Flash

The maximum peak value

210 -
for channel 1

The maximum peak value

211 -
for channel 2

The maximum peak value

212 -
for channel 3

The maximum peak value

213 -
for channel 4 Integer format; the maximum peak value for 7_
R
The maximum peak value analog inputs
214 -
for channel 5

The maximum peak value

215 -
for channel 6

The maximum peak value

216 -
for channel 7

The maximum peak value

217 -
for channel 8

The minimum peak value

218 -
for channel 1 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R
The minimum peak value analog inputs
219 -
for channel 2

7-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

The minimum peak value

220 -
for channel 3

The minimum peak value

221 -
for channel 4

The minimum peak value

222 -
for channel 5

The minimum peak value

223 -
for channel 6

The minimum peak value

224 -
for channel 7

The minimum peak value

225 -
for channel 8

The time to record for

226 R/W 1
channel 1

The time to record for

227 R/W 1
channel 2

The time to record for

228 R/W 1
channel 3

The time to record for Unit: 100 ms

229 R/W 1
channel 4 Range: 1–100

The time to record for The time to record the digital value for the
230 R/W 1
channel 5 channels

The time to record for

_7 231
channel 6
R/W 1

The time to record for

232 R/W 1
channel 7

The time to record for

233 R/W 1
channel 8

The number of records for

240
channel 1

The number of records for

241
channel 2
Range: 0-100, display the current records R 0
The number of records for
242
channel 3

The number of records for

243
channel 4

7-16
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

The number of records for

244
channel 5

The number of records for

245
channel 6

The number of records for

246
channel 7

The number of records for

247
channel 8

4000
Records for channel 1 100 records for channel 1 R -
~4099

4500
Records for channel 2 100 records for channel 2 R -
~4599

5000
Records for channel 3 100 records for channel 3 R -
~5099

5500
Records for channel 4 100 records for channel 4 R -
~5599

6000
Records for channel 5 100 records for channel 5 R -
~6099

6500
Records for channel 6 100 records for channel 6 R -
~6599

7000
Records for channel 7 100 records for channel 7 R -
~7099

7500

~7599
Records for channel 8 100 records for channel 8 R -
7_

7-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.2.6 Functions

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Unit of Measurement Select the unit of measurement: Fahrenheit or Celsius.

3 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

4 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.

Disconnection If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If
5
Detection the input is open-circuited, the module produces an alarm or a warning.

If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware can
Channel Detection
6 receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable
and Alarm
this function.

Limit Detections for

7 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels.
Channels

Records for
8 Save the analog curves for channels.
Channels

9 PID Algorithm PID control modes

1. Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 200 ms per channel. If a channel is not used,
_7 you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.

2. Unit of Measurement

Select the unit of measurement, Fahrenheit or Celsius, according to your needs.

3. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

(𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺)
𝑂𝑂𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
1000

7-18
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

Example:

If the gain is 1000 and the offset is 0, the corresponding value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C is 0–1000.

If you change the offset to 100, the calibrated value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C becomes 100–1100.

Gain = 1000, Offset = 0

O
Original signals
100 C Signals af ter the calibration

-320 00
0 100 1000 110 0
D igital v alue (X)

I nput analog value (Y)

4. Average

You can set the average value between 1–100. It is a steady value obtained from the sum of the recorded

values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you may

observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude the acute pulses from the

sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded values. Set the

filter percentage to the range of 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, for example, the

system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the filter

range to 1, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and averages only the

remaining values to obtain the average value.

7_
Quantity

Range for filter percentage

Present measured value

5. Disconnection Detection

If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If the input is open-circuited, the

module produces an alarm or a warning.

7-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6. Channel Detection

If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs that the hardware can receive, an error message

appears and the Error LED blinks. You can disable this function so that the module does not produce an

alarm or warning and the Error LED also does not blink when the input signal exceeds the input range.

7. Limit Detections for Channels

This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to

peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

Maximum valu e

Mini mu m va lue

Time
8. Records for channels

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. For AS04TC-A, the system saves up to

500 data points and the recording time is 10 ms. For example, if the conversion time is 2 ms and 4

channels are open, the recording time is 8 ms x 500 data points = 4 seconds in total. And the system

saves up to 100 data points for AS08TC-A and the recording time is 100 ms. The following uses

AS04TC-A as an example to demonstrate.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

_7

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

9. PID control

PID algorithm is available for every channel. With its auto tuning function, parameters such as Kp, Ki, Kd

and more can be calculated and therefore temperature control can be achieved. You can also use
DMPID instruction to calculate relative parameters by entering the parameters in the endpoints of the

corresponding instruction image and then you can then obtain the output values from the output

endpoints. Note: DMPID instruction is available for AS04TC-A (V1.04 or later), AS08TC-A (V1.00 or

later), AS Series PLC (V1.06 or later) and AS-SCM (V2.04 or later).

7-20
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.2.7 Control Mode

1. You can use DMPID (API1417) to execute PID control. The applicable models and FW are

AS04TC-A (V1.04 or later), AS08TC-A (V1.00 or later), AS Series PLC (V1.06 or later) and AS-

SCM (V2.04 or later). Refer to AS Series Programming Manual for more details.

2. If the device you have does NOT support DMPID instruction, you can use the following PID

parameter to execute PID control.

Use PID parameters

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

1: the PID

algorithm is

implemented.

Enable the PID 0: the output value

600 630 660 690 720 750 780 810 PID_RUN 0
algorithm (MV) is reset to

0, and the PID

algorithm is not

implemented.

601 631 661 691 721 751 781 811 SV SV Target value 0

0: automatic

control

When PID_MAN 7_
is switched from

1 to 0, the

output value
(MV) is included
PID control
602 632 662 692 722 752 782 812 PID_MODE in the automatic 0
mode
algorithm.

1: the parameters

are tuned

automatically for

the temperature

control. When

the tuning is

7-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

complete, the

device is

automatically

reset to 0, and

the parameters

Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki,

Td_Kd, and Tf

are set

appropriately.

0: auto; the MV is

output based

on the PID

algorithm.

1: manual; the MV
PID A/M is output based
603 633 663 693 723 753 783 813 PID_MAN 0
mode on the MOUT.

When

PID_MODE is

also set to 1,

this setting is

ineffective.

_7 0: normal; the

MOUT does not

MOUT
vary with the
automatic
604 634 664 694 724 754 784 814 MOUT_AUTO MV. 0
change
1: auto; the MOUT
mode
varies with the

MV.

Range: 0–32000,

Auto tuning used when SV is

605 635 665 695 725 755 785 815 Auto DBWA non-action in the ±dead band 0

zone in auto tuning

mode.

7-22
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

Kc_Kp are

floating-point

numbers. If the P
Calculated
coefficient is less
proportional
606 636 666 696 726 756 786 816
Kc_Kp than 0, the Kc_Kp 3.846
607 637 667 697 727 757 787 817 coefficient
is 0.
(Kc or Kp)
Independently, if

Kc_Kp is 0, it is

not controlled by P.

Ti_Ki are floating-

point numbers. If
Integral the calculated
608 638 668 698 728 758 788 818 coefficient
Ti_Ki coefficient I is less 0.013
609 639 669 699 729 759 789 819
(Ti or Ki) than 0, Ti_Ki is 0.

If Ti_Ki is 0, it is

not controlled by I.

Td_Kd are

floating-point

numbers. If the
Derivative calculated
610 640 670 700 730 760 790 820 coefficient
Td_Kd coefficient D is 190.078
611 641 671 701 731 761 791 821
(Td or Kd) less than 0, Td_Kd
7_
is 0. If Ti_Ki is 0, it

is not controlled by

D.

If the derivate-

action time

constant is less

612 642 672 702 732 762 792 822 Derivate-action than 0, Tf is 0 and
Tf 4.941
613 643 673 703 733 763 793 823 time constant it is not controlled

by the derivate-

action time

constant.

7-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

0: independent

PID formula formula

614 644 674 704 734 764 794 824 PID_EQ 0
types 1: dependent

formula

0: use the

variations in the

error (E) to

calculate the

control value of

the derivative
The
(derivative of
calculation of
E).
615 645 675 705 735 765 795 825 PID_DE the PID 0
1: use the
derivative
variations in the
error
PV to calculate

the control
value of the

derivative

(derivative of

PV).

0: heating action
PID forward/
_7 (E=SV-PV)
616 646 676 706 736 766 796 826 PID_DIR reverse 0
1: cooling action
direction
(E=PV-SV）

The error value (E)

is the difference

between the SV
Range within and the PV. When
which the this setting is 0,
617 647 677 707 737 767 797 827 ERR_DBW 0
error value is the function is not
counted as 0 enabled. When

this setting is

enabled, the CPU

module checks

7-24
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

whether the

present difference

is less than the

absolute value of

ERR_DBW, and it

checks whether

the present

difference meets

the cross status

condition. If the

present difference

is less than the

absolute value of

ERR_DBW and it

meets the cross

status condition,

the present error is

counted as 0, and

the PID algorithm

is implemented.

Otherwise the

present error is

brought into the 7_

PID algorithm

normally.

618 648 678 708 738 768 798 828 α value Integral sum Range: 0–100 31

619 649 679 709 739 769 799 829 β value Integral sum Unit: 0.01 0

When PID_MAN is

set to 1, the MV

Manual value is output as

620 650 680 710 740 770 800 830 MOUT output value this manual MOUT 0

(MOUT) value, between

MV_MAX and

MV_MIN.

7-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

Range: 0–1000

(0%–100%)

Feedforward

Feedforward output value, used

621 651 681 711 741 771 801 831 BIAS 0
output value for the PID

feedforward

A floating-point

Output value number

622 652 682 712 742 772 802 832
MV --
623 653 683 713 743 773 803 833 (MV) Range: 0–100

Unit: %

Floating-point

format.

The accumulated

integral value is

temporarily stored

for reference.
624 654 684 714 744 774 804 834 Accumulated
I_MV When the MV is --
625 655 685 715 745 775 805 835 integral value
out of the range

0%–100%, the

accumulated
integral value in
_7 I_MV is

unchanged.

When this

instruction is read,

the PID algorithm

is implemented

according to the
Sampling
626 656 686 716 746 776 806 836 CYCLE sampling time, and 1
time (TS)
the MV is

refreshed.

If TS is less than 1,
it is read as 1. If TS

is larger than

7-26
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

1,000, it is read as

1,000.

Unit: 100 ms

Note: PID control registers of AS04TC-A and RTD-A are retainable; however PID control registers of

AS06RTD-A and AS08TC-A are not retainable. But you can use the data registers that are retainable to store

the set PID parameters so that the PID parameters can be retainable.

PID formula:

1. When the PID_MODE is set to 0, the mode is set to auto:

 Independent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=False）

t
dE
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt + K d * + BIAS (E = SV – PV or E = PV – SV)
0
dt
 Independent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=True）
t
dPV
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt − K d * + BIAS (E = SV – PV)
0
dt
Or
t
dPV (E =PV – SV)
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt + K d * + BIAS
0
dt

 Dependent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=False）

 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt + Td *  + BIAS (E = SV – PV or E = PV – SV)
 Ti 0 dt  7_
 Dependent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=True）
 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt − Td *  + BIAS (E = SV – PV)
 Ti 0 dt 
Or
 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt + Td *  + BIAS (E = PV – SV)
 Ti 0 dt 

2. When you set the PID_MODE to 1, auto tuning mode is enabled. When auto tuning is complete, the value

becomes 0 and switches off the auto tuning mode automatically.

7-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

PID Control Block Diagram:

PID Block Diagram (Independent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND
-
PV REVERSE
0
X(-1)

ERR_DBW

Kc_Kp
PID-P
>0 PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
<=0 +
0 +
Kc_Kp MV_LIMIT
1
MV
Ti_Ki
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, MV_MIN
+
<=0 +
0 +
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
+ MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT
PID-D PID_MAN
>0 1
0

<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT

PID Block Diagram (Dependent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND PID-P
-
REVERSE
PV 0
X(-1)

Kc_Kp
ERR_DBW Kc_Kp
>0

_7 <=0
0

PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
+
+
MV_LIMIT
1
Ti_Ki MV
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, M V_MIN
<=0
0
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT PID_MAN
PID-D
>0 1
0

<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT

7-28
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

ERR_DBW
When the PV (present value) is in the range of ERR_DBW, at the beginning, the present error is brought

into the PID algorithm according to the normal processing, and then the CPU module checks whether the

present error meets the cross status condition: PV (present value) goes beyond the SV (target value).

Once the condition is met, the present error is counted as 0 when applying the PID algorithm. After the PV

(present value) is out of the ERR_DBW range, the present error is brought into the PID algorithm again. If

PID_DE is true, that means it uses the variations in the PV to calculate the control value of the derivative,

and after the cross status condition is met, the PLC treats Δ PV as 0 to apply the PID algorithm. (Δ PV=

current PV – previous PV). In the following example, the present error is brought into the PID algorithm

according to the normal processing in section A ,and the present error or Δ PV is counted as 0 to apply

the PID algorithm in the section B.

α、β Value
To reduce overshoot, you can use parameters of ALPHA or BETA in the beginning of the PID
operation or while SV (target value) varies to compensate initial value of integral calculus (for
heating up or cooling down). See the images below. Use ALPHA parameter to reduce overshoot while the 7_
temperature is climbing up. Use BETA parameter to reduce overshoot while the temperature is dropping.
Temperature ( 0 C) Temperature ( 0 C)

Time Time

7-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Formula of the output cycle:

 Pulse output width = MV (%) x output cycle

Execute the general pulse with modulation instruction (GPWM) to set pulse output width and output cycle

sampling time to manage the cycle.

Example:

If the output cycle is 2000 ms, then the output value is 50% after the PID algorithm is implemented.

 Pulse output width = 50% × 2000 ms = 1000 ms

In other words, the GWPM instruction can be set to pulse output width = 1000 and output cycle = 2000.

t =10 0 0 ms

Ou tp u t Y 1 0

T =2 00 0 ms

Note:

1. When tuning the parameters Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, and Td_Kd (PID_MODE=0), set the Kc_Kp value first, and

then set the Ti_Ki and Td_Kd values to 0. In a controlled environment, you can increase the values of

Ti_Ki (from smaller to bigger) and Td_Kd (from bigger to smaller). When the value of Kc_Kp is 1, the

proportional gain is 100%. That is, the error values increase by a factor of one. When the proportional

gain is less than 100%, the error values decrease. When the proportional gain is greater than 100%, the
error values increase.
_7
2. The parameters which have been automatically tuned are not necessarily suitable for every controlled

environment. You can, therefore, further modify the automatically-tuned parameters, but it is

recommended that you only modify the values of Ti_Ki or Td_Kd.

3. The operand CYCLE is to set the sampling time to use the PID algorithm and refresh MV.

4. When the number of the channel for measurement is changed, the time to refresh the measured value

also changes. For example, the measured value is refreshed every 200 ms when there is only 1 channel

for measurement. The measured value is refreshed every 800 ms when there are 4 channels for

measurement. The Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, Td_Kd parameters may differ when the number of channel for measure

is different.

7-30
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.2.8 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the

ASTC-A Series must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load

which is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,

or a cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) To wire a terminal block, use single-core cables or multi-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22 AWG

with pin-type connectors smaller than 1 mm in diameter, which are covered with an insulation tube as

below. Moreover, use only copper conducting wires that can withstand temperatures above 60°C-75°C.

< 1mm 8-10mm 24-22AWG

(5) Do not wire empty terminals.

(6) Only use copper conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C and the length must be less
than 50 m.

(7) TC modules must run for 30 minutes before they start to take any temperature measurement.

 External wiring

J,K ,R ,S ,T,E ,N , B,
7_
C, U, L an d T X K CH1

+ I 1+
- A DC
I1-
SL D I NA
Shi el ded cable*1

- 1 00 mV ~1 0 0m V CH 3
+
I3 +
-
I3 - Cold - junction
SL D compensati on

*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for Type J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, C, U, L and TXK thermocouples, and
keep them separate from power cables and other cables which generate noise.

7-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.2.9 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Analog-to-Digital Conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

_7

7-32
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

7.3.1 Initial Setting
The following uses AS04TC-A as an example to demonstrate.

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

7_

7-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

_7

7-34
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the

parameters while the CPU module is running.

7_

7-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

_7

7-36
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.3.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

7_

7-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Setting dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

(2) Click Import in the Device Setting dialog box, and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

_7

7-38
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input modes of the channels

(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

7_

7-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) Input CH1-CH4 calibration

(4) Input average filter

_7

7-40
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

(5) Temperature measurement

(6) Input channel detect and alarm settings

7_

7-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration)

The following example uses AS04TC-A.

7.4.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start DIADesigner-AX, click New Project, and then Project+Device to create a new project.

(2) Add modules in:

➀ Double-click Hardware Configuration
➁ Select the + section and drag and drop the module that you want to add from the Product List to the +
section.
or ➂ Right-click Delta_Localbus Master to see the context menu and then double-click Add Device to
add devices manually or double-click Scan for Devices.

_7

7-42
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

(3) Select modules:

➀ Double-click the module name in the Hardware Configuration area.
or ➁ Double-click the module name shown in the node.

(4) Module parameter setting page:

7_

7-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) After setting is complete, select the module and click Login on the tool bar to download the settings to the
modules.

_7

7-44
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) Select the module and click the Information tab to see the module information.

(2) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can find the Module Revision
from the Parameters tab.

7_

7-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.4.3 Online Mode

(1) Select the module and click Login on the tool bar to go to Online Mode. You can monitor all configuration
parameters. Values in the column of Prepared Value are configurable online. After editing the values in
the Prepared Value column, click Write Parameter to confirm the change.

(2) You can monitor the values, status, error codes in each channel from the I/O Mapping tab.

(3) You can monitor the current status and error codes from the Status tab.

_7

7-46
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.4.4 Parameters
(1) You can set up the value format to Integer or Floating for Channel 1 to 4.

(2) You can set up the values for Channel 1 to 4.

(3) You can set up the calibrations for Channel 1 to 4.

7_
(4) You can set up the average filtering for Channel 1 to 4.

7-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) You can set up the temperature measurement units Channel 1 to 4.

(6) You can set up the channel detect and alarm settings.

_7

7-48
 Ch a pt er 7 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

7.5 Troubleshooting
7.5.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180A
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180B
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF
16#180C
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180D
the hardware can receive.
7_
The signal received by channel 7 exceeds the range of inputs that
16#180E
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 8 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180F
the hardware can receive.

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

7-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 3.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 4.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 5.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 6.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 7 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 7.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

_7 The signal received by channel 8 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 8.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

7-50
 8
Chapter 8 Load Cell Module AS02LC

Table of Contents
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 8-2

8.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Profile........................................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.4 Control Registers .................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.5 Functions................................................................................................................ 8-13
8.2.6 Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 8-19

8.3 Making Adjustments by ISPSoft ...................................................... 8-20

8.3.1 Steps to Adjust Points ......................................................................................... 8-20
8.3.2 Parameter Settings in LC Wizard ...................................................................... 8-21
8.3.3 Adjustment Settings / Calibrational Commands ........................................... 8-24
8.3.4 LED Indicators ...................................................................................................... 8-27

8.4 Making Adjustments by DIADesigner-AX ......................................... 8-28

8.4.1 Steps to Adjust Points ......................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.2 Parameter Settings in LC Wizard ...................................................................... 8-29
8.4.3 LED Indicators ...................................................................................................... 8-33

8.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 8-33

8.5.1 Initial Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-33
8.5.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................................... 8-36
8.5.3 Online Mode .......................................................................................................... 8-37
8.5.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................................. 8-38
8.5.5 Parameters ............................................................................................................ 8-39

8.6 Basic Operation in DIADesigner-AX ................................................. 8-42

8.6.1 Creating a New Project ....................................................................................... 8-42
8.6.2 Adding a Module ................................................................................................... 8-44
8.6.3 Parameters - Configuring the Module.............................................................. 8-46
8.6.4 I/O Mapping .......................................................................................................... 8-49
8.6.5 Status ..................................................................................................................... 8-50
8.6.6 Information............................................................................................................ 8-50

8.7 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 8-51

8.7.1 Error Codes............................................................................................................ 8-51
8.7.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ................................................................................ 8-52

8-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for load cell modules, their operation, and their programming. You

can use the AS02LC load cell module with four-wire or six-wire load cells with various eigenvalues, so you

can adjust its response time according to your requirements. In addition, the AS02LC-A can read and write

data via the AS Series PLC units using the FROM/TO instructions.

To ensure that the product is correctly installed and operated, read the manual carefully before use. This

manual provides functional specifications, and it also introduces installation, basic operation, and settings.

Refer to load cell related literature for more details on the principles of operating load cells.

For software operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner or DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If you are using AS

Series PLC CPU, refer to ISPSoft User Manual or DIADesigner Manual for more information. The new

software DIADesigner-AX only supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to AX-3 User

Manual for more information on software operation.

8.2 Specifications
8.2.1 Specifications
Item Description
Rated Supply Voltage/Power
24 VDC (-15% to +20%) / 3 W
Consumption
Minimum/Maximum Voltage 18–31.2 VDC
Maximum Current Consumption 150 mA
Input Signal Range ±40 mVDC
Sensibility +5 VDC +/-10%
Highest Accuracy 0.04 % of full scale
Communication Interface RS-232, RS-485
Applicable Sensor Type 4-wire or 6-wire load cell
Expanding a Temperature
≤ ±50 ppm/K v. E
Coefficient
_8
Reducing a Temperature
≤ ±0.4 μV/K
Coefficient to Zero
Linearity Error ≤0.02%
Response Time 2.5, 10, 16, 20, 50, 60, 100, 200, and 400 ms
Eigenvalue Applicable to a Load
0–1, 0–2, 0–4, 0–6, 0–20, 0–40 and 0–80 mV/V
Cell
Maximum Distance for
100 meters
Connecting a Load Cell
Maximum Output Current 5 VDC x 160 mA
Allowable Load 40–4010 Ω

8-2
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Item Description
Common-mode Rejection Ratio
≥100 dB
(CMRR @50/60 Hz)
Maximum Filter 0~8
Average Weights 1–100 (FM V1.04: supports 1-400)
Between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation Between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC
Weight 147 g

8.2.2 Profile

38.2 95

02LC 1
7
7
EX C+ EX C -

SI G+ SI G -

2
CH1
SE N+ SE N-
98.3
88

3
SL D

EX C+ EX C-

SI G+ SI G-
CH2

8 SE N+ SE N-

SL D

4
2 4V

0V

9
5
6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

The status of the power supply to the module

PWR LED Indicator ON: the power supply to the module is working.

OFF: no power supply to the module.

Error status of the module

2 ERR LED Indicator

ON: a serious error exists in the module. 8_
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Conversion status
Analog-to-Digital
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

The inputs are connected to transducers.

3 Removable Terminal Block
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

8-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Number Name Description

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals

5 Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Nameplate

8.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS02LC-A

02LC

EX C+ EX C -

SI G+ SI G -
C H1
SE N+ SE N-

SL D

EX C+ EX C-

SI G+ SI G-
C H2
SE N+ SE N-

SL D

2 4V

0V

_8

8-4
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.2.4 Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set values are downloaded, they can be retained in the

module. However, if you just use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN unless you also write 16#6001 in CR#201

(Command set) and download the Retain command to the module. For details, see the Command set (CR#201)

in the following descriptions.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: disabled

Display options for 1: gross weight

0 R/W 1
CH1 2: net weight

3: raw data

0: 1 mV/V

1: 2 mV/V

2: 4 mV/V

1 Eigenvalue for CH1 3: 6 mV/V R/W 1

4: 20 mV/V

5: 40 mV/V

6: 80 mV/V

0: 2.5ms

1: 10ms

2: 16ms

3: 20ms

2 Sampling cycle for CH1 4: 50ms R/W 4

5: 60ms

6: 100ms

7: 200ms
8_
8: 400ms

Weight measured times in a

3 Range: 1–500 R/W 5
stability range for CH1

4 Floating-point format
Stability range for CH1 R/W 10
5 Range: 0–100000

Floating-point format
6 Maximum weight for CH1 R/W 100,000
Maximum measuring weight; when the

8-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

weight measured exceeds the limit, an

7 alarm is triggered. The value should be

greater than 1.

0: no filter (default)

1: maximum filter mode

2: average filter mode

8 Filter mode for CH1 R/W 0
Note: FW V1.06 or later: low-pass filter is

available; refer to section 8.2.5 for more

information.

Range: 0–8; the bigger the number the

9 Maximum filter for CH1 R/W 1
stronger the filter

Average weight measured Range: 1–100

10 R/W 10
times for CH1 (for FW V1.04: 1–400 is available)

11 Floating-point format
Upper limit of the zero return
Determines the current weight as the zero R/W 10
for CH1
12
point in the upper/lower range; when the

13 lower range is larger than the upper range,

Lower limit of the zero return
the lower range is read as the upper range R/W -10
for CH1
14 and vice versa.

Zero point tracking time for Range: 5–500

15 R/W 10
CH1 Unit: 100 ms

16 Zero point tracking range for Floating-point format

R/W 0
17 CH1 Range: 0–10000; 0: disabled

_8 18 Calibration points for CH1 Range: 2–20 R/W 2

Floating-point format

19–58 Calibrated weight for CH1 Calibrated weight of the calibration points R/W -

1–20

0: disabled

1: gross weight
59 Display options for CH2 R/W 1
2: net weight

3: raw data

8-6
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0：1 mV/V

1：2 mV/V

2：4 mV/V

60 Eigenvalue for CH2 3：6 mV/V R/W 1

4：20 mV/V

5：40 mV/V

6：80 mV/V

0：2.5 ms

1：10 ms

2：16 ms

3：20 ms

61 Sampling cycle for CH2 4：50 ms R/W 4

5：60 ms

6：100 ms

7：200 ms

8：400 ms

Weight measured times in a

62 Range: 1–500 R/W 5
stability range for CH2

63 Floating-point format
Stability range for CH2 R/W 10
64 Range: 0–100000

Floating-point format
65
Maximum measuring weight; when the
Maximum weight for CH2 weight measured exceeds the limit, an R/W 100,000

alarm is triggered. The value should be

66
greater than 1.
8_
0: no filter (default)

1: maximum filter mode

2: average filter mode

67 Filter mode for CH2 R/W 0
Note: FW V1.06 or later: low-pass filter is

available; refer to section 8.2.5 for more

information.

Range: 0–8; the bigger the number the

68 Maximum filter for CH2 R/W 1
stronger the filter

8-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

Average weight measured Range: 1–100

69 R/W 10
times for CH2 (for FW V1.04: 1–400 is available)

70 Upper limit of the zero return Floating-point format

R/W 10
71 for CH2 Determines the current weight as the zero

72 point in the upper/lower range; when the

Lower limit of the zero return lower range is larger than the upper range,
R/W -10
73 for CH2 the lower range is read as the upper range

and vice versa.

Zero point tracking time for Range: 5–500

74 R/W 10
CH2 Unit: 100 ms

75 Zero point tracking range for Floating-point format

R/W 0
76 CH2 Range: 0–10000; 0: disabled

77 Calibration points for CH2 Range: 2–20 R/W 2

Floating-point format

78–117 Calibrated weight for CH2 Calibrated weight of the calibration points R/W -

1–20

118 Decimal place for CH1 Range: 0–4 R/W 1

119 Decimal place for CH2 Range: 0–4 R/W 1

0: warning

1: alarm

120 Alarm Bit0: error in the power supply R/W 1

Bit1: error in the module hardware

Bit2: error in the driver board

200 State register Refer to the explanation below. R/W -

201 Command set Refer to the explanation below. W 0

_8
210 The maximum peak value for Floating-point format -
R
211 CH1 Maximum peak value for CH1 -

212 The maximum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
213 CH2 Maximum peak value for CH2 -

214 The minimum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
215 CH1 Minimum peak value for CH1 -

216 The minimum peak value for Floating-point format R -

8-8
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

217 CH2 Minimum peak value for CH2 -

222 The time to record for CH1 Unit: 1 ms 50

Range: 1–100 (1 ms–1 s)

R/W
223 The time to record for CH2 Time to record the digital value for the 50

channels

240 The number of records for CH1 -

Range: 0–500; display the current records R
241 The number of records for CH2 -

Here displays the 20 pieces of raw data in

DWORD format for channel 1 and 2; the

400~ Calibration of the raw data for values will be loaded automatically during
R/W -
439 CH1
calibration. You can copy the values to

other load cell modules of the same model

number and with similar parameter settings

for a similar measurement curve without

calibration.

440~ Calibration of the raw data for Note: By copying the calibration of the raw
R/W -
479 CH2 data to other modules, some errors or

deviation may occur in in the weighted

values for different applications.

604 -
Tare weight measured by CH1 Display the tare weight measured by CH1 R/W
605 -

606 -
Tare weight measured by CH2 Display the tare weight measured by CH2 R/W
607 -

700– Floating-point format

Theoretical calibration for CH1 R/W 0
739 Output voltage unit: mV

740– Floating-point format 8_

Theoretical calibration for CH2 R/W 0
779 Output voltage unit: mV

4000 Floating-point format

Records for CH1 R -
–4999 500 records for CH1

5000 Floating-point format

Records for CH2 R -
–5999 500 records for CH2

8-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Normal Exchange Area

Explanation

You can view the error code, the channel value, and the state code, as well as the data registers that

correspond to their commands under the Normal Exchange Area tab of the Device Setting dialog box in the

HWCONFIG utility in ISPSoft.

C R # 2 0 0 : Codes for the state register

Explanation

Bit Code Definition Bit Code Definition

b0 16#0001 Error exists in the power supply. b1 16#0002 Error exists in the module hardware.

b2 16#0004 Error exists in the driver board. b3 16#0008 Calibration disabled

b4 16#0010 Reserved b5 16#0020 Reserved

The weight measured by CH1 The weight measured by CH2

exceeds the maximum weight that exceeds the maximum weight that
b6 16#0040 b7 16#0080
can be measured, or the voltage of can be measured, or the voltage of
_8
SEN is incorrect. SEN is incorrect.

The weight measured by CH1 The weight measured by CH2

b8 16#0100 exceeds the maximum weight that b9 16#0200 exceeds the maximum weight that

can be measured. can be measured.

b10 16#0400 CH1 has been adjusted incorrectly. b11 16#0800 CH2 has been adjusted incorrectly.

b12 16#1000 CH1 is not measuring any weight. b13 16#2000 CH2 is not measuring any weight.

The weight measured by CH1 is in The weight measured by CH2 is in

b14 16#4000 b15 16#8000
the stability range specified. the stability range specified.

8-10
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Bit Code Definition Bit Code Definition

Note: The state is determined by the corresponding bit and it is possible to have more than 2 states at the

same time.

C R # 2 0 1 : Command set

Explanation

Input
Description Input value Description
value

Start a new recording of the peak value

0 No action 16#0101
for CH1.

Commands for calibrating the calibration Start a new recording of the peak value
1–20 16#0102
points 1–20 on CH1 for CH2.

Commands for calibrating the calibration Start a new recording of the peak value
21–40 16#010F
points 1–20 on CH2 for CH1 - CH2.

98 Activate the weight calibration. 16#0201 Start a new recording for CH1.

99 Deactivate the weight calibration. 16#0202 Start a new recording for CH2.

Subtract the weight on CH1. Use the

subtracted weight as the tare weight

100 16#020F Start a new recording for CH1 - CH2.
and store it in CR604 and CR605

(DWORD).

Restore the tare weight stored in CR604

101 16#0211 Stop recording for CH1.
and CR605 to CH1.

Clear the weight measured by CH1 to

102 zero. You might need to execute this 16#0212 Stop recording for CH2.

command after each power-off.

Subtract the weight on CH2. Use the

8_
subtracted weight as the tare weight
103 16#021F Stop recording for CH1 - CH2.
and store it in CR606 and CR607

(DWORD).

Restore the tare weight stored in CR606

104 16#0301 Start a theoretical calibration for CH1.
and CR607 to CH2.

Clear the weight measured by CH2 to

105 zero. You might need to execute this 16#0302 Start a theoretical calibration for CH2.

command after each power-off.

8 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Input
Description Input value Description
value

Start a theoretical calibration for CH1 - Restore default settings and clear
16#030F 16#0501
CH2. settings in Flash.

Restore default settings and settings in

16#0502 16#6000 Read the current settings from Flash
Flash stay intact.

Write the current settings into Flash and

16#6001 retain the current values in the module

after power-off

_8

8-12
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.2.5 Functions

Item Function Description

1 Measuring net weight Various measuring modes to choose from

When an object is put on a load cell, you can check whether the
2 Stability check
present weight of the object is in a specified stability range.

3 Determining zero point If an object is removed from the load cell, no weight is measured.

Filter out the maximum or minimum weight measured or use an

4 Filter out weights
average weight for a more accurate value.

5 Multi-point adjustment There are as many as 20 points for adjustment

Calibration based on the output value of the sensor instead of the

6 Theoretical calibration
real weight calibration

7 Zero point tracking Zero point tracking

Limit detections for

8 Save the maximum and minimum values for channels.
channels

9 Records for channels Save the analog curves for channels.

1. Measuring net weight

You can choose to measure either the net weight or the gross weight of an object. Net weight is the actual

weight of a product without its package. The weight of a package is the tare weight. Gross weight is the total

weight: net weight plus tare weight.

 Tare weight: the weight of a package

 Net weight: the weight of a product, that is, the actual weight of a product without its package

 Gross weight: the total weight, that is, the net weight of a product plus the tare weight of its package
8_
 Gross weight=Net weight+Tare weight

Example: a product weighs 10 kg, and the carton in which the product is packed weighs 0.2 kg. The

gross weight is 10.2 kg.

Net weight = 10 kg

Tare weight = 0.2 kg

Gross weight = 10.2 kg

8-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. Checking stability

When an object is placed on a load cell, you can check whether the present weight of the object is in a

specified stability range.

 If the weight measured is in the specified stability range, the corresponding bit is set to 1.

 If the weight measured exceeds the specified stability range, the corresponding bit is set to 0 until the

number of objects weighed in the stability range reaches the setting.

Example: the measurement time set is 10 ms, the number of weights measured in a stability range is 10, and

the stability range is 1000 g. If a variation exceeds 1000 g, the corresponding bit is set to 0. If the variations

within 100 ms (10×10 ms) are within 1000 g, the corresponding bit is set to 1. You should determine whether

the present weight measured is in the stability range before you perform control actions.

△ : Va ri a ti on s in a ve ra g e we ig h ts
t
t: Me a su r em en t tim e se t by use rs
k
k: Sta b il i ty ra ng e se t by use r s
m <kk
< kk △<
m: Num be r o f we i gh ts me a su re d i n <kk
△<
△<
a sta bi l ity ra n g e >kk
△>

A ve r ag e we i gh t >k
△> k

>k
△> k

△> k

>k
△> k

>k
△> k
△
△> k
>k

T ime

B it in th e sta b il it y ran g e t m

b it

3. Determining zero point

_8 If an object is removed from the load cell, the corresponding bit is set to 1, and you can perform the next

control action. If a weight measured is in the specified zero range, the corresponding bit is also set to 1.

No o b je ct

Ch 1
L oa d ce ll

CH 2

8-14
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Average weight

Zero range

Time

Zero weight

4. Filtering

There are three methods to filter

 Filtering out the maximum/minimum weight measured: If there is a maximum weight or a minimum

weight, you can filter out the maximum weight or the minimum weight. The larger the value, the more

weights are filtered out. Range: K0–K8

 Averaging weights: The values recorded are averaged so that a steady value is obtained. There may be

peak values due to unavoidable external factors, and the average value obtained may change

accordingly. A maximum of 100 values can be averaged.

 Low-pass filter (available for FWV1.06)

Work with the function block MLPF to set up different filtering ranges. Refer to MLPF instruction

(API1430) from AS Series Programming Manual for more information.

5. Making multi-point adjustments

Make adjustments to get the weight measured by a cell to correspond to the digital value displayed by the

load cell module. Generally, two points are adjusted. After a system is set up, put no load on the scale. The

weight measured is 0 grams when there is no load. Then place an object of a given weight on the scale, and

set a digital value corresponding to the weight. At that point, two points have been adjusted. For example, if

you have a load cell sensor which can measure a maximum weight of 10 kg, and if 1 kg corresponds to

K1000, the curve is like the one shown below. 8_

Weight

10 kg

Point
1 kg

Digital value
K0 K1000 K10000 (LSB)

Adjusting two points

8-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

In addition to this two-point adjustment, the load cell also supports adjustments of up to 20 points. A

characteristic curve is shown below.

Weight
Point 5
10 kg

Point 3
Point 4

Point 1
1 kg
Point 2

Digital value
K0 K1000 K10000 (LSB)

Adjusting multiple points

6. Determining theoretical calibration

Theoretical calibration is determined according to the sensor specification in order to input the voltage values

corresponding to various weights. The registers for storing the voltage values are CR#700–739 for CH1 and

CR#740–779 for CH2. After entering the voltage values into the registers, you can use the command set

16#301–302 to execute the calibration.

Example: the sensor specification is 10 kg and its eigenvalue is 2 mV/V. When the sensor is loaded with a 10

kg weight, the output is 10 mV. The theoretical calibration steps are:

Step 1: set the eigenvalue.

Step 2: set the 2-point adjustment; when the sensor is loaded with a 1 kg weight, set the value to 1000.

_8

Step 3: set the voltage calibration for the zero point to 0 (0 mV) in the CR#700/701 registers, and to 1.0 (1

mV) in the CR702/703 registers.

Step 4: enable the calibration function and enter 98 into the command set CR#201.

8-16
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Step 5: enter 16#0301 into the command set CR#201 to execute a theoretical calibration for channels 1.

Step 6: do not put any load on the sensor and enter 16#102 into the command set CR#201 to reset the value

to 0 for CH1.

Step 7: disable the calibration function to prevent inappropriate changes. To complete the theoretical

calibration, enter 99 into the command set CR#201. Put a 1 kg weight on the sensor and the load cell should

show 1000.

Weight

Point

D igita l v alue

2 -point a djustme nt

Step 8: write 16#6001 in CR#201 to disable the calibration function to write the current settings into Flash and

have the settings in the latched area.

7. Zero point tracking

Zero point tracking refers to resetting the current value to 0. You can reset the value to 0 within a certain

duration or at a certain weight. This is especially useful when the sensor is no longer as accurate as it was

before.

8_

8-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8. Limit detections for channels

Save the maximum and minimum values for channels so you can determine the peak to peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

Maximum valu e

Mini mu m va lue

Time

9. Recording channels

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data points and

the recording time is 10 ms.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

_8

8-18
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.2.6 Wiring
 External wiring

EX C+ A+5V
EX C- AGND
F our -wir e
SIG+
SIG-
CH 1
SE N+
SE N-

EX C+ A+5V
Six- wire EX C- AGND
SIG+
SIG-
CH 2
SE N+
SE N-

Connected to
on a power supply m odule *1 A+5V
System 0V DC/DC
ground 24V conver ter
AGND
T hir d gr ound
( Im pedance: Less than 100 )

 Multiple load cells connected in parallel are connected to a single load cell module.

Lo ad c ell

Lo ad c ell

Lo ad c ell

CH1
Lo ad c ell

Lo ad c ell
CH2

Lo ad c ell
8_
Lo ad c ell

Loa d ce ll

Note 1: Please connect on the power supply module and on the load cell module to a system
ground, and then ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.

Note 2: If multiple load cells are connected in parallel, the total impedance should be greater than 40 Ω.

8-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.3 Making Adjustments by ISPSoft

Make adjustments to get the weight measured by a cell to correspond to the digital value displayed by the

load cell module. You can make adjustments by following the commands below or by setting up the

theoretical calibration (refer to section 8.2.5 for more details).

8.3.1 Steps to Adjust Points

Enter adjustment

Set the total number

of adjustment points

Set the weights of

adjustment points

No load
(No weight value)

Write an adjustment enabled

command

Write an adjustment
command

YES
The next adjustment point

_8
NO

Write an adjustment disabled

command

Write current setting

into Flash

The adjustment is complete.

8-20
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.3.2 Parameter Settings in LC Wizard

Step 1: Open LC Wizard from HWCONFIG.

Step 2: Set the eigenvalue.

Step 3: Set the number of adjustments and their corresponding values. The example below shows a 2-point

adjustment in which point 1 = 0 and point 2 = 1000, corresponding to 1 kg.

8_

8-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 4: After the configuration is complete, download the parameters to the module.

Step 5: Start calibration.

Step 6: Leave no load on the load cell (adjustment point 1) and click Next Step to proceed.

_8

8-22
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Step 7: Put a load on the load cell (adjustment point 2). For multi-point adjustment, repeat this step. This

example uses a 1 kg weight.

Step 8: The calibration is complete.

8_

8-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

A characteristic curve is shown below.

Weig ht

1 0 kg

Po int
1 kg

Dig ita l val ue

0 1 000 1 000 0

Ad ju sti ng two p oi nts

8.3.3 Adjustment Settings / Calibrational Commands

Step 1: Set the eigenvalue in LCWizard.

Step 2: Set the number of adjustment points and their corresponding values. The example below shows a 2-

point adjustment where point 1 = 0 and point 2 = 1000, corresponding to 1 kg.

_8

8-24
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Step 3: After the configuration is complete, download the parameters to the module.

Step 4: Double-click on the module to see the settings and verify that the corresponding address of the

calibrational commands is D28007 in the Normal Exchange Area.

Step 5: Enter 98 into D28007 to enable the weight calibration. 8_

Step 6: Leave no load on the load cell for adjustment point 1, and enter 1 into D28007 (1 for CH1 and 21 for
CH2. See CR#201: Command set for more explanation).

8-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 7: Put a load on the load cell for adjustment point 2, and enter 2 into D28007 (2 for CH1 and 22 for CH2.
See CR#201: Command set for more explanation). For multi-point adjustment, repeat this step. This example

uses a 1 kg weight.

Step 8: To complete the adjustment, enter 99 into D28007, which disables the weight calibration.

A characteristic curve is shown below.

Weig ht

1 0 kg

Po int
1 kg

Dig ita l val ue

0 1 000 1 000 0
_8
Ad ju sti ng two p oi nts

8-26
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.3.4 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

The status of the power supply to the module

1 PWR LED Indicator ON: the power supply to the module is working.

OFF: no power supply to the module.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Analog-to-Digital Conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

8_

8-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.4 Making Adjustments by DIADesigner-AX

Make adjustments to get the weight measured by a cell to correspond to the digital value displayed by the

load cell module. You can make adjustments by following the commands below or by setting up the

theoretical calibration (refer to section 8.2.5 for more details).

DIADesigner-AX is available for module firmware V1.5 or later.

8.4.1 Steps to Adjust Points

Enter adjustment

Set the total number

of adjustment points

Set the weights of

adjustment points

No load
(No weight value)

Write an adjustment enabled

command

Write an adjustment
command

YES
The next adjustment point
_8
NO

Write an adjustment disabled

command

Write current setting

into Flash

The adjustment is complete.

8-28
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.4.2 Parameter Settings in LC Wizard

Step 1: Add the AS02LC module.

Step 2: Double-click on AS02LC_A.

8_

8-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 3: Set the characteristic value.

Step 4: Click Login button to download the program to PLC and then click Logout.

Step 5: Enter Online Config Mode.

Step 6: Click Yes in the following dialogue box that appears after entering the Online Config Mode.

_8

8-30
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Step 7: Set the number of adjustment points and their corresponding values. The example below shows a 2-

point adjustment in which point 1 = 0 and point 2 = 1000, corresponding to 1 kg.

Step 8: Click Start after the setting is complete.

Step 9: Leave no load on the load cell (adjustment point 1) and click Calibrate to proceed.

8_

8-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 10: Put a load on the load cell (adjustment point 2). For multi-point adjustment, repeat this step. This

example uses a 1 kg weight.

Step 11: Click Stop to finish the weight adjustment.

A characteristic curve is shown below.

Weig ht

1 0 kg

Po int
_8 1 kg

Dig ita l val ue

0 1 000 1 000 0

Ad ju sti ng two p oi nts

8-32
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.4.3 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

The status of the power supply to the module

1 PWR LED Indicator ON: the power supply to the module is working.

OFF: no power supply to the module.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Conversion status
Analog-to-Digital
3 Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

8.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

8.5.1 Initial Setting
(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

8_

8-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

(3) Right-click on the module and then click LC Wizard to go to the setting page.

_8

8-34
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

(4) Set the setting values.

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters in HWCONFIG. Note that you cannot
download the parameters while the CPU module is running.)

8_

8-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.5.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) Click On-line Mode.

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

_8

8-36
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.5.3 Online Mode

(1) In the On-line Mode.

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module state.

8_

8-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.5.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a dep file (.dep).

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a dep file to import saved parameters.

_8

8-38
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.5.5 Parameters
(1) Settings for CH1

(2) Adjustment for CH1

8_

8-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) Settings for CH2

(4) Adjustment for CH2

_8

8-40
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

(5) Alarm settings

8_

8-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.6 Basic Operation in DIADesigner-AX

DIADesigner-AX is an open platform for PLC development system and industrial automation. The adaptable
DIADesigner-AX provides an easy way to create professional engineering of IEC 61131-3 automation projects.
Based on the IEC 61131-3 data structure and the high-level language programming, DIADesigner-AX is strong
in functionality, easy to develop, reliable, extendable and open for development. Integrated with components
such as visualization and Safety solution, DIADesigner-AX offers a variety of user-friendly engineering functions
for your professional applications in controller development system sectors including PLC and motion control.
In DIADesigner-AX, you can customize the user interface by arranging the window layout and the appearance
of menus, toolbars and commands according to your requirements.

8.6.1 Creating a New Project

Double-click the DIADesigner-AX icon to open DIADesigner-AX. Click New Project on the Start
Page or select File > New Project (Ctrl+N) to create a new project.

Next you will see a window with two sections, Categories and Templates. Click Projects in the Categories
section and click Standard project in the Templates section. After that create a Name and specify a location
for the project and then click OK.

_8

8-42
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

And a Standard Project dialog appears. You can select the device and the programming language from the
drop-down list. Click OK, the system generates a cyclic task with a default PLC_PRG.

After a new project is successfully created, you can see a project management area in the left side of the
window. All the options are listed in nodes. Click View -> Devices (Alt+0) on the tool bar, if nothing appears in
the project management area.

8_

8-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.6.2 Adding a Module

 Method 1

With AX-3 Series PLC backplaneless design, the extension module can install on the right-side of AX-3

Series PLC directly. Double-click or drag and drop the extension module that you’d like to add from the

Product List. Newly added extension modules will appear on the right-side of the AX-3 Series PLC. And the

device names will also show up on the left-side under Delta_LocalBus_Master.

_8

8-44
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

 Method 2

If the AX-3 Series PLC and its connected extension module are powered on and the gateway is correctly set,

you can use the icon to scan and add the modules in. Newly added extension modules will appear on

the right-side of the AX-3 Series PLC. And the device names will also show up on the left-side under

Delta_LocalBus_Master.

8_

8-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.6.3 Parameters - Configuring the Module

Two methods to open the parameter setting page.

 Method 1

Find and double-click Hardware Configuration in the tree view to open the Hardware Configuration.

Double-click the image of the module you’d like to configure to open the parameter setting page.

 Method 2

Find and double-click the module you’d like to configure under Delta_LocalBus_Master (Delta LocalBus

Master) in the tree view to open the parameter setting page.

Check and set the configurations on the parameter setting page.

_8

8-46
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.6.3.1 Channel 1 and Channel 2 Settings

You can set up Gross/Net setting, Characteristic Value, Sampling Time, Standstill Times, Standstill Range,

Max Weight, Filter Mode, Filter Ratio, Filter Average Times, Zero Upper Range, Zero Lower Range, Zero

Tracking Time and Zero Tracking Range for channel 1 and channel 2.

Channel 1:

Channel 2:

8_

8-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.6.3.2 Channel Calibration Settings

You can set up Weight of Calibration Points for channel 1 and channel 2.

Channel 1:

Channel 2:

_8

8-48
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.6.3.3 Alarm Settings

You can set up alarm settings for External Power Supply Error, Hardware Error and Driver Board Error.

8.6.3.4 Online Mode

After the configuration is complete, click the Login button on the toolbar to go to the Online Mode and also

download the parameter to the PLC module. You can read the parameter status and the Module Revision

under the Parameter Tab when the system is in the Online Mode, but editing is NOT accessible in the Online

Mode.

8.6.4 I/O Mapping

You can read/write values, status, error codes of each channel under the I/O Mapping Tab.
8_

8-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.6.5 Status
You can monitor the status and error message of the module under the Status Tab.

8.6.6 Information
You can check the module information, including Name, Vendor, Categories, Type, ID, Version, Order

Number and Description under the Information Tab.

_8

8-50
 Ch a pt er 8 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

8.7 Troubleshooting
8.7.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code indicator indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1807 Diver board failure OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of analog

16#1808
inputs or the SEN voltage is abnormal.

16#1809 The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the weight limit.

16#180A The factory calibration in channel 1 is incorrect. Run: blinking

Blinking
The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of analog Stop: OFF
16#180B
inputs or the SEN voltage is abnormal.

16#180C The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the weight limit.

16#180D The factory calibration in channel 2 is incorrect.

Blinking once

or twice and

Upon power-on, the module does NOT receive any detecting after 2
- OFF
request from the PLC CPU. seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

8_

8-51
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.7.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.

If the problem persists, contact the local authorized

Hardware failure
distributors.

Check if the terminals is affected by any interference or is

Diver board failure short-circuit (check EXC+ and EXC-). If the problem

persists, contact the local authorized distributors.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1 and the cable
range of analog inputs or the SEN voltage is
connections.
abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the Check the value input to channel 1 and the maximum

weight limit. weight setting.

The factory calibration in channel 1 is incorrect. Check the weight calibration in channel 1.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2 and the cable
range of analog inputs or the SEN voltage is
connections.
abnormal.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the Check the value input to channel 2 and the maximum

weight limit. weight setting.

The factory calibration in channel 2 is incorrect. Check the weight calibration in channel 1.

Upon power-on, the module does NOT receive Check the connection between the CPU and the module

any detecting request from the PLC CPU. or reconnect them again.

_8

8-52
 9
Chapter 9 Serial Communication Module
AS00SCM

Table of Contents

9.1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 9-2

9.2 Specification, Function and Wiring ......................................................... 9-3
Functional specifications ......................................................................... 9-3
Dimensions and Profile ........................................................................... 9-4
Knob Functions ...................................................................................... 9-5
Wiring .................................................................................................. 9-8
9.3 COM Mode .............................................................................................9-10
Modbus............................................................................................... 9-10
UD Link .............................................................................................. 9-20
CANopen Mode .................................................................................... 9-28
9.4 RTU Mode ............................................................................................. 9-31
CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM) .................................................................. 9-32
EtherNet/IP Mode ................................................................................ 9-36
Remote Module Setting ......................................................................... 9-53
9.5 Normal Exchange Area .......................................................................... 9-56
9.6 Applications ......................................................................................... 9-58
Modbus............................................................................................... 9-58
UD Link .............................................................................................. 9-75
Remote I/O Application (AS-FCOPM) ...................................................... 9-90
Remote I/O Application (AS-FEN02) ....................................................... 9-97
Remote I/O Application (Multiple AS-FEN02) ........................................... 9-99
9.7 Error Code.......................................................................................... 9-100
Troubleshooting for AS00SCM-A as a Communication Module ...................9-101
Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module....................9-102

9-1
AS Series Module Manual

9.1 Introduction
Thank you for using the AS00SCM-A, a serial communication module. To ensure that your AS00SCM-A is installed
and operated correctly, read this manual carefully before using the module.

The AS00SCM-A communication modules referred to as SCM below can work as AS series communication extension
modules (COM) as well as remote modules (RTU) with the following two modes.

 COM. mode (AS series communication extension modules, installed on the right side of the AS CPU and no
external power supply is allowed)

 RTU mode (remote modules, requiring independent power supply after communication cards are inserted.)

See the tables below for supported communication cards and corresponding card slots in respective modes. For details
on communication specifications and firmware versions, refer to sections 9.3 and 9.4, and for how to use it with the
PROFINET card AS-FPFN02, refer to Chapter 10 in this manual.

Mode COM mode

AS-F232
Communication
AS-F485 AS-FCOPM AS-FPFN02
card
AS-F422
Card Slot CARD 1 or CARD 2 CARD 2 CARD 1 and CARD 2

Mode RTU mode

Communication
AS-FCOPM AF-FEN02 AS-FPFN02
card

Card Slot CARD 2 CARD 1 and CARD 2

Its most functions are configured with the AS CPU together in the ISPSoft software. Please download ISPSoft V3.13
or later from Delta official website. If the SCM module acts as an Ethernet remote communication module, working with
a non-Delta EtherNet/IP master, please use EIP Builder as the configuration software, and download EIP Builder V1.08
or later from Delta official website.
Most contents in this chapter use ISPSoft to demonstrate. For DIADesigner examples, please refer to DIADesigner
Software User Manual for more information.

9-2
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

9.2 Specification, Function and Wiring

Functional specifications

 RS-485/RS-422/RS-232 communication interface

Item Specifications
Connector type 5- pin European-style terminal block, spring-clip connector
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800 115200 and
Transmission speed
230400 bps
Stop bit: 1 bit and 2 bits
Communication
Parity bit: none, an odd parity bit, and an even parity bit
format
Data bit: 7 bits and 8 bits
Communication
Modbus ASCII/RTU, user-defined communication format
protocol

 CAN communication interface

Item Specifications
Connector type RJ45*2
Transmission speed 10k, 20k, 50k, 125k, 250k, 500k, and 1000k bps
Communication AS remote mode (RTU mode)
protocol CANopen (firmware V2.00 or later)

 Ethernet communication interface

Item Specifications
Connector type RJ45*2
Transmission speed 10M, 100Mbps
Topology type Chain, Star and Ring (DLR ring node, used with AS-FEN02 firmware V1.04 or later)
Communication
EtherNet/IP (firmware V2.02 or later), PROFINET (firmware V2.06 or later)
protocol

 Electrical specifications

Item Specifications
Supply voltage 24 VDC
Electric energy
0.6 W
consumption
Weight Approximately 169 g

9_

9-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Dimensions and Profile

SCM
1 PO WER

7 ER RO R
7
2 CA RD 1

CA RD 2

98 .3
ID 1

88
3
FOR M AT 1

4
8
ID 2

9
F OR MA T 2

5 C OM . RTU

6 75
10 56

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module
Power status of the module
POWER LED Indicator (blue) ON: the power supply to the module is working.
OFF: the module has low voltage or no power.
Error status of the module
ON: there is a hardware error.
ERROR LED Indicator (red) OFF: the module is operating normally.
2
Blink: an error has occurred or occurs on the module; refer to section
9.7 for more information.
Function card 1 Indicator Blink: data is being transmitted to function card 1.
(orange) OFF: there is no data transmission to function card 1.
Function card 2 Indicator Blink: data is being transmitted to function card 2.
(orange) OFF: there is no data transmission to function card 2.
Knob for the Node ID and
3 2 sets, one for function card 1 and the other for function card 2
Format
Function Card 1 Slot COM Mode: for AS-F232, AS-F422 and AS-F485
4 COM Mode: for AS-F232, AS-F422, AS-F485 and AS-FCOPM
Function Card 2 Slot
RTU Mode: for AS-FCOPM, AS-FEN02 and AS-FPFN02
COM Mode: serial communication extension mode
5 Knob for the Work Mode
RTU Mode: remote module mode
6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail
7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules
8 Ground Clip
_9 9 Label Nameplate
10 RTU Power Input Supplies power to the RTU module for RTU Mode only

9-4
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Knob Functions

Restore to Default Settings

1 For all communication cards and work mode, you can cut the device power off, turn the four knobs to the position
F, and resupply the power. The AS00SCM-A module restores to default settings once it is resupplied with power.
After the module restores to default settings, cut the power off again and turn the knobs to the new values you
desire. Then resupply the power.
2 AS00SCM-A firmware V2.08 or later supports the function of restoring to default settings, which also restores AS-
FEN02 (firmware V1.04 or later) to the default values at the same time.

Modbus Parameter Settings (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485)

Modbus communication (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485) can be installed in Card 1 and Card 2 (in COM mode only).

1. When the setting range is 0x01–0x0F, you can use the knob to set the node ID1 and ID2. (The settings in the
ISPSoft is ignored here.)

2. When the setting range is NOT between 0x01–0x0F, you can turn the knob to 0 and use ISPSoft
(HWCONFIG) to set up the node ID. Follow the descriptions shown on the HWCONFIG for node ID setting
range.

COM. RTU

ID Setup (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485) in COM mode

ID1/ID2 Node ID Setup ID1/ID2 Node ID Setup

0 Use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) 1-F Manual Setting

3. When the FORMAT knob is NOT set to 0, use the FORMAT1 AND FORMAT2 knobs to set the communication
mode. Refer to the following table. (The settings in the ISPSoft is ignored here.)

4. When the FORMAT knob is set to 0, you can use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the communication mode.

COM. RTU

Modbus (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485) in COM mode

Baud Baud
FORMAT Data Stop ASCII/ FORMAT Data Stop ASCII/
rate Parity rate Parity
1/2 (bits) (bits) RTU 1/2 (bits) (bits) RTU
(bps) (bps)
0 Software setting 8 38400 8 None 2 RTU
1 9600 7 Even 1 ASCII 9 38400 8 None 1 RTU
2 9600 8 Even 1 RTU A 38400 7 Even 1 ASCII
3 9600 7 None 2 ASCII B 57600 8 None 1 ASCII
4 9600 8 None 1 RTU C 76800 8 None 1 RTU
5 19200 7 Even 1 ASCII D 115200 7 None 1 ASCII
6 19200 8 None 1 RTU E 115200 8 Even 1 RTU 9_
7 19200 8 Odd 2 RTU F 115200 7 None 2 ASCII
For UD Link function, you can turn the FORMAT knob to 0 and use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the
communication mode. Refer to section 9.3.2 for more details.

9-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CANopen Parameter Settings (AS-FCOPM)

CANopen (AS-FCOPM) can only be installed in Card 2 for COM mode or RTU mode.

1. When the setting range is 0x01–0x0F, you can use the knob to set the node ID1 and ID2. (The settings in the
ISPSoft is ignored here.)

2. When the setting range is NOT between 0x01–0x0F, you can turn the knob to 0 and use ISPSoft
(HWCONFIG) to set up the node ID. Follow the descriptions shown on the HWCONFIG for node ID setting
range.

3. When in RTU mode, the setting varies according to different CANopen communication mode; refer to section
9.4.1 for more details.

COM. RTU

ID Setup (AS-FCOPM in COM mode) in COM mode

ID2 Node ID Setup ID2 Node ID Setup
0 Use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) 1-F Manual Setting
4. COM and RTU Mode:

Refer to the following table and use FORMAT 2 knob to set up the communication. You can NOT use ISPSoft
(HWCONFIG) to set up the communication mode in this format.

CANopen (AS-FCOPM) in COM Mode and RTU Mode

FORMAT 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-F
Bit rates (bps) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 1000K NA
Distance (m) 5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 25 NA

EtherNet/IP (AS-FEN02)
EtherNet/IP (AS-FEN02) is installed in both slots of Card 1 and Card 2, which is used for RTU mode only.

When using the communication card AS-FEN02, you need to set ID1 and FORMAT1 to 0. Refer to the following
methods to edit the IP address and settings of AS-FEN02.

1. When both knobs ID2 and FORMAT 2 are set to 0, IP address is set through EIP Builder (ISPSoft ->
HWCONFIG).

 Open EIP Builder and add AS00SCM (RTU) + AS-FEN02 to your network. Double-click HWCONFIG to
set up.

 Open EIP Builder and select IP Setting Tool from the Tool on the tool bar to scan for the device IP
address for setup.

2. When both ID2 and FORMAT 2 are set to F, IP setting mode is in DHCP mode. After setting is complete, you
need to turn the power OFF and then ON to make sure the modules are sending DHCP requests. Check the
_9 sticker on the AS-FEN02 communication card for the MAC address. After that open EIP Builder and select IP
Manager from the Tool on the tool bar and click Start the Server to set up the correspondences between MAC
address and IP address.

3. When either ID2 or FORMAT 2 is Neither 0 nor F, IP address is set by knobs ID2 and FORMAT 2. Hexadecimal
format is used and ID2 corresponds to x161 and FORMAT 2 to x160. The possible IP address is 192.168.1.x,
x=1~FE (1~254).

9-6
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

IP Address Setup (AS-FEN02) in RTU Mode

ID1 0
FORMAT 1 0
ID2 0 F x161
Other combination
FORMAT 2 0 F x160
IP Address Use ISPSoft IP Address
DHCP
Setup (HWCONFIG) 192.168.1.x, x=1~FE（1~254)
Note: The parameters of AS-FEN02 are stored in AS300 PLC or AS00SCM-A. Thus you need to use the knobs to set
up the IP address for AS-FEN02 or use COMMGR or IP Setup tool to scan and check for the IP address of AS-
FEN02. Refer to section 9.4.2 for more information.

PROFINET (AS-FPFN02)
You can use the knob to restore to default settings.

9_

9-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Wiring

AS00SCM-A Power Wiring

 COM mode

Turn the work mode to COM. Install the module on the right hand side of the AS Series CPU. To avoid problems, do
not use an external power supply for AS00SCM-A.

 RTU mode

Turn the work mode to RTU. This module is equipped with an independent DC power connector.

To ensure the serial communication module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise. Before
you install cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the DC cable and other power cables that are connected to the AS00SCM-
A must be separate cables. An independent power supply is recommended for the AS00SCM-A.

SCM AS Series IO

D C Power Supply
24VD C
Min 1.5A

0V 2 4V
Ground

Ground
24V
DC Power Supply
24VD C
0V

Ground

Ground

24V
DC Power Supply Ot her
24V D C devices
0V

Ground

(2) The 24 VDC cable should be twisted pair, and the shorter end should be connected to the module.

(3) The cable (110 VAC, 220 VAC, and 24 VDC) must not be installed near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,

_9 or a cable connected to a load that is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a
high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that is not a PLC. All the cables should be wired at least
100 mm apart.

(4) Ground the power supply using a 14 AWG wire.

(5) Connect 20–14 AWG (1 mm) wires to the input/output terminals. Use only copper leads that can resist
temperatures above 60 °C /75 °C.

9-8
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

AS00SCM-A Communication Interface

 COM mode

This module comes with two function card slots, supporting AS-F232, AS-F422, and AS-F485 communication cards.
The Card 2 slot also supports the AS-FCOPM communication card (AS00SCM-A firmware V2.00 or later). Refer to
Chapter 10 for more information on wiring the cards.

 RTU mode

The Card 2 slot supports the AS-FCOPM communication card (AS00SCM-A firmware V2.00 or later), AS-FEN02
(AS00SCM-A firmware V2.02 or later) and AS-FPFN02 (AS00SCM-A firmware V2.06 or later). Refer to Chapter 10
for more information on wiring the cards.

9_

9-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

9.3 COM mode

This section introduces how to operate the AS00SCM-A module in COM mode when the communication protocols
are Modbus, UD Link and CANopen respectively. For operation on PROFINET, refer to section 10.2.8.

AS-F232
AS-FPFN02
Function Card AS-F485 AS-FCOPM
(V2.02 or later)
AS-F422
Modbus user-defined CANopen DS301 PROFINET
Function
communication format (Slave) (Slave)
Card slot CARD 1 or CARD 2 CARD 2 CARD 1 and CARD 2
AS00SCM-A
V - --
V1.00
AS00SCM-A
V V --
V2.00
AS00SCM-A
V V --
V2.02
AS00SCM-A
V V --
V2.06
AS00SCM-A
V V V
V2.08

 There are two user-defined communication formats: UD Link and the SCMRS instruction. It is recommended to
use the SCMRS instruction.
 Built in Delta communication software DCISoft, the SCMSoft software is used for setting the UD Link
function. To use the UD Link function, please download DCISoft V1.24 or later from Delta official website
and start SCMSoft from HWCONFIG. Or you can also use DIADesigner software to call SCMSoft. Refer
to section 6.1.1.12 in DIADesigner Software User Manual for details.
 Installed on AS series CPU with firmware V1.14 or later, the AS00SCM-A module with firmware V2.08 or
later supports the SCMRS instruction, which is operated in the same way as the COMRS instruction for AS
PLC CPU. Refer to AS Series Programming Manual for detailed operation of this instruction.

Modbus

The AS00SCM-A supports standard communication protocols such as Modbus RS232, RS422, and RS485. Once
you create a data exchange table, you can exchange data with slave modules.

 You can set up the communication format and node ID via HWCONFIG. Refer to section 9.2.3 for more details.

 Refer to section 9.6.1 for more details on operational examples.

Modbus Master

_9 Configuring Modbus Master through ISPSoft

 When AS00SCM-A acts as scanner/master, you can create a data exchange table to exchange data with slave
modules. To initialize Modbus communication: Open ISPSoft. -> HWCONFIG -> AS00SCM-A. Be sure to check
if the DDF version is the same as the actual firmware before setting up.

9-10
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 Set up the node ID and communication format. Go to Edit Area -> Function Card1 / Card 2 Setting.

 Retry times: set the times for the AS00SCM to retry communication. If no response after the set retry
times, a slave timeout alarm will be triggered.

 Received Data Timeout Alarm Enable: available for FW V2.06 or later, you can enable this function so
that if a timeout occurs, an alarm will be triggered. Default: disable.

9_

9 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Select a mode to start. Go to Data Exchange -> Function Card1 / Function Card 2 -> Mode (Program
Control, PLC Run, or Always Enable)

 Program Control: PLC decides whether the set data exchange is performed. Function Card 1 and
Function Card 2 are independent; you can set them up differently.

 PLC Run: The set data exchange will be executed automatically when PLC is in RUN state. If the
PLC is in STOP state, the communication will stop.

 Always Enable: The data exchange will be executed constantly after PLC is powered on.

_9

9-12
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 Create a Data Exchange table: Tick the option Enable first.

 Select the Slave Address and the Remote Device Type from their drop-down list.

 The Shortest Update Cycle (ms): You can set the shortest update cycle in ms. If a timeout error occurs
too often, you can increase the value here, 10 ms as a unit to find out the best setting value.

 Connection Timeouts (ms): You can set the connection timeout time in ms. If for a period of time that
you have set, there is no response from the slave device, this is considered as a timeout. The value here
cannot be set too large, otherwise the PLC will need to wait for the time set for the slave device to
respond, and this will affect and prolong the data exchange time.

 Support Read/Write Synchronization (Function Code: 0x17): the master PLC CPU can use MODBUS
function code to complete read and write synchronization at one operation. However you need to make
sure all the devices support MODBUS function codes; otherwise, the slaves devices may NOT recognize
the function code and fail to complete read/write synchronization.

 After the setting is done, click Download. And you can find the Address of Card 1 / 2 Data Exchange
State under the tab of Normal Exchange Area. If the address value is 1 here, it indicates the data
exchange is a success one.

 Note: When you use HWCONFIG to scan the modules, the data exchange table of AS00SCM-A can NOT be
copied back to HWCONIG. If you need the data exchange table of AS00SCM-A, you can use Upload on the
tool bar to send the data exchange table of AS00SCM-A back to HWCONFIG.

Configuring Modbus Master through DIADesigner-AX

 When AS00SCM acts as the master, the data exchange table can be established to exchange data with slaves. 9_
The operation steps for Modbus communication in DIADesigner-AX are: right-click on Delta_Localbus_Master,
select Scan for Devices, and then double-click on the AS00SCM icon. Make sure that the DDF version and
firmware version of AS00SCM are not earlier than the versions below to avoid function mismatch.
 AX-3 firmware version: V1.0.5.8 or later
 AS00SCM DDF version: V1.0.0.2 or later
 AS00SCM firmware version: V2.08 or later

9-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 AS00SCM DDF version

 AS00SCM firmware version*1

*1. Module Revision will show up only when the module is being monitored online.

 There are two methods to add a communication card:

 Method 1: Right-click on AS00SCM and select Scan for Devices, and then the communication card
configured in AS00SCM will be detected and added as a new one automatically.

_9

9-14
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 Method 2: Right-click on <Empty> and select Plug Device…, and then configure the card that is currently
desired by manual.

 Double-click on the newly added communication card, and select Configuration.

 Communication card setup

9_

9-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Parameter setup for the function card

Parameter Description
Baud Rate Communication rate
Parity Parity bit
Data Bits Data length
Stop Bits Stop bit
Transmission Mode Communication protocol
Data Exchange Activate the data exchange
Received Data Timeout Alarm*1 Activate the wait-timeout alarm when receiving data
Mode*2 Program Control/PLC Run/Always Enable
Retry Count*3 Number of retries
Update Cycle（ms) Cycle time for updates
Connection Timeout（ms) Connection timeout time
*1. Received Data Timeout Alarm:
This function is not activated by default, which means that when communication timeout occurs, the alarm will not be
activated. If the timeout alarm is required, check this option to activate the function.
*2. Mode:
 Program Control: Use the output registers for the normal exchange area to enable and disable the data
exchange. As shown in the figure below, you can set the data exchange items to enable, and write the
trigger instruction in the address for data exchange mode control.

 PLC Run: The data exchange starts when PLC is set to RUN and stops when PLC is set to STOP.
 Always Enable: Regardless of whether the PLC is in RUN or STOP, the data exchange is always
performed.
*3. Retry Count: The alarm for slave communication timeout will be issued only when no response is received after
AS00SCM finishes a set number of retransmissions.
 The data exchange table is set according to the slave address and device type. After finishing setting it, tick
Enable and then click OK. For other parameters, please set them as per your requirements.
_9

9-16
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Parameter Description
Channel Name Channel name
Slave Address Remote station address
Device Type Remote device type

Modbus Slave
9.3.1.2.1 Configuring Modbus Slave through ISPSoft

 When AS00SCM acts as Slave, it provides Master with communication channels to read and write data in AS
CPU.
Addresses and corresponding registers for function card 1 / 2

Address for data to Address for data to

Funciton card Length (character) Length (character)
be written be read
Function card 1 16#0000 100 16#0100 100
Function card 2 16#0200 100 16#0300 100

You can find the corresponding registers in HWCONFIG, after setting up AS00SCM-A as the right-side module of AS
CPU. As the image shown below, you can see the input device range (to write) for Card 1 is from D26000 to D26099
and the output device range (to read) is from D26100 to D26199.

9_

9-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Supported function codes and addresses

Function Supported addresses

Function
code CARD1 CARD2
0x03 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
Read
0x04 16#0100~16#0163 16#0300~16#0363
0x06
Write 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
0x10
16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
Read
0x17 16#0100~16#0163 16#0300~16#0363
Write 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263

9.3.1.2.2 Configuring Modbus Slave through DIADesigner-AX

 When AS00SCM acts as Slave, it provides Master with communication channels to read and write data in AS
CPU.
Addresses and corresponding registers for function card 1 / 2

Address for data to Address for data to

Funciton card Length (character) Length (character)
be written be read
Function card 1 16#0000 100 16#0100 100
Function card 2 16#0200 100 16#0300 100
The slave’s read/write registers are found in the AS-F485 I/O Mapping tabs. You can see FunctionCardInput (to write
data) and FunctionCardOutput (to read data) for Function Card 1 as well as Function Card 2 in the figure below.

_9

9-18
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 Supported function codes and addresses

Function Supported addresses
Function
code CARD1 CARD2
0x03 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
Read
0x04 16#0100~16#0163 16#0300~16#0363
0x06
Write 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
0x10
16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
Read
0x17 16#0100~16#0163 16#0300~16#0363
Write 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263

9_

9-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

UD Link

The UD Link provides communications with devices that communicate via RS232, RS422 or RS485. You can edit a
packet according to its communication format to send and receive packets. This section introduces the use of UD Link
communications in COM mode. For firmware V2.08 or later, it is suggested to use the SCMRS instruction for user-
defined format communication.

Notes:
1. Make sure the knob of SCM module is turned to 0 before operation.

2. SCMSoft is embedded in DCISoft. Go to www.deltaww.com to download the last version of DCISoft.

3. Make sure you are using the last version of COMMGR.

4. Make sure you are an administrator to run ISPSoft.

Steps to Create an UD Link Protocol Communication

1. Setting up in HWCONFIG

Set up the function card. -> Set the communication protocol to UD Link. -> Set up the communication format and
baud rate. -> Download to HWCONFIG. -> Use data length 8 byte as the communication format, 8E1, 8N1, 8O2 and
so forth to ensure a complete transmission. After setting, you need to download HWCONFIG parameters.

_9

9-20
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

2. Opening SCMSoft

Right-click any AS00SCM module if there is more than one AS00SCM module to see the context menu, click
Communication Software and then double-click SCMSoft to open it.

AS00SCM modules can upload UD Link parameters through SCMSoft. Select one slot as one SCM module and one
AS00SCM module at one time.

SCMSoft
 COM PORT Settings: Here is the parameters set in HWCONFIG and it is a read-only page. If you need to edit
the parameters, close SCMSoft first and then go to HWCONFIG to edit.

9_

9-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Group List: One group list corresponds to one slot, and do NOT use the same group list on other slots
repeatedly. The slot number in the group list is the actual placement order of AS00SCM-A on the right-side of
the PLC. For example, the slot number 2 in the group list corresponds to the second module on the right-side of
the PLC. Once the group list is assigned to a certain slot, the CARD 1 and CARD 2 of its corresponding module
can trigger the group list of the selected slot.

_9

 Group List under the Group List: Every group has its Group ID and this number will be used in PLC program as
AS00SCM uses to call for the group to take orders.

9-22
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 Group: Right-click anywhere on the blank area of the Group to create commands. When the Group ID is called,
AS00SCM executes the commands in their numerical order of the called Group ID.

After the group list is created, you can edit packets for transmission.
 Send packet / Receive packet: use the packets to be sent or to be received but they can only be used in the
group where they belong. Commands can be used to execute all kinds of packets.
Send: to send packets
Receive: to receive packets
Send & Receive: to send packets and to receive packets
 COM PORT History: Right-click this node to upload the COM Port History. You can obtain the data stored in the
communication port by selecting the slot (CARD 1 indicating COM 1 and CARD 2 indicating COM2). The data
9_
here include TX and RX packets and the data is included not only AS00SCM data but also other kinds of data as
long as they are from the same communication port.

9-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Refer to the next section for the settings on packets and commands. After the setting is done, download the
parameters from SCMSoft to PLC. And once a group number is trigger, the function card starts to send and receive
packets according to the command order. Make sure you add the group number in the UD Link group address in the
Normal Exchange area. Refer to section 9.6.2 for more details on operation.

TX Packets and RX Packets

You can create several TX and RX packets in a group. A packet includes messages, an address, a length, and a
checksum.

_9
 Packet Name: enter the packet name.

 Packet View: shows the packet contents.

 Packet Segment Edit: adjust the sequence of segments and add or delete segments.

No.: the segment number. You can create no more than 64 segments.

Class: the segment class. The available classes are Message, Address, Length, and Checksum.

9-24
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Format: the data format of the segment. The available data formats are Hex (hexadecimal), ASCII, and Code.

Segment View: the contents of the segment

 Message: a message may be either Constant or Variable. Messages can be applied to a header segment, a start
bit segment, an end bit segment, and a data segment. There can be several messages in a packet.

 Address: an address may be either Constant or Variable. There can be only one address segment in a packet.

 Length: enter the length of a packet. There can be only one length segment in a packet.

Class: 1 byte or 2 byes

Format: select a format for the length, Hex or ASCII

Value: enter a value for the length according to the format; unit: byte

 Checksum: edit the checksum. There can be only one checksum segment in a packet.

Class: select a Class.

Format: select the Format for the checksum.
Initial value: set the initial value for the checksum.
Reverse: the high byte of a one-word checksum is calculated, and the high byte (word) and low byte (byte) of
the checksum are reversed.

 Constant: enter a constant.

Format: Select Hex, ASCII, or Code in the Format box. If you select Code, the data is a control code.

Value: enter a constant .

9_

9-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Variable: a variable data to read or write. Specify either an internal register in AH10SCM-A or a register in a CPU
module.

Format: select the format for the data.

 Null: data is not processed.

 Hex: ASCII data is converted into hexadecimal data. ASCII data that cannot be converted into
hexadecimal data is converted into 0.

 ASCII: Hexadecimal data is converted into ASCII data. Hexadecimal data that cannot be converted into
ASCII data is converted into 0.

 Reverse: the high byte of a one-word checksum which is calculated, and the low byte of the checksum
are reversed.

Variable Property:

 Function: for a TX packet, select Read R() for the Function. For an RX packet, select Read R(), Write
W(), or * for the Function.

 Mapping Register: select a register in the PLC.

Length Property:

 Function: It is suggested to select to determine the length (*) automatically. The data length can be
specified between the packet interval (around 4 character time length) and should receive all data. Select
Read R ( ) for a variable. And then you can select its corresponding register. The value here is the length.
Select Constant and then you can define the data length. For a TX packet, you can select the variable
and the constant length. For a RX packet, you can select a variable, constant and determine the length
(*) automatically.

Command
After creating several TX and RX packets, create commands to select packets to be sent and packets to be received.
Also create a sequence to execute the commands.

_9

 Command No.: every command has a number. The Command Number indicates the execution order. You can
also use this Command Number to appoint a certain packet for transmission when using Goto function.

 Command Type: select Send, Receive, or Send & Receive for the Command Type. Once the type Send is
selected, when the packet is sent, the transmission is considered successful. Once the type Send & Receive is

9-26
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

selected, AS00SCM-A checks if the received data met the definition of RX packet. When they are matched, the
transmission is considered successful.

 Send Packet: select a packet to send.

 Receive Packet: select a packet to receive.

 Success: specify the action to follow the successful execution of the command: Next, Goto, or End.

 Next: the next command is executed based on Command Number. If the command that is being executed
is command 1, the next command that will be executed is command 2.

 Goto: specify a later command to be executed based on its Command Number.

 End: end the sequence of commands.

 Fail: specify the action to follow the failure of the command: Next, Goto, or Abort.

 Next: the next command is executed based on Command Number. If the command that is being
executed is command 1, the next command that will be executed is command 2.

 Goto: specify a later command to be executed based on its Command Number.

 Abort: end the sequence of commands.

 Retry: set the number of times the command will be retried after a failure.

 Repeat: set the number of times the command will be repeated after successful execution.

 Send Wait: set an interval in milliseconds for the sequence to wait between commands. The default is 0
milliseconds, which causes the next command to be executed immediately after a reply is received.

 Timeout: set the amount of time in milliseconds for the system to wait for the command to be executed before
the system reports a communication timeout. The default is 50 milliseconds. When it is set to 0, there
is no timeout message and the module is at the status of waiting to receive.

Return to Default

Select Tools in SCMSoft and select Return to Default. Select the slot (module) you need to reset and clear all the
saved settings in UD Link mode. After that turn off and then turn on AS00SCM-A so that UD Link mode can work
again.

9_

9-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CANopen Mode

The installed on the right side of AS Series PLC CPU, AS00SCM-A (firmware V2.00 or later) can be connected to an
AS-FCOPM module through the Card 2 slot. It can then be used as a slave for other modules in the CANopen
network environment.

Features
When using the AS00SCM-A as a slave module, it has the following features:

 Complies with CANopen DS301 V4.02

 Supports NMT Slave

 Error-controlled; supports Heartbeat and Node-Guarding Protocols

 Supports PDO; up to 8 TxPDO and 8 RxPDO can be configured for every slave.

 PDO transmission type: event triggered, time triggered, synchronous cyclic, synchronous acyclic

 Supports SDO:
Server: 1
User: 0
Supports SDO (expedited SDO) transmission mode

 Supports Emergency Protocol

_9

9-28
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Input / Output Device Range

Input / Output Device Range in ISPSoft

When the AS00SCM-A module acts as a CANopen slave, the CPU PLC assigns the input/output device ranges
according to the placement of the AS00SCM-A. The corresponding input/output device ranges from the right hand
side of the CPU PLC are shown in the example below from the HWCONFIG utility. The red boxes below are the data
exchange sections for AS00SCM-A modules acting as CANopen slaves.

9_

9-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Input / Output Device Range in DIADesigner-AX

When AS00SCM-A acts as a CANopen slave, the CPU assigns the input/output device ranges according to the
placement of the AS00SCM-A. The red boxes below are the data exchange sections for respective AS00SCM-A
modules acting as CANopen slaves.

_9

9-30
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

9.4 RTU Mode

Here you can find the introductions on the communication through CANopen and EtherNet/IP remote mode. For
PROFINET remote mode, refer to Chapter 10.2.8.

Function AS-FEN02 AS-FPFN02

AS-FCOPM
card (V1.02 or later) (V2.00 or later)
AS Special Remote
Mode, Delta Special CANopen DS301 EtherNet/IP PROFINET
Function
Drive, AS Remote (Slave) (Slave) (Slave)
Mode
Card slot CARD 2 CARD 1 and CARD 2
AS00SCM-A
- - - -
V1.00
AS00SCM-A
V - - -
V2.00
AS00SCM-A
V V V -
V2.02
AS00SCM-A
V V V V
V2.06
AS00SCM-A
V V V V
V2.08

 When AS00SCM-A is used as a remote module, its right side supports the following AS series I/O modules.
When AS00SCM-A acts as a CANopen remote module, the followings are supported.
AS08AM10N-A, AS16AM10N-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS64AM10N-A, AS08AN01P-A,
Digital Module AS08AN01R-A, AS08AN01T-A, AS16AN01P-A, AS16AN01R-A, AS16AN01T-A, AS32AN02T-
A , AS64AN02T-A , AS16AP11P-A, AS16AP11R-A, AS16AP11T-A
AS04AD-A, AS08AD-B, AS08AD-C, AS02ADH-A, AS04RTD-A, AS06RTD-A, AS04TC-A,
Analog Module
AS08TC-A, AS04DA-A, AS06XA-A, AS02LC-A
Network Module AS04SIL-A (for AS00SCM-A FW V2.06 or later)

When AS00SCM-A acts as an EtherNet/IP remote module, the followings are supported.
AS08AM10N-A, AS16AM10N-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS64AM10N-A, AS08AN01P-A, AS08AN01R-
Digital Module A, AS08AN01T-A, AS16AN01P-A, AS16AN01R-A, AS16AN01T-A, AS32AN02T-A , AS64AN02T-
A , AS16AP11P-A, AS16AP11R-A, AS16AP11T-A
Analog AS04AD-A, AS08AD-B, AS08AD-C, AS02ADH-A, AS04RTD-A, AS06RTD-A, AS04TC-A,
Module AS08TC-A, AS04DA-A, AS06XA-A, AS02LC-A

When AS00SCM-A acts as a PROFINET remote module, the followings are supported.
AS08AM10N-A, AS16AM10N-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS64AM10N-A, AS08AN01P-A, AS08AN01R- 9_
Digital Module A, AS08AN01T-A, AS16AN01P-A, AS16AN01R-A, AS16AN01T-A, AS32AN02T-A , AS64AN02T-
A , AS16AP11P-A, AS16AP11R-A, AS16AP11T-A
Analog AS04AD-A, AS08AD-B, AS08AD-C, AS04RTD-A, AS06RTD-A, AS04TC-A, AS08TC-A, AS04DA-
Module A, AS06XA-A

9-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM)

When the function card AS-FCOPM works with an AS series PLC, it supports three kinds of RTU modes, including AS
Remote Communication, CANopen DS301 Mode and Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode. Use the knob
FORMAT 1 to turn among three RTU modes.

 RTU Communication Mode Setup Knob “FORMAT 1”

FORMAT1 Description
0 AS Remote Communication
4 CANopen DS301
8 Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode

 Node ID Setup Knob “ID1/ID2”

 ID1: 0 (recommended)

 ID2: 0 (the knob is no function; set up through ISPSoft); see the table below for the knob setting
range.

RTU mode FORMAT1 ID2 setting range

AS Remote
0 1~F (by the number of remote slaves and set in a consecutive order)
Communication
1~F (by the number of DS301 slaves)
CANopen DS301 4
16-64 (if the knob is at 0, the setting range is set by HWCONFIG)
Delta Special Driver &
8 9~F (by the number of remote slaves and set in a consecutive order)
AS Remote Mode
Compound modes:
4 16-20 and 29-64 (by the number of DS301 slaves)
AS Remote
Communication and
8 9~F (by the number of remote slaves and set in a consecutive order)
CANopen DS301

 RTU Communication Speed Setup Knob “FORMAT 2”

Use the knob for setting. You cannot use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the communication mode in this
format.

FORMAT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-F
Byte (bps) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 1000K NA
Distance (m) 5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 25 NA

_9

9-32
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

AS Remote Communication Mode

 AS series CPU setup: Double-click the AS Series PLC, then in Device Setting, click Function Card 2 Setting
and set the function card 2 to AS-FCOPM, set to working mode to AS Remote Communication Mode, enter the
number of the AS remote module and set up the baud rate. After the setting is done, download the parameters.

 AS00SCM-A setup: Turn the FORMAT1 knob to 0 and it is in AS Remote Communication Mode. In AS Remote
Communication mode, an AS series CPU PLC can connect to as many as 15 AS00SCM-A modules, as long as
they are all in RTU mode. The RTU station number should be set from 1 to 15 in numerical order. RTU mode
and baud rate cannot be set via ISPSoft (HWCONFIG). Use the knob ID2 to set up Node ID and use the knob
FORMAT2 to set up the baud rate. (The baud rate should be the same as the PLC’s baud rate.)

9_

9-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Steps for a quick setup

1. Set up the PLC: AS Remote Communication mode, number of the device: 1; baud rate: 1000kbps;
download the parameters.

2. Set up AS00SCM-A; set the ID1 knob to 0 and FORMAT1 to 0; ID2 knob to 1 and FORMAT2 to 7.

3. Supply power to AS00SCM-A and connect AS00SCM-A to the PLC with a CANopen cable.

4. Resupply power to the PLC and the indicator of CARD2 should keep blinking. That indicates AS00SCM-A
and the PLC are connected. The PLC error indicator should be blinking too, since the setting is not done
yet.

5. Use HWCONFIG to scan the connected devices to see if AS00SCM-A is connected.

6. Download the parameters and check if the PLC error indicator has stopped blinking. Then the setting of one
RTU device is complete.

Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode

1. AS series CPU setup: Double-click the AS Series PLC, then in Device Setting click Function Card 2 Setting
and set the function card 2 to AS-FCOPM, set to working mode to Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode and
enter the number of the AS remote module and set up the baud rate. After the setting is done, download the
parameters.

_9

2. Turn the FORMAT1 knob to 8, and it is in Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode. In this mode, an AS series
CPU PLC can connect to as many as 7 AS00SCM-A modules, as long as they are all in RTU mode. The RTU
station number should be set from 9 to 15 in numerical order. RTU mode and baud rate cannot be set via

9-34
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

ISPSoft (HWCONFIG). Use the knob ID2 to set up Node ID and use the knob FORMAT2 to set up the baud
rate. (The baud rate should be the same as the PLC’s baud rate.)

 Steps for a quick setup

1. Set up the PLC: Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Modem mode, number of the device: 1; baud rate: 1000kbps;
download the parameters.

2. Set up AS00SCM-A; set the ID1 knob to 0 and FORMAT1 to 8; ID2 knob to 9 and FORMAT2 to 7.

3. Supply power to AS00SCM-A and connect AS00SCM-A to the PLC with a CANopen cable.

4. Resupply power to the PLC and the indicator of CARD2 should keep blinking. That indicates AS00SCM-A and
the PLC are connected. The PLC error indicator should be blinking too, since the setting is not done yet.

5. Use HWCONFIG to scan the connected devices to see if AS00SCM-A is connected.

6. Download the parameters and check if the PLC error indicator has stopped blinking. Then the setting of one RTU
device is complete.

CANopen DS301 Mode

1. This mode supports AS Series PLC acts as the CPU and the 3rd party CANopen DS301 devices (non-AS series
devices and non-Delta PLC). When using Delta PLC as the CPU, you need to use CANopen Builder to set up.

2. Before using a 3rd party PLC, use AS Series PLC as the CPU and select the AS Remote Communication Mode.

3. Before connecting to CANopen DS301 master, turn the AS00SCM-A FORMAT1 knob to 4, and the adjustable
range for station knob ID2 becomes 0x1h~0xFh. This mode can be used to communicate with a Master PLC
from other brand through the CANopen configuration software of the master. See the detail in section 9.6.3.
When the PDO mapping configuration is done, the I/O modules on the right side of AS00SCM-A can be
controlled remotely.

9_

9-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Steps for a quick setup

1. Set up the PLC: in AS Remote Communication Mode, connect AS series PLC to AS00SCM-A, refer to section
9.4.1.1 for more details.

2. Use AS series PLC to scan the I/O modules installed on the right-side of AS00SCM-A and download the
parameters.

3. If using HWCONFIG to set up the node ID, you can use COM mode to connect AS00SCM-A to the right-side of
AS series PLC directly and no I/O module behind it. Use AS series PLC’s HWCONFIG to scan and add
AS00SCM-A in and then double-click the module to set up its node ID and then download the parameters. After
that, knob ID2 to 0.

4. Install the I/O module to the right side of AS00SCM-A and turn the working mode to RTU.

5. Turn FORMAT1 to 4 and use the CANopen cable to connect to the PLC, and then supply power to AS series
PLC.

6. Follow master’s CANopen setting method to install the slaves.

Note: Refer to section 9.6.3 for PDO configuration, if you are using AH10COPM-5A as the master.

EtherNet/IP Mode

 AS-FEN02 can be installed on AS00SCM-A (firmware V2.02 or later). However, AS00SCM-A+AS-FEN02 can only
be used in RTU mode, called ASRTU-EIP below. That means this set can NOT be installed on the right side of AS
PLC CPU. You can use Delta PLC or the 3rd-party EtherNet/IP master device to control the right-side modules of
ASRTU-EIP.

 Use the following version combinations to have a good compatibility and operation experience.
AS-FEN02 AS00SCM-A Remark
V1.00 V2.02
 Adds the support for AH series masters.
V1.02 V2.04  Fixes some problems to improve
communication performance.
Compatible  Optimizes the operation process in Delta
firmware version software
V1.03 V2.06
 Optimizes the data transmission
mechanism to enhance data integrity
 Adds the 3rd party master connection mode.
V1.04 V2.08
 Adds the webpage of network diagnostic

 It is suggested to use ISPSoft V3.13 or later versions when AS00SCM-A+AS-FEN02 is used in remote mode with
AS or AH PLC CPU. Use HWCONFIG V4.0 or later versions or use DIADesigner to set up EtherNet/IP for AS PLC
CPU and use EIP Builder to set up EtherNet/IP for AH PLC CPU.
 When AS00SCM-A+AS-FEN02 is used with the 3rd party EtherNet/IP Scanner, you need to set up the remote I/O
modules in EIP Builder (V1.06 or later) or on the webpage. Go to Delta Official Website Delta | Download Center
_9 (deltaww.com)
(steps: Select Product Category: Industrial Automation; Select Product Sub-Category: PLC- Programmable Logic
Controllers; Select Series: AS Series; Filter: Electrical Parameter and click Submit and then find the EtherNet/IP
EDS File: AS00SCM-RTU (AS-FEN02)) to download the EDS file and then install the downloaded EDS file in the
EtherNet/IP software. Refer to the user manual of the 3rd party EtherNet/IP Scanner for more information.
 Refer to section 10.2.7 for more details on the operations of AS-FEN02 installed on AS Series PLC.

9-36
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

LED Indicators
 AS00SCM-A acting as a remote module

LED Indicator Description

CARD 1 LED indicator Orange light blinking: when AS-FEN02 sends data to AS00SCM-A
CARD 2 LED indicator Orange light blinking: when AS00SCM-A sends data to AS-FEN02
Indicates if there is any error on the module
OFF: the module is operating normally
Error LED indicator (red)
Blinking: an error has occurred or occurs on the module; refer to section
9.7 for more information.
 AS-FEN02 installed on AS00SCM-A

LED Indicator Description

Indicates the status of the communication card
Green light ON: the operation is normal
Green light Blinking: the setting is not complete
Red and green lights are blinking alternately:
 Initializing
MS indicator  The unstable external power supply causes internal communication
(MS, Module Status) failure. After checking the external power supply, resupply the power.
Red light ON: The card installed at the function card slot is not secured
enough, causing internal communication failure. Reinstall the card after
power-off.
Red light Blinking: internal communication timeout
OFF: no power
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
Green light ON: a CIP connection is established
Green light Blinking: a CIP connection is not established
NS indicator Red light ON: duplicated IP address, after fixing this issue, resupply the
(NS, Network Status) power.
Red light Blinking: communication timeout / CIP connection is established
after power-on / IP address change
OFF: no power / network cable is not connected
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
Ethernet LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicates the status of Ethernet communication
Ethernet ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission

IP Setting Tool
When the knobs are set to 0 for ASRTU-EIP, the IP address is 192.168.1.3 by default. If there are more than one
9_
ASRTU-EIP in the system, you need to set up the IP addresses for them first.

Here are four methods for you to set up the IP address for AS-FEN02 installed on AS00SCM-A.

1. Using knobs: Highly suggested. You can use ID2 and FORMAT2 knobs to set up the IP address.
Hexadecimal format is used and ID2 corresponds to x161 and FORMAT 2 to x160. The possible IP address is
192.168.1.x, x=1~FE (1~254).

9-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. Using the IP Setting Tool: AS-FEN02 firmware V1.02.40 or later supports the IP Setting Tool, which is embedded
in COMMGR V2.0 or later. The tool identifies a device via its MAC address. Thus, even if the IP address duplication
occurs or an IP address of ASRTU-EIP is inconsistent with the network segment for the computer, the devices can
still be identified for you to set up their IP addresses.
For example:
 When there are two or more ASRTU-EIPs with the same IP address of 192.168.1.3 in the network, you
can still use this setting tool to modify the IP address of each ASRTU-EIP at the same time.
 When the IP of an ASRTU-EIP is 192.168.1.3, but the IP of the network interface card (adapter) of the
computer is 192.168.10.5, you can still use this setting tool to modify the IP address of the ASRTU-EIP.

Operation steps:

1) Set all four knobs of ASRTU-EIP to 0 and connect to the computer via Ethernet.
2) Open the IP Settings Tool.

3) Select the adapter type and click IP Search or Broadcast Search and then you can edit the
parameters. After the editing is complete, select the device you’d like to download and then click
Download.

3. Using DHCP: You can set the device to DHCP mode with the knobs, and Delta software provides the DHCP
server.

_9 Operation steps:
1) Ensure that both ID1 and FORMAT 1 of the remote module are set to 0 and both ID2 and FORMAT 2 are
set to F, and then use Ethernet to connect to your computer.

2) Open IP Manager ( built in COMMGR V2.0 or later).

9-38
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

3) Click Stop the Server and then select a suitable Network Interface. Click Start the Server to complete
the setting. After that, you need to turn the power OFF and then ON so that the devices will send DHCP
requests to the computer.

4) Check the device in the DHCP request form to assign the IP address to its corresponding MAC address.
You can also export the corresponding table. After the assignment is complete, you can see the result in
the status section.

4. Using the webpages: This method is supported by AS-FEN02 firmware V2.08 or later, suitable for the quick setup
of a single ASRTU-EIP module.
Operation steps:
1) Set all four knobs of ASRTU-EIP to 0 and connect to the computer via Ethernet.
2) Enter the Network setup tab.

9_

3) After finishing editing, press Apply.

9-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4) The settings take effect after being saved.

Connecting to Delta AS PLC Master

Delta AS series PLC can make the EtherNet/IP connection with ASRTU-EIP (AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02). Below shows
an example of how to make such a connection via ISPSoft V3.13 or later. To use DIADesigner to create the connection,
refer to DIADesigner operation manual for details on operations.

1. Connect your AS PLC CPU, ASRTU-EIP and computer through EtherNet. Set up the IP addresses for the
computer, AS PLC CPU and ASRTU-EIP, and make sure they are in the same network.

2. Set the knobs of ASRTU-EIP: ID2=6 and FORMAT2=C. The IP address of ASRTU-EIP is 192.168.1.108
(16#006C=108).

3. Communication Setup: Open COMMGR to scan the devices in the network.

1) Add a new driver and set a name for the driver.

2) Select Ethernet as the communication type.

3) Choose a proper Ethernet card.

4) Click Search, and select to confirm that the AS PLC CPU and AS-FEN02 are found. If they are not found,
please check if the Ethernet cable is properly connected.

5) Save the driver.

_9

9-40
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

4. Open a project in ISPSoft, and upload the project after the communication settings are complete.

5. Enter HWCONFIG, and click the AS PLC CPU icon to open the EtherNet/IP configuration window.

6. Scan the network: Tick ASRTU-EIP and then click OK to add the device in the EtherNet/IP network.

9_

7. Establish a connection: Connect ASRTU-EIP to the network of AS PLC CPU, and then its right side I/O modules
are configured automatically.

9-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8. Set up module: Go back to HWCONFIG and Click ASRTU-EIP to see the RTU Configuration (Dev_0) option and
then click it to open the setting page for the right-side modules, ASRTU and the handlings after the connection
lost. Refer to section 9.4.3 for more information on remote module setting.

_9

9. Data Exchange: Go to EtherNet/IP setting page and click the Show Data Exchange option to view the setting
page.

9-42
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

You can adjust parameters including RPI and Timeout below to ensure a stabilized communication.
 RPI (Requested Packet Interval): The value here is to set how often to renew the data between the
Scanner and Adapter cyclically and thus increase the value here can lower the risk of EtherNet/IP
Scanner network overload. Whenever a connection-lost error occurs, you can edit the setting here
to troubleshoot.
 Timeout: Set the timeout time according to the RPI or the multiple of RPI (RPI*X). This is used to
determine if the connection between the scanner/adapter and the remote device is lost. Increase the
value here can make longer the waiting time for the remote device to respond. It is useful when the
9_
remote device is busy. But by increasing the value here can NOT solve the problem of network
overload.
10. Download: Use the function button Download under the Communication tab in EtherNet/IP setting page to
download the EtherNet/IP parameters. Make sure you are in the setting page of EtherNet/IP.

11. Check the connection: Click the function button On-line Mode under the Communication tab in EtherNet/IP
setting to check the EtherNet/IP connection status.

9-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

12. HWCONFIG Table Synchronization: After setting is complete, you can synchronize the devices used by
ASRTU-EIP with ISPSoft.

1) Open HWCONFIG Table.

2) You can edit the identifier one by one or click Set All Identifiers to set all identifiers at one time.

3) Go to ISPSoft -> Global Symbols -> HWCONFIG Table: right-click anywhere on the blank area to see and
click the option Synchronize with HWCONFIG. After the synchronization is complete, ASRTU devices are
shown in array and available to be used in PLC program.

Connecting to Delta AH PLC Master

_9 Through EIP Builder, Delta AH series PLC (when acting as a master) can make the EtherNet/IP connection with
ASRTU-EIP (AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02). Here are the operation steps.

1. Connect your AH PLC CPU, ASRTU-EIP and computer through EtherNet/IP. Set up the IP addresses for your
computer, AH PLC CPU and ASRTU-EIP and make sure they are in the same network.

2. Enter HWCONFIG through ISPSoft and then open EIP Builder.

9-44
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

3. Scan the network to add ASRTU-EIP in EIP Builder. Drag the red block and drag it to the same network
(Network_0) as the AH Series PLC does. Double-click ASRTU-EIP to open RTU-HWCONFIG, and set the
parameters for ASRTU-EIP. After the setting is done, save them and close the RTU-HWCONFIG window.

4. Set up data mapping: right-click the red dot on the AH PLC icon to open the data mapping table.

9_

9-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5. After the setting is done, click the Download icon in the tool bar of EIP Builder and then select the parameters
that you want to download.

_9  RTU Parameters: all the parameters set in RTU-HWCONFIG above.

 Data exchange: data mapping area in the PLC for the right-side modules of ASRTU-EIP

9-46
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Master

The following firmware versions for AS-FEN02 and AS00SCM-A support the ASRTU-EIP module working with the
non-Delta EtherNet/IP master.

 AS-FEN02: V1.04 or later

 AS00SCM-A: V2.08 or later

Module Operation:

1. Connect ASRTU-EIP to your computer and open EIP Builder.

2. You can manually add ASRTU-EIP or scan the network to add the remote module to the network. Click the
remote module to open RTU-HWCONFIG to scan and download the parameters of its right side modules.

9_

9-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 When there are no parameters to be set for the modules on the right side of ASRTU-EIP, you can just use
the webpage setup to enable the auto configuration of I/O modules. For example, when there is only a
digital module on the right side of ASRTU-EIP, the setting process in EIP Builder can be omitted and use
the following Remote module setting page to enable the Auto I/O Module Allocation function.
 Open the webpage for ASRTU-EIP and enter the Remote module setting tab page.

 Set Auto I/O Module Allocation to Enable.

 After the setting is done, press Apply.
 After saving the configuration settings, repower the module.

_9

9-48
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Connection Setup
Please download the EDS file (electronic description file) for AS00SCM-RTU (AS-FEN02) firmware V1.08 or later
from Delta official website.
1. Install the EDS file.
2. After the file installation is complete, you can add a new device. Open the webpage for ASRTU-EIP and set the
data lengths according to the information provided on the webpage.
(Note that the unit of data lengths here is INT.)

3. After the setting is done, the module data can be used according to the offset values displayed on the webpage.
4. The AS00SCM-A’s own parameters are fixed in the range of 0-29 for input data and 0-19 for output data in
length, and the total length is the sum of data lengths for all devices.
Note: If the EDS file cannot be installed successfully, you can create a general device and then fill in the
Instances and data lengths for Input and Output. 9_

9-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Webpage Function
When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 PLC and AS00SCM-A (RTU mode), the webpages for AS-FEN02 can be
accessed through a browser. There are some differences on webpage display when the function card is installed on
AS300 PLC and AS00SCM-A respectively. Below is the functionality of the webpages for the card installed on
AS00SCM-A. See section 10.2.7.9 for the webpage introduction when the card is installed on AS300 PLC.

Account name "Admin" and password-free login are factory settings for entering the webpages of AS-FEN02. It is
suggested that you set the password for the default account "Admin" when logging in for the first time.

List of browsers that support the webpages for AS-FEN02:

Supported browser Version

Microsoft Internet Explorer V10.0 or later

Microsoft Edge V20 or later

Google Chrome V14 or later

Apple Safari V5.1 or later

 Installing AS-FEN02 in AS00SCM-A

1. Modify the IP address of AS-FEN02 with the knobs on AS00SCM-A, and other operation steps are the same as
those for installing the function card on AS300.
2. AS-FEN02 installed on AS00SCM-A supports the right-side module status monitoring on the Hardware status
page as well as the EtherNet/IP connections reading on the EtherNet/IP information page. The display pages
for permissions are defined as follows:
Permission
Display page
Administrator Read

Device information*1 V V

Network setup*3 V X

Permitted IP list*3 V X

Remote module setting*3 V X

Account management V X

Firmware update V X

Hardware status V V

Network diagnostic*3 V V
_9
DLR status*3 V V

EtherNet/IP information*2 V V

Address allocation*3 V V

Save configuration V X

9-50
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Note:
*1. AS-FEN02 V1.03 or later with AS00SCM-A V2.06 or later supports the device information display for
AS00SCM-A.
*2. AS-FEN02 V1.03 or later supports the display page.
*3. AS-FEN02 V1.04 or later supports the display page.
3. Network setup: The IP address can be set on this page only when the four knobs of AS00SCM-A are set to 0.
4. Permitted IP List: Set up the devices for connection to be established. If you fail to log in to the webpage due to
the setting values forgotten, please restore A-FEN02 to default settings through AS00SCM-A.
5. Remote module setting: Remote module parameters such as auto I/O module allocation and error handling
mechanisms can be set up here.
6. Hardware status: You can monitor the names, current data, status, and error codes of the right-side I/O
modules on this page. Modify the value of Refresh cycle to adjust the cycle for status update.

7. Network diagnostic: See section 4.2.7.

8. DLR status: See section 9.4.2.8.
9. Address allocation: Shows Modbus TCP addresses. See section 9.4.2.9 for details.
10. EtherNet/IP information: When you use a non- Delta EtherNet/IP Scanner, the data on this page are required
as connection parameters. See section 9.4.2.5 for details.

9_

9-51
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Network Diagnostic
AS-FEN02 firmware version V1.04 or later supports the webpage displaying network diagnostic information.

DLR Network

AS-FEN02 firmware version V1.04 or later supports DLR network, where only ring nodes are supported and only the
ring supervisor can establish a complete backup network. The webpage displaying DLR status is supported.

_9

9-52
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Address Allocation
AS-FEN02 firmware V1.04 or later with AS00SCM-A firmware V2.08 or later supports Modbus TCP addresses and
EtherNet/IP objects.
Modbus TCP address
Enter the webpage for ASRTU-EIP to confirm Modbus TCP addresses on the page of Address allocation.

EtherNet/IP object
Class ID 0x301 (Fixed)
Instance 0x01 (Fixed)
Attribute Modbus address +1

 For example:
Modbus address = 0xA001
→ {Class, Instance, Attribute} = {0x301, 0x01, 0xA002}

Network Security

To enhance security and performance of the system, it is suggested to use closed network or LAN with firewall
protection to prevent cyber-attacks.

Remote Module Setting

1. Double-click AS00SCM-A -> AS remote module in Device Setting and click AS Serial Remote Module. To set up
the remote module in RTU mode, set the function card type 2 to AS-FCOPM, AS-FEN02 or AS-FPFN02.

2. For AS00SCM-A with firmware V2.04 or previous versions, parameter-downloading for ASRTU is connection lost.
If the handling of lost connection is all the I/O modules stop running (default), you need to turn the power off and 9_
then on again after downloading is complete.

9-53
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 AS-FEN02 firmware V1.04 or later working with AS00SCM-A firmware V2.08 or later supports the setting of
right-side modules on the webpage.

1) When a Scanner (Master) connection is lost

 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running

 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running

2) When a Scanner has reconnected after the connection lost

 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running

 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running

3) When an alarm occurs in an I/O module

_9  I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running (after resupply power to resume running)

 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running

4) When an I/O connection is lost

 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running (after resupply power to resume running)

 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running

9-54
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Analog Output Module

Digital & Analog Digital Output
Procedure Settings (RTU) (I/O Module Settings)
Input Modules Modules
Clear Keep

No change to
I/O module stops Output value
Master Output value = 0 the output
running Cannot update data =0
connection value
on the master
lost
I/O module keeps
No change to the output value
the same state

Master has No change to

I/O module stops Output value
reconnected Output value = 0 the output
running Keep updating data =0
after value
on the master
connection
lost. I/O module keeps
Output value = output value of the master
the same state
No change to
I/O module stops No change to the Output value
Output value = 0 the output
Alarm in I/O running output value =0
value
module
Other functional
(Ex. module
I/O module keeps modules: keep Other functional modules:
is broken)
the same state updating data on the output value = output value of the master
master
No change to
I/O module stops No change to the Output value
I/O Output value = 0 the output
running output value =0
connection value
lost Other functional
(Ex. unstable I/O module keeps modules: keep Other functional modules:
connection) the same state updating data on the output value = output value of the master
master
 Module configurations: refer to section 8.1.2 in the AS Series Operation Manual.

 Module setups: refer to other chapters in the AS Series Module Manual.

9_

9-55
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

9.5 Normal Exchange Area

1) COM mode

The examples above shows that AS00SCM-A is installed as the first module on the right side of AS PLC CPU;
note that the Normal Exchange Area shows the corresponding data registers of the module and the PLC.

 Module Status: 0 = stop, 1 = run

 Error Code: refer to section 9.7 for more information.

 Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange State: occupies 4 data registers (32-bit data); each bit 1–32 represents the
state of the corresponding data point 1–32 to be exchanged: 0 = none/fail, 1 = success.

 Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange Mode Control: set the data register to 0: none, 1: once, 2: always.

 Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange Trigger: occupies 4 data registers; each bit 1–32 represents the state of the
corresponding data point 1–32 to be exchanged: 0 = no trigger, 1 = trigger.

 Card 1 & Card 2 UD Link Group ID Trigger: set the group ID to be triggered.

2) RTU Mode: (AS Series PLC acting as a Scanner)

_9

9-56
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 RTU Error Code: refer to section 9.7 for more information.

 I/O Module Error Code: refer to the I/O module manual for more information.

 RTU Operation Status: 0 = communication module stop, 1 = communication module run

3) RTU Mode: (AH Series PLC acting as a Scanner)

 RTU State: 0 = communication module is working fine, 1 = communication module is NOT working fine.

 RTU Error Code: refer to section 9.7 for more information.

 Power State:０= power error, 1 = power normal

 I/O Module State: each I/O module uses 1 bit to show its status (0 = normal , 1 = not running normally)

 I/O Module Error Code: refer to the I/O module manual for more information.

 RTU Operation State: 0 = communication module stop, 1 = communication module run

9_

9-57
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

9.6 Applications
Modbus

This section introduces how to use the Modbus protocol to connect the AS00SCM-A to other Delta industrial products
such as human-machine interfaces, temperature controllers, programmable logic controllers, AC motor drives, and
servo motors.

Modbus Slave

Modbus Slave Application through ISPSoft

The following table shows the slave station supports the following function codes and their corresponding addresses.

Function Addresses Supported

Function
Code CARD1 CARD2
0x03 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
Read
0x04 16#0100~16#0163 16#0300~16#0363
0x06
Write 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
0x10
16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
Read
0x17 16#0100~16#0163 16#0300~16#0363
Write 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
The structures:

Example of a slave structure: HMI (master station)  AS-F485 + AS00SCM-A COM1 (slave station)

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Station Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
read module written module
HMI 5 9600, RTU, 8, E, 1 16#0100 D26100 16#0000 D26000

If the AS00SCM-A functions as a Modbus slave, you need to set a slave ID and baud rate.

1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the knob of AS00SCM-A is turned to COM
mode and no power connected to it.

_9

9-58
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

2) Click the I/O Scan button to make the system read the module’s current configuration. The PLC assigns the input
and output device ranges.

Device from which Register in the Device into which Register in the
Function card
data is read CPU module data is written CPU module
Function card 1 16#0000 D26000 16#0100 D26100
Function card 2 16#0200 D26200 16#0300 D26300

3) Double-click the SCM module to open the configuration settings.

9_

9-59
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4) Set the communication protocol values for COM1 using the HMI settings.

5) Click the Download button to download the parameters to the AS00SCM-A.

NOTE: Double-click the module to open the Device Setting dialog box to configure the parameters.

9.6.1.1.1 Modbus Slave Application through DIADesigner-AX

The following table shows that the slave supports the following function codes and their corresponding addresses.
Function Addresses Supported
Function
Code CARD1 CARD2
0x03 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
Read
0x04 16#0100~16#0163 16#0300~16#0363
0x06
Write 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
0x10
16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263
Read
0x17 16#0100~16#0163 16#0300~16#0363
Write 16#0000~16#0063 16#0200~16#0263

The connection structure:

_9 Example on Modbus slave: HMI (master station)  AS-F485 + AS00SCM-A COM1 (slave station)

Address from which Address into which data is

Product Station ID Communication protocol
data is read written
HMI 5 9600, RTU, 8, E, 1 16#0100 16#0000
If the AS00SCM-A with AS-F485 functions as a Modbus slave, you need to set the slave ID and baud rate for the
master to connect to it.

9-60
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the knob of AS00SCM-A is turned to
COM mode and no power connected to it.

2) With a click on Device Scan, the PLC assigns the input and output device ranges based on the position
configured for AS00SCM-A.

3) Double-click on the AS_F485 function card to enter the AS-F485 I/O Mapping tab.

9_

9-61
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Addresses in function card 1 and corresponding registers in the master:

Address into
Function Corresponding Address from Corresponding
which data is
card register in master which data is read register in master
written
Function
16#0000 %IW7*1 16#0100 %QW7*1
card 1
*1. The address is not fixed, which depends on the allocated address after sofware compiling.
4) Set the communication format in the Configuration tab, which should be the same as that for HMI.

5) Click the Download button to download the configured parameters to the AS00SCM-A.

_9

9-62
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Modbus Master

Modbus Master Application through ISPSoft

This section introduces how to use COM2 to connect the AS00SCM-A to other Delta industrial products such as Delta
programmable logic controllers, AC motor drives, and servo motors.

The structures:

Example of a master structure: AS-F485 + AS00SCM-A COM2 (master station)  VFD, ASDA, and DVP series PLC.

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Communication
Product Slave ID which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
protocol
read module written module
16#2000 D26300-
VFD 10 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#2103 D26200
16#2001 D26301
ASDA 11 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#0101 D26210 16#0101 D26310
D26220- D26320-
PLC 12 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D100-D109 D200-D204
D26229 D26324

If the AS00SCM-A is functioning as a Modbus master, you need to set a slave ID and baud rate.

1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the knob of AS00SCM-A is turned to COM
mode and no power connected to it.

9_

9-63
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2) Double-click COM2 Setting and set the Function Card Type to AS-F485.

3) Click the I/O Scan button to make the system read the module’s current configuration. The PLC assigns the input
and output device ranges.

_9

9-64
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

4) Double-click the SCM module to open the configuration settings.

5) Set the communication protocol values for COM2 as shown in the figure below.

9_

9-65
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6) Set up the data exchange table: select Data Exchange – COM2 and click Add to create a new Data Exchange
Setup table.

7) In the Data Exchange Setup table, double-click an item to edit its settings.

 Select Standard Modbus Device as the Remote Device Type, enter the parameters, and check Enable.

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
_9 read module written module
16#2000 D26300-
VFD 10 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#2103 D26200
16#2001 D26301

9-66
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 Select Standard Modbus Device as the Remote Device Type, enter the ASDA parameters, and check
Enable.

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
read module written module
ASDA 11 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#0101 D26210 16#0101 D26310

 Select PLC devices as the Remote Device Type, enter the PLC parameters, and check Enable.

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product
ID protocol
which data is
read
the CPU
module
which data is
written
the CPU
module
9_
D26220- D26320-
PLC 12 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D100-D109 D200-D204
D26229 D26324

9-67
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8) Select Always Enable in the Mode.

NOTE: If the Data Exchange Mode Control is set by the program, you can check and control the register address
on the Normal Exchange Area page. The following example shows when writing “2: always” to D28021, it
indicates Card 2 is always the one to perform data exchange.

_9

9-68
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

9) Download the parameters to the AS00SCM-A.

NOTE: Double-click the SCM module to open the Device Setting dialog box to configure the parameters.

9.6.1.1.2 Modbus Master Application through DIADesigner-AX

This section introduces how to use COM2 to connect the AS00SCM-A to other Delta industrial products such as Delta
programmable logic controllers, AC motor drives, and servo motors.

The structures:

Example of a master structure: AS-F485 + AS00SCM-A COM2 (master station)  VFD, ASDA, and DVP series PLC

Communication Address from which data is Address into which data is

Product Slave ID
protocol read written
38400, ASCII 16#2000
VFD 10 16#2103
7, E, 1 16#2001
38400, ASCII
ASDA 11 16#0101 16#0101
7, E, 1
38400, ASCII
PLC 12 D100~D109 D200~D204
7, E, 1

1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the knob of AS00SCM-A is turned to
COM mode and no power is connected to it.

9_

9-69
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2) Double-click the SCM module and select the function card AS-F485.

3) Double-click on the AS_F485 function card to enter the AS-F485 I/O Mapping tab. The PLC assigns the input
and output device ranges based on the position configured for AS00SCM-A.

_9

9-70
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

4) In the Configuration tab, set up the communication parameters for COM2: COM ID 2, Modbus ASCII, 38400, 7,
Even and 1.

5) Set up the data exchange table: tick the box of Data Exchange and then click Add Channel….

9_

9-71
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6) In the Data Exchange Setup table, double-click an item to edit the settings.

 Select Standard Modbus Device as Device Type, enter the parameters, and check Enable.
Address from which Addresses into which
Product Slave ID Communication protocol
data is read data are written
16#2000
VFD 10 38400, ASCII 7, E, 1 16#2103
16#2001

_9

 Select Standard Modbus Device as Device Type, enter the settings for ASDA parameters, and check Enable.

Address from which Address into which data

Product Slave ID Communication protocol
data is read is written
ASDA 11 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#0101 16#0101

9-72
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 Select DVP EH3/SV2/SE as Device Type, enter the settings for PLC (SV2) parameters, and check Enable.
Devices from
Devices into which
Product Slave ID Communication protocol which data are
data are written
read
PLC 12 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D100~D109 D200~D204

9_

9-73
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7) Select Always Enable in Mode.

 If the Data Exchange Mode Control is set by the program, you can check and control the register address on the
Normal Exchange Area page. The following example shows when “2: always” is written to D28021 with Trigger
used together, it indicates Card 2 is always the one to perform data mapping.

8) Click the Download button to download the configured parameters to the AS00SCM-A.

_9

If you set Mode to Always Enable, the data exchange begins immediately after the parameters are downloaded.
If you set Mode to Program Control, the PLC program controls the data exchange after the parameters are downloaded.

9-74
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

UD Link

This section introduces how to use a non-Modbus RS485 communication port on the AS00SCM-A to connect to other
industrial products.

AS00 SCM COM1

Mas ter Slav e

RS 485 9600, 7, E, 1
Communication with a slave

Packet to Send Packet to Receive

Description
() ()

POS, xxx, yyy POS, ACT xxx and yyy are coordinates (0–999)

1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the knob of AS00SCM-A is turned to COM
mode and no power connected to it.

9_

9-75
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2) Double-click the SCM module to open the configuration settings.

3) Select AS-F485 as the Function Card Type for COM1.

_9

9-76
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

4) Select UD Link as the Protocol, set the Baud Rate and Format, and click OK.

5) Right-click the AS00SCM-A and click Communication Software and then click SCMSoft.

9_

9-77
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6) Right-click Group List and then click Create Group List to create a group list.

7) You can find a created Group List1. Double-click it to open an editing window to edit the Group List Name and
the Slot.

Give the group list a Name (this example uses “Slave_Simulation”) and select 1 (COM1) as the Slot number.

_9

9-78
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8) Right-click Slave_Simulation and click Create Group List to create a group list for the Slave_Simulation group.

9) You can find a created Group List1. Double-click it to open an editing window to edit the Group List Name and
the Slot.

Create a group and name it “Master Send”.

9_

9-79
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10) Right-click TX Packet and click TX Packet to create a TX Packet1.

_9

9-80
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

11) Double-click TX Packet1 to open the Packet Edit form.

12) Give the Packet a Name (This example uses “TX POS Send”)

9_

9-81
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13) Edit the TX packet, “POS, xxx, yyy” (The example below uses POS, 123, 123)

14) Click Constant in the Message area.

Enter “POS” in the Value area. Click OK and verify the packet contents in the Packet View.

_9

9-82
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

15) [xxx] is a variable, so click Variable in the Message area to edit it. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data
registers D26100–D26101. The example below uses D26100: 16#3132 and D26101: 16#3300 and the value is
123.

16) Enter the data register that contains the value you want to find. The example below uses D26100 and the value
returned is 3. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data registers D26100–D26199.

9_

9-83
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Click OK and verify the values (”POS,”+(R(D Register [26100], 3))in the Packet View.

17) [, ]: Use Address Constant to enter this Value and set the Format to ASCII.

Click OK and verify the values (”POS,”+(R(D Register [26100], 3)) in the Packet View.

18) [yyy] is a variable, so click Variable in the Message area to edit it. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data
registers D26102–D26103. The example below uses D26102: 16#3132 and D26103: 16#3300 and the value is
123.

_9

9-84
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

19) Enter the data register that contains the value you want to find. The example below uses D26102 and the value
returned is 3. Use ISPSoft to get the value from the data registers D26100–D26199.

Click OK and verify the values (”POS,”+(R(D Register [26102], 3))in the Packet View.

20) Edit the packet: Create a packet and name it “RX Result”. Double-click it to open the editing window.

9_

9-85
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Enter the sending packet into the D26000 register of the AS300 CPU. “*” indicates that the length is not
specified.

The packet should look like the example below.

21) Create a command: Right-click Master Send and click the Create Command.

_9

9-86
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

22) Double-click the new command on the list to open the Command Edit window.

23) Set Send Packet to “TX POS Send” and set Recv Packet (received contents) to “RX Result”.

9_

9-87
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

24) Make sure the Group is in slot 1 (COM1).

25) Click the Download button to download the parameters to the AS00SCM.

_9

9-88
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

26) Set up the devices for the UD Link Group ID Trigger in HWCONFIG. Once you create the AS00SCM-A module,
the system automatically assigns the corresponding addresses.

27) Double-click AS00SCM-A to open the Device Setting page. Verify that the Card 1 UD Link Group ID Trigger is set
to D28030. Use ISPSoft to enter 1 into register D28030 to start the data exchange.

9_

9-89
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

28) Use the monitor function in ISPSoft to verify that the transmission is working correctly.

29) In SCMSoft, right-click the item COM PORT History on the left and click the option “Upload COM History Data” to
see the transmission history of COM1 and COM2 respectively. Under the item COM1 and COM2, you can view
recent transmission history; however the shown recent history cannot be deleted or saved.

30) Select Tools -> Return to Default to clear the previous settings and have all the settings back to defaults. After
this, turn the power off and on again.

Remote I/O Application (AS-FCOPM)

This example shows other series PLC, AH10COPM-5A, as a CANopen Master that controls four I/O modules on the
right side of AS00SCM-A that acts as a CANopen Slave. (You can use this method to connect to a 3rd party PLC.)

Device Function
Scan and download AS00SCM-A (RTU mode),
AS300
right side module configurations
AS00SCM-A + AS-FCOPM CANopen Slave
AHCPU530-EN + AH10COPM-5A CANopen Master
AS16AN10R-A 16 digital outputs
AS16AM01N-A 16 digital inputs
AS04DA-A 4 Analog channels for output
AS04AD-A 4 Analog channels for input

_9

9-90
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Step 1

Use AS300 to connect to AS00SCM-A through AS Remote Communication (RTU mode) and then use HWCONFIG to
scan and download the parameters. If the Card 2 LED is blinking normally, with no error messages, and no need to
download the PLC programs, the device power can be turned off. Refer to section 9.4.1.1 for reference.

9_

9-91
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 2

Turn the Format 1 of AS00SCM-A to 4 (using CANopen DS301 mode) and turn Format 2 to 7 (setting the bit rate to
1000kbps) and then turn the power off and on again. After that wiring AH10COPM-5A and set the node ID to 2 and
set the bit rate to 1000kbps. Use ISPSoft (V3.04 or later) and HWCONFIG to scan and download the parameters to
AH500. Right click AH10COPM-5A and open Intelligent Module Configuration (CANopen Builder) from the menu.

Step 3

Use CANopen Builder to scan the network. You should find Node ID 1 and its name to be AS00SCM-A RTU.

If not, check if you follow the first two steps right. And repeat the previous steps. Recommended to set the value in
cycle period to 50 ms to ensure a more complete module functions. Double click the module to open the Node
Configuration window, and set up the PDO manually. RPDO is for DO/AO, and TPDO is for DI/AI and error codes of
RTU/I/O modules.

_9

9-92
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Step 4

Here uses a first right side digital output module (16 points) as an example.

1. Since it is the first one, here it corresponds to Receive PDO1 (index: 1400), indicating RTU receives data from
Master through CANopen communication. (If this is an input module, it sends data to Master through CANopen
communication.) Double click to add it in the table. Double click the table to open the PDO setting window.

2. Since it is the first one, here it corresponds to Rx_Module 1. It is a 16-point digital output module so that only
the object of one word Rx_Module1_EDO0 (Index: 2000) should be selected. Click the arrow to add it into the
data mapping parameter table and you have set up a PDO for the first module. If t is a 32-point digital output
module, objects of 2 words Rx_Module1_EDO0 and Rx_Module1_EDO1 should be selected in numerical
order.

3. Follow the previous steps to set up more modules.

9_

9-93
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Mapping
Device Function PDO PDO Mapping
Registers
AS16AN01R-A 16 digital outputs RxPDO1 Rx_Module1_EDO0 D6000
AS16AM01N-A 16 digital inputs TxPDO2 Tx_Module2_EDI0 D5000
4 Analog Rx_Module3_EDO0 D6001
channels for Rx_Module3_EDO1 D6002
AS04DA-A RxPDO3
output Rx_Module3_EDO2 D6003
(Integer format)* Rx_Module3_EDO3 D6004
4 Analog Tx_Module4_EDI0 D5001
channels for Tx_Module4_EDI1 D5002
AS04AD-A TxPDO4
input Tx_Module4_EDI2 D5003
(Integer format)* Tx_Module4_EDI3 D5004
Tx_Module1_error_code D5005
I/O Module Tx_Module2_error_code D5006
- TxPDO5
Error Code Tx_Module3_error_code D5007
Tx_Module4_error_code D5008
RTU Error Code - TxPDO6 Tx_RTU_error_code D5009
* Here the analog module uses integer format; if you need to use floating point format, two PDOs will be used per
channel.

* Index 2002 to Index 200d are for system internal use only. Avoid using this range, when PDO is used.

* Only synchronization cycle is supported.

Step 5

Double click the PLC icon and select Node ID 001 from the available nodes and then use the Right arrow to add the
selected one into the Node List. Output and Input tables are mapping registers for PDOs.

_9

9-94
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Step 6

Double click the module icon and the Node Configuration window appears. Click Error Control Protocol and then
Error Control Setting windows appears. Select Heartbeat and set values for the Master Consumer Timeout and
Node Heartbeat Producer Timer. Select AH10COPM Master from the Node List and click the Down arrow to add it
to the list of Heart Consumer and then disconnection detection is now available for AS00SCM-A (RTU mode).

9_

9-95
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Click OK to confirm the setting. Download the parameters to the PLC. And then PLC can control the input/output of
the I/O module remotely.

An example of using PLC to control the input/output of the I/O module remotely:

Start ISPSoft and download the program from AH series PLC. Switch digital output module between 1 and 0 in every
0.5 seconds; change output values of the analog output module. Wire DI/DO modules to AI/AO modules and then
you can see the changes of D6000 from D5000 and D6001-D6004 from D5001-D5004 as the example below shown.
The module error codes are stored in D5005-D5009. Refer to relevant module manuals for error code definitions.

_9

9-96
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Remote I/O Application (AS-FEN02)

 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS00SCM-A (RTU mode, FW V2.02 or later), then the remote master can
monitor right-side I/O modules remotely.

 Here use ISPSoft (V3.12 or earlier) with EIP Builder to demonstrate. For ISPSoft V3.13 or later, there is no
need to use EIP Builder, you can complete the settings in HWCONFIG. Refer to section 9.4.2.3 for more
information.

Device Function IP Address / Location Data Mapping Range

AS300 EtherNet/IP Master 192.168.1.5
D29000~D29019
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP Slave 192.168.1.3
AS08AM10N Digital Input right side of AS00SCM-A X1.0~X1.15
AS08AN01T Digital Output right side of AS00SCM-A Y1.0~Y1.15
AS04AD-A Analog Input right side of AS00SCM-A D29060~D29079
AS04DA-A Analog Output right side of AS00SCM-A D29080~D29099

Step 1

After setting up AS300 in ISPSoft and HWCONFIG. Open EIP Builder and scan the network to add AS00SCM-A
(RTU) + AS-FEN02 to the Network. Double-click RTU module to open HWCONFIG and scan to obtain the
configuration and mapped register addresses of the I/O module on the right side of AS00SCM-A. You can also edit
the module configurations and write down the mapped register addresses. After saving, close HWCONFIG.

9_

9-97
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 2

You can see the IP address and the data length from the data mapping table in EIP Builder. The data mapping table
can be downloaded and upload the mapped data to the device.

Step 3

An example of using PLC to control the input/output of the I/O module remotely:

Start ISPSoft and switch digital output module between 1 and 0 in every 0.5 seconds and shift output values of the
analog output module between 10 V and 5V. Wire DI/DO modules to AI/AO modules. Refer to Chapter 2, 3 and 4 in
this manual for more details on module operation.

_9

9-98
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Remote I/O Application (Multiple AS-FEN02)

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, it can be used as the Ethernet port of the CPU.

The following example shows how to add multiple AS00SCM-A (RTU) + AS-FEN02 (hereafter referred to as the
“RTU”) to an AS Series PLC in EIP connection. All IP addresses of RTU are set by the software.

Device Function IP Address Data Mapping Area

EtherNet/IP
AS200 192.168.1.5
master/scanner
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP slave/adapter 192.168.1.30 D29540~D29559
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP slave/adapter 192.168.1.31 D29180~D29199
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP slave/adapter 192.168.1.32 D29360~D29379
AS08AN01T Digital output The right side of RTU Y1.0~Y1.15
AS16AM10N-A Digital input The right side of RTU X1.0~X1.15
AS08AM10N-A Digital input The right side of RTU X2.0~X2.15

Step 1 Set up an IP address for the RTU

Turn all the knobs of the FORMAT 2 of the 3 new RTUs to 0. The default IP addresses are 192.168.1.3. Refer to
section 9.4.2.2 for more information on using IP Setting Tool to set up the IP address.

Step 2

After the IP addresses of the 3 new RTUs are set, you can scan and add them in the network and connect to the AS
Series PLC. Do not download the project before uploading the already set RTU values to the network.

Now you can set up the right-side module of RTU. Refer to section 9.6.4 for more details. Scan all the RTU and save
the parameters. Make sure the data mapping table is updated and then download the project, including the
parameters, configurations, and data mapping table to the AS Series PLC and the RTUs.

9_

9-99
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

9.7 Error Codes

The error flags and the UD Link status codes are stored in data registers. You can modify the input device range as
needed.

_9

9-100
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Troubleshooting for AS00SCM-A as a Communication Module

ERROR LED Indicators are ON

The following error codes indicate possible errors when the AS00SCM-A module is installed on the right side of the
CPU module and is acting as a communication module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check that the module is securely installed.
16#1605 Hardware failure
2. Install a new AS00SCM-A or contact the factory.
1. Check if the function card is securely installed.
2. Install a new function card or contact the factory.
16#1606 The function card setting is incorrect. 3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent
with the function card setting.
4. Install a new AS00SCM-A or contact the factory.

ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS00SCM-A module is installed on the right side of the
CPU module and acts as a communication module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG. Download the
16#1802 Incorrect parameters
parameter again.
1. Check whether the communication cable is
properly connected.
2. Check if the station number and the
16#1803 Communication timeout
communication format are correctly set.
3. Check if the connection with the function card is
working correctly.
1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#1804 The UD Link setting is incorrect.
2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
The following error codes can only be viewed with SCMSoft; when the following errors occur, they are not shown on
the LED indicators and the system does not send the error messages to the CPU module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
The settings in HWCONFIG and manual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and manual
16#0107 settings are not consistent with function settings for function card 1.
card 1.
The settings in HWCONFIG and manual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and manual
16#0108 settings are not consistent for function card settings for function card 2.
2.

16#0201 Incorrect parameters

Check the parameter in HWCONFIG. Download the 9_
parameter again.
1. Check if the station number and the
communication format are correctly set.
16#0301 Function card 1 communication timeout
2. Check if the connection with the function card is
working correctly.

9-101
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check if the station number and the
communication format are correctly set.
16#0302 Function card 2 communication timeout
2. Check if the connection with the function card is
working correctly.
Invalid UD Link Group ID for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0400
1 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Group ID for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0401
2 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Command for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0402
1 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Command for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0403
1 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.

Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module

Errors from the remote modules are regarded as warnings for AS Series CPU modules. The LED indicator of the
CPU module blinks and the CPU module can still operate. Use flag SM30 to manage error presentation in the remote
modules.

ERROR LED Indicators Are ON

Error codes:

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check if the module is securely installed.
16#1301 Hardware failure 2. Change and install a new AS00SCM-A or contact
the factory.
1. Check if the function card is securely installed with
the AS-FCOPM card.
2. Change and install a new function card or contact
16#1302 The function card setting is incorrect. the factory.
3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent
with the function card setting.
4. Install a new AS00SCM-A or contact the factory.
More than eight remote modules on Check the total number of remote modules on the right
16#1304 side of the CPU module (maximum is 8).
the right side of the CPU module.

_9

9-102
 Ch a pt er 9 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 1 Seconds

Error
Description Solution
Code
This error code should work with AS Series Remote
Module Setting in ISPSoft. When this error code
shows up, it indicates the remote module had been
stopped: Master Disconnected, Master Reconnected,
Remote module had been stopped.
16#1506 I/O Module Alarm, or I/O Module Timeout. Check and
(available for firmware V2.06 or later)
clear the problem and then power-off and then power-
on the remote module to refresh its state. Refer to
section 9.4.3 in AS Series Module Manual for more
details.

ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

Error codes:

Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1500 Remote module communication timeout Make sure the communication cable is well connected
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG. Download the
16#1502 Incorrect parameters parameter again. Or use the knob to restore the
modules to the default settings.
Make sure the communication cable is well connected
Remote extension module communication
16#1503 and the module is properly connected to the CPU
timeout
module and turn the modules on again.
The actual placement of the extension Check if the parameter configuration in the software is
16#1505
modules is NOT the same as it is set. the same as the actual placement.
Extension module communication Make sure the module is properly connected to the
16#1604
timeout CPU module and power the modules on again.

ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds

This happens when the 24 VDC power supply for the remote module is not sufficient. Check the power supply. If the
power supply is normal, remove the extension module from the CPU module and then check if the SCM remote
module is out of order. Error codes:

Error
Description Solution
Code
24VDC power supply had not been
Check whether the 24 V power supply to the module is
16#1303 sufficient before and then recovered from
normal.
low-voltage that was less than 10 ms.

9_

9-103
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

MEMO

_9

9-104
 10
Chapter 10 Function Cards

Table of Contents

10.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 10-2

10.2 Specification and Function ............................................................................... 10-2
10.2.1 AS-F232 ...................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.2 AS-F422 ...................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.3 AS-F485 ...................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.4 AS-F2AD ..................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.5 AS-F2DA ..................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.6 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.7 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.8 AS-FPFN02 ................................................................................................ 10-19
10.2.9 AS-FOPC02 ................................................................................................ 10-31
10.2.10 AS-FFTP01 ............................................................................................. 10-38
10.2.11 AS-FECAT ............................................................................................... 10-65
10.3 Profiles and Dimensions ................................................................................. 10-75
10.3.1 AS-F232 .................................................................................................... 10-75
10.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA ........................................................... 10-75
10.3.3 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................................. 10-75
10.3.4 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................................. 10-76
10.3.5 AS-FPFN02 ................................................................................................ 10-77
10.3.6 AS-FOPC02 ................................................................................................ 10-78
10.3.7 AS-FFTP01 ................................................................................................. 10-79
10.3.8 AS-FECAT .................................................................................................. 10-80
10.4 Wiring ............................................................................................................ 10-82
10.4.1 AS-F2AD ................................................................................................... 10-82
10.4.2 AS-F2DA ................................................................................................... 10-83
10.4.3 Topology of AS-FEN02, AS-FOPC02, AS-FPFN02 and AS-FECAT ........................ 10-84
10.4.4 Topology of AS-FFTP01 ............................................................................... 10-85
10.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft .................................................................................... 10-86
10.5.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................................. 10-86

10-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.1 Introduction
Function cards are extension cards such as analog input/output (AI/AO) and communication cards for the AS Series
PLC.

10.2 Specification and Function

10.2.1 AS-F232
The AS Series PLC is built with COM1 (RS-485) and COM2 (RS-485) ports. You can use the AS-F232 extension card for
other communication interfaces such as RS-232, PC, and so on. Except for the communication interface, the
communication functions and the isolation voltage are the same as the functions of the built-in ones. You can set up the
communication port as either a slave or a master node. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to
configure the communication.

 Wiring example

AS-F232
(DB9 female) + + Superior
machine

DB9 male to DB9 female (standard cable)

10.2.2 AS-F422
Use the AS-F422 extension card to communicate with Delta HMI devices or other devices that use an RS-422
communication port. Other than the different communication interface, the communication functions and the isolation
voltage remain the same as the functions of the built-in ones. You can set the communication port as either a slave or a
master node. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.

 Wiring example for communication with Delta HMI DOPA series via COM2
AS-F422 Delta HMI DOPA series
1 R+ Tx+ 3 6 RTS-
2 R- Tx- 4 7 RTS+
3 T+ Rx+ 2 8
4 T- Rx- 1 9 CTS+
CTS-
COM2/DB-9
10.2.3 AS-F485
Other than the different communication interface, the communication functions and the isolation voltage remain the same
as the functions of the built-in ones. With its own standalone communication port, the AS-F485 card can work
independently and can be either a slave or a master node. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft
to configure the communication.

 Wiring example
Master node Slave node Slave node
D+ D- SG D+ D- SG SG D+ D-
Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor
(120 ohm) (120 ohm)
10 Shielded Shielded
cable cable

10-2
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.4 AS-F2AD
2 DC analog signal input channels:

Item Voltage Input Current Input

Rated Input Range 0 V - 10 V 4 mA - 20 mA

Resolution 12-bit 11-bit

Digital Conversion Range 0 - 4000 0 - 2000

4mA ~ 20.37mA (FW V1.00)
Hardware Input Limit*1 0V ~ +10.24V
3.63mA ~ 20.37mA (FW V1.20 or later)
0 ~ 2047 (FW V1.00)
Digital Conversion Limit*2 0 ~ 4095
- 48 ~ 2047(FW V1.20 or later)
Error Rate room temperature: ±0.5%; full temperature range: ±1.0%
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit, but the channels are not isolated from
Isolation voltage
one another. Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VC
Input Impedance 2 MΩ 250 Ω

Conversion Time*3 3 ms / CH
4000
Digital Value Output

2000

Digital Value O utput

Characteristic Curve

0 10V 4 20mA
Curr ent input
Voltage input

Card 1 SR168 (CH1), SR169 (CH2)

Digital Value Output*4
Card 2 SR170 (CH1), SR171 (CH2)
*1: The input signal should NOT exceed the limit. If exceeding the limit, damage may occur.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the input signal is
below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also
exceeds the digital conversion limit and a conversion limit error appears. For example in the current input mode (4 mA to
20 mA), when the input signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware lower limit, it also exceeds the conversion lower limit.
The module uses the lower limit value (-48) as the input signal. If a disconnected analysis is required, you can check if
the digital conversion value is -48.

*3: The conversion time is the time for each channel to convert signals to hardware input signals. If you need to calculate
a complete conversion time, you need to add the PLC scan time.

*4: Use the program to read the values in SR to obtain the corresponding A/D conversion value for the channel.

Refer to section 2.2.16 from AS Programming Manual for more information on SM27 and SR27.

10

10-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.5 AS-F2DA
2 DC analog signal output channels:

Item Voltage Output Current Output

Analog Signal 0 V - 10 V 4 mA - 20 mA

Resolution 12-bit 12-bit

Digital Conversion
Limit 0 - 4000 0 - 4000

Error Rate room temperature: ±0.5% ; full temperature range: ±1.0%

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit, but the channels are not isolated from one
Isolation voltage
another. Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VC

Impedance Allowance ≥1 kΩ ≤500 Ω

Conversion Time*1 2ms / CH

10V 20mA
Voltage Output

Curr ent Output

Characteristic Curve

0 4 4000
4000 Digital Value Input
Di gital Value Input

Card 1 SR172 (CH1) SR173 (CH2)

Digital Value Output*2
Card 2 SR174 (CH1) SR175 (CH2)
*1: The conversion time is the time for each channel to convert signals to hardware input signals. If you need to calculate
a complete conversion time, you need to add the PLC scan time.

*2: Use the MOV instruction to move the value to the SR to obtain the corresponding voltage output value.

10.2.6 AS-FCOPM
With its own standalone communication port, the AS-FCOPM card can work independently and can be either a slave or a
master node. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.

 Wiring example

Master node Slave node Slave node

CAN _H CAN _L GND CAN _H C AN _L G ND GN D C AN _H C AN_ L
ON
12 0

O FF

Terminal Terminal
resistor Shielded resistor
(120 ohm) cable (120 ohm)

10

10-4
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.7 AS-FEN02
This communication card can work independently and does NOT occupy the communication port of PLC CPU. It can act
as Modbus TCP Client or Modbus TCP Server and EtherNet/IP Adapter. After AS-FEN02 is installed, you can go to
HWCONFIG from ISPSoft for editing in the Function Card 2 section.

All the AS-FEN02 parameters are stored in AS300 PLC CPU or AS00SCM-A. If you need the IP address of AS-FEN02,
you need to go to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft to check its IP address in the Function Card 2 section. You can also use
COMMGR to see the IP address of this device.

10.2.7.1 Supported Software and Firmware Versions

 The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.06 or later for AS-FEN02 to be installed on it. Use ISPSoft
V3.06 or later as the PLC editing software.

 The firmware of AS00SCM-A module should be V2.02 or later for AS-FEN02 to be installed on it. AS00SCM
should be in RTU mode only, not supported when installed on the right-side of the AS PLC CPU.

AS-FEN02 AS00SCM-A
V1.00 V2.02
Compatible firmware V1.02 V2.04
versions V1.03 V2.06
V1.04 V2.08
 If using Delta AS/AH PLC CPU in RTU mode, it is suggested to use ISPSoft V3.13 or later. Use HWCPNFIG
V4.0 to set up EtherNet/IP for AS PLC CPU and use EIP Builder to set up EtherNet/IP for AH PLC CPU.

 If using the 3rd party EtherNet/IP Scanner in RTU mode, it is suggested to use EIP Builder V1.06 or later to
set up the remote IO modules.

10.2.7.2 Features
 AS-FEN02 can be installed on AS300 Series PLC and AS00SCM-A (in RTU mode). But the firmware of
AS00SCM-A module should be V2.02 or later for AS-FEN02 to be installed on it. AS00SCM should be in
RTU mode only, not supported when installed on the right-side of the AS PLC CPU.

 This section introduces the operations when it is installed on AS300 Series PLC. For the operations when it
is installed on AS00SCM-A, refer to Chapter 9 for more details.

 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it acts as a Client or Server of Modbus TCP connection.
Go to HWCONFIG and click AS300 PLC CPU. Select Data Exchange in the editing area and if the AS-
FEN02 is installed, you can find FEN02 in the function card section. Click it to edit the data exchange table.
The rest is the same as using the built-in connection port for communication. Refer to Chapter 8 from AS
Series Hardware and Operation Manual for more details. 10

10-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it acts as an EthernNet/IP Adapter but not Scanner for
EtherNet/IP connection. When using Delta PLC CPU, you can use EtherNet/IP software to scan and add the
device in.

 When AS00SCM-A+AS-FEN02 is used with the 3rd party EtherNet/IP Scanner, you need to set up the
remote IO modules in EIP Builder (V1.06 or later). Go to Delta Official Website Delta | Download Center
(deltaww.com) (steps: Select Product Category: Industrial Automation; Select Product Sub-Category: PLC-
Programmable Logic Controllers; Select Series: AS Series; Filter: Electrical Parameter and click Submit and
then find the EtherNet/IP EDS File: AS00SCM-RTU (AS-FEN02)) to download the EDS file and then install
the downloaded EDS file in the EtherNet/IP software. Refer to the user manual of the 3rd party EtherNet/IP
Scanner for more information.

10.2.7.3 Specifications
 System Specifications
Item Specification
Device type Master, Slave and RTU communication interface
Star, linear and ring (DLR ring node, firmware
Topology
V1.04 or later )
General  AS300 Series PLC
 AS00SCM-A (available only for RTU mode;
Availability
NOT supported when installed on the right-side
of the AS PLC CPU.)
Max. connection number 8
 View device information
 Account management
Web
Functions  AS-FEN02 firmware update
 When installed on AS00SCM-A and in RTU
mode, the module monitoring is supported.

 Modbus TCP Specifications

Item Specification
General Device type Server, Client
Modbus TCP Max. connection number 8#1
Server Max. data length/per transmission 100 words
Max. connection number 8#1
Modbus TCP Client
Max. data length/per transmission 100 words
#1Note: The connection numbers of Server and Client are counted separately.

10

10-6
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

 EtherNet/IP Specifications
Item Specification
General Device type Adapter
Max. number of devices#1 8
Max. number of pieces for slave
8
Cyclic data exchange #2
communication Requested Packet Interval (RPI) 1 ms~1000ms
(Implicit Message) Max. Transmission Speed
10,000 pps
(pps, packets/second)
Max. data length per piece 200 bytes
Max. number of messages received
8
simultaneously#3
Identity Object (16#01)
Non-cyclic Message Router Object (16#02)
communication Assembly Object (16#04)
(Explicit Message) Supported CIP Objects Connection Manager Object (16#06)
Port Object (16#F4)
TCP/IP Interface Object (16#F5)
Ethernet Link Object (16#F6)
#1: TCP connection
#2: CIP connection
#3: The messages for both Class 3 and UCMM are counted together.

10.2.7.4 IP Setting
 The IP address of AS-FEN02 is not stored on the function card. When you replace the AS-FEN02 card, the IP
settings will be downloaded automatically from AS300 PLC CPU or AS00SCM-A to the new function card.
 When the function card is installed on AS300 PLC CPU, you can go to ISPSoft -> HWCONFIG -> Function Card 2
Setting -> Ethernet Port Basic Setting to edit the parameters.

10

10-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 When the function card is installed on AS00SCM-A, see section 9.4.2.2 in this manual for more information on IP
settings.

10.2.7.5 SM/SR
 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM)
AS300 Series

AS200 Series

OFF STOP RUN

Attribute
Latched

Default

SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM1006 Data exchange through AS-FEN02 enabled by ISPSoft. ○ – OFF – OFF N R/W OFF
Connection 1 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1008 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 2 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1009 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 3 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1010 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
10 SM1011
Connection 4 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started

10-8
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

AS300 Series

AS200 Series
OFF STOP RUN

Attribute
Latched

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

Connection 5 for data exchange through AS-FEN02

SM1012 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 6 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1013 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 7 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1014 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 8 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1015 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Successful data exchange connection 1 through AS-
SM1016 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 2 through AS-
SM1017 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 3 through AS-
SM1018 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 4 through AS-
SM1019 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 5 through AS-
SM1020 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 6 through AS-
SM1021 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 7 through AS-
SM1022 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 8 through AS-
SM1023 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 1 through AS-
SM1024 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 2 through AS-
SM1025 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 3 through AS-
SM1026 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 4 through AS-
SM1027 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 5 through AS-
SM1028 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 6 through AS-
SM1029 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 7 through AS-
SM1030 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 8 through AS-
SM1031 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
SM1006 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, you set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1008~SM1015 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, you set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1016~SM1031 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically. 10

10-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Special Data Registers (SR)

OFF STOP RUN

Attribute
Latched

Default
AS300

AS200
Series

Series
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

Actual connection time for data exchange through the

SR1520 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 1
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1521 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 2
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1522 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 3
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1523 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 4
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1524 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 5
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1525 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 6
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1526 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 7
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1527 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 8
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1528 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 1
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1529 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 2
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1530 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 3
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1531 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 4
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1532 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 5
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1533 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 6
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1534 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 7
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1535 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 8
SR1536 AS-FEN02/FOPC02 TCP current connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1537 AS-FEN02 Modbus /TCP Server connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1538 AS-FEN02 Modbus /TCP Client connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02/FOPC02 EtherNet/IP Adapter connection
SR1539 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
number

Special data
Refresh time
register
SR1520~SR1535 Refresh after AS-FEN02 communication is done.
SR1536~SR1539 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.

10

10-10
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.7.6 Example of Connecting AS Series PLC CPU (Scanner) to

AS Series PLC CPU + AS-FEN02 (Adapter)

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, it can act as an EtherNet/IP adapter.

Use HWCONFIG to set the IP Address of AS-FEN02.

The below example uses PLC 1 and PLC 2 (with AS-FEN02) to connect to each other and perform data mapping through
EtherNet/IP connection. When AS PLC CPU acts as a Scanner, you need to set the network to EtherNet/IP in ISPSoft.
Refer to Chapter 9 in AS Series Hardware and Operation Manual for more details on AS Series PLC acting as
EtherNet/IP Scanner.

Device Function IP Address Data Mapping Area

PLC 1 EtherNet/IP Scanner 192.168.1.5 D100, D200
PLC 2 EtherNet/IP Adapter 192.168.1.3 D1000, D2000

Steps

(1) Right-click AS PLC CPU of the PLC1 project in HWCONFIG and then go to Communication Software ->
EtherNet/IP.

10

1 0 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Scan the network or to add ASCPU(ASFEN02) (the latest version) manually. After adding the function card in,
drag and drop it to the red dot of Network_0 to add it to the same network as the scanner’s. Click Data
Exchange tab to open the data exchange table and to edit the data mapping table, including Scanner Start
Address, Adapter Starter Address, and Length for data mapping between the scanner and adapter; the unit for
data length is word.

(3) Click the Download on the tool bar and then start data exchange. Click the On-line Mode to check the
connection status.

10.2.7.7 Example of Connecting a 3rd Party EtherNet/IP PLC CPU

(Scanner) to AS Series PLC CPU + AS-FEN02 (Adapter)

A 3rd party PLC (when acting as a scanner) can create an EtherNet/IP connection to AS300 Series PLC (when AS-FEN02
is installed). Before you begin, you need to go to www.deltaww.com to download EDS file. Go to Delta Official Website
Delta | Download Center (deltaww.com) (steps: Select Product Category: Industrial Automation; Select Product Sub-
Category: PLC- Programmable Logic Controllers; Select Series: AS Series; Filter: Electrical Parameter and click Submit
and then find the EtherNet/IP EDS File: AS00SCM-RTU (AS-FEN02)) to download the EDS file and then install the
downloaded EDS file in the EtherNet/IP software. Refer to the user manual of the 3rd party EtherNet/IP Scanner for more
information. The following uses EtherNet/IP Scanner from manufacturer A as an example.
10
(1) Right-click Ethernet to see the context menu and click New Module to add a new device in.

10-12
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

(2) Set up the parameters including device name, IP address and many more. For basic operation, you can use the
default EDS file directly. No need to edit the EDS file. But you should change the data type to meet the system
format. Click Change in the section of Module Definition on the General tab to change the data type according to
your needs. Here the data type is INT, meaning when monitoring, data in each deice is shown in one word (a D
device).

(3) Setting up the data mapping table

I: Input data (T->O), The Scanner reads data from the Adapter.
Ex. Connection 1 is corresponding to PLC D3000~D3099.

O: Output data (O->T), The Scanner writes data in the Adapter.

Ex. Connection 1 is corresponding to PLC D2000~D2099.

C: here corresponds to the configurations. You can edit the corresponding PLC addresses of input and output.
After editing, you need to download the parameters to the 3rd party PLC and establish a connection to make the
changes become effective.

I/O Message Connection

Instance
Connection No. Function Length Defaults
Attribute
Input (T->O) 0x65 100 words D3000~D3099
Connection 1 Output (O->T) 0x64 100 words D2000~D2099
Configuration 0x80 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (T->O) 0x67 100 words D3100~D3199
Connection 2 Output (O->T) 0x66 100 words D2100~D2199
Configuration 0x81 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (T->O) 0x69 100 words D3200~D3299
Connection 3 Output (O->T) 0x68 100 words D2200~D2299
Configuration 0x82 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (T->O) 0x6B 100 words D3300~D3399
Connection 4 Output (O->T) 0x6A 100 words D2300~D2399
Configuration 0x83 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (T->O) 0x6D 100 words D3400~D3499
Connection 5 Output (O->T) 0x6C 100 words D2400~D2499
Configuration 0x84 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (T->O) 0x6F 100 words D3500~D3599
Connection 6 Output (O->T) 0x6E 100 words D2500~D2599
Configuration 0x85 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (T->O) 0x71 100 words D3600~D3699
Connection 7 Output (O->T) 0x70 100 words D2600~D2699
Configuration 0x86 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (T->O) 0x73 100 words D3700~D3799
Connection 8 Output (O->T) 0x72 100 words D2700~D2799
Configuration 0x87 8 words Refer to the table below 10

10-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Configuration Default
Data type Description
address (Connection 1)
Corresponding devices for input
Word[0] UINT 0
0: D, 1: X, 2: Y
Word[1] UINT Reserved 200
Word[2-3] DWORD Corresponding input device No. 3000
Corresponding devices for output
Word[4] UINT 0
0: D, 2: Y
Word[5] UINT Reserved 200
Word[6-7] DWORD Corresponding output device No. 2000

10.2.7.8 Example of Connecting AS Series PLC CPU (Modbus TCP

Client) to AS Series PLC CPU + AS-FEN02 (Server)
When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, you can create a connection by configuring the IP address and some
relevant parameters to make it act as a Modbus TCP Server.

The following example shows two AS Series PLCs (one with AS-FEN02) to connect each other and one as Client and the
other as Server (AS-FEN02) to perform data mapping through the Modbus TCP connection. For the support function
codes and corresponding addresses, refer to AS Series Operation Manual for more details.

Device Function IP Address Data Mapping Area

AS300 Modbus TCP Client 192.168.1.5 D100, D200
AS300+ AS-FEN02 Modbus TCP Server 192.168.1.3 D200, D300

Step 1

Double click AS Series PLC in HWCONFIG and the Device Setting window appears. Set up the IP Address of the
AS300+AS-FEN02 to 192.168.1.3.

10

10-14
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

Step 2

Create a data mapping table in the Client and then perform data mapping with the Server (AS300+AS-FEN02).

Step 3

Click the Downloader icon and then select the parameters that you’d like to download.

10

10-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.7.9 Webpage Function

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode), you can enter the AS-FEN02 webpage
via your browser. The webpage display for AS-FEN02 installed on AS300 Series PLC is slightly different from that for AS-
FEN02 installed on AS00SCM-A (RTU mode). The webpage display when AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 series PLC is
explained below. Refer to section 9.4.2.6 for the webpage for AS-FEN02 installed on AS00SCM-A.

The account "Admin" and password-free login are preset as factory settings. It is suggested that you set the password for
the default "Admin" account for the first-time login.

List of browsers that support the webpages for AS-FEN02:

Provider Browser Supported versions

Microsoft Internet Explorer V10.0 and later

Microsoft Edge V20 and later

Google Chrome V14 and later

Apple Safari V5.1 and later

 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC

1. After the setting IP address in HWCONFIG of ISPSoft. Open your browser and enter AS-FEN02 IP address in
the search bar to connect to AS-FEN02. After the webpage appears, enter “Admin” in the User section and
click Login without entering any password. You can set up the password after login.

10

10-16
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

2. After login, you can check the items shown on the left section.

3. The menu shows data based on the permission of the current user.

Permission
Nodes
Administrator Read

Device information V V

Account management V X

Firmware update V X

Network diagnostic* V V

DLR status* V V

Save configuration V X

*Note: AS-FEN02 firmware V1.04 or later supports the webpage.

4. Account Management: You can set 2 kinds of access types, Administrator and Read. After the setting is done,
click Apply and save the settings in Save configuration. You’d better set the password for the Admin account
when logging in for the first time. If you forget the password, restore AS-FEN02 to the factory settings through
AS300 PLC CPU or AS00SCM-A.

5. Firmware Update: You can update the firmware of AS-FEN02 via the webpage. 10
6. Network diagnostic: See section 10.2.7.10.

10-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7. DLR status: See section 10.2.7.11.

8. Save Configuration: After any setting is done, save the settings in Save Configuration to reflect the changes.

10.2.7.10 Network Diagnostic

AS-FEN02 firmware V1.04 supports the Network diagnostic page.

10.2.7.11 DLR Network

AS-FEN02 firmware V1.04 supports the DLR network (Ring) with ring nodes only. The supervisor is required for building
a complete backup network. The DLR status can be viewed on the webpage.

10.2.7.12 Network Security

To enhance security and performance of the system, it is suggested to use closed network or LAN with firewall protection
to prevent cyber-attacks.

10

10-18
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.8 AS-FPFN02
10.2.8.1 Introduction
AS-FPFN02 can serve as a PROFINET (hereafter referred to as PN) device to communicate with PN-controller. There are
three application modes based on different installation methods.
1. CPU mode
 When AS-FPFN02 is installed at the function card slot of the AS300 series PLC CPU, they work as a
PROFINET remote device.
 The data in the D registers in the AS300 series PLC CPU can be read and written, and the device data can
be set within the allowed range of data length for data exchange.
2. COM mode
 When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS00SCM-A (in COM mode) on the right side of AS100/AS200/AS300,
they work as a PROFINET remote device.
 The COM mode is used when the communication card is required on the right side of AS100/AS200, or other
communication cards are needed on AS300. In these situations, only the data in the exchange area between
AS00SCM-A and AS series PLC CPU can be read and written.
3. RTU mode
 When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS00SCM-A which is in RTU mode, they work as a PROFINET remote IO
module (hereafter referred to as ASRTU-PN).
 Directly use the PN upper device software to read and write values in AS series remote I/O modules.

CPU mode COM mode

RTU mode

10

10-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

AS series PLC CPU does not support the function of a PN master. Thus, please use the AX-5 PLC or the PN master of
other brands for configuration. The GSDML file (General Station Description Markup Language) must have been installed
before you use any of the three modes mentioned above to communicate with other brands of PN master devices. Please
download the latest version from Deltas official website, which is compatible with old firmware versions.

10.2.8.2 Supported Firmware Versions

CPU mode RTU mode COM mode

AS-FPFN02 FM V1.00 or later AS-FPFN02 FM V2.00 or later AS-FPFN02 FM V2.02 or later

AS100/AS200/AS300 series
AS300 series FM V1.08 or later --
FM V1.14 or later
-- AS00SCM-A FM V2.06 or later AS00SCM-A FM V2.08 or later

 To use with the Siemens upper device, TIA Portal V17 or later is recommended.
 The AS-FPFN02 hardware with FM V1.00 cannot be directly upgraded to firmware V2.00 or later. When installed
on AS300 series PLC CPU, it can be a PROFINET remote device, and relevant firmware is required as below:
 The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.08 or later.

 The firmware of AS-FPFN02 should be V1.00 or later.

 When installed on AS00SCM-A, it can be a PROFINET remote IO module and relevant firmware is required as
below:
 The firmware of AS00SCM should be V2.06 or later.

 The firmware of AS-FPFN02 should be V2.00 or later.

 It can work with Siemens PLC CPU: S7-1500, S7-1200, S7-300 and so forth, and TIA Portal V15.1 or later is
recommended.
 To directly upgrade the firmware V1.00 of the AS-FPFN02 hardware to V2.00 is not supported.

10.2.8.3 PN Modules and PN Slots

AS-FPFN02 assigns the addresses to read and write data via modules and slots specified in GSDML. To distinguish from
AS series right-side slots and AS series I/O modules, PN modules and PN slots are explained later. See different usages
for PN modules and slots in different application modes.
CPU mode COM mode RTU mode
 Data length and read/write direction for data exchange,
supported data type: Word;
 Supports data lengths: 1, 2, 4, 8, 10, 16, 32, 64, 100;
PN  Input, Output, or In - and Output can be selected for each I/O modules actually installed on
modules length; the right side of AS00SCM-A
 When a PN module is placed at a slot, the data exchange is
established for the corresponding data length and read/write
direction.
 Only supports 1 piece data
 Supports up to 16 pieces
exchange The actual order of the I/O
for data exchange
PN slots  The starting D register for modules on the right side of
10  The starting D register of
data exchange is fixed and AS00SCM-A
each piece can be set.
thus cannot be set.

10-20
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.8.4 Specifications

Item CPU mode COM mode RTU mode

Communication
PROFINET RT
protocol

Ethernet interface 100 Mbps / 2 x RJ45

Network cable
100 meters
length

Topology type Linear and star topologies

Other field devices Other field devices Other field devices

Device type  PROFINET IO  PROFINET IO  PROFINET IO
 PLSs & CPs  PLSs & CPs  I/O
Max. PN slot
16 1 8
Number#1
Devices to read and AS00SCM-A normal
AS300 series data registers RTU I/O modules
write exchange area
Minimum cycle time
10 ms 10 ms 10 ms
for data exchange
Maximum Data
Input: 508 bytes#2 Input: 200 bytes Max. 8 units of AS series I/O
Length for data
Output: 500 bytes#2 Output: 200 bytes modules are supported.
exchange
The configuration data is
After configuring the AS PLC CPU via Delta software is
Configuration directly downloaded by PN-
complete, use PN-controller to download the connection
method controller without the need for
configuration data.
Delta software.
#1: Only the PN slots for which you can configure modules by yourself are counted.
#2: The length of PN module data is included. See section 10.2.8.6 for more information on the total data length.

10.2.8.5 Indicators
Indicator Description
SF indicator Red light ON: an error occurs in the topology or RTU module
(System Fault) OFF: no system error
Red light ON: no PROFINET connection
BF indicator Red light blinking: the connection is working fine but the communication
(Bus Fault) with the PN controller is NOT normal.
OFF: the connection with the PN controller is working fine.
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicates the status of Ethernet communication
ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange blinking: data are in transmission
OFF: no data transmission
10

10-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.8.6 CPU Mode (Works with AS300 Series PLC)

When AS-FPFN02 communication card is installed on AS300 series PLC, from the following table you can create 27
kinds of data exchanges – different data length and data type (e.g. 32 word in- and output).

Set up the corresponding I/O module addresses to the AS300 data register addresses in the upper device software.
Refer to section 10.2.8.9 for more reference.

Data Length (word) 1, 2, 4, 8, 10, 16, 32, 64, 100

Data Type Input, Output, In- and Output

 Total data length calculation

The total data size is related to the number of modules used. The total data length is the data length plus the length of IO
Production Status (IOPS) and IO Consumption Status (IOCS) of modules.

PN Module Type Additional Input Data Length Additional Output Data Length
Device Access
PN slot 0 4 bytes 4 bytes
Point (DAP)
PN slot 1 Status Register 1 byte 1 byte
Input module 1 byte 1 byte

Output module 1 byte 1 byte

I/O module 2 bytes 2 bytes

DAP and Status Register should be counted in the total data size of input and output.
From the following table, you can see that the module data is counted in the total data size. If the total size specification
of 508 bytes for input and 500 bytes for output is exceeded, the PLC editing software will prompt you with an error
message while compiling.
In (byte) Out (byte)
PN
PN Module IOPS / IOPS /
slot Data Size Total Data Size Total
IOCS IOCS
0 AS300-CPU (DAP) 0 4 4 0 4 4
1 Status Register 8 1 9 0 1 1
2 100 Word In- and Output_1 200 2 202 200 2 202
3 100 Word In- and Output_2 200 2 202 200 2 202
4 16 Word In- and Output_1 32 2 34 32 2 34
5 16 Word In- and Output_2 32 2 34 32 2 34
6 04 Word Output 0 1 1 8 1 9
Total Size 486 486

 Additional remarks on Status Register

PN slot 1 is used as the status register to show the current communication card status, with the fixed size of 8 bytes
for input. See details in the following table.
Status
Name Description
Register

Determine whether the input data is valid.

Input Data
Byte 0.0  If the value is TRUE, the input data sent to PN Controller is valid.
Available
 If the value is FALSE, the input data sent to PN Controller is invalid.

Indicates PN connection status of PN slot 2 ~ PN slot 9.

Byte 4.0 - Connection
10 Byte 4.7 Status
 If the value is TRUE, the slot is configured with a PN module.
 If the value is FALSE, the slot is not configured with any PN module.

10-22
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

Status
Name Description
Register

Indicates PN connection status of PN slot 10 ~ PN slot 17.

Byte 5.0 -
 If the value is TRUE, the slot is configured with a PN module.
Byte 5.7
 If the value is FALSE, the slot is not configured with any PN module.

 Example 1

You can check that the value in Byte 0.0 is TRUE so as to determine if the input data is valid, preventing PN-
Controller receiving incorrect data when the connection is just established.

 Example 2

PN slots 2~4 are configured with PN modules. You can check that the values in corresponding Byte 4.0~ Byte 4.2
are TRUE to determine if the PN slots 2~4 are with working PN connections respectively.

10.2.8.7 RTU Mode (Works with AS00SCM-A)

When AS-FPFN02 communication card is installed on AS00SCM-A, you can use PN Controller’s software to configure
the modules. You can drag and drop the PN modules to PN slots. 8 modules can be configured at most (for PN slot 2 ~
PN slot 9). And then you can double-click a module to open the setting page and configure the module parameters.

Available for the following modules

AS08AM10N-A, AS16AM10N-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS64AM10N-A, AS08AN01P-A, AS08AN01R-A,
Digital modules AS08AN01T-A, AS16AN01P-A, AS16AN01R-A, AS16AN01T-A, AS32AN02T-A, AS64AN02T-A ,
AS16AP11P-A, AS16AP11R-A, AS16AP11T-A
AS04AD-A, AS08AD-B, AS08AD-C, AS04RTD-A, AS06RTD-A, AS04TC-A, AS08TC-A, AS04DA-A,
Analog modules
AS06XA-A

 Digital module addresses

Length to be used (bit) Length is being used (bit)

Type Module Name
In (I) Out (Q) In (I) Out (Q)
AS08AM10N-A 16 0 8 0
AS16AM10N-A 16 0 16 0
Digital input
AS32AM10N-A 32 0 32 0
AS64AM10N-A 64 0 64 0
AS08AN01P-A
AS08AN01R-A 0 16 0 8
AS08AN01T-A
AS16AN01P-A
Digital output
AS16AN01R-A 0 16 0 16
AS16AN01T-A
AS32AN02T-A 0 32 0 32
AS64AN02T-A 0 64 0 64
AS16AP11P-A
Digital
AS16AP11R-A 16 16 16 16
input/output
AS16AP11T-A

 Analog module addresses

(1) The first two words of the input data head is the error code for the module.
(2) Each channel takes two words of length, starting from channel 1, in numerical order. 10

10-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Length to be used
Length is being used (word)
(word)
Type Module Name In (I) Out (Q)
In (I) Out (Q) Error Data in
Data in channel
code channel
AS04AD-A
AS04RTD-A 20 0 2 8 0
AS04TC-A
Analog input AS06RTD-A 20 0 2 12 0
AS08AD-B
AS08AD-C 20 0 2 16 0
AS08TC-A
Analog output AS04DA-A 2 18 2 0 8
Analog
AS06XA-A 10 10 2 8 4
input/output

 Example
Use S7-1500 as a master and AS remote module as the 1st slave device. The address starts from 0. The actually-
used address for the module is from the starting address of each module shown on the software. For those unused
addresses are reserved by the system. The unit is byte. For example, 20 to 21 is seen as a word and for the next
word, it will be 22 to 23. The image shown below is the grouped module.

Arrangement shown on Device numbering in

PN the software program editing
Module Name Explanation
Slot I Q I Q
AS00SCM-A
1 0~19 0~19 0~13 --
(AS-FPFN02)
2 AS08AM10N-A 20~21 -- 20.0~20.7 -- 8 input points
3 AS16AM10N-A 22~23 -- 22.0~23.7 -- 16 input points
4 AS08AN01P-A -- 20~21 -- 20.0~20.7 8 input points
8 input points,
5 AS16AP11P-A 24~25 22~23 24.0~24.7 22.0~22.7
8 point output
26~29 Module error code
30~33 Channel 1
6 AS04AD-A 26~65 -- 34~37 -- Channel 2
38~41 Channel 3
42~45 Channel 4

 Additional remarks on Status Register

When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS00SCM-A, PN slot 1 is used as the status register. The input data length of I address
is 10 words for storing the current status of AS00SCM-A. Q address occupies 10 words and is system-reserved for output
data.

10

10-24
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

Status Register
Name Description
(Siemens S7-1500)
0: STOP
%IW0 Operation Status
1: RUN
%IW2 For AS00SCM-A; refer to AS00SCM-A for more information
Error Code For PN slot 2 to PN slot 9; refer to its corresponding module
%IW4 - %IW18
chapter
 The unit for the address series is byte. For example, %IW0 indicates from the address of 0 byte to read a length of
word (%IB0 & %IB1) and the next one is %IW2 (%IB2 & %IB3) and so forth.
 Select PN slot 1 to set up when to stop remote I/O modules by entering Properties→General→Module
parameters→AS Serial Remote Module Setting. Refer to section 9.4.3 for more information.

 When the extension module is disconnected, the error code shown on AS00SCM-A is 16#1503. The error code
address of the extension module that is disconnected from the AS00SCMA shows 16#1604.

10.2.8.8 COM Mode (Works with AS300 PLC and AS00SCM-A)

When AS-FPFN02 communication card is installed on AS00SCM-A on the right side of AS300/AS200/AS100 series PLC,
from the following table you can create 27 kinds of data exchanges – different data length and data type (e.g. 32 word in-
and output).
Data Length (word) 1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 10 / 16 / 32 / 64 / 100
Data Type Input / Output / In- and Output
In the upper device software, set up the serial number, that is, which unit AS00SCM-A is among the modules (including
AS00SCM-A, AS04SIL-A and AS01DNET-A) on the right side of AS series PLC CPU. The starting device for data
exchange is fixed as that of the exchange area that AS series PLC CPU assigns to AS-FPFN02.

Serial No. of Data exchange direction and starting D register

network modules Upper device → AS-FPFN02 AS-FPFN02 → Upper device
1 D26200 D26300
2 D26600 D26700
3 D27000 D27100
4 D27400 D27500

 Additional remarks on Status Register

PN slot 1 is used as the status register to show the current communication card status, with the fixed size of 8
bytes for input. See details in the following table.
Status
Name Description
Register
Determine whether the input data is valid.
Byte 0.0 Input Data Available  If the value is TRUE, the input data sent to PN Controller is valid.
 If the value is FALSE, the input data sent to PN Controller is invalid
When the value is not 0, it indicates an error occurs in module settings or
communication card installation.
 0x1620: Incorrect serial number setting, it should be the 1st unit.
Byte 3 &  0x1621: Incorrect serial number setting, it should be the 2nd unit.
Module Error Code
Byte 2  0x1622: Incorrect serial number setting, it should be the 3rd unit.
 0x1623: Incorrect serial number setting, it should be the 4th unit.
10
 0x1630: The communication with AS00SCM-A is not working. Repower
the module.

10-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.8.9 Example of AS-FPFN02 Working in CPU Mode

In this example, we use AX564 controller and DIADesigner-AX software to exchange data with AS-FPFN02 which is in
CPU mode.

Step 1: Configure the AS300 PLC CPU and AS-FPFN02 in DIADesigner.

Step 2: Add PN-Controller under Ethernet device of AX-5 in DIADesigner-AX.

Step 3: Right-click on PN-Controller, select "Scan for Devices...", and then select the model AS300-CPU (AS-FPFN02)
for data exchange to add the slave device.

Step 4: Right-click on the slave device to add a new device, and the PN module of 16 Word In - and Output is added.

10

10-26
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

Step 5: Enter the PN module settings window, where you set up the AS CPU D registers for communication.

Step 6: Click Login to download the project to the AX-5 PLC.

Step 7: The data in the mapping area for 16 word output of AX-5 will be sent to D12000~D12015 for the AS CPU respectively.

Step 8: The data from D10000 to D10015 of the AS CPU will be stored in the mapping area for 16 word input of AX-5.

10

10-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.8.10 Example of AS-FPFN02 Working in COM Mode

In this example, we use AX564 controller and DIADesigner-AX software to exchange data with AS-FPFN02 which is in
COM mode.

Step 1: Configure the AS200 PLC CPU, AS00SCM-A and AS-FPFN02 in DIADesigner.

Step 2: Add PN-Controller under Ethernet device of AX-5 in DIADesigner-AX.

Step 3: Right-click on PN-Controller, select "Scan for Devices...", and then select the model AS00SCM-COM (AS-
FPFN02) for data exchange to add the slave device.

Step 4: Add the PN module 16 Word In - and Output at the empty slot.

10

10-28
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

Step 5: Enter the PN module settings window, where you must set up the installation serial numbers for AS network
modules, which include AS00SCM-A, AS04SIL-A and AS01DNET-A.

Step 6: Click Login to download the project to the AX-5 PLC.

Step 7: The data in the mapping area for 16 word output of AX-5 will be sent to D26200~D26215 for the AS CPU
respectively, and the data from D26300~D26315 of the AS CPU will be stored in the mapping area for 16 word
input of AX-5.

10.2.8.11 Example of AS-FPFN02 Working in RTU Mode

In this example, we use AX564 controller and DIADesigner-AX software to exchange data with AS-FPFN02 which is in
RTU mode.

Step 1: Install AS-FPFN02 at the card slot of AS00SCM-A, and an AS16AP11P-A module on its right side, switch the
knob of AS00SCM-A to RTU mode and supply the power.

Step 2: Add PN-Controller under Ethernet device of AX-5 in DIADesigner-AX.

10

10-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 3: Right-click on PN-Controller, select "Scan for Devices...", and then select the model AS00SCM-RTU (AS-
FPFN02) for data exchange to add the slave device.

Step 4: Right-click on the slave device to add a new device, and the PN module of 16 Word In - and Output is added.

Step 5: Enter the PN module settings window, where you set up error handling and I/O module parameters.

Step 6: Click Login to download the project to the AX-5 PLC.

Step 7: The I/O mapping area for AX-5 can read and write the data in AS16AP11P-A.

10

10-30
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.8.12 Network Security

To enhance security and performance of the system, it is suggested to use closed network or LAN with firewall protection
to prevent cyber-attacks.

10.2.9 AS-FOPC02
AS-FOPC02 can be installed on AS300 PLC CPU. Communication can be done independently and that does NOT
occupy the communication port of PLC CPU. It can act as an OPC UA Server. After AS-FOPC02 is installed, you can go
to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft to do the editing in Ethernet Port Basic Setting and Ethernet Port IP Filter.

All the AS-FOPC02 parameters are stored in AS300 PLC CPU. Go to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft to check AS-FOPC02 IP
address in the Function Card 2 section. You can also use COMMGR to see the IP address of this device.

10.2.9.1 Supported Firmware Versions

 The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.10.00 or later for AS-FOPC02 to be installed on it.

 AS00SCM-A does NOT support AS-FOPC02. You can NOT install AS-FOPC02 on AS00SCM-A.

 ISPSoft version should be V3.13 or later.

10.2.9.2 Features
 When AS-FOPC02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it can act as OPC UA Server. The tag settings are the
same as the network communication settings for AS Series; refer to Chapter 9 from AS Series Hardware and
Operation Manual for more information.

 For PLC CPU with firmware version 1.10 or previous versions, before scanning to add AS-FOPC02 in,
remerber to change the setting “Setting delay time to detect I/O Module” to 3 seconds and then download the
settings to PLC CPU.

10

10-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.9.3 Specifications
 System Specifications
Item Specification
Device type Server
Topology Star and linear topologies are supported.
General When installed on AS300 PLC CPU, you can use
IP Settings
HWCONFIG from ISPSoft for editing
Availability AS300 Series PLC
Max. connection number 8
View device information
Web
Functions Account management
AS-FOPC02 firmware update

 Modbus TCP Specifications

Item Specification
General Device type Server (TCP port: 502)
Max. connection number 8
Modbus TCP Server
Max. data length 200 words

 OPC UA Specifications

Item Specification
General Device type Server (TCP port: 4840)
OPC UA Max. sessions 6 (Clients)
Server Max. tags 1000
Security policy None
Authentication Anonymous
Default endpoint/port opc.tcp://192.168.1.5:4840/
Transport protocol / encoding opc.tcp / binary
Supported profiles UA v1.03 Nano Embedded Device Server Profile
Sampling rate (ms) 100, 200, 300(default), 400, 500, 600…50000
10 Publish interval (ms) 100, 200, 300, 400, 500(default), 600…50000
Supported data type Int16, Uint16, Int32, Uint32, Float, Boolean
Max. subscription per session 2

10-32
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

Item Specification
Max. monitored items 3000 (including all sessions)
Session timeout (ms) 5000 ~ 30000
Subscription keep alive count 1~1000ms
1) Maximum data size of monitor items for all sessions < 50000bytes
Monitor Items Total Data size of Sampling and
monitor items Publish interval
(Bytes) time (second)
1~500 1~10000 1
10001~20000 2
20001~30000 3
30001~40000 4
40001~50000 5
501~1000 1~10000 2
10001~20000 3
20001~30000 4
30001~40000 5
40001~50000 6
1001~1500 1~10000 3
10001~20000 4
20001~30000 5
30001~40000 6
Restrictions
40001~50000 7
1501~2000 1~10000 4
10001~20000 5
20001~30000 6
30001~40000 7
40001~50000 8
2001~2500 1~10000 5
10001~20000 6
20001~30000 7
30001~40000 8
40001~50000 9
2501~3000 1~10000 6
10001~20000 7
20001~30000 8
30001~40000 9
40001~50000 10
2) Maximum tag array elements = 512 or data size < 400Bytes
3) Maximum tag name length = 40bytes

10.2.9.4 Special Data Registers (SR) for AS300 Series Only

OFF STOP RUN

Attribute
Latched

Default
AS300

AS200
Series

Series

SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

Total data of ASFOPC02 monitor items; unit: bytes;

SR913 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
low word
Total data of ASFOPC02 monitor items; unit: bytes;
SR914 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
high word 10
SR1430 Connection number of AS-FOPC02 OPC UA Server ○ – 0 – – N R 0

10-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

OFF STOP RUN

Attribute
Latched

Default
AS300

AS200
Series

Series
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

Connection number of AS-FOPC02 Modbus/TCP

SR1537 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
Server

Special data
Refresh time
register
SR913, SR914,
The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.
SR1430, SR1537

10.2.9.5 OPC UA Server

When AS-FOPC02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it can act as an OPC UA Server. Follow the steps below to create
Tags on AS300 Series PLC via OPC UA variables.

(1) Open ISPSoft and create a new project and then double-click Global OPC UA Variables under the Global
Symbols node to open the Global OPC UA Variables setting table.

10

10-34
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

(2) Right-click on the Global OPC UA Variables setting table to see the context menu. Click Add a Symbol to open the
setting page.

(3) Set up the OPC UA tag. See the following example for reference.
Supported data types are: WORD, DWORD, INT, DINT, REAL, and ARRAY; supported data types in ARRAY are
BOOL, WORD, DWORD, INT, DINT, and REAL.

(4) After the settings are complete, download the settings to PLC. After that devices can read/write the Tag. The way to
connect to the Tags varies in different brands. Refer to the specific device manual for more information on using tags
to connect.

10

10-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.9.6 Setting UTC Time in OPC UA Server

When AS-FOPC02 is installed on AS300 PLC CPU. You can create a connection through OPC UA and then the AS300
PLC CPU can be an OPC UA Server. Follow the steps below to set up the RTC and the time zone of OPC UA UTC.

(1) Set up the AS300 RTC

10

10-36
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

(2) Set up the time zone.

10.2.9.7 Network Security

To enhance security and performance of the system, it is suggested to use closed network or LAN with firewall protection
to prevent cyber-attacks.

10.2.9.8 The copyright information about the Used External Software

Sources
 lwIP TCP/IP stack
Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

10

10-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.10 AS-FFTP01
AS-FFTP01 can only be installed on AS Series PLC CPU. Communication can be done independently and that does
NOT occupy the communication port of PLC CPU. It supports IIoT related protocols. After AS-FFTP01 is installed, you
can go to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft for editing.
The AS-FFTP01 basic parameters (IP address and other parameters) are stored in AS Series PLC CPU. Other
parameters are stored in the SD card. After AS-FFTP01 is installed on AS Series PLC CPU, you can use the following
steps to obtain the parameters and make sure the IP address of AS-FFTP01 is correct.
1. Go to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft to upload the AS Series PLC CPU parameters and to check the IP address of AS-
FFTP01.
2. If the IP address is a dynamic one, use COMMGR to scan and check the IP address of this device.

10.2.10.1 Supported Firmware Versions

 The firmware of AS Series PLC should be V1.12 or later for AS-FFTP01 to be installed on it.
 AS00SCM-A does NOT support AS-FFTP01. You can NOT install AS-FFTP01 on AS00SCM-A.
 ISPSoft version should be V3.16 or later.

10.2.10.2 Functions
Function Name Description
It can act as an OPC UA Server. AS-FFTP01 and AS-FOPC02 share the same OPC
OPC UA Server UA symbols table in ISPSoft.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP); enter the IP address or the network name and the port
number (default 21) in FTP Client and then enter username and password to log in.
FTP Server
The read/write permission varies according to different users. You can set up the
parameters and the user permission in HWCONFIG.
You can save data in .csv file format, save user-defined contents in a table, and
Data Log design triggering conditions. The data log will be saved in the SD card on AS-
FFTP01, which can be retrieved from the SD card or obtained through FTP Server.
MQTT Client supported; you can use APIs of PLC and message broker to create
MQTT Client connections, publish and subscribe to messages. For AS-FFTP01 with firmware
version 1.00, only Amazon Web Services (AWS) is supported.
Webpage function is supported. (AS Series PLC CPU has its own independent
webpage.) You can monitor the diagnosis of the communication card and update
Web Server
firmware through the webpage. Node-RED Dashboard is supported, you can use
Node-RED editor to read/write data from the AS300 Series registers.
Modbus TCP communication supported; the upper device of Modbus TCP can use
Modbus TCP Server AS-FFTP01 communication card to read/write AS Series PLC CPU; up to 8
connections are supported simultaneously.

10

10-38
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.10.3 Specification Overview

 System Specifications
Item Specification
Device Type IIoT module
Availability AS300 Series PLC
Topology Star and linear (end point) topologies are supported.
When installed on AS Series PLC CPU, you can use HWCONFIG from ISPSoft for
IP Settings
editing
Storage Interface Micro SD (up to 32GB supported)

 OPC UA Specifications
Item Specification
Device type OPC UA Server
Communication port 4840
Maximum Sessions 6 (Clients)
Maximum Tags 1000
None,
Basic128Rsa15 – Sign,
Security policy Basic128Rsa15 - Sign & Encrypt
Basic256 – Sign
Basic256 - Sign & Encrypt
Anonymous
Authentication
Sign

Default endpoint/port opc.tcp://192.168.1.5:4840/

Transport protocol / encoding opc.tcp / binary

Supported profiles UA v1.03 Nano Embedded Device Server Profile
Sampling rate (ms) 100, 200, 300(default), 400, 500, 600…50000

Publish interval (ms) 100, 200, 300, 400, 500(default), 600…50000

Supported data type Int16, Uint16, Int32, Uint32, Float, Boolean

Max. subscription per session 2

Max. monitored items 3000 (including all sessions)

Session timeout (ms) 5000 ~ 30000

Subscription keep alive count 1~1000ms

 FTP Specifications
Item Specification
Device type FTP Server
Communication port 21 (default)
Maximum user accounts 4 (at least one user account should be created)
Data storage SD card

10

10-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Log Specifications
Item Specification
Device type Registers M, D
Supported format BOOL, INT16, UINT16, INT32, UINT32, Float
Supported user account 4
PLC Run, Always Enable (log cycle: 0.5s-120s),
Log mode
Program Control (log cycle: PLC program trigger)
Creating a new subdirectory when Date:1~31, month:1~12,
any of the conditions is met. Data log: 5,000 pieces automatically
Creating a new file when any of the Minutes :1~1440 , hours: 1~168, days: 1~31,
conditions is met. Data log: 1~10,000 pieces
Data storage SD card

 MQTT Specifications
Item Specification
Device type MQTT Client
Supported platform Amazon Web Service
Communication port 8883
Maximum connection number 1
Maximum connection number to be
1
recorded
Quality of Service (QoS) * 0, 1
Section to be read D register
Maximum data length in Publish 128 words
Maximum data length in Subscribe 128 words
MQTT_Connect
Application instructions MQTT_Publish
MQTT_Subscribe
*Note: QoS (Quality of Service): There are 3 QoS levels in MQTT. But for AS-FFTP01 V1.0, only 0 and 1 are supported.
For more details, refer to the instructions, including MQTT_Connect (API2214), MQTT_Publish (API2215) and
MQTT_Subscribe (API2216) from AS Series Programming Manual.

 Web Specifications
Item Specification
Communication port 80
Maximum connection number None*
 Check the device information
 Communication card function diagnostic
Function  Management on the webpage permission of users
 Firmware update
 Built-in Node-RED
Version V0.18.5
Node-RED
Communication port 1880
*Note: How many connections can be made is determined by the system resource. As the number of connections
increases, the webpage response will become slow. When the system resource is used up, the webpage will no
10 longer make response to any new connection request.

10-40
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

 Modbus TCP Specifications

Item Specification
Device type Modbus TCP Server
Communication port 502
Maximum connection number 8
Maximum data length 200 words

 Standard Modbus device address

Modbus address AS Series Address
Device Type Format Range
(Dec) (Hex)

Bit DD.DD X0.0~X63.15 124577~125600 6000~63FF

X
Word DD X0~X63 332769~332832 8000~803F

Bit DD.DD Y0.0~Y63.15 040961~041984 A000~A3FF

Y
Word DD Y0~Y63 440961~441024 A000~A03F

M Bit DDDD M0~M8191 000001~008192 0000~1FFF

SM Bit DDDD SM0~SM4095 016385~020480 4000~4FFF

SR Word DDDD SR0~SR2047 449153~451200 C000~C7FF

D Word DDDDD D0~D29999 400001~430000 0000~752F
S Bit DDDD S0~S2047 020481~022528 5000~57FF
Bit DDD T0~T511 057345~057856 E000~E1FF
T
Word DDD T0~T511 457345~457856 E000~E1FF
Bit DDD C0~C511 061441~061952 F000~F1FF
C
Word DDD C0~C511 461441~461952 F000~F1FF

Bit DDD HC0~HC255 064513~064768 FC00~FCFF

HC
DWord DDD HC0~HC255 464513~464768 FC00~FCFF

E Word DD E0~E9 465025~465039 FE00~FE09

 Standard Modbus function codes and range

Function
Description Applicable to devices Supported device range
code
01 Read multiple bit devices X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC 1~1600
02 Read multiple bit devices X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC 1~1600
03 Read multiple word devices X, Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E 1~100, but for HC: 1~50
04 Read multiple word devices X 1~100
05 Write the status in a single bit device Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC 1
06 Write data in a single word device Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E 1
0F Write the status in multiple bit devices Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC 1~1600
10 Write the status in multiple word devices Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E 1~100, but for HC: 1~50
Read/write the status from/in multiple word
17 Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E 1~100, but for HC: 1~50
devices

10

10-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.10.4 Before You Begin

 Setting up IP Address
1: Scan to add AS-FFTP01 in (recommended) or set the Function Card 2 to AS-FFTP01 in HWCONFIG.

2: Go to Function Card 2 Setting -> Ethernet Port Basic Setting to set up the IP address for AS-FFTP01.

3. After setting is done, download the parameters from HWCONFIG. And the Ehternet settings will be stored in
AS Series PLC CPU. If you replace the AS-FFTP01 communication card with another one, there is no need to
set up the IP address again.

4. After connecting to AS-FFTP01 via Ethernet, you can use COMMGR to scan for AS-FFTP01 and check its IP
address.

 Setting up NTP (RTC and Time Zone)

It is required to have accurate time for AS-FFTP01. And AS-FFTP01 time is synchronizing with the time of AS
Series PLC CPU. There it is necessary to check the time accuracy of AS Series PLC CPU.

1. Go to HWCONFIG -> Ethernet Port Advanced Setting -> NTP.

2. If there is a NTP Server, you can enable NTP Client Function.

3. If there is no NTP Server, you can go to ISPSoft -> Tool -> Real Time Clock to set up the time for AS Series
PLC CPU.

4. After setting up the Time Zone and the RTC, power off and then power on AS Series PLC CPU. AS-FFTP01
time will synchronize with the time of AS Series PLC CPU.

10

10-42
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

 Setting up the parameters

1. Go to HWCONFIG -> AS-FFTP01 setting page to set up. You will need to use Upload and Download buttons
on this page to upload/download the parameters set for AS-FFTP01. The upload/download function on the
PLC CPU setting page does not include the parameters of AS-FFTP01.

2. Use the Upload and Download buttons on the AS-FFTP01 setting page to upload/download the parameters
to the project. This will not alter the AS PLC CPU parameters in the project.

3. Note: After powering on or downloading the parameters, AS-FFTP01 will begin initializing. After the
initialization is done, the upload/download can be executed again. Once AS-FFTP01 is ready, the MS LED
will be ON. (Green LED).

4. Password: A password can be created or changed to protect AS-FFTP01. This password should be different
from other projects or webpages. It is required to enter the created password whenever you need to
upload/download AS-FFTP01 in HWCONFIG. You can delete the old password by leaving the new password
field blank and press the enter key.

5. Restore to default settings: This only restores the AS-FFTP01 parameters to defaults. AS PLC CPU
parameters will not be affected.

10

10-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.10.5 OPC UA Server

When AS-FFTP01 is installed on AS PLC CPU, OPC UA clients can create connections through OPC UA and AS-
FFTP01 to read and write OPC UA tags of AS PLC CPU. It is required for AS-FFTP01 to communicate with an OPC UA
client certificate; communication without OPC UA client certificate is not supported. Set up the related parameters in
HWCONFIG.
Refer to the following steps and examples for more information.
1. Enable / disable OPC UA Server
As long as there is OPC UA tags created in ISPSoft, OP UA Server is enabled. If you need to disable OPC UA
Server, all you need to do is clear all the OPC UA tags.
2. Create OPC UA Tags in ISPSoft. (Refer to sections 10.2.9.5 and 10.2.9.6.)
3. Make sure if the IP address, time and time zone are accurate in AS-FFTP01.
4. Create an username and password.
(1) Go to HWCONFIG -> AS-FFTP01 -> OPC UA Server Setting: You can use anonymous to login by ticking the
option Allow Anonymous Login. Otherwise, you will need to create a username and a password.

(2) Go to HWCONFIG -> AS-FFTP01 -> OPC UA Server Setting -> OPC UA User Setting 1: Create an User
name and a Password. Up to 4 unique user names can be created.

(3) Download the AS-FFTP01 parameters.

5. Client Certificate: Since communication without a client certificate is not supported, you will need to create one.
The followings demonstrate how to create a Client Certificate by using VTScada.
(1) Establish a VTScada connection.
i. Create a communication port.

10

10-44
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

ii. Create a connection.

10

10-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

iii. Enter the Endpoint URL: Use the format: opc.tcp://AS-FFTP01 IP Address:4840

iv. Enter the username and password

You can select Anonymous if you have ticked the option Allow Anonymous Login in the OPC UA
Server Setting. If not, you need to select Username and then enter the username and password you
have created.

10

10-46
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

(2) Client Certificate

i. Set up the Client Certificate: Under the Client Certificate tab, select the valid one from the list and
click Use Selected and then click Apply.

ii. Make sure AS-FFTP01 is connected through EtherNet. Go to Server Certificate page and use Add
Trust button to add all the valid ones to the Trust list.

iii. AS-FFTP01 will renew its Client Certificate automatically if any of the following executions is
performed, RTC adjust, time zone adjust, firmware update or restoring back to defaults. If you have
problem connecting to OPC UA Client, follow the previous steps to set up the Client Certificate again.

(3) Set up OPC UA Server Certification for AS-FFTP01.

i. After setting up Client Certificate in VTScada, you need to upload parameters on AS-FFTP01 to
HWCONFIG.
ii. After that, go to HWCONFIG -> AS-FFTP01 -> OPC UA Server Setting -> OPC UA Server Certification
Management.

10

10-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

iii. Select the certificates from the right and then click the directional button (to the right) to add the
selected ones to the Trust List on the left.

iv. Download AS-FFTP01 parameters.

v. If you need to clear the unwanted certificates, you need to synchronize the certificates in HWCONFIG
and AS-FFTP01 by using Upload and Download buttons. After that, select the option Clear all
optional certificates to remove unwanted certificates.

After the initialization is done, the MS LED will be ON. (Green LED). Upload the AS-FFTP01
parameters and the certificate list is updated and the unwanted certificates are cleared.

(4) Connection
i. After setting up the client certificates for AS-FFTP01, click Restart Comms to restart connection in
VTScada.

10

10-48
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

ii. Check the OPC UA Connection. If the value is 0, that means the connection is working fine. If the value
is any other number, you will need to check the VTScada manual to see what that error code indicates.

10

10-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) Create Tags

i. Select I/O and Calculations.

ii. Set up Data Type.

10

10-50
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

iii. Click OPC UA under I/O tab to open the setting page. And OPC UA tags created in ISPSoft will appear
in here for selection.

6. Application Diagnostic - OPC UA

(1) Connection error
i. Make sure the client end and server end are in each other’s trust list.
ii. Make sure the username and password are correct.
iii. If the MS LED is green and blinking, that means OPC UA server is initializing or starting up. You will
need to reconnect once the MS LED is green and ON.
iv. If MS LED is red and ON / blinking, power off and power on the device. And then check the error code
stored in SR38 of AS Series PLC CPU.
(2) Log in to the webpage and then go to Diagnostic -> Application diagnostic to check the OPC UA Server
status. If its status is in error, you can use Reboot button to restart the OPC UA Server.

10

10-51
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.10.6 FTP Server

It is required for AS-FFTP01 to have a SD card inserted to use FTP function. SD card of AS-FFTP01 can be accessed by
the FTP software. FTP server function is supported but not FTPS nor SFTP.

 When there is no card reader, FTP function can be used with Log function, and if necessary, system log output and
firmware update functions on the webpage can be used together. Refer to the following sections for more details.

 Set up the related parameters in HWCONFIG. Refer to the following steps and examples for more information.

1. Make sure the IP address, time and time zone of AS-FFTP01 are accurate. (refer to section 10.2.10.4 for more
information).
2. Enable FTP Server.

3. Make sure the port that FTP is going to use. (default: 21; no need to change it if there is no other concern).
4. Set up the user account and password for users to log in to FTP Server. Up to 4 unique users can be set. At least
one user account should be created.

 Use FTP Client from your computer to connect to AS-FFTP01. Enter the followings:

1. IP address of the communication card

2. Port number (default: 21)
3. User account and password
After that AS-FFTP01 is connected and you can upload/download data on the SD card of AS-FFTP01.
 The folder and zip files: System Volume Information、iot.zip、uasave.zip in the SD card are for system use. Do not
edit or remove them. If the files are deleted accidentally, you can download the AS-FFTP01 parameters again from
HWCONFIG.

10.2.10.7 Log
You can save the data to the SD card in .csv file that is installed on AS-FFTP01. Up to four groups of logs (Log1 to Log4)
can be set. Each group of log can set its own triggering conditions to log data. You can retrieve data from the SD card or
through FTP to download data.

10  Before you begin:

1. Make sure a SD card is installed in AS-FFTP01.

10-52
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

2. Make sure the IP address, time and time zone of AS-FFTP01 are accurate. (refer to section 10.2.10.4 for more
information).

 Set up the related parameters in HWCONFIG. Refer to the following steps and examples for more information.
1. Log Setting

On the Log Setting page, row 1 and row 2 are fixed for date and time. For other rows, one row corresponds to one
register. Click +Add to create a new row in the .csv file and up to 60 rows can be added. The following parameters
can be set here on the Log Setting page.
 Name: user-defined, the maximum length is 64 characters.
 Register Type: Registers D and M
 Register Address: Register number
 Data Type: INT16, UINT16, INT32, UINT32, and Float can be used. After the file is saved in the log, the
corresponding data type and acceptable data length will be applied.
 Decimal Places: Up to 5 decimal places can be used for the use of floating-point data type.

2. Log Mode

(1) Log Mode:

 Disable: Not using this log function
 Program Control: Work with Record_Trigger instruction (API2305); the execution of instruction is used for PLC
to control the log recording timing. For more details, refer to AS Series Programming Manual.
 PLC Run: When PLC starts running, the log function is enabled. When PLC stops running, the log function is
disabled.
 Always Enable: Once PLC starts running, the log function is enabled. The log function is enabled, even if the
PLC stops running.

(2) Log Cycle:

 When Log Mode is PLC Run or Always Enable: The triggering time to record log is set here; the interval unit
is 0.1 second.
 When Log Mode is Program Control: The triggering time to record log is defined by PLC program.

3. File Name
Data log can only be saved on the SD card. You can define the directory name and the file name, for instance, a
created file name looks like this: ‘SD card/Delta/MyLog_20220425/Device_log_20220425_184031.csv”.

10

10-53
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(1) Parent directory name (SD Card): Set up the parent directory name.
(2) Subdirectory name: Set up the subdirectory name.
(3) Automatically Appended Subdirectory Name: Disable, Date, Date + Time
If Date or Date + Time is selected, the date or date + time will be added right after your set subdirectory name.
Make sure you have set up the real time correctly in AS PLC CPU before selecting Date or Date + Time option.
(4) File name (.csv): Set up the file name. Do not leave this field blank.
(5) Automatically Appended File Name: Disable, Date, Date + Time
If Date or Date + Time is selected, the date or date + time will be added right after your set filename. Make
sure you have set up the real time correctly in AS PLC CPU before selecting Date or Date + Time option.

4. Parameter Settings

(1) New Directory Creating Timing: New subdirectories can be created according to the following selections. Up
to 500 subdirectories can be created in one directory.
 Automatically create a new directory: when the number of the files in the subdirectory has reached to
500, a new subdirectory will be created.
 Date, Month: When selecting the cycle unit, date or month the system will create a new subdirectory and
save the data in the new subdirectory when the saving condition is met.
(2) New Directory Creating Parameter: Up to 500 files can be created in a subdirectory.
(3) New File Creating Timing: New files can be created according to the following selections. Up to 10000 files
can be created in one subdirectory.
 Overwrite existing file: When the number of the data in the file is reached to the maximum number (up
to 10000), the file will be overwritten.
 Minute, Day, Month: When selecting the cycle unit, minute, day, or month, the system will create a new
file and save the data in the new file when the saving condition is met. Up to 10000 pieces of data can
be saved; if exceeding the limit, the system will create a new file for recording.
 Set maximum records of created file: You can set a maximum number for records in a file. The set
10 maximum of records can be saved, if exceeding the limit, the system will create a new file for recording.
(4) New File Creating Parameter: Up to 10000 pieces of data can be created in a file.

10-54
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

(5) Save to SD Card Timing: The system saves data from the registers to the files in the SD card by counts or by
seconds.
 Count, second: Set the number of counts or seconds. When the number is reached, the system saves
data from the registers to the files on the SD card. The less the setting value is, the sooner, the data will
be saved and data loss is prevented. But the frequency of writes on the SD card will be increased and
the working life of the SD card may be decreased.
(6) Save to SD Card Parameter: Up to 500 files from the registers can be saved on a SD card. When the setting
value is set to 0 or less than the recording cycle, the system saves data automatically. When the data in the
register is more than 60% full, the system saves data to the SD card immediately.

5. Example
(1) Make sure a SD card is installed in AS-FFTP01.
(2) Make sure the RTC and time zone are set accurately.
(3) Setting up the parameters.
There are two pieces of data stored in D registers and their data types are INT16 and Float respectively.

(4) Log Mode

 Log Mode: PLC Run
 Log Cycle: The triggering time to record log is recording 1 piece of data every second; the interval unit
is 0.1 second.

(5) File Name

 Parent directory name: Delta
 Subdirectory name: MyLog
 Automatically Appended Subdirectory Name: Date
 File Name: Device_log
 Automatically Appended File Name: Date + Time

(6) Parameter Settings:

 The system will create a new subdirectory and save the data in the new subdirectory daily.
 The system will create a new file every 10 minutes.
 The system will save the file to the SD card every 10 seconds. 10

10-55
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(7) Download data through FTP

 Enter the IP address, the username and password in FTP software to log in.
 Data is recorded under the folder with the name “/Delta/MyLog_20220325”.
 After downloading, the .csv file can be opened for reviewing.

6. Log status
Log in to the webpage of AS-FFPT01 and then go to Diagnostic -> Application diagnostic to check the Log status. If
its status is in error, you can use Reboot button to restart the Log.

10

10-56
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.10.8 Web Server

You can enter AS-FFTP01 IP address in the search bar of your browser to connect to your device. After that you can
monitor the operation, diagnose the problem and reboot the system if necessary. Node-RED is also supported.

To enable web server, go to HWCONFIG -> Function Card 2 Setting -> Ethernet Port Basic Setting -> Web Server
Enable.

 List of browsers that support AS-FFTP01 webpage:

Provider Browser Supported versions

Microsoft Internet Explorer V10.0 and later

Microsoft Edge V20 and later

Google Chrome V14 and later

Apple Safari V5.1 and later

 Log in

After the setting up IP address in HWCONFIG of ISPSoft. Open your browser and enter AS-FFTP01 IP address in
the search bar to connect to AS-FFTP01. After the webpage appears, enter “Admin” in the User section and click
Login without entering any password. You can set up the password after login.

10

10-57
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Diagnostic: Use this page to execute System diagnostic and Application diagnostic.

 System diagnostic: The system diagnostic can be exported. Click Export button to export the system status
to the SD card. If something went wrong on the function card, your local authorized distributor can use the
system diagnostic as reference to solve the problem. Once the Export status shows Finished, you can take out
the SD card and use a card reader or FTP software to check the message.zip file from the SD card.

 Application diagnostic: You can use this page to check the OPC UA status and Log status. If the status is in
error, you can use Reboot button to restart the OPC UA or Log.

10

10-58
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

 Configuration

 Account management
There is only one account; that is Admin. For its password, you can edit the password and then click Apply
button. After that go to Save Configuration page to save the change. This password will be used in this
webpage and Node-RED editor.

 Firmware update

Store the firmware on SD card of AS-FFTP01 via a card reader or FTP function and then you can use this page to
update the firmware. After firmware update is complete, power off and then power on your PLC to have the new
firmware to take effect.

 Save configuration: After settings are done, you need to save the changes in this page to make the changes
effective.

 Node-RED editor: You can create flow charts to make components and to read/write data from PLC data registers.

(1) You can use Modbus TCP communication to access to AS Series PLC CPU in Node-RED editor. The IP
address is 127.0.0.1. And then you can see the data from the AS PLC CPU on this page.
(2) Click the Click button and then enter the fixed account name “Admin” and your password (default: Admin) to
open the editor.

10

10-59
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Dashboard: Once you click it, a new window will be opened and a complied dashboard will be shown visually.
 The Demo-page can be opened if it is your first time to use AS-FFTP01 function card or you just restore AS-
FFTP01 to its default settings. The data in SM, SR, M and D devices of AS Series PLC CPU can be read and
transferred to the nodes of the dashboard in different formats. For more details, see the reference in the editor.
 Users cannot create new nodes for AS-FFTP01 V1.00.
 Backup and Restoration

(1) If the AS-FFTP01 is restored to its defaults, only the demo page will be shown. Thus it is important to
back up your Node-RED data after editing is done.
(2) Click any nodes in the editor to open the function list on the upper-right corner of the screen. Select
Export -> Clipboard and then you can select the sections to be backed up. After that, click Export to
clipboard to copy the codes and then paste them in any textbook. And then a copy of your codes is
made.
(3) For restoration, select Import -> Clipboard from the upper-right corner of the screen to import your
copied codes and then your codes can be used again.

10.2.10.9 MQTT Client

AS-FFTP01 V1.00 supports Amazon AWS IoT Core for MQTT. You can use the MQTT feature Publish to publish
messages to the specific topic on the cloud where the MQTT Broker designed. For example, you can update the status
of the PLC registers to the specific topic on the cloud. Up to 5 topics can be subscribed at the same time. Users can use
the MQTT feature Subscribe to scribe the specific topic and after the subscription is complete, they can receive the
published messages that they subscribed or the status of the PLC registers.

Before the connection is established, you will need to set up AWS IoT Core.
1. Log in AWS IoT Core and create things.

2. Select the Create single thing and click Next. On the next page, provide the to-be-created thing with a name and
then click Create thing type. On the next page, provide the to-be-created thing type with a name and then click
10 Create.

10-60
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

3. Select Auto-generate a new certificate (recommended) and click Next.

10

10-61
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4. Click Create policy to manage AWS IoT actions and then click Create.

5. After that, attach policies to certificate and then click Create thing.

6. Download all the certificates and keys. We will need the followings for the set up.
 Root certificate (Root CA1)
 Device certificate (.crt)
 Private key

10

10-62
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

7. Go to the setting page to copy the Endpoint address. You will need to use this address later in HWCONFIG.

Setting up MQTT in HWCONFIG:

1. Go to MQTT User Setting 1 page.
2. Cloud: Select AWS.
3. Server Mode: Select Domain Name.
4. Server Domain Name: Paste the Endpoint address that you’ve just copied from AWS setting page.
10
5. Port number: 8883
6. Import the AWS provided RootCA1, Certification (.crt) and Private Key file.

10-63
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7. After the connection is established, you can use the PLC instruction MQTT_Connect (API2214) to establish
connections.
8. After connected, use the PLC instructions MQTT_Publish (API2215) and MQTT_Subscribe (API2216) to publish and
subscribe messages.
9. Refer to AS Programming Manual for more details on instruction executions.

10.2.10.10 Network Security

To enhance security and performance of the system, it is suggested to use closed network or LAN with firewall protection
to prevent cyber-attacks.

10.2.10.11 Error Codes

AS-FFTP01 uses SM38 as an error flag and stores error codes in SR38.
 Any error occurs, the flag SM38 will be ON.
 The error codes will be stored in SR38. When there are more than one error occur at the same time, only the one
with higher priority will be shown in SR38. For example, if the errors 16#9001 and 16#900F occur at the same time,
only 16#9001 will be shown in SR38. The following error codes are numbered according to their priorities. The higher
the priority is, the sooner it will be presented in this table.
Error
Description Solution
Code
A firmware update is undergoing After the firmware update is complete, power off and power on your
16#9000
now. PLC CPU to restart.
1. Check if the function card is securely inserted into the slot.
2. Check if the settings in HWCONIG are the same as the actual
16#9001 Failed to communicate internally settings for function card.
3. Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Internal master communication Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9002
stops working. persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Internal slave communication Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9003
stops working. persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9004 Modbus TCP slave stops working.
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9005 MQTT client stops working.
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
1. Reboot OPC UA server on the diagnostic web page.
16#9006 OPC UA server stops working. 2. Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
FTP server or Log function stops Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
10 16#9007
working. persists, contact the local authorized distributors.

10-64
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

Error
Description Solution
Code
Web server function stops Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9008
working. persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Internal communication stops Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9009
working. persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Initialization on internal master Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#900B
communication failed persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Initialization on internal slave Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#900C
communication failed persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Initialization on Modbus TCP Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#900D
slave failed persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#900E Initialization on MQTT client failed
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Initialization on OPC UA server 1. Reboot OPC UA server on the diagnostic web page.
16#900F failed 2. Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Initialization on FTP server or Log Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9010
function failed persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Initialization on Web failed Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9011
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Initialization on internal Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9012
communication failed persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Initialization on RTC failed Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9013
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9014 RTC function stops working.
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
1. Check if the function card is securely inserted into the slot.
16#9200 Internal communication timeout 2. Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Check if the SD card is functioning properly. And then download the
16#9201 Failed to store in SD card
HWCONFIG parameters again.
Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. And then
16#9202 Failed to back up
download the HWCONFIG parameters again.
Failed to read HWCONFIG Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9203
parameters persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
Failed to read parameter from Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#9204
OPC UA server persists, contact the local authorized distributors.
1. Check if the function card is securely inserted into the slot.
2. Power off and power on your PLC CPU and try to restore the
16#9205 Failed to restore to defaults
settings to defaults again. If the problem persists, contact the
local authorized distributors.
Check if the SD card is functioning properly. Power off and power on
16#9206 Failed to update firmware your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem persists, contact the local
authorized distributors.
Remove the device with the same IP address on the network or
16#9207 IP address conflict
modify the IP address of AS-FFTP01.
Power off and power on your PLC CPU to restart. If the problem
16#92FF Unknown error
persists, contact the local authorized distributors.

10.2.11 AS-FECAT
This communication card can work independently and does NOT occupy the communication port of PLC CPU. It can act
as Modbus TCP Server and EtherCAT Master. After AS-FECAT is installed, you can go to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft for
editing in the Function Card 2 section.

For the AS-FECAT basic parameters (IP address and other parameters) are stored in AS300 Series PLC CPU. After AS-
FECAT is installed on AS300 Series PLC CPU, you can use the following steps to obtain and make sure the IP address
of AS-FECAT is correct. 10
1. Go to HWCONFIG from ISPSoft to upload the AS Series PLC CPU parameters to check the IP address of AS-FECAT

10-65
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. If the IP address is a dynamic one, use COMMGR to scan and check the IP address of this device.

10.2.11.1 Supported Firmware Versions

 The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.14 or later for AS-FECAT to be installed on it.
 ISPSoft version should be V3.16 or later.
 Built-in ISPSoft, HWCONFIG, should be V4.06 or later.

10.2.11.2 Features
 AS-FECAT can be installed on AS300 Series PLC CPU.
 When AS-FECAT is installed on AS300 Series PLC CPU, it can act as a Server of Modbus TCP. The way to use
AS-FECAT is the same as using the built-in connection port for communication.
 When AS-FECAT is installed on AS300 Series PLC CPU, you can use the INITEC instruction (API2820) to initialize
EtherCAT communication and then set up one of the AS-FECAT port as the EtherCAT Master’s port in HWCONFIG.
As for the other port, it can be used by Server of Modbus TCP. The way to use the two communication ports is the
same as using the built-in connection port for communication.

10.2.11.3 Specifications

 System Specifications
Item Specification
Device type Master and Slave
Star and linear topologies are supported.
Note: Once the EtherCAT communication is
initialized via the INITEC instruction (API2820), the
Topology above mentioned topologies are not supported.
General There are two ports on AS-FECAT; one will be used
as EtherCAT port and the other will be Ethernet
port. Two ports work independently.
Availability AS300 Series PLC CPU
 When installed on AS300 PLC CPU, you can
IP Settings
use HWCONFIG from ISPSoft for editing.
Max. connection number 8
View device information
Web
Functions Account management
10 AS-FECAT firmware update

10-66
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

 Modbus TCP Specifications

Item Specification
General Device type Server
Modbus TCP Max. connection number 1
Server Max. data length/per transmission 200 words

 When EtherCAT function is enabled, it is suggested to set the communication timeout to over 100 ms for
Modbus TCP client.
 When the AS CPU scan time is greater than 25 ms, you should set the communication timeout to over
200 ms, and adjust it according to the field communication situation.
 Data update cycle reference: 100 words of data exchange
 When the CPU scan time is less than 10 ms, the data update cycle is less than 60 ms.
 When the CPU scan time is greater than 30 ms, the data update cycle is greater than 100 ms.

 EtherCAT Specifications
Item Specification
Baud rate 100Mbps
Communication protocol EtherCAT packet
16
Note: only available for Delta Servo
Supported number of axes drives, ASDA-A2-E, ASDA-A3-E, ASDA-
B3-E and Delta inverters, C2000 and
CH2000.

10

10-67
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.2.11.4 IP Setting
 The IP address of AS-FECAT is not stored on the function card. When you install AS-FECAT onto AS300 PLC CPU
or AS00SCM-A, the IP settings of AS-FECAT will be obtained automatically.
 When installed on AS300 PLC CPU, you can go to ISPSoft -> HWCONFIG -> Function Card 2 Setting -> Ethernet
Port Basic Setting to edit the parameters.

Note: You can use IP Manager Tool, when AS-FECAT is installed on AS300 PLC CPU, but do not use it to set up the IP
address to avoid conflicts with the parameters of AS300 PLC CPU project.

10.2.11.5 Set up the ECAT Port

When AS-FECAT is installed on AS300 Series PLC CPU, you can use the INITEC instruction (API2820) to initialize
EtherCAT communication and then set up one of the AS-FECAT port as the EtherCAT Master’s port in HWCONFIG. As
for the other port, it can be used by Server of Modbus TCP. Two ports work independently. If the EtherCAT
communication is NOT initialized, the two ports of AS-FECAT can be used by Servers of Modbus TCP.

10

10-68
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.11.6 SM/SR
 The following table shows special flags (SM) and registers (SR) related to ECAT communication.
Flag R/W ID. 1 to ID. 16
Initialization and communication
R SM1681
complete (INITC and CASD)
Communication error R SM1682
SM1684 = OFF (default; when one goes down, all the drives are OFF.)
Disconnection error handling R/W
SM1684 = ON (when one goes down, only the defective drive is OFF.)
SR656
ECAT SDO abort code (32-bit) R/W
SR657
ID number with a communication
R/W SR658
error
Communication error code R/W SR659

Function R/W ID. 1 ID. 2 ID. 3 ID. 4 ID. 5 ID. 6 ID. 7 ID. 8
Servo Positioning complete#1 R/W SM1631 SM1632 SM1633 SM1634 SM1635 SM1636 SM1637 SM1638
Servo Stop R/W SM1641 SM1642 SM1643 SM1644 SM1645 SM1646 SM1647 SM1648
Servo-ON, inverter-ON R SM1651 SM1652 SM1653 SM1654 SM1655 SM1656 SM1657 SM1658
Go-back/go-forth enabled
R/W SM1661 SM1662 SM1663 SM1664 SM1665 SM1666 SM1667 SM1668
Only DDRVAC is supported.
Go-back/go-forth direction indicator
R SM1671 SM1672 SM1673 SM1674 SM1675 SM1676 SM1677 SM1678
Only DDRVAC is supported.
Auto return communication control
R/W SM1581 SM1582 SM1583 SM1584 SM1585 SM1586 SM1587 SM1588
right. Only DDRVAC is supported.
Disconnection error code#2 R/W SM1691 SM1692 SM1693 SM1694 SM1695 SM1696 SM1697 SM1698

Function R/W ID. 9 ID. 10 ID. 11 ID. 12 ID. 13 ID. 14 ID. 15 ID. 16

Servo Positioning complete#1 R/W SM1921 SM1922 SM1923 SM1924 SM1925 SM1926 SM1927 SM1928
Servo Stop R/W SM1931 SM1932 SM1933 SM1934 SM1935 SM1936 SM1937 SM1938
Servo-ON, inverter-ON R SM1621 SM1622 SM1623 SM1624 SM1625 SM1626 SM1627 SM1628
Go-back/go-forth enabled
R/W SM1941 SM1942 SM1943 SM1944 SM1945 SM1946 SM1947 SM1948
Only DDRVAC is supported.
Go-back/go-forth direction indicator
R SM1951 SM1952 SM1953 SM1954 SM1955 SM1956 SM1957 SM1958
Only DDRVAC is supported.
Auto return communication control
R/W SM1601 SM1602 SM1603 SM1604 SM1605 SM1606 SM1607 SM1608
right. Only DDRVAC is supported.
Disconnection error code#2 R/W SM1611 SM1612 SM1613 SM1614 SM1615 SM1616 SM1617 SM1618

#1: The timing for the servo positioning completion flag to be cleared to off automatically is when the outputting of the
axis is enabled. If you need to use positioning instructions on a certain axis for several times in a row, you need to clear
the servo positioning completion flag by yourself. If you do not clear the servo positioning completion flag and then use
the positioning instruction again and again, it is possible that before the next positioning instruction is executed, a servo
positioning completion flag is detected and then the execution of positioning instruction will be stopped.

# 2: Since the heartbeat is not available for ECAT communication, working counter (WKC) is used as a way to determine
whether the connection of a slave is lost or not. 10

10-69
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 The following table shows special flags (SM) and registers (SR) related to Servo ECAT communications.
Parameter Name (Number) R/W ID. 1 ID. 2 ID. 3 ID. 4 ID. 5 ID. 6 ID. 7 ID. 8
Servo PR command (P5-07) /
R SR661 SR662 SR663 SR664 SR665 SR666 SR667 SR668
Inverter status (index 6041H-00H)
Servo Alarm code (P0-01) R SR671 SR672 SR673 SR674 SR675 SR676 SR677 SR678
Servo DO state (P0-46) R SR681 SR682 SR683 SR684 SR685 SR686 SR687 SR688
Servo command positon CMD_O SR691 SR693 SR695 SR697 SR699 SR701 SR703 SR705
R
(P0-09) SR692 SR694 SR696 SR698 SR700 SR702 SR704 SR706
Servo target position CMD_E (P0- SR711 SR713 SR715 SR717 SR719 SR721 SR723 SR725
R
10) SR712 SR714 SR716 SR718 SR720 SR722 SR724 SR726
Servo DI state (P4-07) R SR731 SR732 SR733 SR734 SR735 SR736 SR737 SR738

Current torque (P0-11) R SR741 SR742 SR743 SR744 SR745 SR746 SR747 SR748
SR791 SR793 SR795 SR797 SR799 SR801 SR803 SR805
Servo Self-defined (P0-12) R
SR792 SR794 SR796 SR798 SR800 SR802 SR804 SR806
Positioning completion range
R/W SR811 SR812 SR813 SR814 SR815 SR816 SR817 SR818
setting

Parameter Name (Number) R/W ID. 9 ID. 10 ID. 11 ID. 12 ID. 13 ID. 14 ID. 15 ID. 16
Servo PR command (P5-07) /
R SR751 SR752 SR753 SR754 SR755 SR756 SR757 SR758
Inverter status (index 6041H-00H)
Servo Alarm code (P0-01) R SR761 SR762 SR763 SR764 SR765 SR766 SR767 SR768

Servo DO state (P0-46) R SR1191 SR1192 SR1193 SR1194 SR1195 SR1196 SR1197 SR1198
Servo command positon CMD_O SR1201 SR1203 SR1205 SR1207 SR1209 SR1211 SR1213 SR1215
R
(P0-09) SR1202 SR1204 SR1206 SR1208 SR1210 SR1212 SR1214 SR1216
Servo target position CMD_E (P0- SR1221 SR1223 SR1225 SR1227 SR1229 SR1231 SR1233 SR1235
R
10) SR1222 SR1224 SR1226 SR1228 SR1230 SR1232 SR1234 SR1236
Servo DI state (P4-07) R SR781 SR782 SR783 SR784 SR785 SR786 SR787 SR788

Current torque (P0-11) R SR771 SR772 SR773 SR774 SR775 SR776 SR777 SR778
SR1241 SR1243 SR1245 SR1247 SR1249 SR1251 SR1253 SR1255
Servo Self-defined (P0-12) R
SR1242 SR1244 SR1246 SR1248 SR1250 SR1252 SR1254 SR1256
Positioning completion range
R/W SR1261 SR1262 SR1263 SR1264 SR1265 SR1266 SR1267 SR1268
setting

 Special Data Registers (SR)

OFF STOP RUN

Attribute
Latched

Default
AS300

AS200
Series

Series

SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR1536 AS-FEN02/FOPC02 TCP current connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0

SR1537 AS-FEN02 Modbus /TCP Server connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0

Special data
Refresh time
register
SR1536~SR1537 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.

10

10-70
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.11.7 Example of Setting up EtherCAT Master

When AS-FECAT is installed on AS300 Series PLC CPU, you can set up one of the AS-FECAT port as the EtherCAT
Master’s port in HWCONFIG.
1. Set up the ECAT port x1 in HWCONFIG for AS-FECAT.

2. Use the INITEC instruction (API2820) to initialize EtherCAT communication. Refer to section API2820 from section
6.27 Delta CANopen Communication Instructions of AS Programming Manual for more details. After the initialization
of EtherCAT communication is complete, port x1 can act as the port for an EtherCAT Master, and then communicate
with Slaves.
3. After the initialization of EhterCAT communication is complete, port x2 can be used by a server of Modbus TCP or can
be used by a webpage.
4. After the initialization of EhterCAT communication is complete, if PLC switches from RUN to STOP, port x1 will no
longer be used as a port for an EtherCAT Master. And then two ports, port x1 and port x2 can both be used by servers
of Modbus TCP or can be used by a webpage.

10.2.11.8 Example of Setting up Modbus TCP Server

When AS-FECAT is installed on AS300 PLC CPU, you can create a connection by configuring the IP address and some
relevant parameters to make it act as a Modbus TCP server.

The following example shows two AS300 PLC CPUs (one with AS-FECAT) to connect to each other and one as Client
and the other as Server (AS-FECAT) to perform data mapping through the Modbus TCP connection. For the support
function codes and corresponding addresses, refer to AS Series Operation Manual for more details.

Device Function IP Address Data Mapping Area

AS300 Modbus TCP Client 192.168.1.5 D100, D200
AS300+ AS-FECAT Modbus TCP Server 192.168.1.3 D200, D300

10

10-71
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 1

Double click AS 300 PLC CPU in HWCONFIG and set up the IP Address of the AS-FECAT to 192.168.1.3

Step 2

Create a data mapping table in the Client and then perform data mapping with the Server (AS-FECAT).

Step 3

Click the Downloader icon and then select the parameters that you’d like to download.

10

10-72
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.2.11.9 Webpage Function

When AS-FECAT is installed on AS300 Series PLC, you can enter AS-FECAT IP address in the search bar of your browser
to connect to your device. After that you can set up, update firmware and monitor AS-FECAT. List of browsers that support
AS-FECAT webpage:

Provider Browser Supported versions

Microsoft Internet Explorer V10.0 and later

Microsoft Edge V20 and later

Google Chrome V14 and later

Apple Safari V5.1 and later

 When AS-FECAT is installed on AS300 Series PLC CPU

1. After the setting IP address in HWCONFIG of ISPSoft. Open your browser and enter AS-FECAT IP address in
the search bar to connect to AS-FECAT. After the webpage appears, enter “Admin” in the User section and
click Login without entering any password. You can set up the password after login.

2. After login, you can check the items shown on the left section.

10

10-73
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. The menu shows data based on the permission of the current user.

Permission
Nodes
Administrator Read

Device information V V

Account management V X

Firmware update V X

Save configuration V X

4. Account Management: You can set 2 kinds of access types, Administrator and Read. After the setting is done,
click Apply and save the settings in Save configuration.

5. Firmware Update: You can update the firmware of AS-FECAT via the webpage.
6. Save Configuration: After any setting is done, save the settings in Save Configuration to reflect the changes.

10.2.11.10 Network Security

To enhance security and performance of the system, it is suggested to use closed network or LAN with firewall protection
to prevent cyber-attacks.

10

10-74
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.3 Profiles and Dimensions

10.3.1 AS-F232

66.3
37 59.3 23.9
Unit: mm

10.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA
59.3
60.8

37 23.9
Unit: mm

10.3.3 AS-FCOPM
61.3
59.3

37 23.9
10
Unit: mm

10-75
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.3.4 AS-FEN02
42 25.2

1
2

88
3
4

61.5 6

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

Indicates the status of the communication card
Green light ON: the operation is working normally
Green light BLINKING: the setting is not complete
Red light and green light BLINKING alternatively:
 Initializing
MS indicator
1  Unstable external power supply. Check the power supply and
(Module Status)
repower the module.
Red light ON: internal communication fails since the function card is
not installed at the slot firmly. Re-install it and power on again.
Red light BLINKING: internal communication timeout
OFF: no power
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
Green light ON: a CIP connection is established
Green light BLINKING: a CIP connection is not established after
power-on
NS indicator
2 Red light ON: duplicated IP address
(Network Status)
Red light BLINKING: communication timeout (a CIP connection has
been established after power-on) / IP address
change
OFF: no power / network cable is not connected
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 For network connections
Indicate the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicate the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
6 Clip ring Secures AS300 series CPU or communication module

10

10-76
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

RJ-45 Pin Definition

Pin No. RJ-45

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
7 N/C
8 N/C

10.3.5 AS-FPFN02
42 25.2

1
2
88

3
4

61.5 6

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

System Fault Indicator
1 SF indicator Red light ON: an error occurs in the topology or RTU module
OFF: no system error
Bus Fault Indicator
Red light ON: no PROFINET connection
2 BF indicator Red light BLINKING: the connection is working fine but the communication
with PROFINET Controller is NOT normal.
OFF: the connection with PN-Controller is working fine.
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 Uses for network connections
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicates the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
6 Clip ring Secures AS series

10

10-77
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

RJ-45 Pin Definition

Pin No. RJ-45

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
7 N/C
8 N/C

10.3.6 AS-FOPC02
42 25.2

1
2
88

3
4

61.5 6

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

Indicates the status of the communication card
Green light ON: the operation is working normal
Green light BLINKING: the setting is not complete
1 MS indicator Red light ON: powering on, or internal communication failure, can
NOT be recovered
Red light BLINKING: internal communication timeout
OFF: no power
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
Green light ON: an OPC UA connection is established
Green light BLINKING: an OPC UA connection is not established
after power-on
2 NS indicator Red light ON: duplicated IP address
Red light BLINKING: communication timeout (OPC UA connection
has been established after power-on) / IP
address change
OFF: no power / network cable is not connected
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 For network connections
Indicate the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicate the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
10
6 Clip ring Secures AS300 series CPU or communication module

10-78
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

RJ-45 Pin Definition

Pin No. RJ-45

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
7 N/C
8 N/C

10.3.7 AS-FFTP01
42 25.2

A S- FF TP0 1

1
MS
NS

2
88

4 3

61.5 6

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

Indicates the status of the communication card
Green light ON: the communication card operation is working normal
Green light BLINKING: communication card is initializing
MS indicator Red light ON: powering on or internal communication fail, can NOT
be recovered
1
Red light BLINKING: internal communication timeout; reboot is
required.
OFF: no power
Red light ON: IP address conflict; remove the device with the same IP
NS indicator
address on the network
2 Micro SD card slot For Micro SD card

3 RJ-45 port For network connections

Indicate the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicate the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
6 Clip ring Secures AS series
10

10-79
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

RJ-45 Pin Definition

Pin No. RJ-45

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
7 N/C
8 N/C

10.3.8 AS-FECAT
42 25.2

1
2
88

3
4

61.5 6

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

Indicates the power status of the communication card and the status
of the firmware update
1 SYS indicator Green light ON: Power On
Green light BLINKING: firmware updating
OFF: no power or firmware updating is complete.
Indicates the status of EtherCAT communication
Green light ON: the communication card operation is working normal
(All slaves are in the operational state.)
Red light ON: the network connection between master and slave is
2 ECAT indicator not established.
Red light BLINKING (2s): the connection of slave is lost.
Red light BLINKING (5s): the state of slave is not normal
OFF: ECAT master function is not enabled. Going to state of firmware
updating
3 RJ-45 ports x1, x2 For network connections
Indicate the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicators x1, x2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicate the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicators x1, x2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
10 OFF: no data transmission

10-80
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

Number Name Description

6 Clip ring Secures AS series

RJ-45 Pin Definition

Pin No. RJ-45
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
7 N/C
8 N/C

10

10-81
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.4 Wiring
10.4.1 AS-F2AD

Sh iel ded cab le *1

2-wi re : curre nt i np ut

Sh iel ded cab le *1

3-wire: v olta ge in put

Sh iel ded cab le *1

3-wire: c urre nt i np ut

Sh iel ded cab le *1

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–2) must be short-circuited.

*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor having a
capacitance in the range of 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*5. The wording “CHX” indicates that you can use the five wiring methods listed above for every input channel.

10

10-82
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.4.2 AS-F2DA

Vol tage o utpu t

0V~+10V *4
CHX
V O1 CH1
*2
IO1
COM
AC motor driv e, Sh iel de d ca ble *1 *3 AG
recorder,
propor tioning v al ve
FE

C urre nt o utp ut *4
CHX
4mA ~20mA
V O2 CH2
IO2
COM
AG
AC motor driv e,
recorder, Sh iel de d ca ble *1 *3
propor tioning v al ve
FE

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor having a
capacitance in the range of 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*3. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*4. The wording “CHX” indicates that you can use the two wiring methods listed above for every input channel.

10

10-83
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.4.3 Topology of AS-FEN02, AS-FOPC02, AS-FPFN02 and AS-FECAT

1. AS-FEN02, AS-FOPC02, AS-FPFN02, AS-FECAT (EtherCAT OFF)

 Linear Topology

 Star Topology

2. AS-FECAT sets EtherCAT Master Port via ISPSoft (EtherCAT ON)

 Use Port x1 as EtherCAT Master

 Use Port x2 as EtherCAT Master

10

10-84
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

10.4.4 Topology of AS-FFTP01

 Linear Topology 1

 Linear Topology 2

 Star Topology

10

10-85
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

10.5.1 Initial Setting
(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

(2) Select a function card on the module.

10

10-86
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

(3) Double-click the function card to open the Device Setting page.
Card1 Detect mode: select Auto Detect or choose the function card model.

(4) When the function card is an AS-F232, AS-F422, or AS-F485, configure the communication settings in the red box.

(5) Function card AS-FCOM can only be installed in function card slot 2.

10

10-87
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Configure the communication settings in the red box.

(6) When the function card is an AS-F2AD or AS-F2DA, configure the communication settings in the red box.

(7) When the function card is an AS-FEN02 or AS-FECAT, configure the communication settings in the red box.

10

10-88
 Ch a pt er 1 0 F unc t i on C ar ds

(8) Click OK to confirm the settings.

(9) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the parameters while
the CPU module is running.

10

10-89
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

MEMO

10

10-90
 11
1
Chapter 11 DeviceNet Master Scanner Module
AS01DNET-A

Table of contents

11.1 Introduction of AS01DNET-A .................................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Feature ............................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 Specifications ....................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Components of AS01DNET-A .................................................................... 11-3
11.2.1 Profile and Dimensions .......................................................................... 11-3
11.2.2 Components ........................................................................................ 11-4
11.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave） ......................................................... 11-4
11.2.4 DeviceNet Connector ............................................................................ 11-4
11.2.5 Address Switch..................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.6 Function Switch .................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.7 Digital Displayer ................................................................................... 11-5
11.3 DeviceNet Network Communication ......................................................... 11-6
11.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate ....................... 11-6
11.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure .................................................... 11-6
11.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor ............................... 11-10
11.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power .......................................................... 11-11
11.4 Master /Slave Mode ............................................................................... 11-12
11.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode ........................................................ 11-12
11.4.2 Installation ......................................................................................... 11-13
11.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC ...................................................... 11-14
11.4.4 Bit-strobe Command ............................................................................ 11-16
11.4.5 Network Node Status Display ................................................................ 11-17
11.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and Slaves ............... 11-17
11.4.7 Application Example ............................................................................. 11-18
11.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram .................................. 11-28
11.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting ....................................................... 11-35
11.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via Software .......... 11-38
11.5 RTU Mode ............................................................................................... 11-50
11.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode) ............................................... 11-50
11.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU) ................. 11-51
11.5.3 Installation ......................................................................................... 11-52
11.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode) ................................................... 11-54
11.5.5 Application Example ............................................................................. 11-81
11.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting ..................................................... 11-90
11.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft (AS-Series PLC) ............ 11-96

11 - 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.1 Introduction of AS01DNET-A

 Thank you for choosing Delta AS01DNET-A. Please read this chapter carefully before use so as to ensure correct
installation and operation of AS01DNET-A.
11  The instruction is simply a guideline for operation of the product and the details on the DeviceNet protocol is
excluded here. Please refer to relevant articles and literatures for more details on the DeviceNet protocol.

 AS01DNET-A, a DeviceNet network module can work in two modes: master /slave and RTU. The RTU-
Master/Slave switch is used for selecting one of the two modes. When AS01DNET-A works in master/slave mode,
it makes up the DeviceNet master or slave with AS-series PLC together. When working in RTU mode, AS01DNET-
A needs an external 24VDC power supply and can connect AS-series I/O modules onits right side.

Refer to section 11.4 and 11.5 for details about master/slave mode and RTU mode.

11.1.1 Feature
 Supports the Group 2 server slave and Group 2 only servers.

 Supports the explicit connection in the predefined master/slave connection and I/O polling connection.

 Able to work as a DeviceNet master or slave as well as a remote RTU connecting AS series I/O modules.

 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder offers the graphical configuration interface.

 Supports the EDS file configuration in the DeviceNet network configruation tool.

11.1.2 Specifications
 DeviceNet Connector

Item Specifications

Transmission method CAN

Isolation voltage 500 VAC
Connector type Removable terminal block with screws (5.08mm)
Communication cable 2 communication wires, 2 power wires and 1 shielded wire included.

 DeviceNet Communication

Item Specifications

Message type I/O polling connection, explicit connection

Standard: 125 kbps, 250 kbps and 500 kbps
Baud rate Extension: 10 kbps, 20 kbps, 50 kbps, 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500 kbps,
800kbps and 1M bps.

 Electrical Specification

Item Specifications

Voltage The power wires of the communication cable provide 11 ~ 25 VDC.

Current 28mA (typical value), 125mA impulse current (24 VDC)

11 - 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

 Environment

Item Specifications

ESD (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2): 8KV Air Discharge

11
EFT (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-4): Power Line: 2KV, Digital I/O: 1KV
Noise immunity Analog & Communication I/O: 1KV
Damped-Oscillatory Wave: Power Line: 1KV, Digital I/O: 1KV
RS (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-3): 26MHz ~ 1GHz, 10V/m

-20ºC ~ 60ºC (Temperature); 5 ~ 95% (Humidity), no condensation;

Operating Environment
pollution degree: 2
Storage Environment -40ºC ~ 80ºC (Temperature); 5~95% (Humidity), no condensation

International standard IEC 61131-2, IEC 68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC 61131-2 &
Vibration/Shock resistance
IEC 68-2-27 (TEST Ea)

Safety Conforms to IEC 61131-2, UL508

Weight 128 g

11.2 Components of AS01DNET-A

11.2.1 Profile and Dimensions

11 - 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.2.2 Components

01DNET 1
MS

7 2 9
11
NS

1
x10

3
IN 0
IN 1 Node Address
0
x10

8 5

6
RTU Master/ Slave

10

Mode toggle
① Model name ⑥
(RTU-Master/Slave)

② State indicators ⑦ Left-side extension port

③ Address switch ⑧ Nameplate

④ Function switch ⑨ Right-side extension port

⑤ DeviceNet communication port ⑩ 24V DC power input port for RTU mode

Note:

The power input port of the network module is required to connect an external 24VDC power supply only when the toggle
(RTU- Master/Slave) is switched to RTU mode. Otherwise, the port does not need an external 24VDC power supply
connected when the toggle (RTU- Master/Slave) is switched to Master/Slave mode.

11.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave）

Mode Selection Description

Works in master or slave mode and constitutes a

Master/Slave DeviceNet master or slave without external
power supply.
When working in remote (RTU) mode,
AS01DNET-A is required to connect the external RT U M a ste r/Sl ave
RTU
DC 24V power supply and can have AS series
I/O modules connected on its right side.

11.2.4 DeviceNet Connector

The connector is used for the connection to DeviceNet. Wire by using the connector enclosed with AS01DNET –A.

Pin Signal Color Description

1 V- Black 0 VDC
2 CAN_L Blue Signal-
3 SHIELD - Shielded wire
4 CAN_H White Signal+
5 V+ Red 24 VDC

11 - 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.2.5 Address Switch

The switch is used for setting up the node address of AS01DNET-A in DeviceNet network. Range: 00~63 (64~99
are forbidden.)

Switch setting Description 2 3

11

4
0 1
x10 1

5 6
9
7 8
0 … 63 Valid DeviceNet node address Node Address
2 3

4
0 1
x10
0

5 6
9
64…99 Invalid DeviceNet node address
7 8

Example: If users need to set the node address of AS01DNET-A to 26, simply switch the corresponding switch of
x101 to 2 and the corresponding switch of x100 to 6.

Note:

 After the setup is completed, repower AS01DNET-A.

 While AS01DNET-A is working, changing the setting of the node address is invalid.

 Rotate the switch carefully with a slotted screwdriver to prevent damage to the switch.

11.2.6 Function Switch

 The function switches are used for:

 Setting up the work mode (IN0)

 Setting up the baud rate of DeviceNet network (DR0~DR1)

DR1 DR0 Baud Rate

OFF OFF 125 Kbps
OFF ON 250 Kbps IN 0
ON OFF 500 Kbps IN 1
ON ON Entering the mode of extended baud rate
ON When the slave is off-line, the I/O data in the buffer area will be held.
IN0
OFF When the slave is off-line, the I/O data in the buffer area will be cleared.
IN1 Reserved
Note:

 After the setup of the function switch is completed during power off, repower AS01DNET-A.

 While AS01DNET-A is working, changing the setting of the node address is invalid.

 Adjust the DIP switch carefully with a slotted screwdriver to prevent any damage to the switch.

11.2.7 Digital Displayer

01DNET
 The digital displayer provides following functions:
MS

 Showing the node address of AS01DNET-A and error ID

NS

 Showing the error information about a slave

11 - 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.3 DeviceNet Network Communication

11.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate
The transmission distance of a DeivceNet network is determined by the baud rate. The following table shows the
11 corresponding maximum communication distance at different baud rates.

Baud rate (bits/s) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 800K 1M
Max. transmission
5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 50 25
distance (M)

11.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure

11 - 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

List of Delta DeviceNet Fieldbus Network Products:

Product picture Model Function

11
1. AS01DNET-A, a DeviceNet module running on
the right of AS PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.
AS01DNET-A 2. AS01DNET-A can also be used as AS series
remote IO module for connecting AS series
DI/DO modules and AI/AO modules to DeviceNet
network.

AH10DNET-5A, a DeviceNet module, running on the

AH10DNET-5A right of AH500 series PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.

AHRTU-DNET-5A, a remote I/O module of AH

series, is used for connecting AH500 series DI/DO
AHRTU-DNET-5A
module, AI/AO module and 10SCM module to
DeviceNet network.

DVPDNET-SL, a DeviceNet module, running on the

DVPDNET-SL left of S series PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.

RTU-DNET, a remote I/O module of S series, is

RTU-DNET used for connecting S-series DI/DO module, AI/AO
module and other device to DeviceNet network.

11 - 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Product picture Model Function

Used for connection of the DeviceNet network and

11 IFD9502
electromechanical equipment such as AC motor
drive, PLC, temperature controller, servo drive, HMI,
user-defined device.

A fieldbus data analysis tool, with one end: CAN

interface and the other end: USB interface can be
IFD6503 used for getting the CAN data or sending the data to
the CAN node. It is used with the Netview Builder
software together.

Used for connecting AC motor drive to DeviceNet

E-series AC motor drive
network via CME-DN01 card.

Used for connecting C2000 series AC motor drive to

CMC-DN01
the DeviceNet network.

Used for the connection of DeviceNet network and

DN-02
AC motor drive.

Used for the connection of DeviceNet network and

DVPDT01-S
S series PLC.

11 - 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

Product picture Model Function

11
Used for the connection of DeviceNet network and
DVPDT02-H2
DVP-EH2 series PLC.

The distribution box for CAN topology, with the 120

TAP-CP01 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take
effect or not via its switch.

The distribution box for CAN topology, with the 120

TAP-CN01 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take
effect or not via its switch.

The distribution box for CAN topology, with the 120

TAP-CN02 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take
effect or not via its switch.

UC-DN01Z-01A UC-DN01Z-01A: DeviceNet trunk cable.

UC-DN01Z-02A UC-DN01Z-02A: DeviceNet branch cable.

11 - 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor

 Choice of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor

A DeviceNet network requires two terminal resistors of 121 Ω connected at both ends of the trunk cable respectively.
11 The thick cable represents the trunk cable, the thin cable represents the branch cable and the yellow boxes at the two
ends are terminal resistors in the following figure.

 Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor

The terminal resistor is used for eliminating the signal reflection in the communication cable.

All signal transmission cables have the characteristic impedance. The characteristic impedance of Delta DeviceNet
communication cable is about 121 Ω.

When being transmitted to the end of the communication cable, because the impedance of the end is different from the
characteristic impedance, the signal will be reflected, which will interfere with the new signal and the signal wave form
distortion will happen.

The phenomenon of the signal wave form distortion is not obvious in the short-distance transmission. But the wave form
distortion will become severer in the increasingly long communication cable. Therefore, the two ends of the trunk cable
must be installed with the terminal resistors respectively.

 Installation Position of Terminal Resistors

The DeviceNet communication cable consists of five wires such as red wire, blue wire, white wire, black wire and shielded
wire as below.

The terminal resistors must be installed to the two ends of the trunk cable only. Since the blue wire and white wire are
for signal transmission, both of the terminal resistors must be installed between blue wire and white wire at the two ends
of the main cable.

11 - 1 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power

The network requires one or multiple supply powers to supply the power to each piece of network equipment via the bus
cable.

Delta DeviceNet communication cable consists of five wires, among which the power cable and signal cable occupy two 11
wires respectively and the one on the left is the shielded wire as the above figure shows.

The supply power for the bus is optional and could be a single supply power or multiple supply powers according to the
actual demand.

 Single Supply Power

 Multiple Supply Powers

11 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.4 Master /Slave Mode

11.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode
AS01DNET-A can work as a DeviceNet master as well as slave with at most 4 AS01DNET modules connectable to the
11 right side of AS PLC. Running on the right of AS-series PLC, AS01DNET-A with AS-series PLC together constitutes the
DeviceNet master or slave. When working in Master/Slave mode, AS01DNET-A is required to switch the function toggle
(RTU- Master/Slave) to Master/Slave mode and the DeviceNet Builder of version 2.04 and above is used for the setup.

For details about the setup, refer to section 11.4.10.

 As a master, AS01DNET-A can provide the following function.

 Supporting the Client function of Explicit message;

 Supporting IO polling connection with slaves;

 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder provides graphic configuration interface.

 Sending explicit messages to read and write the data in slave through the explicit message instruction
DNETRW.

 Automatically performing data exchange with the PLC module; users just need write a program for D register
in the PLC without using FROM/TO instructions.

 Offering 190 bytes of output data area and 190 bytes of input data area for exchanging data with the master.

 As a slave, AS01DNET-A can provide the following function.

 Explicit message Server and Group 2 only server connection mode;

 Polling connection;

 Offering 200 bytes of input data area and 200 bytes of output data area for exchanging data with master;

 Automatically exchanging data with the PLC. The user just need to write a program for D register in the PLC
without using FROM/TO instruction.

11.4.1.1. Scan List, Input Table and Output Table

Item Description Figure

Before AS01DNET-A module works, the scan list

must be configured through the configuration
software. The scan list stores slave information
including node address, I/O type, I/O size and etc. for
data exchange. The scanner module manages the
Scan List
slaves in the scan list, makes a connection with
slaves and exchange I/O data with them. For those
slaves which have not been configured to the scan
list, AS01DNET-A will not make a connection and I/O
data exchange with them.

11 - 1 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

Item Description Figure

The scanner module provides an input table of total

size: 190 bytes and an output table of total size: 190
bytes for data exchange with slaves. When one slave 11
is configured to the scan list, the configuration
software will automatically assign corresponding size
of I/O data exchange area to the slave. Input Table
and Output Table are the interface for data exchange
Input/output between the PLC of the master and slaves and show
Table the mapping relationships between the D registers in
the PLC of the master and the I/O data of slaves.
After the configuration is finished, download the
configuration data to the scanner module. Then the
module will exchange I/O data with corresponding
slaves according to the configuration. The data in the
output table will be transmitted to slaves and the data
returned from slaves will be filled in the input table.

11.4.2 Installation
11.4.2.1. Connecting AS01DNET-A Module to AS series PLC

For the details on how AS01DNET-A (in Master/slave mode) is connected to AS series PLC, refer to section 1.3.1
Installing a Module in AS Series Module Manual.

11.4.2.2. Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector

 Make sure that the color marks for the PINs of the DeviceNet connection port match the colors of the connection
cables and the cable should be connected to the right PIN.

 Delta’s power module is recommended as the power module in the communication.

11 - 1 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC

11.4.3.1. Data Mapping between Modules and AS PLC

Up to four AS01DENT modules can be connected to the right side of AS PLC at most. After AS01DNET modules and
11 PLC are connected, PLC will assign data mapping areas to each module.

POWER
01DNET 01DNET 01DNET 01DNET
RUN MS MS MS MS

ERROR
BAT. LOW NS NS NS NS

COM1
COM2
AS324MT 40
IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10

IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address

0 8 x10 x10 x10 x10

1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
7

0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave

AS01DNET modules are connected to the right of the PLC. The position of the first module on the right of AS PLC is 1, the
second module is 2, the third module is 3 and the fourth module is 4. The position is only defined for network modules such
as AS01DNET and AS00SCM, instead of digital modules, analog modules, temperature modules, and weight-
measurement modules. The positions of AS01DNET modules on the right of the PLC are shown in the following table
where there are two arrangement ways of module connections.

Example 1 Example 2

Arrangement order of AS Arrangement order of

Position of AS01DNET on Position of AS01DNET
PLC and modules on the AS PLC and modules
the right of the PLC on the right of the PLC
right of the PLC on the right of the PLC

AS PLC AS PLC

1 AS01DNET 1 AS01DNET

AS04AD AS04AD

2 AS01DNET AS00SCM

3 AS01DNET

11 - 1 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

When AS01DNET is at different positions of the right of the PLC, the input and output mapping areas for the AS01DNET
module in AS PLC are listed in the following table.

Position of AS01DNET
Output mapping area Input mapping area
on the right of the PLC
11
1 D26100 – D26199 D26000 – D26099
2 D26500 – D26599 D26400 – D26499
3 D26900 – D26999 D26800 – D26899
4 D27300 – D27399 D27200 – D27299

11.4.3.2. Tables of Input Mapping and Output Mapping areas

 When AS01DNET works in master mode, the input and output mapping areas for AS01DNET at different
positions of the right of AS PLC are listed in the following table.
Position of Output mapping area (for sending data to Input mapping area (for receiving data from
AS01DNET the slave) the slave)
on the right Data Data
D register Mapping area D register Mapping area
of the PLC size size
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D26100~D26103 D26000~D26003 status indication
command area words words
area
Module status
1 D26104 Reserved 1word D26004 1 word
indication area
DeviceNet
95 DeviceNet input 95
D26105~D26199 output data D26005~D26099
words data area words
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D26500~D26503 D26400~D26403 status indication
command area words words
area
Module status
2 D26504 Reserved 1word D26404 1 word
indication area
DeviceNet
95 DeviceNet input 95
D26505~D26599 output data D26405~D26499
words data area words
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D26900~D26903 D26800~D26803 status indication
command area words words
area
Module status
3 D26904 Reserved 1word D26804 1 word
indication area
DeviceNet
95 DeviceNet input 95
D26905~D26999 output data D26805~D26899
words data area words
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D27300~D27303 D27200~D27203 status indication
command area words words
area
Module status
4 D27304 Reserved 1word D27204 1 word
indication area
DeviceNet
95 DeviceNet input 95
D27305~D27399 output data D27205~D27299
words data area words
area

11 - 1 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Note: See section 11.4.5 for further explanation of scan-list node status indication areas and module status indication
areas. The input and output mentioned here are defined in the perspective of the master of the entire fieldbus system.

 When AS01DNET works in slave mode, the input and output mapping areas for AS01DNET at different positions
of the right of AS PLC are listed in the following table.
11 Position of Area for sending data to the master Area for receiving data from the master
AS01DNET on
the right of the
D register Data length D register Data length
PLC
1 D26100~D26199 100 words D26000~D26099 100 words

2 D26500 – D26599 100 words D26400 – D26499 100 words

3 D26900 – D26999 100 words D26800 – D26899 100 words

4 D27300 – D27399 100 words D27200 – D27299 100 words

11.4.4 Bit-strobe Command

11.4.4.1. Bit-strobe Work Principle
Bit strobe is one of the standard DeviceNet I/O transmission methods. The command length is fixed to 8 bytes, i.e. 64
bits. (Maximum 64 stations exist in a DeviceNet network.) One bit corresponds to one node. The following table takes
the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example.

Bit-strobe Corresponding network node

register b15 b14 b13 …… b1 b0
D26100 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13 …… Node 1 Node 0
D26101 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29 …… Node 17 Node 16
D26102 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45 …… Node 33 Node 32
D26103 Node 63 Node 62 Node 61 …… Node 49 Node 48
When the value of bit0 of D26100 is 0, node 0 is selected and need return data to the master.

When the values of bit0 and bit1 of D26100 are both 0, node 0 and node 1 are selected and they need return data to the
master.

D6283 D6282
b31 b30 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b2 b1 b0
Node 0
Node 1
Node 2

Node 14

In the bit-strobe method, the master does not send control data to the slave node. However, the slave node need return
I/O data to the master if the corresponding bit is set to 0. If the corresponding bit is set to 1, the slave node does not need
to return I/O data to the master.

11 - 1 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.4.5 Network Node Status Display

11.4.5.1. Scan-List Node Status Indication
The following table takes the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example. AS01DNET master can monitor whether
the configured slave is online or not in real time and have the status of the configured slave mapped to one bit. Users can
get the status of network nodes by monitoring the contents in D26000~D26003. The corresponding relationships between
11
devices in the PLC and network nodes are shown in the following table. If the node in Scan List is normal, the corresponding
bit is OFF. If the node in Scan List is abnormal, the corresponding bit is ON.

Register in Corresponding network node

the PLC b15 b14 b13 …… b1 b0
D26000 Node15 Node 14 Node 13 …… Node 1 Node 0
D26001 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29 …… Node 17 Node 16
D26002 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45 …… Node 33 Node 32
D26003 Node 63 Node 62 Node 61 …… Node 49 Node 48

11.4.5.2. Module Status Indication

The following table takes the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example. Users can get the status of the network
node by monitoring the content in D26004. When the module works normally, the content in D26004 is 0. When the module
is initializing, the content in the high byte of D26004 is 1 and the content in the low byte is 0. When an error occurs in the
module, the content in the high byte of D26004 is 2 and the content in the low byte is an error code. For details on error
codes, see Digital Displayer.

Register in Description
the PLC b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Module status
D26004 Error code in the module
（0：Normal，1：Initializing，2：error）

11.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and
Slaves
When AS01DNET works in master mode, the period of time for a data exchange between master and all slaves need be
set. Master and all salves will periodically perform the data exchange based on the set time. See the following explanation
for details. Click menu Network >> Scanner Setting on the DeviceNet Builder software page. The Scanner Setting
window appears as below.

11 - 1 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

The explanation of Scan Interval Time and Expected Packet Rate is shown in the following table.

The period of time needed for a data exchange between master and all slaves.
Scan Interval Time
Master and all salves will periodically exchange data based on the set interval time.
Sets the timeout time for connection of master and slaves. The calculation method:
11 4 X EPR with the unit: ms. The default EPR is 75. The EPR for the connection of
Expected Packet Rate master and slaves is 4 X 75 = 300ms. The value indicates that the IO data exchange
(EPR) should be achieved once at least within 300 ms. Otherwise, the connection will fail
due to communication timeout and then the connection will have to be re-made so
that the IO data exchange can proceed.

Since most DeviceNet slaves only support polled IO data exchange, the EPR value is related to the value of Scan
Interval Time. Make sure that the actual setting must meet the following condition.

Scan Interval Time < （4 X EPR）

We suggest users refer to the following condition while setting the value of Scan Interval Time.

Scan Interval Time < （4 X EPR）/ 5

Click the Calculate Time button. The Calculate Scan Interval Time dialog box comes out. Clicking the Calculate button,
the values of Total input size, Total output size and Scan Interval Time are calculated. The value of Scan Interval Time
is a value in theory. We suggest users should set the scan interval time to a value slightly greater than the actually
calculated time. The scan interval time calculated here will not be filled in the Scan Interval Time box automatically and
so users need enter the value manually.

11.4.7 Application Example

To explain how to configure a DeviceNet network through an application example

Control requirement: AS PLC remotely monitors D26105~D26108 and D26005~D26008 in AS module through
DeviceNet network to achieve the data exchange as AS01DNET-A works as master and slave respectively.

11 - 1 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.4.7.1. Constructing One DeviceNet Network

This section describes how to construct a DeviceNet network configuration through an application example. Before
constructing a DeviceNet network, users should understand the control requirement of the network; plan the data for
exchange in advance such as maximum communication distance, slaves, total data length for exchange as well as the 11
requirement for response time during data exchange.

The information above will determine whether the constructed network is reasonable and able to meet the demand. Even
it will directly affect the future maintenance and convenience of network capacity expansion and upgrade.

 Connection Figure

Note: Both of the ends of the DeviceNet Bus cable must connect one 121Ω terminal resistor respectively. The terminal
resistor is connected between CAN_H and CAN_L.

 Modules Setting
Prepare two AS PLCs and two AS01DNET-A modules for constructing one DeviceNet network. The setups for two
AS01DNET-A modules are shown in the follwing table.

DeviceNet network module Node address Baud rate

AS01DNET-A (Master) 0 500kbps

AS01DNET-A (Slave) 1 500kbps

11 - 1 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.4.7.2. Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure a DeviceNet Network

 Configuring DeviceNet slave

1. Set the driver for the connection of AS PLC and PC. Clicking Add, the Driver Properties dialog box appears.
11 Select the connection type for AS PLC and PC in the Type field. In this example, select Ethernet as the
connection type. Click Search to search the PLC and then click OK after searching is finished.

11 - 2 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11

2. Opening the DeviceNet Builder software, the following window appears.

11 - 2 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for
connection of AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

11

4. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.

5. Click Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network.

11 - 2 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

6. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will
appear on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 00 in this example.

11

7. Double click the icon of AS01DNET Slave. Then the Node Configuration… dialogue box appears. Input Size
and Output Size are both set to 8 bytes. Click OK to finish the setting.

11 - 2 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8. Right click the icon of AS01DNET Slave and click Parameter Edit… on the drop-down menu. The Parameters
Edit… dialog box appears and Polled Input Length and Polled Output Length are both set to 8 bytes as
shown in the following red box. Then click Write button. Click OK after writing is finished. Afterwards, repower
AS01DNETSlave.
11

11 - 2 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

 Configuring AS01DNET-A

1. Double click the icon of AS01DNET Scanner (node 0). The Scanner Module Configuration… dialog box
appears. The left list shows the current available node AS01DNET Slave and the right Scan List is empty as
below.
11

11 - 2 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. Move the DeviceNet slaves from the left list to Scan List of the right side. Follows the steps: Select one
DeviceNet slave node and then click > . Then the DeviceNet slave nodes are moved to the Scan List one
by one.

11

3. Click OK to finish the configuration above. Then download the configuration data to AS01DNET-A. During
the download, the Warning dialog box will pop out if AS PLC is in RUN mode. Click OK to continue the
download.

11 - 2 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

 Configure the DeviceNet network by following the steps above. The IO data mappings between
AS01DNET-A and the slave are shown in the following tables.

 AS01DNET-A → Slave

AS PLC AS01DNET(Master) AS01DNET(Slave) AS PLC 11

D26105 D26000
D26106 D26001
D26107 D26002
D26108 D26003

 Slave → AS01DNET-A

AS PLC AS01DNET(Master) AS01DNET(Slave) AS PLC

D26005 D26100
D26006 D26101
D26007 D26102
D26008 D26103

 Saving configuration data

Select File>> Save to save current network configuration.

11.4.7.3. DeviceNet Network Control

This section describes how to write a ladder program to achieve the control requirement of the DeviceNet network.

 PLC Programs

 The program in the PLC connecting AS01DNET slave:

Program Explanation:

The contents in D26000~D26003 are the data received from the master and the contents in D26100~D26103
are the data transmitted to the master. SM400 is a normally open contact. The program above can make the
contents in D26000~D26003 move to D26100~D26103.

 The program in the PLC connecting AS01DNET master:

11 - 2 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11
Program Explanation:

1. When M0 changes to ON, the value 16#5555 is written to D26105~D26108 in AS PLC. The data are
transmitted to the slave cyclically via DeviceNet Bus.

2. The contents in D26005~D26008 are the data which the master receives from the slave via DeviceNet
Bus. When M1 changes to ON, the data in D26005~D26008 are moved to D0, D1, D2 and D3.

11.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram

AS01DNET-A supports the sending of explicit messages via DNETRW instruction.

11.4.8.1. Principle of Explicit Message Transmission

1. AS PLC transmits the explicit request message to AS01DNET-A master according to the user program.

2. AS01DNET-A transmits the explicit request message to the slave according to the user program.
3. The slave sends back the response message to AS01DNET-A master after handling data.

4. AS PLC gets back the response message from AS01DNET-A master. Then the explicit message transmission of this
time is finished.

11 - 2 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.4.8.2. Explicit Message Transmission Instruction DNETRW

 DNETRW instruction:

API Instruction code Operand Function

11
S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，S6，S7，S8，S9， Read and write DeviceNet
1818 DNETRW
S10，D1，D2，D3，D4，D5 communication data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S4    
S5    
S6    
S7    
S8 
S9    
S10    
D1   
D2   
D3 
D4 
D5 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT

Data type

S1   
S2   
S3   
S4   
S5   
S6   
S7   
S8   
S9   
S10   
D1 
D2 
D3   
D4   
D5   

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS

11 - 2 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Symbol:
DNETRW
S1 D1
S2 D2
11 S3 D3
S4 D4
S5 D5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S 10

S1 The sequence number of the DeviceNet communication module

S2 DeviceNet node address (MAC ID)

S3 Service Code

S4 Class ID

S5 Instance ID

S6 Attribute ID

S7 Written-data size

S8 The start device where written data are stored

S9 Communication timeout time

S10 Times of re-transmission

D1 Completion flag

D2 Error flag

D3 Error code

D4 Read-data size

D5 The start device where read data are stored

 Explanation:

 S1 is the sequence number of the module on the right of the PLC. The number of the first module is 1; the
second module is 2 and so on. Any type of module need be numbered within the range of 1~32. If the number
is out of the range, the instruction will take the minimum (1) or maximum (32) for operation.

 S2 is a DeviceNet node address within the range of 0~63. Users can specify the node address of a slave
which the master is to read and write. It also can be the node address of the master, which means to read and
write the data in the master.

11 - 3 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

 S3 is DeviceNet service code:

Service code Explanation

0x01 Get all attributes (Get_Attribute_All)
0x02 Set all attributes (Set_Attribute_All)
11
0x0E Get one single attribute (Get_Attribute_Single)
0x10 Set one single attribute (Set_Attribute_Single)
 S4, S5 and S6 represent Class ID, Instance ID and Attribute ID respectively.

 S7 is the written-data size with the unit: Byte.

 S8 is the start device where written data are stored. The data are arranged in the order from low byte to high
byte.

 S9 is the communication timeout time within the range: 1~100 and with the unit: 0.1 second.

 S10 is the times of re-transmission within the range: 0~3. When communication timeout occurs, the
communication will be resent

 D3 represents the error codes to read and write.

Error Code
Explanation
Code 1 (High Byte) Code 2 (Low Byte)
XX FF Not conform to the DeviceNet standard
20 01 The target slave does not exist.
20 02 Unable to make the connection with the slave
20 03 Sending explicit message failed.
16 00 Explicit message response timeout.
 D4 is the read-data size with the unit: Byte.

 D5 is the start device where read data are stored. The data are arranged in the order from low byte to high
byte.

 D1 and D2 are communication completion flag and error flag respectively.

 Application Example 1

Control requirement: when M0=ON, read the data of class1>>instance1>>attribute1 of the DeviceNet function
card CMC-DN01.

 Connection Figure

POWER
01DNET
RUN MS

ERROR
BAT. LOW NS

COM1
COM2
AS324MT 40
IN 0
x10

IN 1 Node Address

0 8 x10
1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
DeviceNet
7

0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave

11 - 3 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Parameters Setting and Device Explanation

 Setup for AS01DNET-A

Parameter Setting value Description

11 Node ID 00 Set the node ID of AS01DNET-A to 00.
Baud rate 500 kbps Set the baud rate of AS01DNET-A to 500 kbps.

 Setup for VFD-C2000

Parameter Setting value Description

00-20 08 Frequency command source
00-21 05 Operation command source
09-30 0 Communication decoding method
09-70 01 Node ID of AC motor drive
09-71 02 Baud rate: 500Kbps

 PLC Program

 S1: The number of the module sending DeviceNet communication. The first one of the right side is 01.

 S2：DeviceNet node ID (MAC ID); Node ID of VFD-C2000: 01.

 S3：Service code; 0X0E: read one single attribute content.

 S4：Class ID; Class ID of CMC-DN01: 01;

 S5：Instance ID; Instance ID of CMC-DN01: 01;

 S6：Attribute ID; Attribute ID of CMC-DN01: 01；

 S7：Write data size. When DNETRW instruction is used to read data, the value in S7 can be set to any
data.

 S8：The start device where the written data are stored. When DNETRW instruction is used to read data,
the value in S8 can be set to any data.

 S9：Communication timeout time

 S10：Times of re-transmission. Times of re-sending communication when communication timeout occurs.

 D1：Completion flag

11 - 3 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

 D2：Error flag

 D3：Error code

 D4：Read data size

11
 D5：The start device where data are read.

 Program Explanation

 When M0 changes to ON, execute the explicit message instruction DNETRW to read Class 1 >> Instance
1 >> Attribute 1 of the target equipment with node ID: 01. If the explicit message communication succeeds,
the completion flag M1 changes to ON.

 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends out the request message only once. If the request
message is to be resent, the instruction DNETRW need be re-triggered.

 If the data reading succeeds, the content of Class 1>> Instance1 >> Attribute 1 of CMC-DN01 will be
stored in D5. In this example, the content in D5 should be 031FHex.

 Application Example 2

Control requirement: When M1 changes to ON, set the content of Class ID: 0x05>> Instance 1>>Attribute ID:
09 of CMC-DN01 to 000AHex.

 Connection figure

POWER
01DNET
RUN MS

ERROR
BAT. LOW NS

COM1
COM2
AS324MT 40
IN 0
x10

IN 1 Node Address

0 8 x10
1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
DeviceNet
7

0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave

 Parameters Setting and Device Explanation

 Setup for AS01DNET-A

Parameter Setting value Description

Node ID 00 Set the node ID of AS01DNET-A to 00.
Baud rate 500 kbps Set the baud rate of AS01DNET-A to 500 kbps.
 Setup for VFD-C2000

Parameter Setting value Description

00-20 08 Frequency command source
00-21 05 Operation command source
09-30 0 Communication decoding method
09-70 01 Node ID of AC motor drive
09-71 02 Baud rate: 500Kbps

11 - 3 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 PLC Program

11

 S1：The number of the module sending DeviceNet communication. The first one of the right side is 01.

 S2：DeviceNet node ID (MAC ID); Node ID of VFD-C2000: 00.

 S3：Service code; 0X10: read one single attribute content.

 S4：Class ID; Class ID of CMC-DN01: 05.

 S5：Instance ID; Instance ID of CMC-DN01: 01.

 S6：Attribute ID; Attribute ID of CMC-DN01: 09.

 S7：Write data size with the unit: Byte. The written-data size is 2 in this example.

 S8：The start device where the written data are stored.

 S9：Communication timeout time.

 S10：Times of re-transmission. Times of re-sending communication when communication timeout occurs.

 D1：Completion flag.

 D2：Error flag.

 D3：Error code.

 D4：Read data size. When DNETRW instruction is used to write data, the value in D4 can be set to any
data.

 D5：The start device where read data are stored. When DNETRW instruction is used to write data, the
value in D5 can be set to any data.

11 - 3 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

 Program Explanation

 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends the request message and 000AHex is written to Class
ID: 05>> Instance 1 >> Attribute ID: 09 of the target equipment with node ID: 01. If explicit message
communication succeeds, the completion flag M1 changes to ON.
11
 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends out the request message only once. If the request
message is to be resent, the instruction DNETRW need be re-triggered.

11.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting

AS01DNET-A has two LED indicators and one digital displayer. NS LED and MS LED display the connection status of
AS01DNET-A. The digital displayer shows the node address and error information of AS01DNET-A as well as error
information of the slave.

01DNET
MS

NS

11.4.9.1. NS LED

LED status Indication Correction

1. Check if AS01DNET-A is powered and the connection
No power;
is normal.
OFF Or duplicate ID check has not been
2. Make sure that at least one node can communicate
completed.
normally.
Green light
blinking
The connection to the DeviceNet No correction;
(ON:0.5s and
network failed. Refer to Digital Displayer for troubleshooting.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Online;
Green light ON The connection to the DeviceNet No correction
network is normal.
Red light
blinking
(ON:0.5s and Communication error Refer to Digital Displayer for troubleshooting.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
1. Make sure that all the devices in the network have
their unique node addresses.
Network trouble, duplicate node ID, no 2. Check if the network installation is correct.
Red light ON
network power or Bus-OFF. 3. Check if the baud rates of the master and slave are
same.
4. Check if the network power is normal.

11 - 3 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.4.9.2. MS LED

LED status Indication Correction

Make sure that the power supply for AS01DNET-A is
OFF No power
11 normal and the connection is proper.
Green light
blinking
Configure the scan list and then download the
(ON:0.5s and No module is configured.
configuration to AS01DNET.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Green light ON Input and output data are normal. --
Red light When AS01DNET works as the
blinking master, the slave in Scan List can not Refer to Digital Displayer.
(ON:0.5s and work normally. Make sure that the slave information in Scan List
OFF: 0.5s When AS01DNET works as the slave, matches that of the actually connected slave.
alternately) an error occurs in the configuration.
1. Check if the configuration is correct.
Red light ON An error inside AS01DNET 2. Return the module to factory for repair if the error still
exists after repower ON.

11.4.9.3. Combination of MS LED and NS LED

LED status
Indication Correction
NS LED MS LED
OFF OFF No power Check if the power supply for AS01DNET-A is normal.
Make sure that the baud rate of at least one node in the
Green light Duplicate ID check has
OFF network is the same as that of the module and their
ON not been completed.
communication is normal.
Green light Duplicate ID check failed 1. Ensure that the node ID of AS01DNET is unique.
Red light ON
ON or Bus-OFF. 2. Repower the module.
Red light
blinking
1. Check if the network cable connection is proper.
Red light ON (ON:0.5s and No network power
2. Check if the network power supply is normal.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Red light ON Red light ON Hardware error Return the module to the factory for repair.

11.4.9.4. Digital Displayer

Code Explanation Correction

Node address of AS01DNET-A
0~63 --
(in normal operation)
80 AS01DNET-A is in STOP status. Turn the PLC to RUN and start I/O data exchange
The node ID of AS01DNET is the
1. Ensure that the node address of AS01DNET is unique.
F0 same as that of other node or
2. Re-power AS01DNET.
exceeds the allowed range.
No slave is configured in Scan Configure the scan list and then download the configuration to
F1
List. AS01DNET.
Too low voltage of the work
F2 Check if the power supply for AS01DNET and the PLC is normal.
power
Switch the function switch IN1 from On to Off and re-power
F3 AS01DNET enters the test mode
AS01DNET-A.

11 - 3 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

Code Explanation Correction

1. Check if the network cable is normal and the shielded cable is
grounded.
2. Check if the baud rates of all nodes in the network are same.
F4 BUS-OFF
3. Check if the start and end of the network cable are both connected 11
with a 121Ω terminal resistor.
4. Re-power AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if the network cable is normal.
F5 No network power
2. Ensure that the network power is normal.
Internal error; Flash or RAM If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F6
check error factory for repair.
Error produced in factory If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F8
manufacturing factory for repair.
Internal error; EEPROM access If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F9
failure factory for repair.
1. Configure the network correctly and re-download it to AS01DNET-
A.
FA Invalid configuration data
2. Check if the node address of one slave in the scan list is the same
as that of AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if there is any change in node ID of the slave in the
Identification parameters returned
network.
E0 from the slave do not match the
2. Check if some node device in the network is replaced.
configuration data.
3. Re-configure the network.
I/O Data size returned does not Re-configure I/O data size of the slave, download the configuration to
E1
match that in the scan list. AS01DNET-A and run the PLC.
The slave device in the scan list
does not exist or is offline when 1. Check if there is a change in the node address of the slave.
AS01DNET-A is in master mode. 2. Check if the communication cable is disconnected or connected
E2 The I/O connection between the loosely.
slave AS01DNET-A and the 3. Check if the bus cable length exceeds the maximum transmission
master is broken when distance. If so, the system may not be stable.
AS01DNET-A is in slave mode.
1. Make sure that the connection between AS01DNET-A and the
AS01DNET-A fails to transmit network is normal.
E3
data. 2. Check if the baud rate of AS01DNET-A is the same as that of
other node in the network.
Error detected in sequence of
E4 fragmented I/O data from the Check if the slave is operating normally.
slave device.
The slave device returns error
E5 when AS01DNET-A attempts to Check if the slave is operating normally.
communicate with it.
IO data size returned from the
Check that the IO data size of the slave should be the same as that
E6 slave is bigger than that
configured in Scan List.
configured in Scan List.
If the code is displayed long, do the troubleshooting according to the
following steps.
AS01DNET-A is checking MAC 1. Make sure that at least two nodes work normally in the network.
E7
ID. 2. Check if either end of the network is connected with the terminal
resistor of 121Ω.
3. Check if the baud rates of the node devices in the network are

11 - 3 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Code Explanation Correction

same.
4. Check if the communication cable is normal so as to avoid that
the cable is disconnected or connected loosely.
11 5. Check if the bus cable length exceeds the maximum transmission
distance. If so, the system may not be stable.
6. Check if the shielded wire of the network cable is grounded.
7. Re-power AS01DNET-A scanner module.

11.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via

Software
AS01DNET-A can serve as a DeviceNet master or slave by modifying its mode. When the AS01DNET-A module works as
a slave, the input and output data sizes are both 8 Bytes by default. The maximum input and output data sizes are both
200 Bytes.

Under standard mode, AS01DNET-A supports three baud rates: 125K, 250K and 500K. Under non-standard mode,
AS01DNET-A supports eight baud rates: 10K, 20K, 50K, 125K, 250K, 500K, 800K and1M.

11.4.10.1. Setting AS01DNET-A to Slave Mode

1. Build a driver through the COMMGR software.

Refer to section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft User Manual for more details.

2. Call the DeviceNet Builder software through the ISPSoft software.

Refer to section 11.6 in this manual for details on how to operate.

3. The called DeviceNet Builder software interface is shown as below.

11 - 3 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

4. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

11

5. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.

6. Click Project List>>Properties. Then the Properties dialog box appears. Select Slave mode and then click OK.

11 - 3 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11

7. Click Network >> Download. If the PLC is in STOP state, the following dialog box will exist during the download.
The dialog box will disappear automatically after the download is finished. AS01DNET-A will be in slave mode after
repower ON.

8. If the PLC is in RUN state, the Warning dialog boxes will pop out before and after the download. Users can click
OK or Cancel according to actual situation.

11 - 4 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.4.10.2. Setting AS01DNET-A to Master Mode

1. Build a driver through the COMMGR software.

Refer to section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft User Manual for more details.
11
2. Call the DeviceNet Builder software through the ISPSoft software.

Refer to section 11.6 in this manual for details on how to operate.

3. The called DeviceNet Builder software interface is shown as below.

4. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

11 - 4 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected slave.

11

6. Click Project List>>Properties as below. Then the Properties dialog box appears. Select Master mode and
then click OK.

11 - 4 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11

7. Click Network >> Download. If the PLC is in STOP state, the following dialog box will exist during the download.
The dialog box will disappear automatically after the download is finished. AS01DNET-A will be in master mode
after repower ON.

8. If the PLC is in RUN state, the Warning dialog boxes will pop out before and after the download. Users can click
OK or Cancel according to actual situation.

11 - 4 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.4.10.3. Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Slave Mode

1. Opening the DeviceNet Builder software, the following window appears.

11

2. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

11 - 4 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

3. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.

11

4. Clicking Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network, the DeviceNet Builder software starts to scan the whole network.

5. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will appear
on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 01 in this example.

11 - 4 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6. Right-click AS01DNET(Slave), select Parameter Edit… on the drop-down menu to enter the Parameter Edit
page.

11

7. Set Extend Baudrate Enable to Enable and then select the desired baud rate. Click Write button after setting is
finished.

8. After the download is completed, switch DR0 and DR1 of AS01DNET to ON. Finally, repower AS01DNET-A.

11 - 4 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.4.10.4. Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Master Mode

1. Opening the DeviceNet Builder software, the following window appears.

11

2. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

11 - 4 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.

11

4. Clicking Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network, the DeviceNet Builder software starts to scan the whole network.

5. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will appear
on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 00 in this example.

11 - 4 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

6. Click Network >> Scanner Setting. The Scanner Setting dialog box appears. Select Enable under Extension
Baudrate and the desired baud rate as below. Click OK after the setting is finished.

11

7. Click Network >> Download to download the extension baud rate setting to the master. After the download is
completed, switch DR0 and DR1 of AS01DNET-A to ON. Finally, repower AS01DNET-A.

11 - 4 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.5 RTU Mode

11.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode)
 As DeviceNet slave, AS01DNET-A supports standard DeviceNet communication protocol.
11
 Supports explicit connection in the predefined master/slave connection and I/O polling connection.

 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder provides graphic configuration interface, and supports
auto scan and recognition of I/O modules, free mapping of special module parameters as I/O exchange data
as well as the setting of exception handling and diagnosis of module error states.

 Users can choose to retain the data in registers or not when the network is disconnected according to actual
need.

 AS01DNET (in RTU mode) can connect max. 8 AS-series extension modules including digital modules, analog
modules, temperature modules and etc. The mapping length of digital modules is determined by number of
digital points. The max. length of mapping parameters for input of other module is 20 words and the max.
length of mapping parameters for output of other module is 20 words.

 Max lengths for output data and input data of AS01DNET (in RTU mode) are both 100 bytes.

 AS01DNET (in RTU mode) needs the external 24VDC power supply.

11 - 5 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU)

The mapping specification of connectable AS-series digital modules for AS01DNET (in RTU mode):

Length of I/O mapping data (Unit: words)

Digital I/O module
model
11
（Master→AS01DNET） （AS01DNET→Master）

AS08AM10N-A None 1
AS16AM10N-A None 1
AS32AM10N-A None 2
AS64AM10N-A None 4

AS08AN01T-A 1 None

AS08AN01R-A 1 None

AS08AN01P-A 1 None

AS16AN01T-A 1 None

AS16AN01R-A 1 None

AS16AN01P-A 1 None

AS32AN02T-A 2 None

AS64AN02T-A 4 None

AS16AP11T-A 1 1
AS16AP11R-A 1 1
AS16AP11P-A 1 1

The mapping specification of connectable AS-series special modules for AS01DNET (in RTU mode):

Length of I/O mapping data (Unit: words)

Special module model
DeviceNet→AS01DNET(RTU) AS01DNET(RTU)→DeviceNet

AS04AD-A 6 None
AS04DA-A 2 4
AS06XA-A 10 4
AS02LC-A 7 1
AS04RTD-A 10 None
AS06RTD-A 14 None
AS04TC-A 10 None

AS08TC-A 18 None

AS08AD-B 18 None
AS08AD-C 18 None
Note:
The length of mapping data of the I/O modules connected to AS01DNET (in RTU mode) is fixed. The default mapping
parameters of special modules must be chosen.
Besides default mapping parameter configuration, you can also choose other parameters for I/O mapping according to
need when special modules are connected to AS01DNET (RTU). The max. input length and max. output length of
default parameters and user-added mapping parameters of each special module are both 20 words.

11 - 5 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.5.3 Installation
11.5.3.1. Installing AS01DNET (in RTU Mode)
11.5.3.1.1. Connecting AS01DNET-A (in RTU Mode) and Extension Module on DIN Rail
11  Please push the clips of AS01DNET-A (RTU) in the directions indicated by arrow ① until hearing a click. That
means the DIN clips are interlocked each other. Then insert the module hooks at the bottom into the DIN rail
mounting slot until hearing a click. That means AS01DNET-A (RTU) is connected to the DIN rail.

 To install the second module AS16AP11T, push the clips of AS16AP11T in the direction indicated by arrow ①.
Then aim the left-side slot of AS16AP11T at the right-side slot of AS01DNET-A (RTU) and push AS16AP11T in
the direction as illustrated by arrow ② until hearing a click. That means the module is on the DIN rail and is
connected to AS01DNET-A (RTU). In the same way, install more IO modules on the right side of AS01DNET-A
(RTU) and DIN rail one by one.

1 DI N ra il clip
2

01DNET
MS

NS

1
x10
IN 0
IN 1 Node Address
0
x10

RTU Mas te r/ Sl a ve

1 DIN rail clip

 Tighten the screws on the top of the module at the end of installing.

11 - 5 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.3.1.2. Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector

 The color marks on the communication connector match the colors of the connection cables. During the wiring,
please check whether the colors of the connection cable and the color mark are same.

 Delta’s power module is recommended as the power module in the communication. 11

11.5.3.2. Connecting the Cable to DeviceNet Connector

 Use an efficient tool to peel the communication

cable for approx. 30mm. DO NOT damage the
shielded cable during the peeling.

 Peel off the metallic shielded net and foil, and you
will see 2 power cables (red and black), 2 signal
cables (blue and white) and 1 shielded cable.

 Peel off the exterior metallic shielded net, foil and

the plastic cover of the power cable and signal
cable for appropriate length.

11 - 5 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Insert the peeled communication cables into the

holes in the connector in correct order.
11

 Tighten the screws on the connector by a slotted

screwdriver and fix the communication cables in the
holes in the connector.

11.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode)

As DeviceNet slave, AS01DNET (RTU) mainly achieves the data exchange between the master and AS-series I/O modules
connected to AS01DNET.

 Transmits output data of DeviceNet master to I/O modules.

 Transmits input data from I/O modules to DeviceNet master.

11.5.4.1. Terms

No. Name Unit Description

The first WORD for output data that the master assigns to AS01DNET is
the control word of AS01DNET for setting the work mode of AS01DNET.
1 Control word WORD When the content in the control word is set to 2, AS01DNET is in STOP
mode. When the content in the control word is set to 1, AS01DNET is in
RUN mode.

The first WORD for input data that the master assigns to AS01DNET is
the status word of AS01DNET for displaying the operation state of
2 Status word WORD
AS01DNET.
Refer to section 11.5.4.3.4 for more about status word.

Range of input data Determined by start input address and input mapping parameter length
5 WORD
in modules of each module.

Range of output data Determined by start output address and output mapping parameter
6 WORD
in modules length of each module.
The sum of the size of status word of AS01DNET and the size of input
data of the modules connected to it. The status word occupies one word.
Digital input module takes 16 bits as one word. The input data length of
7 Input data size WORD
analog I/O modules and temperature modules are determined by the
default mapping parameter length and user-added parameter length, no
more than 20 words.
The sum of the size of control word of AS01DNET and the size of output
8 Output data size WORD data of the modules connected to it. The control word occupies one word.
Digital output module takes 16 bits as one word. The output data length

11 - 5 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

No. Name Unit Description

of analog I/O modules and temperature modules are determined by the

default mapping parameter length and user-added parameter length
together, no more than 20 words.
11
11.5.4.2. Introduction of Software

Before the new version of DeviceNet Builder software is used for making a connection with PLC, make sure that the
communication manager COMMGR has been installed.

(Refer to ISPSoft user manual for details on COMMGR usage.)

11.5.4.2.1. Making a connection between DeviceNet Builder and PLC

Before making a normal connection between DeviceNet Builder and PLC, you have to do relevant setup for COMMGR
software.

1. Build a driver through the COMMGR software.

Refer to section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft User Manual for more details.

2. Call DeviceNet Builder via ISPSoft

Refer to section 11.6 for details on how to operate.

3. The called DeviceNet Builder is started as below.

11 - 5 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4. Click menu Network>> Online.

11

5. The master module AS01DNET-A which has been scanned is shown in the left-side Project List.

11 - 5 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

6. Click Network >> Scan DeviceNet Network.

11

7. After online is implemented, click the Scan DeviceNet Network button to start scanning the nodes in the network.

11 - 5 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.5.4.2.2. Main Configuration Page of AS01DNET (RTU)

1. After scanning is finished, double click the AS01DNET (RTU) node in the network. Then the Node Configuration…
window comes out. The polled transmission is supported with default input data size of 2 bytes and output data size of
2 bytes which are mapping address lengths of control word and status word of AS01DNET (RTU) respectively.
11
Input Size and Output Size under Polled Setting mean the lengths of AS01DNET (RTU) parameters which are
mapped in the master.

11 - 5 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

2. Click the I/O Configure… button in the Node Configuration… window. Then the main configuration page appears
as below.

11

Explanation of parameters on the AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page

Item Description
All I/O modules currently connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are scanned. The
Scan existing modules in the software will be compared with the actually connected I/O module. The
mismatched one will be displayed in an abnormal icon.
Upload and show the configuration data including I/O list, I/O configuration, parameter mapping
Upload
and basic control information in AS01DNET (RTU) in the software.
Download current AS01DNET (RTU) configuration including I/O list, I/O configuration, parameter
Download mapping and basic control information to AS01DNET (RTU), which is retained when the power is
turned off.
Reset Make the connected AS01DNET (RTU) restart.
Clear the configuration data stored in the latched area and automatically reset the configuration.
Clear config
Then the indicator displays F1.

11 - 5 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Item Description
Watch and set in real time the configured exchange data in current system; change output data,
Start
watch input data and use control word to control the operation state of AS01DNET (RTU) in real
Monitor
time.
11 Name Name of each module
Firmware version of each module. Choosing corresponding version of firmware, download the
Firmware
module parameter information which matches the firmware version.
Description The description of basic information of each module.
The mapping range of input data of each module, determined by start address offset of mapping
Input
input data and the size.
The mapping range of output data of each module, determined by start address offset of mapping
Output
output data and the size.
Comment Add a comment for each I/O modules
The current configuration data will not be saved until you click the OK button to finish the
OK
configuration.
Clicking the Cancel button to exit AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page, current configuration data
Cancel
will not be saved.

3. Clicking the Scan button on the page, the main AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page changes as below.

11 - 6 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

After the I/O modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU) are scanned, abnormal icons may appear.

Here is the list of abnormal icons.

The I/O module configured in the software does not match the current I/O module
11
actually connected, e.g. the software configuration is AS32AM, but the actually
connected module is AS16AP. So the abnormal icon such as left-side icon will appear
after the scan. You can change it into current configuration icon with double clicks on it.

The I/O module in the software configuration does not exist in the actual connection,
e.g. the software configuration is AS32AM, but it has not been connected actually. So
the abnormal icon such as left-side icon will appear after the scan. You can change it
into current configuration icon with double clicks on it.

AS01DNET (RTU) scans an unknown module. Right click current icon to select Change
from the menu which appears to change it into a module icon which can be recognized
for configuration.

11.5.4.2.3. AS01DNET (RTU) Parameters Setup Page

After I/O modules are scanned, the main configuration interface changes as follows.

11 - 6 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Double click AS01DNET (RTU) icon on the far left of the configuration page. Then the parameter setting interface of
AS01DNET (RTU) comes out for setting the error handling method as follows.

11

Explanation of AS01DNET (RTU) parameter setup:

Item Description Default

Output start
The start output address of AS01DNET (RTU), occupying one word. None
address
Input start
The start input address of AS01DNET (RTU), occupying one word. None
address
When loses AS01DNET (RTU)’s error handling method when AS01DNET (RTU) and RTU
DeviceNet DeviceNet master are disconnected. “RTU keep running” and “RTU stop” are keep
connection for option. running
AS01DNET (RTU)’s error handling method when an error occurs in any one
RTU
When IO module of I/O modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU). “RTU keep
keep
error or no reply running” and “RTU stop” are for option.
running

Chooses the extension baud rate of AS01DNET (RTU) after ticking the
checkbox of it. The selected baud rate is stored in AS01DNET (RTU) after the
Software baud
download and it will not take effect until the hardware switch of AS01DNET None
rate
(RTU): DR1 and DR0 are both ON.
Refer to section 11.2.6 for details on function switch.
Firmware version Displays the firmware version of AS01DNET (RTU). None

11 - 6 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.4.2.4. I/O Module Configuration Page

The mapping parameters of each module can be set through double clicks on the selected I/O module icon on the
following interface.

11

11 - 6 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Double click the 08AD icon. Then the AS08AD-C configuration interface appears as below for configuration of parameter
mapping of AS08AD-C module.

11

Explanation of I/O module configuration interface:

Item Description
Displays module name, MDS version and creation date. The module parameters will be shown
MDS information in the left-side window based on the MDS file. For explanation of module parameters, refer to the
relevant module manual.
Displays all module parameters read from the MDS file of the module. Set up these parameters
I/O parameter list
to control the operation of the module.
Exception The error handling of AS01DNET (RTU) when AS01DNET (RTU) detects that an error occurs in
handling the module. “RTU keep running” or “RTU stop” can be selected as the solution to the error.

11 - 6 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

Generally, the settings for I/O module parameters and device mappings can be made in the following three cases.

Case 1: Select one appropriate parameter value from the drop-down list in the Initial column, e.g. select -20Ma~+20mA
as channel 1 input mode of AS08AD-C. 11

Case 2: Manually enter the value for the parameter to change in the Initial column, e.g. write 100 for CH1 Cal.Offset of
AS08AD-C).

11 - 6 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Case 3: For the module parameter which need be monitored in real time or need be modified in its value, tick the desired
parameter in the Mapping to Device column and then the corresponding value of the parameter will map to the
bus data for exchange i.e. the D registers in PLC. After the values of the ticked parameters in the Mapping to
Device column go to the software monitor page, the current values of parameters can be monitored and
11 modified in real time.

 Explanation of IO module parameters

Double click the icon of AS08AD-C module. Then the Module Configuration: AS08AD-C dialog box comes out as
below.

11 - 6 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

MDS information of AS08AD-C

11

Present value setting

11 - 6 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Format setting (Integer format and Float format for option)

11

CH1~CH8 Mode setting【8】

11 - 6 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

CH1~CH8 Calibration【16】

11

Average filter setting【16】

11 - 6 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Sampling time

11

Channel Detect and Alarm settings

11 - 7 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.4.2.5. Monitor Function of the Software

When the software is in online mode and current configuration in AS01DNET (RTU) is the same as that stored in the
software, click the Start Monitor button to enter the monitor interface and start to monitor the operation states of
AS01DNET (RTU) and I/O modules in real time.
11

11 - 7 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

The list of operation state of modules:

Indicates that the module is in the normal operation.

11

Indicates that the module is in the Stop state.

Indicates that the module is in the warning or error state. For details on errors, refer to
explanation of error codes in the related product manual.

Indicates that the actually connected module does not match the module configured in the
software or currently configured module has been disconnected.

On the following interface, right click the selected module icon and select RUN or Stop from the drop-down box to
change the operation state of the I/O module.

11 - 7 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.4.3. DeviceNet Mapping Data

The model of the entire mapping data exchange is displayed below and eventually data will map to the registers in the
PLC of the master.
11
PLC AS 01DNET Dev ic eNET AS0 1DNE T IO modules
(RTU)

Note: All mapping addresses mentioned below means the D registers in the PLC.

The start input address and start output address of AS01DNET (RTU) are assigned automatically by the master when
AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master. The input mapping address length and output mapping address length of
AS01DNET (RTU) are determined by the configuration of modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU).

The start input and output mapping addresses of one I/O module are assigned automatically by the software. Its input
mapping address length and output mapping address length are determined by the configuration of the module. The range
of input / output mapping address is limited by the input / output mapping address range of AS01DNET (RTU).

11.5.4.3.1. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses by AS01DNET Master

11 - 7 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Data mapping areas are assigned according to the following table.

Input area: Slave  Master Output area: Master  Slave

Register in AS PLC Purpose Data size Register in AS PLC Purpose Data size

11 D26000~D26003
Scan-list node
state indication 4 words D26100~D26103
Bit-strobe
4 words
command area
area
Scanner module
D26004 state indication 1 word D26104 Reserved 1 word
area
DeviceNet
DeviceNet input
output area; the
data area; for
data in the
D26005~D26099 receiving state 95words D26105~D26199 95 words
registers will be
data back from
sent to slaves
slaves
as control data.

11.5.4.3.2. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses for AS01DNET (RTU)

The start input and start output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are assigned automatically by the master when
AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master. The master assigns mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) according to input
mapping address length and output mapping address length. Input mapping address length and output mapping address
length are determined by the configuration parameters of all modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU). The start addresses
of AS01DNET (RTU) will not be assigned until AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master and they are related to the order
of adding slaves to the master.

When there are two slaves of AH10DNET and AS01DNET (RTU), the input size and output size of AH10DNET are both 4
bytes and the input size and output size of AS01DNET (RTU) are both 4 bytes. If AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master
before AH10DNET is added to the master, then the input mapping addresses and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET
(RTU) are respectively D26005~D26006 and D26105~D26106 as below. D26005 and D26105 are respectively the start
input mapping address and start output mapping address, i.e. status word and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The
registers after start input mapping address and start output mapping address are for mapping the configuration parameters
of I/O modules.

11 - 7 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

If AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master after AH10DNET is added to the master, then the input mapping addresses
and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are respectively D26007~D26008 and D26107~D26108 as below.
D26007 and D26107 are respectively the start input mapping address and start output mapping address, i.e. status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The registers after start input mapping address and start output mapping address
are for mapping the configuration parameters of I/O modules. 11

11 - 7 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.5.4.3.3. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses for I/O Modules

Each module has two forms of data mapping. When DeviceNet master has not assigned the start input mapping address
and start output mapping address to AS01DNET (RTU), the contents in Input and Output in the following figure represent
offsets based on start input or start output mapping address of AS01DNET (RTU). After DeviceNet master has assigned
11 the start input mapping address and start output mapping address to AS01DNET (RTU), the contents in Input and Output
in the following figure represent mapping addresses of parameters in the modules on the right of AS01DNET (RTU).

When AS01DNET (RTU) is added to Scan List on the page of Scanner Module Configuration…, DeviceNet master
assigns start input and output mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU). When AS01DNET (RTU) is removed from Scan
List on the page of Scanner Module Configuration…, the start input and start output mapping addresses of AS01DNET
(RTU) are unknown.

Before the master assigns mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU), the device mappings of modules connected to the
right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are displayed as below.

11 - 7 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

After AS01DNET (RTU) is pulled into Scan List, the mapping addresses that the master assigns to AS01DNET (RTU) are
shown as below.

11

11 - 7 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

After the master assigns mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU), the mapping devices of the modules connected
to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are shown as below.

11

The software automatically assigns mapping addresses of module parameters in the arrangement order of modules
connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) from left to right.

Below is the table of configuration of one master AS01DNET and one slave AS01DNET (RTU) and mapping addresses
that the software automatically assigns to each module. D26005 and D26105 are the control word and status word of
AS01DNET (RTU).The input mapping address and output mapping address of AS16AP are D26006 and D26106
respectively. The input mapping addresses and output mapping addresses of AS04DA are D26007~D26008 and
D26107~D26114 respectively. The input mapping addresses of AS04AD are D26009~D26018.
Auto Assignment Input Output
AS01DNET(RTU) D26005 status word D26105 control word

AS16AP D26006 D26106

AS04DA D26007~D26008 D26107~D26114

AS04AD D26009~D26018

The input and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are D26005~D26018 and D26105~D26114.

11 - 7 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.4.3.4. Status Word and Control Word of AS01DNET (RTU)

The start input address and start output address in the mapping areas of AS01DNET (RTU) are used as the status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU) respectively with the detailed explanation in the following table.

11
 Control word of AS01DNET(RTU)
Bit Status value Description
000 Make no control setting for the operation of AS01DNET(RTU)
bit0
001 Set AS01DNET(RTU) to RUN mode
~
010 Set AS01DNET(RTU) to STOP mode
bit2
Other Reserved
0 Reserved
bit3
1 Restart AS01DNET (RTU)
bit4 0/1 Reserved
bit5 0/1 Reserved
bit6 0/1 Reserved
bit7 0/1 Reserved
bit8 0/1 Reserved
bit9 0/1 Reserved
bit10 0/1 Reserved
bit11 0/1 Reserved
bit12 0/1 Reserved
bit13 0/1 Reserved
bit14 0/1 Reserved
bit15 0/1 Reserved

 Status word of AS01DNET(RTU)

Bit Status value Description
0 AS01DNET (RTU) in RUN state
bit0
1 AS01DNET (RTU) stops.
bit1 0/1 Reserved
0 No error occurs in I/O modules.
bit2
1 An error occurs in I/O modules.
bit3 0/1 Reserved
0 Current connection matches the configuration.
bit4
1 Current connection is inconsistent with the configuration.
0 AS01DNET (RTU) works normally.
bit5
1 The voltage of the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) is too low.
bit6 0/1 Reserved
0 AS01DNET (RTU) works normally.
bit7
1 The number of points/ modules exceeds allowed range.
bit8 0/1 Reserved
bit9 0/1 Reserved
bit10 0/1 Reserved
bit11 0/1 Reserved
bit12 0/1 Reserved

11 - 7 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Bit Status value Description

bit13 0/1 Reserved
bit14 0/1 Reserved
bit15 0/1 Reserved
11
11.5.4.4. Connecting AS01DNET (RTU) to the Network

To configure AS01DNET (RTU) successfully and make it work normally in the network, the following steps should be
taken for the setup.

Ha rdwa re Co n fig u rati on Co n fig u rati on Mo ni tor & C he ck

Wiri ng On li n e Scan
Settin g Do wn lo ad

 Hardware wiring

During hardware wiring, notice that the standard cable should be used and two terminal resistors of 121Ω should be
connected respectively to the two ends of the main line in the DeviceNet network. The node IDs of all nodes in the network
bus can not be repeated and their baud rates should be consistent.

 Online scan

The online scan consists of two parts: scanning online network nodes and scanning I/O modules of AS01DNET (RTU).
Before the scan, make sure that the communication channel selected is proper and the communication setup is normal in
the communication manager COMMGR.

 Configuration setting

The configuration setting includes the master configuration and AS01DNET (RTU) configuration settings. The master
configuration contains the master scanner module setting (configuration of master) and the scan list configuration setting.
AS01DNET (RTU) configuration contains AS01DNET (RTU) setting and other I/O modules setting.

 Configuration Download

Configuration download consists of master configuration download and AS01DNET (RTU) configuration download. During
the master configuration download, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) shows 80 and its node ID alternately.
During the AS01DNET (RTU) configuration download, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) shows 83 and
its node ID alternately.

 Monitor and Check

After the configuration is downloaded, check if AS01DNET (RTU) works normally. If AS01DNET (RTU) works normally, the
digital displayers of the master and AS01DNET (RTU) show their own node IDs and MS and NS indicators are ON in green.

11 - 8 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.5 Application Example

This section describes how to configure AS01DNET (RTU) and its right-side I/O module parameters in the DeviceNet
Builder software through an application example. And how the parameters of the I/O modules connected to the right side
of AS01DNET (RTU) are controlled and accessed through AS01DNET master is illustrated as well.
11

Control Requirement:

1. Connect the output point of AS16AP to the input point; turn on the output point to make the input point ON.

2. Write one value for channel 1 of AS04DA to change into analog signal and then convert the analog signal to
digital signal to output via AS04AD.

11.5.5.1. Network Structure

AS01DNET- A
Master

POWER 01DNET
DeviceNet RUN
ERROR
MS

BAT. LOW NS

Network Configuration Tool COM1

COM2
AS324MT 40
IN 0
x1 0

IN 1 N o d e A d d re ss

0 8 x1 0
1 9

IN
2
3
10
11
AS01DNET
RTU Mode
4
5
6
7

0 8

Ethernet
1 9
01DNET 16AP 04DA 04AD
2 10

Ethernet OUT
3
4
11
2 1
MS

NS
5
6 IN OUT
7
x1 01 VO1 VO2 V1+ V2+
R TU M ast er/ Sla ve
IN 0 S/S C0
N o d e A d d re ss PWR P WR PWR
IN 1
C0 IO1 IO2 I1+ I2+
x1 00 IN
0 AG AG E RR VI1 VI2- ERR
0 0
1 D A A D
1 2 SLD SLD V3+ V4+
1
3
2 VO3 VO4 I3+ I4+
2 4
5 VI3 VI4-
3 3 6
IO3 IO4

DeviceNet 4 4 7
OUT
AG AG SLD SLD

5 5 0 SLD SLD
1
6 6 2 24V AG 24 V
3
7 7 4 0V 0V
5
6
7
R TU M ast er/ Sla ve

Note:

1. During the wiring, connect the voltage output of channel 1 of AS04DA to the voltage input of channel 1 of
AS04AD. And add the 24 V power to AS04DA and AS04AD respectively.

2. Make sure that the baud rates of AS01DNET and AS01DNET (RTU) match.

Module Node ID Baud rate

AS01DNET 0 500Kbps
AS01DNET(RTU) 2 500Kbps

3. Connect the 24V network power module between V+ and V- and a terminal resistor of 121Ω between CAN_H
and CAN_L.

11.5.5.2. Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure the Network

11.5.5.2.1. Building and Starting up Driver1 via COMMGR

Build driver1 in the COMMGR software.

Refer to section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft User Manual for more details.

11 - 8 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.5.5.2.2. Configuring AS01DNET (RTU)

1. Call DeviceNet Builder via ISPSoft.

Refer to section 11.6 for details on the operation.

11
2. The called DeviceNet Builder is started as below.

11 - 8 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

3. Click menu Network>> Online.

11

The AS01DNET-A master module which has been scanned is shown in the left-side Project List.

11 - 8 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4. Click menu Network >> Scan DeviceNet Network.

11

5. The RTU slave in the DeviceNet network is scanned as follows.

11 - 8 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

6. Double click AS01DNET (RTU). Then the Node Configuration… dialog box appears. Click the IO Configure…
button to make the AS01RTU-DNET interface appear, where to configure the modules connected to AS01DNET
(RTU).

11

11 - 8 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7. Click the Scan button to scan the I/O modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU).

11

11 - 8 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

8. After the module is scanned, configure module parameters. Double click AS04DA module and select “-10V~+10V”
for channel 1 mode setting. Click the OK button to finish the setting. Use the same setting way for channel 1 mode
setting of AS04AD and set it to “-10V~+10V” as well.

11

9. After the configuration of modules is finished, click the Download button to download the configuration of I/O
modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) to AS01DNET (RTU).

11 - 8 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

10. After the download, click the OK button to go back to the main page of the software. Double click AS01DNETScanner
icon and then move the slave in Available Nodes to Scan List on the Scanner Module Configuration dialog box.
Click the OK button to finish the setting.

11

11 - 8 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11. Click menu Network >> Download to download AS01DNET (RTU) configuration to the master.

The input mapping address D26005~D26018 and output mapping address D26105~D26114 are for AS01DNET
(RTU). The start input address D26005 and start output address D26105 are respectively used as the status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The parameter mappings of all modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU) are
displayed below.
11

I/O Module Input Output

AS16AP D26006 D26106-
Status D26007~D26008
Channel 1 output value D26107~D26108
AS04DA Channel 2 output value - D26109~D26110
Channel 3 output value - D26111~D26112
Channel 4 output value - D26113~D26114
Status D2609~D26010
Channel 1 input value D26011~D26012
AS04AD Channel 2 input value D26013~D26014
Channel 3 input value D26015~D26016
Channel 4 input value D26017~D26018

11 - 8 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.5.5.3. Using LD Program to Control the Entire Network

11

Program Explanation:

1. In network 1, write a value for the output of AS16AP and for the output of channel 1 of AS04DA when M0 changes
to ON.

2. In network 2, move the input value of AS16AP to D0 and the input value of channel 1 of AS04AD to D1 when M1
changes to ON.

11.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting

AS01DNET (RTU) provides four diagnosis methods such as LED indicator, seven-segment displayer, status word
diagnosis and software diagnosis.

11 - 9 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.6.1. Indicator Diagnosis

 NS indicator

LED status Indication How to deal with 11

No power supply; 1. Check the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) and the
Or the repeated node ID connection are normal.
OFF
detection has not been 2. Make sure that the baud rates of AS01DNET (RTU) and
completed. the master match.
Green light
blinking No connection between
Configure AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet software and
(ON:0.5s and AS01DNET (RTU) and its right-
download the configuration correctly.
OFF: 0.5s side modules
alternately)
Normal I/O data transmission
Green light
between AS01DNET (RTU) and No correction needed
ON
DeviceNet master
Red light
blinking I/O connection timeout between
Refer to the error shooting in Codes in Seven-Segment
(ON:0.5s and AS01DNET (RTU) and DeviceNet
Displayer below.
OFF: 0.5s master
alternately)

1. Ensure that the IDs of all nodes are unique on the bus.
Network trouble; 2. Check if the network installation is normal.
Repeated node ID; 3. Check if the baud rate of AS01DNET (RTU) is the same
Red light ON
No network power; as that of the bus.
Or BUS-OFF. 4. Check if the node ID of AS01DNET (RTU) is valid.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.

 MS indicator

LED status Indication How to deal with

Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) and

OFF No power
connection are normal.
1. AS01DNET (RTU) is waiting for
the I/O data from DeviceNet
Green light master.
blinking 2. No I/O data transmission 1. Configure AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet software
(ON:0.5s and between AS01DNET(RTU) and and download the configuration correctly.
OFF: 0.5s DeviceNet master 2. Switch the PLC to RUN state
alternately) 3. The PLC connected to
DeviceNet master is in STOP
state.
Normal transmission of I/O data
Green light
between AS01DNET (RTU) and No correction needed
ON
DeviceNet master

11 - 9 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

LED status Indication How to deal with

Red light
1. Check if the network power supply is normal;
blinking No network power supply;
2. Reset the internal parameters in AS01DNET (RTU);
(ON:0.5s and Configuration error;
11 OFF: 0.5s Module alarms.
3. Check if there is an error or alarm in the I/O modules
connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU).
alternately)
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
Red light ON Hardware error
after re-power on.

11.5.6.2. Codes in Seven-Segment Displayer

Code Indication How to deal with

Node ID of the scanner module
0~63 No correction needed
(When in RUN state)
1. Ensure that the node ID of AS01DNET (RTU) is unique in
The node ID is repeated or
F0 the DeviceNet network within the range of 0~63.
exceeds allowed range.
2. Repower it on after changing the node ID.

No I/O module is configured to Add I/O modules in AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet
F1 AS01DNET (RTU) in the Builder software and download the configuration data to
DeviceNet Builder software. AS01DNET (RTU) after the configuration is finished.

The work voltage of AS01DNET Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) works
F2
(RTU) is too low. normally.
AS01DNET (RTU) enters the
F3 Repower AS01DNET (RTU).
test mode.
1. Check if the network communication cable is normal and
the shielded cable is grounded.
AS01DNET (RTU) is the Bus- 2. Ensure the baud rates of all network nodes are same.
F4
Off state. 3. Check if the two ends of the network are both connected
with a 120Ω terminal resistor.
4. Repower the scanner module.

1. Check if the network cable is normal.

No network power supply for 2. Check if the network power supply is normal. (The external
F5
AS01DNET(RTU) 24V DC network power supply is connected between red
V+ and black V- of AS01DNET (RTU) .)

Internal error;
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
F6 An error in the internal storage
after re-power on.
units of AS01DNET (RTU)

Internal error;
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
F7 An error in the data exchange
after re-power on.
units of AS01DNET (RTU)

Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
F8 Manufacture error
after re-power on.

11 - 9 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

Code Indication How to deal with

Internal error;
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
F9 An error in the access of the
after re-power on.
Flash of AS01DNET (RTU) 11
Check if an error occurs in the modules connected to the
right side of AS01DNET (RTU);
Check if the module exists;
E4 Module error
Check if current module matches that configured in the
software;
Check if the unconfigured module is added.
If the code has emerged for a long time, please shoot troubles
in the methods below.
1. Ensure that there are at least two nodes working normally
in the network.
2. Check if the two ends of the network are both connected
with a 121Ω terminal resistor.
3. Ensure that the baud rates of all network nodes are same.
Repeated node ID detection 4. Check if the network cable has a problem such as being
E7
disconnected and loosened.
5. Check if the bus communication cable length exceeds
maximum transmission distance. If the maximum
transmission distance is exceeded, the stability of the
system can not be ensured.
6. Check if the shielded wire of the network communication
cable is grounded.
7. Turn on the power of AS01DNET (RTU) again.
The number of I/O modules
Check if the number of I/O modules connected to AS01DNET
E9 connected to AS01DNET (RTU)
(RTU) is more than 8.
exceeds the maximum 8.
1. Check if the RUN/STOP switch of the PLC connected to
AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP the DeviceNet master is turned to RUN.
80
state. 2. Check if the value of control word of AS01DNET (RTU) is
1. For details, refer to section 11.5.4.3.4.
The AS01DNET (RTU)
Wait until the download of AS01DNET (RTU) configuration
83 configuration in the software is
data is completed.
being downloading.

When multiple errors exist, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) will display error codes cyclically. For
example, the error codes: E4 03 80 02 are displayed cyclically. See the detailed meaning as below.
E4 03 80 02

1.
2.
3.
4.

 E4 indicates a module error or offline. For details, see the explanation of codes above.

 03 indicates the position of the module where an error occurs. The position of the first module connected to the right
side of AS01DNET (RTU) is 1 and that of the second module is 2. Maximum 8 I/O modules are connectable to
AS01DNET (RTU) within the range of 1~8.

11 - 9 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 80 means AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP state.

 02 is the node ID: 2 of AS01DNET (RTU).

11.5.6.3. Status Word Diagnosis

11
The status word of AS01DNET (RTU) shows the operation states of special modules and digital I/O modules. See the
following table for status word diagnosis and disposal.

Status
Bit Description Disposal
value
0 AS01DNET (RTU) is in RUN state No correction needed
bit0
1 AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP state. Restart AS01DNET(RTU)
Valid configuration data in
0 No correction needed
AS01DNET(RTU)
bit1 Re-download the configuration data to
Invalid configuration data in AS01DNET
1 AS01DNET (RTU) by using the DeviceNet
(RTU)
Builder software.
bit2 Reserved —— ——
bit3 Reserved —— ——
Currently connected module matches the
0 No correction needed
configuration in the software.
1. Check if currently connected module is
consistent with the configuration in the
bit4 Currently connected module is software.
1 inconsistent with the configuration in the 2. Change current module to match the
software. configuration in the software or change the
configuration in the software to match
currently connected module.
0 AS01DNET(RTU) in normal operation No correction needed
bit5 Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU)
1 AS01DNET(RTU) in low voltage
is normal.
bit6 Reserved —— ——
0 AS01DNET(RTU) in normal operation No correction needed
bit7
Reserved —— ——
bit8 Reserved —— ——
bit9 Reserved —— ——
bit10 Reserved —— ——
bit11 Reserved —— ——
bit12 Reserved —— ——
bit13 Reserved —— ——
bit14 Reserved —— ——
bit15 Reserved —— ——

11 - 9 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

11.5.6.4. Software Diagnosis

Click the Start Monitor button on the AS01DNET (RTU) interface. The Error code column will show relevant contents as
follows.

11

Error No. Explanation Solution

AS01DNET (RTU) can not 1. Check if the module is disconnected.
0x8001
detect the configured module. 2. Check if the module is damaged.
Current module is not
Ensure that the actually connected module is the same as
0x8002 consistent with the configured
that configured in the software.
module.

Note: For details on more error codes, refer to the explanation of Error ID in AS-series product manual.

Remark:

 The software diagnosis function can not be enabled until the DeviceNet Builder software is online.

11 - 9 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft (AS-

Series PLC)

11  Network structure

Connect the devices according to the following figure. PC accesses AS-series PLC through Ethernet.

11 - 9 6
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

 Operation of Software

1. Open the ISPSoft software and then select menu File>> New>> New. In the following dialog box which appears,
select corresponding PLC type AS marked in the red box below.

11

Note: The PLC type used in this section is AS332T-A.

11 - 9 7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. Click the OK button. Then the main interface of the ISPSoft software appears as below.

11

3. Set up COMMGR communication. Refer to section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft User Manual for more
details.

11 - 9 8
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

4. After the setup of COMMGR communication is finished, select menu Tools>> Communication settings…

11

5. The following dialog box appears. Select one desired driver which has been created and then click the OK button.

11 - 9 9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6. Double click HWCONFIG marked in the red box below.

11

7. Select menu Option>> I/O Scan in the following window which pops up. Then the AS01DNET-5A icon will show
up.

11 - 1 0 0
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

8. Select menu Option>> Download in the HWCONFIG window. Then the following dialog box appears. Select the
checkbox of Download All Items or select the checkboxes of the items which are needed for download.
Afterwards, click the OK button.

11

9. Then the following two dialog boxes of HWCONFIG and PC=>AS appear. Click Yes to perform the PC=>AS status.

10. When the download is finished, the progress bar is shown as below.

11 - 1 0 1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Meanwhile the following dialog box pops out. Click the Yes button.

11

11. The following dialog box appears to show that the download has been finished.

12. Return to the HWCONFIG window and right-click AS01DNET module to make the drop-down menu pop out. Select
Communication Software >> DeviceNet Builder from the menu.

11 - 1 0 2
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

13. The following dialog box pops out. Click the Yes button there.

11

14. The DeviceNet Builder software is opened as below, which means the DeviceNet Builder software has been
opened through the ISPSoft software.

11 - 1 0 3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15. Click menu Network>> Online.

11

16. The master module AS01DNET-A has been scanned as below.

11 - 1 0 4
 Ch a pt er 11 D e v ic e N e t Mas te r Sc a n n er Mo du l e A S 01 DN ET- A

17. Right-click the master module AS01DNET-A under the left-side Project List. Then a drop-down list pops up. Click
the option Scan DeviceNet Network from the list.

11

18. The following progress bar appears then.

11 - 1 0 5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

19. The master and slave which have been scanned both show up in the network.

11

11 - 1 0 6
 12
Chapter 12 Positioning Module AS02/04

Table of Contents

12.1 Overview .............................................................................................. 12-2

12.1.1 Characteristics ..................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Specifications and Functions ................................................................ 12-3
12.2.1 Specifications ..................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.2 Profile................................................................................................. 12-5
12.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ..................................................................... 12-6
12.2.4 Special Features ................................................................................. 12-8
12.2.5Notes on Wiring .................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.6 External Wiring for AS02PU-A ................................................................ 12-9
12.2.7 External Wiring for AS04PU-A ...............................................................12-10
12.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ........................................................................ 12-11
12.3.1 Initial Setting ....................................................................................12-11
12.3.2 Checking Module Version ................................................................... 12-13
12.3.3 Online Mode ..................................................................................... 12-15
12.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ..................................................12-16
12.3.5 Parameters ......................................................................................12-18
12.3.6 Normal Exchange Area ......................................................................12-20
12.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ........................................ 12-21
12.4.1 Initial Setting .....................................................................................12-21
12.4.2 Checking Module Version .....................................................................12-23
12.4.3 Online Mode .......................................................................................12-24
12.4.4 Parameters ........................................................................................12-25
12.4.5 Normal Exchange Area ........................................................................12-28
12.5 Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 12-28
12.5.1 Error Codes ........................................................................................12-28
12.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ...................................................................12-28
12.5.3 State Codes (Axis 1 - 4) ......................................................................12-28

12-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the positioning module, its operation, and its programming. On the

analog input/output module, four channels receive analog signals (voltage or current), and converts those

signals into 16-bit digital signals. In addition, the analog input/output module receives two blocks of 16-bit digital

data from a CPU module, and converts the digital data into analog signals (voltage or current). The analog

input/output module sends the analog signals by two channels. For software operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner

or DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If you are using AS Series PLC CPU, refer to ISPSoft User Manual or
12
DIADesigner Manual for more information. The new software DIADesigner-AX only supports AX Series PLC

CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to AX-3 User Manual for more information on software operation.

Characteristics
(1) Use the AS02/04 PU-A module, based on its practical application.

AS02PU-A: 2-axis differential output, 1 encoder

AS04PU-A: 4-axis NPN transistor (sinking) output

(2) High-speed input/output

AS02PU-A: high speed output frequency at 200 k Hz (A/B/Z phase) and 2-axis 200 k HZ differential

output

AS04PU: 4-axis NPN transistor (sinking) output at 100 k Hz

(3) Input/output

AS02PU-A: 5 direct current input points (sinking or souring)

AS04PU-A: 6 direct current input points (sinking or souring)

(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG of ISPSoft or Hardware Configuration of DIADesigner without spending time writing

programs to set registers to manage functions.

(5) Specially designed instructions for the module

You can use specially designed instructions to control the modules without spending too much time to

figure out how to achieve the required applications.

12-2
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

Specifications and Functions

Specifications
 Electrical specifications for the inputs

Module Name AS02PU-A AS04PU-A

Input High speed Standard Standard

3 5
Number of Input Points 6
(A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-) (X0.0-X0.4) 12
Connector Type Removable terminal block

Direct current Direct current

Input Form Differential input
(sinking or sourcing) (sinking or sourcing)

Input Current 5-24 VDC, 5 mA 24 VDC, 5 mA 24 VDC, 5 mA

OFF→ON >3 VDC >15 VDC >15 VDC

Action Level
ON→OFF <1.5 VDC <5 VDC <5 VDC

Response time <1.5 μs <0.5 ms <0.5 ms

200 k Hz
Maximum input frequency 1 k Hz 1 k Hz
(A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-)

Input impedance 4.7 kΩ

Input isolation voltage 500 VAC

Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.

Weight 120 g

12-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Electrical specifications for the outputs

Model
AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
Item

Number of outputs Four (2-axis) Eight (4-axis)

Connector type Removable terminal blocks

Output form differential output Transistor-T (sinking) (NPN)

12 Output current 5 VDC*1 5-30 VDC

Resistance 10 mA 0.1A
Maximum
Inductance N/A
load
Bulb N/A

Maximum Resistance 200 kHz 100 kHz

output Inductance N/A

frequency*1 Bulb N/A

Maximum OFF→ON 0.1 μs 1.5 μs

Response

time ON→OFF 0.1 μs 1.5 μs

Input isolation voltage 500 VAC

Weight 120 g

*1: Actual output: 4 VDC (high input impedance) to 3.3 VDC (10 mA)/output

12-4
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

Profile
38.2 95

1
7 7

98 .3
88
3
8 2

12
4
9
5
6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module

Indicates the status of the power supply

POWER LED indicator
ON: the power is on
(Blue)
OFF: no power

Operating status of the module

Run LED indicator
ON: the module is running and ready to accept instructions.
(Green)
OFF: the module is stopped and can NOT accept instructions.

Error status of the module

2
Error LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.

(Red) Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF): hardware error occurs in the

module, can NOT operate normally

Input LED indicator ON: Receives an input signal

(Red) OFF: Receives no input signal

Output LED indicator ON: Receives an output signal

(Red) OFF: Receives no output signal

Removable terminal The inputs are connected to sensors.

3
block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
input/output terminals

5 Terminal block clip Removal of the terminal block

6 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

12-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Number Name Description

7 Module connecting set Connects the modules

8 Ground clip On the DIN rail for grounding

9 Label Nameplate

Arrangement of Terminals
12
AS02PU-A AS04PU-A

02PU
04PU

IN IN
IN OUT
A+ A-
C0
B+ B- PWR

0 PWR
Z+ Z- RUN
ERR 0 1 RUN
0 A ERR
B 1 2 0
1 2 Z 1
0 2 3 2
3 4 IN
IN 1 3
OUT OUT 3 C1
2
0+ 0- 4
5
3 4 4
1+ 1-
4 0
5 5
2+ 2- 1
●
6 2
3+ 3- 0 3
1 OUT
●
7 4
OUT
2 5
3 6
7

12-6
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

AS02PU-A AS04PU-A

Wordings with the same indications that are used Wordings with the same indications that are used

on the terminal block and manual on the terminal block and manual

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

Manual Block Manual Block Manual Block Manual Block

(left) (right) (left) (right)

A+ A+ A- A- S/S S/S C0 C0
12
B+ B+ B- B- S/S S/S Y0.0 0

Z+ Z+ Z- Z- X0.0 0 Y0.1 1

S/S S/S X0.0 0 X0.1 1 Y0.2 2

X0.1 1 X0.2 2 X0.2 2 Y0.3 3

X0.3 3 X0.4 4 X0.3 3 C1 C1

Y0.0+ 0+ Y0.0- 0- X0.4 4 Y0.4 4

Y0.1+ 1+ Y0.1- 1- X0.5 5 Y0.5 5

Y0.2+ 2+ Y0.2- 2-  Y0.6 6

Y0.3+ 3+ Y0.3- 3-  Y0.7 7

12-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Special Features
The following special instructions (API 14) are designed for AS Positioning Modules, for example, setting

output control parameters, reading output status, pulse output (no acceleration), relative position output (with

acceleration and deceleration), absolute addressing output (with acceleration and deceleration), homing, jog

output, MPG output, and high-speed counter function. Refer to section 6.15 (API 14) in AS Programming

Manual for more information.

12
Notes on Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the positioning module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the

AS02/04PU-A must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that

is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a

cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) To wire a terminal block, use single-core cables or multi-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22
AWG with pin-type connectors smaller than 1 mm in diameter, which are covered with an insulation

tube as below. Moreover, use only copper conducting wires that can withstand temperatures above

60° C-75° C.

< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG

(5) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100

ohm.

(6) Notes on two-wire, three-wire, and four-wire connections:

 Two-wire connection/three-wire connection (passive transducer): connect the transducer and

the analog input module to the same power circuit.

 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply, so

do not connect it to the same power circuit as the analog input module.

12-8
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

External Wiring for AS02PU-A

X0.4

Delta s ervo d rive

X0.3 *7 ASDA - A2 Series
Y0.0+ PLS 43
X0.2 Y0.0- /PLS 41
Y0.1+ SIGN 36
Y0.1- /SIGN 37
X0.1
12
X0.0

*1 S /S Delta s ervo d rive

+ 24V
*7 ASDA - A2 Series
*2
*3 Y0.2+ P LS 43
MPG Shi el ded
c able Y0.2- /PLS 41
A+
Y0.3+ SIGN36
Phase
A A- Y0.3- /SIGN37
B+
Phase
B B-
Z+
Phase
Z
Z-

5 ~2 4V *4
A+
R* 6
A-
B+
R*6
B-
Z+
R*6
Z-

*5
A+
R* 6
A-
B+
R* 6
B-
Z+
R* 6
Z-
5 ~2 4V

*1. Souring

*2. Sinking

*3. Differential input

*4. Open collector souring

*5. Open collector sinking

*6. Open collector sinking/sourcing to connect to phase A/B/Z and if the input frequency is higher than

100 kHz, add a 3W/470 ohm resistor between + the positive end and – the negative end.

*7. Refer to API1402 in AS Series Programming Manual and Delta Servo Drive Manual for more

information on the output mode.

12-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

External Wiring for AS04PU-A

D elta s erv o dri ve ASD A - A2 s eri es
24V
*1 VD D 17

9 1kΩ
PU L L_ HI_ P 339 Ma x.
2 00Kpps
PUL SE 43
X0.5 51Ω
Y0.0 /PU L SE 41
51Ω
C0 COM- 45
X0.4
*3 0V
12 Delta s erv o driv e ASD A -A2 s eries
X0.3
2 4V
*1 V DD 17

X0.2 5 1 kΩ
PU LL _ HI_ S 339 Max.
200 Kp ps
SIGN 36
51Ω
X0.1 Y0.1 /S IGN 37 51Ω
C0 C OM- 45

*3 0V
X0.0

5~30VD C, 0.1A
*4 S/S
Y0.4
C1 *2
+24V
*5 *3

*1. VDD and COM are seen as a group and its power is provided by Delta servo drive.

*2. It is a load or an input point.

*3. Use the same power supply for the same COM group.

*4. Sourcing

*5. Sinking

12-10
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

HWCONFIG in ISPSoft
Initial Setting

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

12

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

1 2 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Setting page.

12

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and close the setting page.

12-12
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the
parameters while the CPU module is running.

12

Checking Module Version

(1) On the Common menu, click On-line Mode.

12-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Double-click the module to open the Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the hardware

are displayed.

12

12-14
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

Online Mode
(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

12

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

12-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(3) View the module status.

12

Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a dep file (.dep).

12-16
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

12

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a .dep file to import saved parameters.

12-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Parameters
 The input point settings

You can set values in the input points as the triggering conditions (phase Z, DOG, LSN, LSP) for the

axis1 and axis 2 to position. Rising-edge and falling-edge can also be specified in the triggering

conditions.

12

The example shows X0.0 is Axis 1 DOG falling edge triggered.

12-18
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

 Filter time settings

The default setting is 10 ms; the system filters out distortion and noises in a pulse width modulated

transmission that is below 10 ms.

 The output point settings

You can set values in the output points (single pulse output, pulse + direction, CW+CCW, A phase + B

phase). Refer to API1402 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on output modes.

12

 Axis settings

You can set up the axis in HWCONFIG or through positioning instructions. Use API1402 to set up the

followings starting speed, acceleration time, deceleration time, max. speed, seeking the set number of Z

phase after homing, output the offset position after homing. Use API1407 to setup homing mode. Refer to

API1402 – 1410 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on the settings of axis.

12-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Normal Exchange Area

For data exchange among the CPU module and the modules, the system assign special devices for specified

parameters.

 AS02PU-A

12

 AS04PU-A

12-20
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration)

12.4.1 Initial Setting
1. After starting DIADesigner-AX, double-click on Hardware Configuration, click Device Scan, and then

click the Yes button in the dialog box.

12

2. You can see AS04PU on the right side of AX-3, and then double-click on the 04PU icon.

(6)

12-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. Enter the setting window for module parameters.

12

4. Complete the setup for the parameters you desire.

12-22
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

5. Download the settings by clicking Online menu > Login.

12

12.4.2 Checking Module Version

1. Click Online menu > Login to start the online monitoring.

12-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. Check the firmware version of the module from the Module Revision parameter.

12

12.4.3 Online Mode

1. Click Online menu > Login to start the online monitoring.

12-24
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

2. Read current parameter values or status in the AS04PU-A I/O Mapping tab.

12

12.4.4 Parameters
1. Input Point Setting

Set an input point as the trigger condition for the positioning function of an axis (Z-phase, DOG, LSN,

LSP) by selecting the rising-edge or falling-edge trigger.

12-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Example: Set X0.0 mode as Axis 1 DOG falling edge trigger.

12

2. Filter Time Setting

The default setting is 10 ms; the system filters out distortion and noises in a pulse width modulated

transmission that is below 10 ms.

3. Output Point Setting

You can set the output points to single pulse output, pulse + direction, CW+CCW or A phase + B phase.

Example: Y0.0/Y0.1 output mode is A phase (Y0.0) + B phase (Y0.1).

Note:

Refer to DFB_DPUCONF in section 6.5 in AX Series Standard Instructions Manual for more information on

output modes.

12-26
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

4. Axis parameters setting

You can set up axis parameters in DIADesigner-AX or through instructions. Use the DFB_DPUCONF

instruction to set the parameters such as start speed, acceleration time, deceleration time, max speed,

seeking the set number of Z phase after homing, and output the offset position after homing. Use

DFB_DPUZRN to set the homing mode. Refer to Chapter 6 in AX Series Standard Instructions Manual

for more information and use of axis parameters.

12

12-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

12.4.5 Normal Exchange Area

For data exchange among the CPU module and the modules, there are different data exchange areas for

modules. Variables can be declared in the AS04PU-A I/O Mapping tab and then the parameters can be read

in POUs.

 Normal exchange area for AS04PU-A

12

Troubleshooting
12.5.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code indicator indicator

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

12.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

12.5.3 State Codes (Axis 1 - 4)

State Code Axis Axis

Description
Byte # 1-2 3-4

0 Error flag

1 The output is active.

Axis 1 Axis 3
2 The output has stopped working.

3 The instruction execution is complete.

12-28
 Ch a pt er 1 2 Pos i t io n i ng M o d ul e A S 0 2/ 04 P U

State Code Axis Axis

Description
Byte # 1-2 3-4

4 Pulse in positive direction not allowed

5 Pulse in negative direction not allowed

6 Current position value overflow

7 Pulse direction (positive or negative)

12
8 Error flag

9 The output is active.

10 The output has stopped working.

11 The instruction execution is complete.

Axis 2 Axis 4
12 Pulse in positive direction not allowed

13 Pulse in negative direction not allowed

14 Current position value overflow

15 Pulse direction (positive or negative)

12-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

MEMO

12

12-30
 13
12
Chapter 13 IO-Link Communication Module
AS04SIL

Table of Contents

13.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 13-2

13.1.1 Firmware and Software Versions ................................................................ 13-2
13.2 Specification and Wiring............................................................................13-2
13.2.1 Specifications .......................................................................................... 13-2
13.2.2 Profile .................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.3 Wiring .................................................................................................... 13-6
13.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 13-8
13.3.1 Basic Functions in ISPSoft ......................................................................... 13-8
13.3.2 Basic Functions in DIADesigner-AX ............................................................ 13-14
13.3.3 Application Functions............................................................................... 13-22
13.4 Application Examples ............................................................................. 13-27
13.4.1 Using AS Series CPU as Upper Device ........................................................ 13-27
13.4.2 Using AH Series CPU or Non-Delta Master PLC as Upper Device .................... 13-28
13.4.3 Application of AS Special Remote Mode...................................................... 13-29
13.4.4 Application of Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode ................................. 13-41
13.4.5 Application of CANopen DS301 Mode ......................................................... 13-43
13.4.6 Using AX-3 Series CPU as Upper Device ..................................................... 13-49
13.5 IO-Link Event Code Table ....................................................................... 13-54
13.6 Module Status Codes .............................................................................. 13-56

13-1
A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.1 Overview
Thank you for using the IO-Link master module AS04SIL-A. To ensure that your AS04SIL-A is installed and operated
correctly, read this manual carefully before using the module.

The AS04SIL-A module is an AS series IO-Link communication module (hereafter referred to as “SIL” module) connected
on the right side of AS CPU, AX CPU, or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode) which is used with the AS-FCOPM function card
together as a CAN remote device. SIL provides 4 channels, which can be separately configured in IO-Link master or
standard I/O (SIO) mode. IO-Link master can freely connect with IO-Link devices and supports the hybrid use of IO-Link
sensors and traditional sensors. Digital I/O of the SIL module can be extended with IO-Link hubs so that the sensors which
do not support IO-Link can be connected to. Therefore it is pretty flexible to use the SIL module.

The configuration software for AS04SIL-A is ISPSoft or DIADesigner-AX. Go to Delta official website to download and
install the software.

13.1.1 Firmware and Software Versions

 Using ISPSoft
Firmware
Model AS series CPU AS00SCM-A AS04SIL-A
Version V1.08.50 and later V2.06 and later V1.00 and later

Software
AS00SCM-A CANopen EDS file
Model ISPSoft HWCONFIG 4.0
(Remote DS301 Mode)
Version V3.12 and later V4.02 and later V2.06 and later

 Using DIADesigner-AX
Firmware
Model AX series CPU AS04SIL-A
Version V1.0.6.0 and later V1.00 and later

Software
Model DIADesigner-AX AS04SIL-A DDF file
Version V1.5 and later V1.0.0.3 and later

13.2 Specification and Wiring

13.2.1 Specifications
 Unit Specification

Item Specifications

Module type IO-Link master

Model name AS04SIL-A
Number of IO-Link ports 4
Baud rate 4.8kbps, 38.4kbps,230.4kbps
Communication
Topology 1:1

13-2
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - L i nk C om m unic a ti o n M od u l e A S 0 4 SI L

Item Specifications
Compliant  IO-Link Interface and System Specification Version 1.1.2
standards  IO-Link Tester Specification Version 1.1.2
IO-Link Yes
Mode SIO (DI) Yes
SIO (DO) Yes, up to 100 mA / channel
Cyclic communications Min. 2 ms; dynamic, according to the valid data length
Input: data size in each communication
Max. 32 bytes
port
Output: data size in each
Max. 32 bytes
communication port
Input: data size in each module Max. 128 bytes
Output: data size in each module Max. 128 bytes
Input PDO data size Max. 100 words
Output PDO data size Max. 100 words
Backup Yes
Type Unshielded (can also apply to shielded ones)
Length Max. 20 m
Electrostatic
Cable specification
capacity Max. 3 nF
between lines
Loop resistance Max. 6 Ω
External connection terminals Removable terminal block, clamping connector

13-3
A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Electrical Specifications

Item Specifications

Rated voltage 24VDC (20.4VDC~ 28.8VDC) (-15%~+20%)

Power supply to
device in IO-Link Max. load
0.2A/port
mode or SIO (DI) current
mode Short-circuit
Yes
protection
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Input voltage/
Digital inputs in SIO 24VDC, 5mA
current
(DI) mode
ON voltage >15VDC
OFF voltage <5VDC
Filter time 0~65 ms (0: no filter)
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Output voltage/
24VDC (20.4VDC~ 28.8VDC),0.1A/port
Digital outputs in current
SIO (DO) mode Short-circuit
Yes
protection
Leakage current <0.1mA
Residual voltage <1.5VDC
Internal I/O
NPN, PNP
common
Input voltage/
Digital inputs for 24 VDC, 2mA
current
Pin2 in IO-Link mode
ON voltage >15VDC
OFF voltage <5VDC
Filter time 0~65 ms (0: no filter)
Isolation voltage 500 VAC
Power consumption 0.8W
Weight 133g

13-4
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - L i nk C om m unic a ti o n M od u l e A S 0 4 SI L

13.2.2 Profile
38.2 95

04 SI L 1
7
7
CQ 1 L1+
PWR
DI 1 L1-

CQ2 L2+ MS 2

98.3
NS

88
DI2 L2- C1
Q1
CQ3 L3+
E1
C2
L3 -
3
DI3
Q2
CQ4 L4+ E2

DI4 L4- C3
Q3

4
●
24 V E3
C4
0V Q4

8
E4

5
6 75
35
Unit: mm
Number Name Description
1 Model name Model name of the module

Indicates the status of the power supply

POWER LED indicator (Blue) ON: the power is on
OFF: no power or the power voltage is too low

Error status of the module

OFF: The module is normal.
Module LED indicator ON: The communication with its left-side PLC or RTU module fails.
(Red) Blinking:
1. Module setting or communication error (blinks every 1 second)
2. Hardware or low voltage error (blinks every 0.2 second)
Error status of the network
ON: No external power supply
Network LED indicator Blinking: Scanning is ongoing or the module is already configured and
(Orange) the diagnosis is done.
OFF: The module has been configured but the diagnosis has not done
yet.
2
IO-Link connection status of each communication port
ON: The communication port is in IO-Link mode and a device is
C1, C2, C3, C4 LED indicator connected.
(Orange) Blinking: The communication port is in IO-Link mode but no device is
connected or the device connected is not configured.
OFF: The communication port is disabled or in SIO mode.

Indicates the status of input / output in SIO mode

Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 LED indicator
ON: The input/output is working in SIO mode.
(Orange)
OFF: The communication port is disabled or in IO-Link mode.

Indicates if any warning or error occurs in each communication port of

E1, E2, E3, E4 LED indicator the IO-Link connection.
(red) Blinking: A warning or an error occurs
OFF: No warnings or errors
3 Removable terminal block IO-Link

13-5
A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Number Name Description

Arrangement of the input/output
4 Arrangement of the terminals
terminals
5 Terminal block clip Removal of the terminal block
6 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail
7 Module connecting set Connects the modules
8 Label Nameplate

13.2.3 Wiring
13.2.3.1 IO-Link Mode Wiring for Power and Communication
Precautions:
1. Keep the input cables, output cables and power cable separate from one another. It is suggested to use independent
power for AS04SIL-A. See the example below.

IO-Link Sens or
(w it h DI )
I O-Link Mast er
A S 04S I L-A 1 B rown

C Q1 . L1+ . 2 Whit e

D I1
. L1- . 3 B lue
4 Black
C Q2 L2+

D I2 L2-

C Q3 . L3+ . 1 B rown

D I3 L3- .
C Q4 L4+ 3 Blue
4 Black
D I4 L4-

. 24V I O-Link S ensor

(w it hout D I )
0V

0V 24V

DC Power S upply
24V D C

2. The 24 VDC cable should be twisted and connected to a module within a short distance.

3. Do not bundle 110 VAC cable, 220 VAC cable, 24 VDC cable, the (high-voltage high-current) main circuit, and the I/O
signal cable together and keep the power cables away from the earth cable. It is suggested that the distance between
adjacent cables should be more than 100 millimeters.

4. Connect a cable with a diameter of 14 AWG or higher to ground.

5. Use single-wire cables or two-wire cables with a diameter of 20 AWG to 14 AWG. Only use copper conducting wires
with a temperature rating of 60/75°C.

13-6
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - L i nk C om m unic a ti o n M od u l e A S 0 4 SI L

13.2.3.2 Digital Input Wiring in SIO Mode

When the connected device is a PNP type When the connected device is a NPN type

AS 04SI L-A AS 04SI L-A

24 V 24 V
Ln+ Ln+

CQn CQn

Ln- Ln-
0V 0V

2 4V 2 4V

0V 0V

Note: n= 1~4

13.2.3.3 Digital Output Wiring in SIO Mode

When the connected device is a PNP type When the connected device is a NPN type

A S04S I L-A A S04S I L-A

24 V 24 V
Ln+ + Ln+ +
R
signal signal
CQn CQn
R Load Load
Ln- - Ln- -

0V 0V

2 4V 2 4V

0V 0V

Note: n= 1~4

13.2.3.4 Digital Input Wiring

When the connected device is a PNP type When the connected device is a NPN type

AS 04SI L-A A S04S I L-A

24 V 24 V
Ln+ Ln+

DI n DI n

Ln- Ln-
0V 0V

2 4V 2 4V

0V 0V

Note: n=1~4

13-7
A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.3 Functions
AS04SIL-A supports the IO-Link devices when it works as the IO-Link master. Between the master and the devices is the
point-to-point connection adopting the reliable 3-wire technology and the unshielded standard cable to connect intelligent
sensors/actuators which function as IO-Link devices. AS04SIL-A is compatible with traditional digital sensors/actuators.
The designs for circuit status and data channels are both based on the reliable 24VDC technology.

There are two sections to respectively introduce the functions in ISPSoft and DIADesigner-AX:
 Section 13.3.1 for the basic functions in ISPSoft with AS300 CPU
 Section 13.3.2 for the basic functions in DIADesigner-AX with AX-3 CPU

13.3.1 Basic Functions in ISPSoft

13.3.1.1 Cyclic Communication Function
I/O data (process data) in the IO/Link devices is cyclically exchanged with the IO-Link master module which operates as
the IO-Link communication master. Meanwhile as the extension module of the upper device, AS04SIL-A can cyclically
update the device data and status of the IO-Link master to the upper device.
For example, users can use cyclic communications to check the amount of incident light for photoelectric sensors, stability
detection margins, and excessive proximity for proximity sensors, etc. as well as detect the amount of performance
deterioration in devices and changes in usage conditions.
There are three modes for cyclic communications:
(1) Asynchronous: AS04SIL-A and IO-Link device defines the cycle time for each port and uses the shortest update cycle
time.
(2) Fixed Value: the system uses what you have set for the update cycle time here. The value here should be within the
cycle time range of the connected device and the minimum value should be a number bigger than the shortest cycle
time that the connected device supports.
(3) Synchronization: AS04SIL-A defines the update cycle time for all the selected communication ports synchronously.
(You need to select at least two ports.) Since different device supports different update cycle time, the system uses
the biggest time among all the shortest cycle times to have every device covered.

13-8
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - L i nk C om m unic a ti o n M od u l e A S 0 4 SI L

13.3.1.2 Message Communication Function

AS04SIL-A receives messages (non-cyclic) from PLC or ISPSoft, sends the data to IO-Link devices and sends back the
response from IO-Link devices. Non-cyclic data, including device parameters and events, uses specific index and sub-
index for searching and data mapping. AS04SIL-A uses explicit message to read and write these data. It is very useful to
use index or sub-index in reading and writing data.
For example, during operation you can use function blocks to change and adjust device parameters, such as threshold
settings, execution tuning, and ON-delay time from a program as well as check the internal status, such as the operating
time of devices. Refer to section 13.3.2.5 for more information.
You can select the data or parameter type, select one or all parameters to read or to write. See the setting image shown
below for reference.

13.3.1.3 Communication Mode Setting

You can select one operating mode among the modes of Inactive, SIO (Digital Output, Digital Input) and IO-Link for
each communication port on the following software page.

A mixture of IO-Link communication and digital I/O can apply to the same AS04SIL-A module.

13-9
A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.3.1.4 Digital Input and Digital Output Function (SIO)

CQ1-CQ4 of AS04SIL-A can be used independently as the standard input or output. The DI/DO types of PNP and NPN
are supported and can be set up separately on the IO-Link page.

13.3.1.5 Automatic IO-Link Baud Rate Setting

AS04SIL-A can automatically match one of existing baud rates (4.8kbps, 38.4kbps and 230.4kbps) of IO-Link devices and
communicate with them. Thus there is no need to set the baud rate at communication ports for connected devices.

13.3.1.6 Connected Device Verification

As long as the Type Compatible option under Inspection Level is enabled and the setting is downloaded, AS04SIL-A will
check if the IO-Link device actually connected matches the product model of the configured device. If not matched, the
status code of the communication port will show 16#8CA2 which indicates that the connected device is inconsistent with
the configured one.

13.3.1.7 DI (Digital Input) Function for IO-Link Pin2

The IO-Link system may not respond fast enough for high-speed applications. When the connected IO-Link sensor
supports the second output, connect the sensor’s pin2 to DI of the port of AS04SIL-A. At this moment, the sensor can still
be watched and set up via the sensor’s pin4.

The real-time data can be monitored through Port 1- 4 Pin2 value of Normal Exchange Area. See the following figure as
an example.

13-10
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - L i nk C om m unic a ti o n M od u l e A S 0 4 SI L

The mapped register for Port 1- 4 Pin2 value of Normal Exchange Area is D29029. For the pin2 input value, the
addresses D29029.0~ D29029.3 correspond to port 1~ port 4 respectively.
Communication Port Address
Port 1 D29029.0
Port 2 D29029.1
Port 3 D29029.2
Port 4 D29029.3
DI1-DI4 of AS04SIL-A can also be used separately as standard inputs.

13.3.1.8 IO-Link Communication Error Detection

This function detects I/O-Link cable breaks, disconnections from IO-Link device ports, error-level device events, device
configuration verification errors, and IO-Link device malfunctions. See section 13.5 for IO-Link event codes.

13.3.1.9 Detection of Short-Circuits in I/O Cables

This function detects short-circuits in I/O cables. The status code for communication ports will show
16#8CA4 if an error occurs.

13.3.1.10 Event Log

The IO-Link event codes listed in section 13.5 are refreshed in the mapped devices for ports in the Normal Exchange
Area section as below.

The device status for each port should be set to 3 bytes in length. See the following table of above device addresses
corresponding to ports in order.

Port Address
Port 1 D29022_H, D29022_L, D29023_H
Port 2 D29023_L, D29024_H, D29024_L
Port 3 D29025_H, D29025_L, D29026_H
Port 4 D29026_L, D29027_H, D29027_L

Device status consists of Event qualifier and Event Code as follows.

For event codes, see section 13.5.

Event Qualifier Event Code

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2
The data frame of Event Qualifier:

MODE TYPE SOURCE INSTANCE

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1 3 - 11
A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Bit 0~ Bit 2: INSTANCE

Value Definition
0 Unknown
1-3 Reserved
4 Application
5-7 Reserved

Bit 3: SOURCE

Value Definition
0 Device (Remote)
1 Master (Local)

Bit 4~ Bit 5: TYPE

Value Definition
0 Reserved
1 Notification
2 Warning
3 Error

Bit 6~ Bit 7: MODE

Value Definition
0 Reserved
1 Event single shot
2 Event disappears
3 Event appears

13.3.1.11 Notification of Input Data Invalidity

Input Invalid Flag is used to determine whether the process input data in the upper device is invalid for the IO-Link
communication or not.

Whether the input data is invalid or not can be monitored by Port1 – 4(IO-Link Process Data) Input Invalid Flag of the
Normal Exchange Area section. If the flag is 1, then the input data is invalid. If it is 0, the input data is valid.
See the example in the following figure.

The mapped register for Port1 – 4(IO-Link Process Data) Input Invalid Flag is D29028 and for the input invalid flag,
D29028.0~ D29028.3 correspond to Port 1~Port 4 respectively as shown in the following table.

Communication Port Address

Port 1 D29028.0
Port 2 D29028.1
Port 3 D29028.2
Port 4 D29028.3

13-12
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - L i nk C om m unic a ti o n M od u l e A S 0 4 SI L

13.3.1.12 IO-Link Device Scan Function

HWCONFIG 4.0 can enable several AS04SIL-A modules to auto-identify all IO-Link devices at communication ports via a
click on Scan button.

You can also select any AS04SIL-A module and then click Scan All Device to scan all the IO-Link devices connected to
the communication ports of the AS04SIL-A module.

While SIL is auto-identifying devices, all IO-Link devices connected to the IO-Link master need be restarted and
therefore the devices will probably stop running for a short time.

13-13
A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.3.2 Basic Functions in DIADesigner-AX

13.3.2.1 Cyclic Communication Function
I/O data (process data) in the IO/Link devices is cyclically exchanged with the IO-Link master module which operates as
the IO-Link communication master. Meanwhile as the extension module of the upper device, AS04SIL-A can cyclically
update the device data and status of the IO-Link master to the upper device.
For example, users can use cyclic communications to check the amount of incident light for photoelectric sensors, stability
detection margins, and excessive proximity for proximity sensors, etc. as well as detect the amount of performance
deterioration in devices and changes in usage conditions.
There are three modes for cyclic communications as set in the following figure:
(1) Free run: SIL and IO-Link devices define the cycle time for each port and use the shortest cycle time.
(2) Fixed value: the system uses what you have set for Cycle Time (us) as the cycle time for each communication port.
The setting values should be greater than the shortest cycle times that the configured devices support.
(3) Message synchronization: SIL defines the cycle time for synchronization of all the selected communication ports.
Since different devices support different update cycle times, the system takes the biggest one among all the shortest
cycle times that devices for synchronization support as the update cycle.

13-14
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - L i nk C om m unic a ti o n M od u l e A S 0 4 SI L

13.3.2.2 Message Communication Function

The SIL module receives messages (non-cyclic) from PLC or the DIADesigner-AX software, sends the data to IO-Link
devices and sends back the response from IO-Link devices. Non-cyclic data including device parameters and events, uses
the specific index and sub-index for exchange. SIL uses explicit messages to read and write these data. It is very useful to
use the index or sub-index in reading and writing data in devices.

 User role
Option Description

Identification menu and Observation menu can be selected to read/write corresponding

Observer
parameters.

Identification menu, Diagnosis menu and Observation menu can be selected to read/write
Maintenance
corresponding parameters.

Identification menu, Parameter menu, Diagnosis menu and Observation menu can be
Specialist
selected to read/write corresponding parameters.

 Actions
Action Description

Change the settings into defaults

Read the parameters on this page

Write the parameters on this page

 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.3.2.3 Communication Mode Setting

You can acquire the IO-Link configuration by using the scan function or manually add digital input and digital output.

 Click “Scan for Devices…” on the drop-down menu to get the IO-Link configuration.

_13

 Click “Plug Device” on the drop-down menu to manually add digital input and digital output.

A mixture of IO-Link communication and digital I/O can apply to the same AS04SIL-A module.

13-16
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13.3.2.4 Digital Input and Digital Output Function (SIO)

CQ1-CQ4 of AS04SIL-A can be used independently as the standard input or output. The DI/DO types of PNP and NPN
are supported and can be set up separately on the AS04SIL-A Parameters tab.

13

13-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.3.2.5 Automatic IO-Link Baud Rate Setting

AS04SIL-A can automatically match one of existing baud rates (4.8kbps, 38.4kbps and 230.4kbps) of IO-Link devices
and communicate with them. Thus there is no need to set the baud rates at communication ports for connected devices.

13.3.2.6 Connected Device Verification

As long as the Type Compatible option under Inspectionlevel is enabled and the setting is downloaded, AS04SIL-A will
check if the IO-Link device actually connected matches the product model of the configured device. If they are not
matched, the status code of the communication port will show 16#8CA2 which indicates that the connected device is
inconsistent with the configured one.

_13

13.3.2.7 DI (Digital Input) Function for IO-Link Pin2

The IO-Link system may not respond fast enough for high-speed applications. When the connected IO-Link sensor
supports the second output, connect the sensor’s pin2 to DI of the port of AS04SIL-A. At this moment, the sensor can still
be watched and set up via the sensor’s pin4.
The real-time data can be monitored through Port 1- 4 Pin2 value of the normal exchange area. See the following figure
as an example.

For Port 1- 4 Pin2 value as shown in the above example figure, the pin 2 input statuses starting from %IW13 correspond
to port 1- port 4 respectively.

13-18
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

Communication Port Address

Port 1 %IW13.bit0
Port 2 %IW13.bit1
Port 3 %IW13.bit2
Port 4 %IW13.bit3
DI1-DI4 of AS04SIL-A module can be separately used as standard inputs as well.

13.3.2.8 IO-Link Communication Error Detection

This function detects I/O-Link cable breaks, disconnections from IO-Link device ports, error-level device events, device
configuration verification errors, and IO-Link device malfunctions. See section 13.5 for IO-Link event codes.

13.3.2.9 Detection of Short-Circuits in I/O Cables

This function detects short-circuits in I/O cables. The status code for communication ports will show 16#8CA4 if an error
occurs.
13
13.3.2.10 Event Log
The IO-Link event codes listed in section 13.5 are refreshed in the mapping addresses for ports in the normal exchange
area as below.

The device status for each port should be set to 3 bytes in length. See the following table of above device addresses
corresponding to ports in order.
Port Channel
Port 1 Port1EventQualifier, Port1EventCode
Port 2 Port2EventQualifier, Port2EventCode
Port 3 Port3EventQualifier, Port3EventCode
Port 4 Port4EventQualifier, Port3EventCode
Device status consists of Event qualifier and Event Code as follows.
For event codes, see section 13.5.
Event Code
Event Qualifier
High byte Low byte
PortxEventQualifier Port1EventCode Port1EventCode

13-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

The data frame of Event Qualifier:

MODE TYPE SOURCE INSTANCE
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Bit 0 – Bit 2：INSTANCE
Value Definition
0 Unknown
1-3 Reserved
4 Application
5-7 Reserved
Bit 3：SOURCE
Value Definition
0 Device (Remote)
_13 1 Master (Local)
Bit 4 – Bit 5：TYPE
Value Definition
0 Reserved
1 Notification
2 Warning
3 Error
Bit 6 – Bit 7：MODE
Value Definition
0 Reserved
1 Event single shot
2 Event disappears
3 Event appears

13-20
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13.3.2.11 Notification of Input Data Invalidity

Input Invalid Flag is used to tell whether the process input data in the upper device is invalid for the IO-Link communication
or not.
Whether the input data is invalid or not can be monitored by Port1 – 4(IO-Link Process Data) Input Invalid Flag of the
normal exchange area. If the flag is 1, then the input data is invalid. If it is 0, the input data is valid. See the example in the
following figure.

13

For Port 1 – 4 (IO-Link Process Data) Input Invalid Flag in the above example figure, the addresses starting from %IW12
correspond to Port 1~Port 4 respectively as shown in the following table.
Port Address
Port 1 %IW12.bit0
Port 2 %IW12.bit1
Port 3 %IW12.bit2
Port 4 %IW12.bit3

13.3.2.12 IO-Link Device Scan Function

Right-click on Delta_Localbus_Master in DIADesigner-AX and select Scan for Devices to enable several AS04SIL-A
modules to auto-identify all IO-Link devices at communication ports.

You can also select any AS04SIL-A module and then click Scan for Device to scan all the IO-Link devices connected to
its communication ports.

13-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

While SIL is auto-identifying devices, all IO-Link devices connected to the IO-Link master need be restarted and
therefore the devices will probably stop running for a short time.

_13
13.3.3 Application Functions
13.3.3.1 Load Rejection for Upper Device Stop or Communication Error
When the upper device enters STOP state or the communication with the upper device fails in IO-Link or SIO mode, the
output function of AS04SIL-A is disabled and all process data outputs are 0. This function is used to prevent the incorrect
output from the upper device as a communications error occurs.

13.3.3.2 The Switch among Process Data Parameter Sets

IODD file allows IO-Link devices support several work modes, each of which corresponds to different Process Data
parameter sets. Therefore SIL supports the switch among Process Data parameter sets if the IODD file of the configured
device supports more than two work modes. However, the Process Data parameter set cannot be changed if the IODD file
of the configured device supports only one work mode.

 Settings in ISPSoft

For example, the IO-Link device configured for Port 1 supports four work modes in the following figure. The default work
mode is Segment mode (0).

When Level mode (1) is switched to, a Confirm dialog box will appear to alert that the Process Data content will be
changed.

13-22
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13
Clicking Yes button, the Process Data content will be refreshed in the software.

Click menu Communication > Download. The switch is completed once the download is done.

 Settings in DIADesigner-AX

For example, select Specialist for User role in the following figure.

The IO-Link device configured here supports four work modes in the following figure. The default work mode is Segment
mode (Default).

13-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

When Level mode is switched to, the content of the IO-Link mapping parameter set will be changed.
_13

Click IO-Link I/O Mapping, and then you can view the parameters in this operating mode on the page.

Click Write this Page button, and the switch is completed once the download is done.

Note: If the module is changed, the settings for parameters will fail to be retained and they need be set again.

13-24
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13.3.3.3 Backup and Restoration of Parameter Setup in IO-Link Devices

The V1.1 IO-Link devices support the Backup and Restore functions which are not necessary functions and are
determined by their IODD files.

IO-Link device parameter settings are backed up to the IO-Link master or restored to IO-Link devices. When IO-Link
devices are replaced, the communication can be resumed according to original settings instead of setting parameters
once again. See the setting page below.
 Settings in ISPSoft

13

Option Description
Disable The backup function is disabled and the backed up process data is cleared.
The backup file is empty if no data exists. It is allowed to back up the parameters read from
Backup/Restore
the connected device to the master and write the parameters to the connected device.
Restore To write parameters to the connected device is allowed.

 Settings in DIADesigner-AX

Option Description
The backup function is disabled and the parameter set already backed up for the port is
Disable
cleared.
The backup file is empty if no data exists. It is allowed to back up the parameters read from
Backup/Restore
the connected device to the master and write the parameters to the connected device.
Restore To write parameters to the connected device is allowed.

13-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.3.3.4 Digital Input Filter

You can use any DI or any CQ of the operation mode SIO (DI) as the standard input and use the input filter function to
filter out noises.
 Settings in ISPSoft
The setting page is as shown below.

The filter timer setting for each port can be between 0 ~ 65 ms. 0 indicates that the filter function is disabled.

 Settings in DIADesigner-AX
_13 The setting page is as shown below.

See the relation between filter frequency and filter timer:濾波頻率與時間關係如下：

Filter frequency (Hz):

Filter frequency=1 / (2 * t), t: filter timer setting (unit: ms)
The noises with the input frequency lower than the filter frequency range will be filtered out.

13.3.3.5 Application-specific API for Communications of IO-Link Devices

Once you complete the configurations for IO-Link devices via HWCONFIG. You can use ISPSoft as well as specific API
to read/write data from IO-Link devices to AS04SIL-A. Refer to the device manual or the IODD file for the index number,
data type, data size of the parameters. And refer to AS Series Programming Manual for the detailed operation of API 14
instructions.
Note: currently, this function is not supported by AX-3.

13-26
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13.4 Application Examples

13.4.1 Using AS Series CPU as Upper Device
The AS04SIL-A module can be connected on the right side of AS series CPU or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode). If AS04SIL-A
is placed on the right of AS00SCM-A (RTU mode), the AS-FCOPM communication card need be added to AS00SCM-A.
AS04SIL-A supports three remote communication modes and communicates with the upper device via CAN port. When
the upper device is an AS series CPU, the application situation is as illustrated in the following figure.

I O-Link
S ensor/A ctuat or 13
Input Hub
I OD D file
Connect to US B port
or E thernet port 16x DI / DO
of A S series CP U ….. …..
Soft ware:
HW CO NFI G 4 .0
CA N open Builder

I O-Link
S ensor/Actuat or
Hub

CA N
I O-Link
B inary
E thernet / U S B

P in2 DI funct ion

An AS04SIL-A module can connect with 4 IO-Link devices at most. If the hybrid use of the IO-Link devices and multiple
traditional sensors (binary sensors) is needed, there are two connection methods based on the number of traditional
sensors on site.

1. If there is only a small number of traditional sensors to be connected, each of AS04SIL-A module’s ports can connect
with one traditional sensor by using the DI function of Pin2 for each port.

2. If there are many traditional sensors to be connected, use the IO-Link hub from other brand to extend the connectable
digital I/O devices.

13-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

There are three communication modes for AS00SCM-A plus AS-FCOPM.

Work mode Description

The AS04SIL-A module is a NIO module. The number of configurable modules

AS Special Remote Mode
is limited to AS series CPU including remote modules. 4 NIO modules can be
configured at most.
Delta Special Driver & AS Remote All SIL modules and IO-Link devices can be configured in HWCONFIG 4.0.
Mode and can be monitored online by the software.

Here AS CPU is a CANopen master and AS00SCM-A is a CANopen slave.

Up to 4 SIL modules can be configured on the right side of the slave
AS00SCM-A (RTU). As many as 64 slaves can be connected to the AS CPU.
CANopen Builder does not support the configuration of extension modules on
the right side of AS00SCM-A and connected IO-Link devices.
CANopen DS301 Mode
First make the connection in AS special remote mode, complete the
configuration of all extension modules and IO-Link devices in HWCONFIG 4.0
_13 and then switch the mode back to CANopen DS301 mode.
Open CANopen Builder and configure PDO mapping according to the EDS file
of AS00SCM-A with V2.06 or later. For details on operation, see section 13.4.5.

13.4.2 Using AH Series CPU or Non-Delta Master PLC as Upper Device

As CANopen master, AH series CPU need be used together with AH10COPM-5A module to communicate with the
CANopen slave AS00SCM-A. See the application situation as illustrated in the following figure.

I mport
I OD D file
C on nect t o U SB p ort
o r Ethe rn et p o rt
o f AS Series C PU IO-Link
Sens or /Act uat or
Software:
: Hub
H WCON FIG4 . 0
CA Nopen Builder 16x D I/ DO
… .. …..

I O-Link
Sens or /Act uat or
Hub

C AN
IO-Lin k
Bina ry
Etherne t / U SB
Pin2 DI funct ion

According to the description on CANopen DS301 Mode in section 13.4.1, connect the AS00SCM-A module to AS CPU in

13-28
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

AS special remote mode, configure all extension modules and IO-Link devices in HWCONFIG 4.0 and then switch the
mode back to the CANopen DS301 mode.
If the upper device is an AH series CPU, the CANopen Builder software can be opened. Configure the PDO mapping list
according to the EDS file of the AS00SCM-A module. See the details in section 13.4.5.
If the upper device is a master PLC from other brand, use the software from the brand to configure the CANopen slaves
and PDO mapping.

13.4.3 Application of AS Special Remote Mode

See the following table of devices used in the application example:
Model name Device type
AS332T-A PLC
AS00SCM-A RTU
AS04SIL-A IO-Link Master 13
AI-B100 3rd IO-Link Device
E3S-DCP21-IL3 3rd IO-Link Device
MAXREFDES27# 3rd IO-Link Device
MAXREFDES36# 3rd IO-Link Device

First of all, open the HWCONFIG 4.0 software and import the IODD files of IO-Link devices which can be downloaded from
vendors’ official websites. Follow the steps here to import the IODD files through the Device Description File Manager
tool.

13-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_13

Put all IODD files in the same folder so as to import multiple IODD files at a time.

13-30
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13

Check the following setups before the AS00SCM-A module is powered on.

1. The AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS00SCM-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is enabled.)

2. Use Delta standard cables to connect to AS CPU and the mode switch is turned to RTU mode.

3. Four switches are set to ID1: 0/ FORMAT1: 0/ ID2: 1/ FORMAT2: 7 and the status is set to AS Remote Communication,
node ID 1 and baud rate 1Mbps.

4. AS04SIL-A is connected on the right side of AS00SCM (RTU). Ensure that IO-Link devices are connected to the four
ports according to the wiring in section 13.2.3.

Switch the power on after the AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS332T-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is enabled.)

13-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Open the HWCONFIG 4.0 software, set up function card 2 for AS CPU and then download the settings as follows.

_13

13-32
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13

Ensure that the CANopen cables are connected properly and the AS00SCM-A module is already powered on. Check if the
Card2 LED indicator of AS00SCM-A keeps blinking after the configuration of AS332T-A is downloaded so as to make sure
the communication works normally.

Click Scan button.

13-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_13

Once any AS04SIL-A module is detected through the software scan, the software will ask whether to scan the connected
IO-Link device.

13-34
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

Perform the scan of IO-Link devices. If some configured devices are in communication during the scan, they will fail to be
used temporarily. Restart the devices after the scan is over and restore the original work mode.

13

Click the IO-Link module and then select the IO-Link page where each device model and related information are can be
seen and the parameters to be set up are all default values.

If no matched IODD file can be found out for the scanned device, Unknown Device will be shown in the device name field.
Users need download the IODD file of the device from the coporate website of the device product according to the scanned
device details such as Vendor Name, Vendor ID, Device ID and Device Name and then import the file into the HWCONFIG
software.

13-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_13

Under the Process Data tab, you can find the supported register addresses of each port. Since ISPSoft V3.11 supports
using tags in PLC programming, it is very useful to set up the tags and its corresponding register addresses.
Follow the steps 1~3 below to set up the tabs.
Step 1: Click Set All Tag.
Step 2: A confirmation shows up asking you if you want to overwrite the set tags and comments. Click Yes to proceed.

13-36
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

Step 3: All the editable tags show up. Double-click the tags in blue to edit if you need to use a different name other than
the default ones.

Note: One register address coresponds to one tag, and it shows on the first group of address.

13

13-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_13

13-38
Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13

13-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Click the On-line Mode button on the IO-Link page and then see the connection status of all devices and the real time
monitored values of input and output process data.

_13

The Status of Port 1~ Port 4 above can also be known through the parsing in the Normal Exchange Area of the
AS04SIL-A module below.

13-40
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

With a click on any device, only the input and output process data of the clicked single device will be displayed.

13
13.4.4 Application of Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode
The device list in the following example is the same as that in section12.4.3.
Model name Device type
AS332T-A PLC
AS00SCM-A RTU
AS04SIL-A IO-Link Master
AI-B100 3rd IO-Link Device
E3S-DCP21-IL3 3rd IO-Link Device
MAXREFDES27# 3rd IO-Link Device
MAXREFDES36# 3rd IO-Link Device

Complete the following setups before the AS00SCM-A module is powered on.

1. The AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS00SCM-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is enabled.)

2. Use Delta standard cable to connect to AS CPU and the mode switch is turned to RTU mode.

3. Four switches are set to ID1: 0 / FORMAT1: 8 / ID2: 9 / FORMAT2: ７and the status is set to Delta Special Driver &
AS Remote Communication, node ID 9 and baud rate 1Mbps.

4. AS04SIL-A is connected on the right side of AS00SCM (RTU). Ensure that IO-Link devices are connected to the four
ports according to the wiring in section 13.2.3.

Switch the power on after the AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS332T-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is
enabled.) Open the HWCONFIG 4.0 software, set up function card 2 for AS CPU and then download the settings as
follows.

13-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_13

The following steps are the same as the operation in section 13.4.3.

13-42
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

13.4.5 Application of CANopen DS301 Mode

In this example, the AS00SCM-A RTU module works with EDS V2.06. Please download the EDS from Delta official
website and import the CANopen Builder software.

The device list in the following example is the same as that in section 12.4.3.

Model name Device type

AS332T-A PLC

AS00SCM-A RTU

AS04SIL-A IO-Link Master

AI-B100 3rd IO-Link Device

E3S-DCP21-IL3 3rd IO-Link Device 13

MAXREFDES27# 3rd IO-Link Device

MAXREFDES36# 3rd IO-Link Device

The CANopen Builder does not support the configuration of extension modules on the right of the AS00SCM-A module
and connected IO-Link devices.

First make the connection in AS Special Remote mode, configure all extension modules and IO-Link devices in the
HWCONFIG 4.0 software (see the example in section 13.4.3) and then switch back to the CANopen DS301 mode.

Please complete the following setups before the AS00SCM-A module is powered on.

1. The AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS00SCM-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is enabled.)

2. Use Delta standard cables to connect to AS CPU and the mode switch is turned to RTU mode.

3. Four switches are set to ID1: 0 / FORMAT1: 4 / ID2: 2 / FORMAT2:７and the status is set to CANopen DS301, node
ID 2 and baud rate 1Mbps.

4. AS04SIL-A is connected on the right side of AS00SCM (RTU). Ensure that IO-Link devices are connected to the four
ports according to the wiring in section 13.2.3.

Switch the power on after the AS-FCOPM card is inserted to AS332T-A via Card 2. (The 120Ω terminal resistor is
enabled.) Open the HWCONFIG 4.0 software, set up function card 2 for AS CPU and then download the settings as
follows.

13-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_13

Right-click the AS332T-A symbol and open the CANopen Builder software as below.

13-44
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

Click the Online button.

Click the Scan button. Then the AS00SCM-A RTU module can be detected.

13

Double-click the detected AS00SCM-A RTU module and ensure that it is with EDS file V2.06 or later. If the EDS file is not
matched, check if the V2.06 EDS file has been imported to the left-side device list and the firmware of AS00SCM-A is
V2.06 or later.

13-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_13

Each object in the EDS file is 1 word (2 bytes) in size and thus one PDO corresponds to one mapped register. Assign all
input parameters to available TxPDOs according to the parameters in the Normal Exchange Area of AS04SIL-A in
section 13.4.3. The mapped PDO object of the input process data is Tx_ModuleX_EDIY (Exchanging Data Input which is
referred to as EDI).

13-46
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

In this example, the AS04SIL-A module is the first one on the right of the RTU module. Therefore the value of X is 1 and
the PDO mapped object for error codes is Tx_Module1_error_code. The corresponding objects starts from
Tx_Module1_EDI0 as below.

13

Based on all communication port address information in the HWCONFIG 4.0 software in section 13.4.3, assign all input
process data to available TxPDOs, which corresponds to the mapped object Tx_NIOX_PD_InputZ and assign all output
process data to available RxPDOs, which corresponds to the mapped object Rx_NIOX_PD_OutputY.

In this example, the AS04SIL-A module is the first one on the right of the RTU module. Therefore the value of X is 1, the
input objects starting from Tx_NIO1_PD_Input0 correspond to IO-Link Port1~ Port4 in Process Data- Input respectively
and the output objects starting from Rx_NIO1_PD_Output0 correspond to IO-Link Port1~ Port4 in Process Data- Output
respectively.

Configure all parameters which need to be updated continuously (which are called objects in CANopen Builder) to one
TxPDO or RxPDO according to the steps described above. Add AS00SCM-A RTU to the slave list (Node List) and then the
real addresses of mapped registers in AS CPU show up immediately as below.

13-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_13

According to the Normal Exchange Area page in HWCONFIG in section 13.4.3, the PDO mapped objects correspond to
the mapped registers assigned by CANopen Builder as follows.

13-48
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

Mapped register in
Parameter Configured PDO PDO mapped object
AS CPU
Error code Tx_Module_error_code D24032
Tx_Module1_EDI0 D24033
Port 1-2 Device TxPDO1
Tx_Module1_EDI1 D24034
Status
Tx_Module1_EDI2 D24035
Tx_Module1_EDI3 D24036
Port 3-4 Device
Tx_Module1_EDI4 D24037
Status
Tx_Module1_EDI5 D24038
TxPDO2
Port1-4 (IO-Link
Process Data) Tx_Module1_EDI6 D24039
Input Invalid Flag
Tx_NIO1_PD_Input0 D24040
Port 1 Process
Tx_NIO1_PD_Input1 D24041
Data- Input TxPDO3
Tx_NIO1_PD_Input2 D24042
Port 2 Process Tx_NIO1_PD_Input3 D24043 13
Data- Input Tx_NIO1_PD_Input4 D24044
Tx_NIO1_PD_Input5 D24045
TxPDO4
Tx_NIO1_PD_Input6 D24046
Tx_NIO1_PD_Input7 D24047
Port 3 Process Tx_NIO1_PD_Input8 D24048
Data- Input Tx_NIO1_PD_Input9 D24049
TxPDO5
Port 4 Process Tx_NIO1_PD_Input10 D24050
Data- Input Tx_NIO1_PD_Input11 D24051
Port 1 Process Rx_NIO1_PD_Output0 D25032
Data- Output Rx_NIO1_PD_Output1 D25033
Port 2 Process No parameter need
No parameter need be output
Data- Output be output
RxPDO1
Port 3 Process
Rx_NIO1_PD_Output2 D25034
Data- Output
Port 4 Process
Rx_NIO1_PD_Output3 D25035
Data- Output

13.4.6 Using AX-3 Series CPU as Upper Device

The AS04SIL-A module can be connected on the right side of AX-3 series CPU. When the upper device is an AX-3 series
CPU, the application situation is as illustrated in the following figure.

IO -Link
Sensor / Actuator
Hub
Import
IODD file
Connect to USB port
or Ethernet port
of AX-3 series CPU

13-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Operations in the example

The IO-Link RTD temperature sensors are used in this example.
1. Right-click on Delta_LocalBus_Master, select Scan for Devices… on the dropdown menu. Click Copy All
Devices to Project once the device scan is done.

_13

2. Double-click on AS04SIL_A, and then select AS04SIL-A Parameters to start setting the parameters you need.

Note: See section 13.3.2 for details on these parameters.

13-50
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

3. Double-click on IO_Link_RTD_Temp_Sensor, and then select IO-Link Parameter tab.

13
4. On the IO-Link Parameter page, set User role to Specialist, select Parameter menu option and then click Read
this Page to upload the parameters on this page from the IO-Link device connected.

5. After setting up the temperature module parameters, click Write this Page button to download parameter settings to
the temperature module and then download the project. Afterwards, you can use the temperature module.

13-51
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Import the IODD file

_13 
1. Click Tools menu > Device Repository…

2. In the Device Repository dialog, click Install.

13-52
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

3. Select the IODD file you need and then click Open.

13
4. Click Close button once importing the file is complete.

13-53
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.5 IO-Link Event Code Table

Here is the table of IO-Link event codes which are recorded in Port1-4 Device Status of the Normal Exchange Area
page. If the sources of events are IO-Link devices, please also refer to the IO-Link device operation manual.

IO-Link Type Source

Event Notifica- Event Solution IO-Link IO-Link
Codes Warning Error
tion Master Device
Device temperature
16#4000 V Lower load V
over-load
Device temperature
16#4210 V Clear source of heat V
over-run
16#5101 V Device fuse blown Change fuse V
Power supply voltage
16#5110 V Check tolerance V
over-run
_13 Power supply voltage
16#5111 V Check tolerance V
under-run
Check device
16#6320 V Parameter error V
specifications
Check device
16#6321 V Parameter missing V
specifications
16#7710 V Device short circuit Check installation V
Process variable range
16#8C10 V Check process data V
over-run
Measurement range
16#8C20 V Check application V
over-run
Process variable range
16#8C30 V Check process data V
under-run
No connected IO-Link
16#8CA0 V Check installation V
device
The version of the IO-
Link protocol is different Use matching IODD file
16#8CA1 V V
from the one and configured again.
configured.
Connected device is
different from the one Check configurations and
16#8CA2 V V
configured in the installation
software
16#8CA3 Reserved V
16#8CA4
IO-Link device process
16#8CAD V Check installation V
cable short circuit
16#8CAE
Master temperature
16#8CA5 V Clear source of heat V
exceeds 135°C
Master temperature Clear source of heat and
16#8CA6 V V
exceeds 160°C lower load
Device power supply Check the external power
16#8CA7 V voltage under-run L+ supply V
(<18V)

13-54
 Ch a pt er 1 3 IO - Li nk C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 04 S IL

IO-Link Type Source

Event Notifica- Event Solution IO-Link IO-Link
Codes Warning Error
tion Master Device
Device power supply Check the external power
16#8CA8 V voltage under-run L+ supply V
(<9V)
Check device
16#8CA9 V Illegal device ID V
specifications
HWCONFIG configured Check device
process data exceeding specifications
16#8CAA V V
the IO-Link process
data range
IO-Link process data
Scan the device and
exceeding HWCONFIG
16#8CAB V download the configuration V
configured process
again 13
data range
16#8CAC V Data storage error Contact the factory V
16#FF21 V New connected device V
16#FF22 V Device disconnected Check installation V
Set the Data Storage
access locked and set it to
Data storage
16#FF23 V backup / restore and then V
identification mismatch
backing up data according
to actual placement.
Data storage not Check device
16#FF24 V V
sufficient specifications
Data storage parameter Check device
16#FF25 V V
access denied specifications

13-55
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

13.6 Module Status Codes

The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS04SIL module as a communication module is installed on
the right side of the CPU module or RTU module.
Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1605 Hardware failure Install a new AS04SIL or contact the factory.
24VDC power supply is not sufficient Check whether the 24 V power supply to the module is
16#1606 and then recovered from low-voltage normal.
for less than 10 ms.

Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1800 Error occurs in IO-Link Master See section 13.5 for more information.
16#1801 Error occurs in IO-Link device See section 13.5 for more information.
_13
16#1802 No external power supply Check the external power supply
Error in the download of IO-Link
16#1803 Redownload the configuration by the software
device mapping tables
Failure to switch the process data Check if the connected device is the same as that configured in
16#1804
parameter set the software.
Error occurs in the communication
16#1805
port 1 of IO-Link connection
Error occurs in the communication 1. Cut the external power off for 3 seconds and power-on
16#1806
port 2 of IO-Link connection again
Error occurs in the communication 2. Download the configurations again
16#1807
port 3 of IO-Link connection
Error occurs in the communication
16#1808
port 4 of IO-Link connection
1. Cut the external power off for 3 seconds and power-on
Error occurs in scan device and
16#1809 again
force to stop scanning
2. Scan all devices again

13-56
 14
10
High-Speed Counter Module
AS02HC
Table of Contents

Overview .................................................................................................. 14-2

Characteristics ......................................................................................... 14-2

Specifications .......................................................................................... 14-3

Profile .................................................................................................... 14-6
Terminals ................................................................................................ 14-7
Wiring .................................................................................................... 14-8
LED Indicators ........................................................................................ 14-11

Parameter Settings ................................................................................. 14-12

Pulse Input Counting ............................................................................... 14-13
SSI Input Counting ................................................................................. 14-16
Z-Phase Function Setting ......................................................................... 14-22
List of Dedicated API Instructions.............................................................. 14-23
The impact of AS CPU Status on AS02HC-A ................................................ 14-24

Parameter Settings ................................................................................. 14-25

Pulse Input Counting ............................................................................... 14-26
SSI Input Counting ................................................................................. 14-29
Z-Phase Function Setting ......................................................................... 14-35
List of Dedicated API Instructions.............................................................. 14-35

Initial Setting ......................................................................................... 14-37

Checking Module Version ......................................................................... 14-40
Online Mode ........................................................................................... 14-41
Import and Export a Parameter File........................................................... 14-42
Parameters ............................................................................................ 14-43
Normal Exchange Area ............................................................................ 14-44

Initial Setting ......................................................................................... 14-45

Checking Module Version ......................................................................... 14-48
Online Mode ........................................................................................... 14-48
Parameters ............................................................................................ 14-49
Normal Exchange Area ............................................................................ 14-51

Error Codes ............................................................................................ 14-52

Troubleshooting Procedure ....................................................................... 14-53

14-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Overview
The AS02HC-A module is a high-speed counter module with two built-in channels. It performs counting through receiving
the pulse signal input or SSI encoder signal input. It is only connected to the right side of AS series and AX series CPU
modules. Configuring it to the right side of the remote modules is not allowed. This chapter mainly introduces the
specifications, functions and operation of the module. For software operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner or DIADesigner-AX is
what you need. If you are using AS Series PLC CPU, refer to ISPSoft User Manual or DIADesigner Manual for more
information. The new software DIADesigner-AX only supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to
AX-3 User Manual for more information on software operation.

Characteristics
1. Pulse signal / SSI signal input interface selection
Pulse input: Supports single-phase pulse input, two-phase pulse input (multiplication x2/4) and CW / CCW pulse input,
5V differential signal and 5-24VDC single-ended signal. The counting speed can reach up to 200 kHz (for
single-phase input).
SSI input: The data transmission frequency can reach up to 1.25 MHz; the received data length can be up to 32 bits;
supports multi-turn and single-turn SSI encoders as well as the conversion of gray and binary codes.
2. 32-bit counter
14 The two channels of AS02HC-A are both 32-bit counters with the counting range of -2147483648 to 2147483647.
3. Counter type setting
Ring counter: cyclical counting between -2147483648 and 2147483647.
Linear counter: The upper and lower limit values need be set. When the counter value is out of the allowed range,
the module can detect that the upper or lower limit is exceeded.
4. High-speed comparison
Preset a comparison value and compare it with the present value of the counter. When they are equal, the external
output point actions can be controlled, the interrupt program can be executed or the counter value can be cleared at
the same time.
5. Phase-Ｚ function selection
Each of the two channels is configured with a phase Z which can be used as the external input point for Reset,
Capture or Gate control.
6. External output points
Four external output points. They can be controlled individually or be used for the output together with high-speed
comparison function.
7. Counter value capture
The counting value is captured through a phase Z input trigger or channel comparison-matched trigger.
8. Pulse rate and rotation rate (RPM) measurement
The function measures the input pulse rate and position change rate of the SSI encoder. And the rotation speed
(RPM) can be calculated automatically.
9. Use the tool software for easy settings
The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in HWCONFIG of
ISPSoft or Hardware Configuration of DIADesigner without spending time writing programs to set registers to
manage functions.
10. Miscellaneous API instructions
The functions such as counter control, counter value capture, high-speed comparison output and measurement can
be achieved via dedicated API instructions.

14-2
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Specifications and Functions

Specifications
Functional specification

Item Description

Number of channels 2

Phase A/B differential pulse input (multiplication x2/4), CW/CCW pulse

Input type inputs and pulse + direction inputs
Max. counting
200 kHz
Pulse Input frequency
Max. transmission
200 kHz → 30 m
distance
Counter type Ring counter, linear counter
Max. data length 32-bit (The single-turn, multi-turn and status data length can be set.)
Coding method binary code, gray code
Transmission
250 kHz, 500 kHz, 625 kHz, 1 MHz, 1.25 MHz
frequency

SSI Input
250 kHz → 150 m 14
500 kHz → 50 m
Max. transmission
625 kHz → 40 m
distance
1 MHz → 20 m
1.25 MHz → 10 m

Parity check None, odd parity, even parity

Counter type Absolute counter and ring counter

Counting range -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 (32-bit counter)

Counter control Reset, preset, gate, capture offset correction for absolute position
Counter
Count direction, counting overflow/underflow, linear counting beyond the
lower and upper limit values, SSI feedback, SSI position exceeding the
State check
protection limit, SSI parity checking, SSI communication status, a zero
point is set beyond SSI encoder resolution
Input point
2 (one point per channel)
number
Function Counter reset, gate control, counting value capture
External input
point (phase Z) Digital filtering Disabled, 100 us, 200 us …20 ms
Min. software
interrupt response 20 us (hardware response time included)
time
Output point
External output 4
number
point
Output type NPN transistor (sinking)
General comparison output instruction, table comparison output
Comparison Instruction instruction
function Interrupt Using comparison to achieve the interrupt function

Measured item Pulse rate and rotation rate (RPM)

Measurement
function Average times 1 ~ 10 times

14-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Electrical specifications for the inputs

Model
Pulse input External input
Item
Number of inputs 4 (A+/B+/A-/B-) 2 (Z+/Z-)
Connector type D-sub15
Input voltage /
5~24 VDC, 6~15 mA
current

Action OFF→ON 3V
level ON→OFF 1V
Maximum input
200 kHz 20 kHz
frequency
Input impedance 4.7 kΩ
Input signal Single-ended signal: 5 ~ 24 VDC (sinking or sourcing); differential signal: 5 V
Isolation voltage 500 VAC
Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.
Weight 138 g

Electrical specifications for the SSI input and output

Model
SSI input SSI output
14 Item
Number of inputs /
2 (DATA+/DATA-) 2 (CLK+/CLK-)
outputs
Connector type D-sub15
Voltage / Current 5 VDC, 1 mA 5 VDC, ±60 mA (Max)

Action OFF→ON VID*1 ≧ 0.2 V -

level ON→OFF VID ≦ -0.2 V -
Maximum
1.25 MHz
frequency
Impedance 12 kΩ (terminal resistor 120 Ω) -
Signal RS-422
Isolation voltage 500 VAC
Input / output
When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.
display
*1：VID is the voltage difference between DATA+ and DATA-.

14-4
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Electrical specifications for the external outputs

Model
AS02HC-A
Item
Number of outputs 4
Connector type D-sub15
Output type NPN transistor (sinking)
Voltage / Current 5~30 VDC, 0.1 A
Resistance 0.1 A
Maximum -
load Inductance
Bulb -

Resistance 10 kHz
Maximum
output Inductance -
frequency
Bulb -
Maximum
Response OFF→ON 25 us
time

Isolation voltage 500 VAC

14
Electrical specifications for the +5 V encoder power supply

Model AS02HC-A
Item
Number of outputs 2 (+5VO/GND)
Connector type D-sub15
Voltage / Current 5 VDC (±5%), 100 mA (Max)

14-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Profile
7 5

1
5

98.3
88
2
6

4 75
35

Number Name Description

14 1 Model name Model name of the module

Indicates the status of the power supply

POWER LED indicator ON: The power is on.
OFF: No power
Error status of the module
ON: A major error occurs in the module.
Error LED indicator
OFF: The module is normal.
Blinking: A minor error occurs in the module.
Counting status of the module (Green)
2 OFF: The counter is disabled.
When the pulse input takes place:
Counter LED indicator for
Ch1 Act. & Ch2 Act. ON: The counter is enabled but the result of counting is not changed.
Blinking: The result of counting is updating.
When the SSI input takes place:
Blinking: The counter is enabled and the position value is updating.
ON: Receives an input / output signal
Input / output LED
indicator OFF: Receives no input / output signal
Refer to section 14.2.5 for details.
Input: Connected for pulse input and encoder
3 D-sub15 Output: Connected to loads to be driven
Power: Providing external encoder +5 VDC
4 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

5 Extension module port Connects extension modules

6 Ground clip For Grounding

7 Label Nameplate

14-6
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Terminals

Pin No. CH1 CH2

02HC
CH1 8 A1+ A2+

3 A1- A2-

PWR
7 B1+ B2+
ERR

CH1 Act.
CH1 A 2 B1- B2-
CH1 B
CH2
CH1 Z
Y0.0
Y0.1 6 Z1+ Z2+
CH2 Act.
CH2 A
CH2 B
CH2 Z
1 Z1- Z2-
Y0.2
Y0.3

10 CLK1+ CLK2+

5 CLK1- CLK2-

9 DATA1+ DATA2+
14
D-sub15 pin
4 DATA1- DATA2-

14 +5VO1 +5VO2
15

5
10

15 GND1 GND2

12 Y0.0 Y0.2
11

1
6

11 Y0.1 Y0.3

13 COM0 COM1

14-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Wiring
Pulse Input
• The NPN output encoder wiring
A S02HC-A

NPN outp ut encoder

I solation
circuit
A+
Phase A O UT
A-
B+
Phase B O UT
B-
Z+
Phase Z O UT
Z-

COM

14
0V +24V

Ext ernal power supply:

5V , 12V , 24V D C

• The PNP output encoder wiring

AS 02HC-A

P NP output enco der

I solation
Phas e A OUT circuit A+

A-
Phas e B
OUT B+

Phas e Z B-
OUT
Z+

Z-
COM

+24V 0V

Ext ernal power supply:

5V, 12V, 24VDC

14-8
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

• The 5V differential output encoder wiring

AS02 HC-A

The e ncoder with 5 V

diffe rent ia l outputs
I solation
circuit
A+
A
Phase A
A A-
B+
B
Phase B
B B-
Z Z+
Phase Z
Z Z-

SSI Input and Output 14

AS 02HC-A

S SI encoder
Isolation
circu it +5V
+V

0V GND

CL K+ CLK+

CL K- CL K-
DATA+ DATA +

DATA- DATA-

Note:

If the power supply to the SSI encoder is non-5 VDC power supply, please supply corresponding external power based
on SSI encoder specifications of different vendors.

14-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

External Output
AS02 HC-A

5~30V DC, 0.1 A

Y0. 0
*1
CO M0
*2
5~30 VDC, 0. 1A
Y0. 2
*1
CO M1
*2

*1：Loads or input points

14
*2：Use one single power supply for each COM port.

14-10
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

LED Indicators

Indicator Color Name Description

ON: The power supply is normal.

PWR Blue Power indicator
OFF: No power supply
ON: A major error occurs in the module.
ERR Red Error indicator OFF: The module is operating normally.
Blinking: A minor error occurs in the module (Blinks every 0.5 seconds.)

OFF: The counter is disabled.

Pulse Input -
ON: The counter is enabled but there is no change in the counter value.
Ch1 counter state
CH1 Act. Green Blinking: The counter value is changing. (Blinks every 0.5 seconds.)
indicator
SSI Input -
Blinking: The counter is enabled and the position value is being updated. (Blinks
every 0.5 seconds.)

Ch1 phase-A input ON: The phase-A input for channel 1 is active.
CH1 A Red
indicator OFF: The phase-A input for channel 1 is not active.

Ch1 phase-B input ON: The phase-B input for channel 1 is active. 14
CH1 B Red
indicator OFF: The phase-B input for channel 1 is not active.

Ch1 phase-Z or DI ON: The phase-Z input for channel 1 is active.

CH1 Z Red
input indicator OFF: The phase-Z input for channel 1 is not active.

Y0.0 output status ON: The Y0.0 output is active.

Y0.0 Red
indicator OFF: The Y0.0 output is not active.

Y0.1 output status ON: The Y0.1 output is active

Y0.1 Red
indicator OFF: The Y0.1 output is not active.

OFF: The counter is disabled.

Pulse Input -
ON: The counter is enabled but there is no change in the counter value.
Ch2 counter state
CH2 Act. Green Blinking: The counter value is changing. (Blinks every 0.5 seconds.)
indicator
SSI Input -
Blinking: The counter is enabled and the position value is being updated. (Blinks
every 0.5 seconds.)
Ch2 phase-A input ON: The phase-A input for channel 2 is active.
CH2 A Red
indicator OFF: The phase-A input for channel 2 is not active.
Ch2 phase-B input ON: The phase-B input for channel 2 is active.
CH2 B Red
indicator OFF: The phase-B input for channel 2 is not active.
Ch2 phase-Z or DI ON: The phase-Z input for channel 2 is active.
CH2 Z Red
input indicator OFF: The phase-Z input for channel 2 is not active.
Y0.2 output status ON: The Y0.2 output is active
Y0.2 Red
indicator OFF: The Y0.2 output is not active.
Y0.3 output status ON: The Y0.3 output is active
Y0.3 Red
indicator OFF: The Y0.3 output is not active.

1 4 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Operation in ISPSoft
Parameter Settings
Before using AS02HC-A to count, you need to set the following shown settings in ISPSoft-HWCONFIG. Set the parameters
and download the settings to AS02HC-A. Refer to section 14.5 for detailed ISPSoft-HWCONFIG operations.

Input
Tab Setting Value Setting Option
Interface

• A／B Phase (2x) (default)

• A／B Phase (4x)
Pulse Type
• CW / CWW
• Pulse + Direction

Pulse Input • Absolute Position (default)

Counter Type
• Ring Counter

0～2147483647 (H0 ～H7FFFFFFF )

Maximum
(default: H7FFFFFFF )
-2147483648～0 (H80000000 ～H0 )
Minimum
(default: H80000000 )
14
• Binary Code (default)
Encoder Coding Method
• Gray Code

• 250 KHz
• 500 KHz
Clock Rate • 625 KHz
• 1 MHz (default)
• 1.25 MHz
CH 1 Setting Data Length 7～32 (default: 5)
Multi-Turn Length 0～32 (default: 12)
Multi-Turn MSB Location b0～b31 (default: b24)
Single-Turn Length 1～32 (default: 13)
Single-Turn MSB Location b0～b31 (default: b12)
SSI Input Status Length 0～15 (default: 0)
Status MSB Location b0～b31 (default: b0)

• None (default)
Parity Check • Even Parity Check
• Odd Parity Check

b0～b31 (default: b0)

Parity Bit Location
Parity Check Start b0～b31 (default: b0)
Parity Check Length 0～31 (default: 0)
• Absolute Position (default)
Counter Type
• Ring Counter
Monoflop Time 4～2500; unit: 16us (default: 4)
Maximum Variation Limit 0～2147483647 (default: 0, disabled)
CH 2 Setting Same as the settings in CH1 Setting

14-12
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Input
Tab Setting Value Setting Option
Interface
• Reset Counter (default)
• Reset Counter + clear Yno
(Reset the current counter value and the
Z-Phase CH1 Z-Phase Function assigned Y output points from DHCCMP and
Function DHCCMPT instructions.)
Setting • Capture
• Gate Control
CH2 Z-Phase Function Same as CH1 Z-Phase Function
Filter Time 0～200; unit: 100us; default: 0
CH1 Ring Counter Overflow /
Default: disabled
Underflow Detect
CH1 SSI Zero Crossing Detect Default: disabled
Alarm Setting
CH2 Ring Counter Overflow /
Default: disabled
Underflow Detect
CH2 SSI Zero Crossing Detect Default: disabled

Pulse Input Counting

To perform the pulse-input counting, first set the configuration of channels, which includes pulse type and counter type
selection in HWCONFIG. If the counter type is set to the linear counter, the maximum counting value and minimum counting 14
value need be set. After the configuration setting is completed, use the API instruction DHCCNT which is special for
AS02HC-A in a program to obtain the counting value, achieve the counter control as well as get the real time counter state.

1. Pulse Type

Specify the pulse input type which can be A/B phase (2x), A/B phase (4x), CW/CCW or pulse + direction.
Parameter Setting Unit Default
A/B phase (2x),
A/B phase (4x),
Pulse Type - A/B phase (2x)
CW/CCW,
Pulse + direction

Pulse Type Timing to Count

ϕA

ϕB

A/B phase (2x)

Count Up Count Down

Counting
Value

14-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Pulse Type Timing to Count

ϕA

ϕB

A/B phase (4x)

Count Up Count Down

Counting
Value

ϕA

ϕB

CW/CCW

14 Count Up Count Down

Counting
Value

ϕA

ϕB

Pulse +
direction

Count Up Count Down

Counting
Vaule

14-14
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

2. Using the ring counter

The ring counter value is cyclical in the range of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647. When it is greater than
2,147,483,647, the count value changes to -2,147,483,648 and then the counting continues. When it is less than -
2,147,483,648, the count value changes to 2,147,483,647 and then the counting continues.

2,147,483,647

-2,147,483,648

3. Using the linear counter

The maximum and minimum counter values must be set up. The counter counts up and down between the two limit
counter value. When the count value exceeds the maximum value, the counter state will show the warning of “The
value exceeds the range!” and the count value will be fixed at the maximum counter value. When the count value is
14
below the minimum value, the counter state will show the warning of “The value exceeds the range!” and the count
value will be fixed at the minimum counter value.

When the count value is beyond the allowed range, the counting persists internally in the hardware. The counter
returns to normal and the count value is refreshed when the internal count value comes back within the valid range.

But when the internal count value in the hardware is beyond the valid range of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647, the
counter state shows linear counter overflow or linear counter underflow, the counting stops and the internal count
value stops at 2,147,483,647 or -2,147,483,648. The counting cannot continue until the count value overflow state of
the counter is cleared.

The methods to clear the states include resetting the counter through phase-Z inputs, executing Reset/Preset via
DHCCNT instruction, disabling DHCCNT instruction or changing the CPU from RUN to STOP.
Parameter Setting Unit Default
Max. counter value
0 ~ 2147483647 - 2147483647
(upper limit)
Min. counter value
-2147483648 ~ 0 - -2147483648
(lower limit)

Linear counter
overflow
2,147,483,647
Maximum
counter value

Minimum
counter value
-2,147,483,648
Linear counter
under flow

14-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4. Ring counter overflow/underflow detection

Enable the Ring Counter Overflow/Underflow Detect function in the Alarm Setting of HWCONFIG.
When the overflow or underflow occurs, the alarm will appear.

231-1 231-1
Ring counter
overflow
Counter
0 0
value
Ring counter
underflow
Counting up Counting down
-231 -231

SSI Input Counting

To perform the SSI input counting, first set the configuration of channels in HWCONFIG which includes encoder coding
method, clock rate, SSI data format, monoflop time and maximum variation limit. After the configuration setting is completed,
use the API instruction DHCCNT which is special for AS02HC-A in a program to obtain the counting value, achieve the
counter control as well as get the real time counter state.
14 1. Encoder Coding Method

There are two coding methods, Binary Code and Gray Code for SSI absolute encoder. The Binary Code is the
default coding method. If the Gray Code is selected, the gray-code position data (multi-turn and single-turn data)
transmitted back from the SSI encoder will be converted into the binary-code position data.

2. Clock Rate

The HWCONFIG software provides 5 clock rates for option including 250 kHz, 500 kHz, 625 kHz, 1 MHz and 1.25
MHz. Default: 1 MHz.

3. SSI Data Format

Set Multi-turn, Single-turn and Status Data start bit & length as well as Parity Check based on the specifications of
the used SSI absolute encoder. For SSI data format, 12ST, 13ST, 12 MT+13ST and User-Defined are provided for
option. See the descriptions as below for details.

Data Format - 12ST:

MSB LSB
b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Single-turn data

Data Length (bits): 12

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 12
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b11
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check

14-16
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Data Format - 13ST:

MSB LSB
b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Single-turn data

Data Length (bits): 13

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b12
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check

Data Format - 12MT+13ST (Default):

MSB LSB
b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Multi-turn data Single-turn data

14
Data Length (bits): 25
Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 12
Multi-Turn Data Start Bit: b24
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b12
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check

Data Format – User-Defined:

Users can define all parameters based on the illustration in the following diagram.

Data length

Parity Check Length

Multi-turn data length Single-turn data length Status data length

..
........ ........ ........
. b1 b0

Multi-turn Parity check Single-turn Status data Parity check

start bit start bit start bit start bit start bit

14-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Note: For a multi-turn encoder, the multi-turn data and single-turn data should be next to each other without
additional data placed between them.
Item Setting Default
Data Length (bits) 7 ~ 32 25
Multi-Turn Data Length (bits) 0 ~ 32 12
Multi-Turn Data Start Bit b0 ~ b31 b24
Single-Turn Data Length (bits) 1 ~ 32 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit b0 ~ b31 b12
Status Data Length (bits) 0 ~ 15 0
Status Data Start Bit b0 ~ b31 b0
No check, odd parity check, even
Parity Check No check
parity check
Parity Check Bit b0 ~ b31 b0
Parity Check Start Bit b0 ~ b31 b0
Parity Check Length (bits） 0 ~ 31 0

Example 1: 25-bit Single-Turn Encoder

14 MSB LSB
b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Single-turn data

Data Length (bits): 25

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 25
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b24
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check

Example 2: Encoder with Status Data

MSB LSB
b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Status
Multi-turn data Single-turn data
data

Data Length (bits): 28

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 12
Multi-Turn Data Start Bit: b27
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b15
Status Data Length (bits): 3
Status Data Start Bit: b2
Parity Check: No check

14-18
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Example 3: Encoder with Parity Check

MSB LSB
b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Single-turn data Parity

Data Length (bits): 18

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits):17
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b17
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: Even parity check
Parity Check Bit: b0
Parity Check Start Bit: b17
Parity Check Length (bits): 17

4. Monoflop Time

The Monoflop Time parameter determines the interval time between two SSI data frames. The correct position data
can be received as long as the setting value is greater than that specified for the connected encoder. The range is
set as follows. 14
Monoflop
Time

CLK

MSB LSB MSB

DATA

Parameter Setting Unit Default

Monoflop time 4 ~ 2500 16us 4

5. Maximum Variation Limit

The parameter is used to prevent sudden errors occurring in reading absolute position values due to noise interference.
You can set the limit value for the variation between two consecutive SSI positions.
When the position change exceeds the set limit, the read position value is discarded, the present count value is not
refreshed and the error code is displayed in the counter status. When the position change is back within the set range,
the counting returns to normal and the error code is cleared.
When the maximum position variation limit is set to 0, the function is disabled and no check on the position change
will be done.
Parameter Setting Unit Default
Maximum Variation
0 ~ 2147483647 - 0 (Disabled)
Limit

14-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6. Absolute Position

When the Absolute Position option is selected as the counter type, the counter value will show the absolute position
of the SSI absolute encoder within the range of 0 to 2resolution . The data information including single-turn data, multi-
turn data status, data and counting direction can be displayed independently based on the set data format. The offset
setting of the SSI absolute encoder can be modified as well. Refer to DHCCNT instruction for more.

7. Ring Counter

When Ring Counter is chosen as the counter type, AS02HC-A is used as a 32-bit ring counter by making two read
absolute position variations added up and the count value is changing cyclically in the range of -2147483648 to
2147483647. The counting value changes cyclically within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. The ring counter
value can be cleared to zero through phase Z. The DHCCNT instruction can also be used to clear and preset the
counter value. Refer to DHCCNT instruction for details.

8. Zero Crossing Detection

The SSI Zero Crossing Detect function is enabled on the Alarm Setting tab page of the HWCONFIG software. The
alarm will appear if the absolute position of the SSI encoder crosses the zero position. The detection function can be
used for both the absolute position and ring counters. The timing for the zero crossing is illustrated in the following
table.

14
2R es ol utio n 2R es ol utio n
Zero Zero
crossing crossing
Counter
Absolute value
Position
counting up counting down
0 0
The absolute position of SSI encoder (original data)
The absolute position of SSI encoder (after offsetting)

14-20
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

231-1 231-1

2R es ol utio n 2R es ol utio n

Counter Zero Zero Zero Zero

value crossing crossing crossing crossing
counting
Ring counting up down
Counter 0 0

The absolute position

of SSI encoder

Ring counter
31 31
-2 -2

14
9. Ring Counter Overflow / Underflow Detection

The Ring Counter Overflow/Underflow Detection function is enabled on the Alarm Setting tab page of the
HWCONFIG software. The alarm will appear as the counter value overflow/underflow occurs.

231-1 231-1
Ring counter
Counter overflow
value
0 0
Ring counter
underflow
Counting up Counting down
-231 -231

10. SSI Encoder Rotation Rate Restriction

For the SSI input counting, the rotation rate restriction is influenced by the SSI encoder resolution and monoflop time.
Use the corresponding formula in the following table to calculate the rotation speed of the SSI encoder.
Encoder type Rotation rate (RPM)
60
Single-turn encoder ± (tp: monoflop time, unit: us)
2×tp×10−6
60×2MT data length
Multi-turn encoder ± (tp: monoflop time, unit: us)
2×tp×10−6

14-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

See the reference values for the formula above in the following table.
Max. rotation rate Max. rotation rate
Monoflop time
of single-turn encoders of multi-turn encoders
(us)
(RPM) (RPM)
64 468750 468750 ✕ 2MT data length
4000 7500 7500 ✕ 2MT data length
8000 3750 3750 ✕ 2MT data length
12000 2500 2500 ✕ 2MT data length
16000 1875 1875 ✕ 2MT data length
20000 1500 1500 ✕ 2MT data length
24000 1250 1250 ✕ 2MT data length
28000 1071 1071 ✕ 2MT data length
32000 938 938 ✕ 2MT data length
36000 833 833 ✕ 2MT data length
40000 750 750 ✕ 2MT data length

Z-Phase Function Setting

14
AS02HC-A’s two channels, each of which is with one input point (CH1 Z and CH2 Z) should be configured in function by
HWCONFIG before they are used to achieve the functions of counter reset, gate control, counter value capture and digital
filtering.
Item name Setting Unit Default
Counter Reset, Counter Reset +Yno,
Phase-Z Function Setting - Counter Reset
Gate Control and Capture
Phase-Z Function Description Remark
The counter is cleared (the counter value is The counter value cannot be cleared if the
Counter Reset
reset to 0 and the counter status is SSI input and the absolute-position
(Default)
cleared.) counter type are selected.
Same to Counter Reset above. Also clears
the output points that are set by the The DHCCMP or DHCCMPT instruction is
Counter Reset +Yno
DHCCMP comparison instruction or table used.
comparison instruction DHCCMPT.
The counter value capture is triggered
Capture through the rising edge and falling edge of The DHCCAP instruction is used.
phase Z.
When phase Z is at low level, the counter’s
Gate control counting pauses. When phase Z is at high Applicable to the pulse input only.
level, the counter’s counting continues.

Item name Setting Unit Default

Filter time 0 ~ 200 100 us 0 (Disabled)

14-22
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

List of Dedicated API Instructions

The operation of AS02HC-A is realized via dedicated API instructions in HWCONFIG after the counter configuration setting
is done. The dedicated API instructions for AS02HC-A include DHCCNT, DHCCAP, HCDO, DHCCMP, DHCCMPT and
DHCMEAS. For details on these instructions and application examples, refer to AS Series Programming Manual.
Instruction Symbol Function

Enable/ disable the counter

Change the count value
Clear the counter
Preset the counter
DHCCNT
Show current counter value
(Counter control)
Show the counting direction
Show the counter state
Correct SSI offset
Show SSI data

DHCCAP
Set a capture method 14
(Count value
Show captured count values
capture)

HCDO Control output points

(Output point control) Show output-point state

Enable/disable comparison output function

DHCCMP Set two point comparison values
(Comparison output) Set comparison-matched actions
Show comparison-matched status

14-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Instruction Symbol Function

Enable/disable table comparison output function

DHCCMPT
Set comparison values for up to ten points
(Table comparison
Set comparison-matched action
output)
Show comparison-matched status

Enable/disable measurement function

DHCMEAS
Set average times
(Rotation rate
Show measured frequency
measurement)
Show measured rotations per minute

14
The impact of AS CPU Status on AS02HC-A
The following table lists the module execution states corresponding to AS CPU operation states of poweroff, and Run ->
Stop. After the AS CPU state switches from Stop to Run, the operation state of AS02HC-A module is controlled by the PLC
program.
Item Poweroff, CPU Run -> Stop
Y0.0~Y0.3 Reset to OFF
Phase Z Disabled
Counter The counting stops and counter state is cleared.
DHCCNT The instruction is disabled.
HCDO The instruction is disabled.
DHCCAP The instruction is disabled.
DHCCMP The instruction is disabled; MATCH1 and MATCH2 are cleared.
DHCCMPT The instruction is disabled and CurNo is cleared.
DHCMEAS The instruction is disabled.

14-24
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Operation in DIADesigner-AX
Parameter Settings
Before using AS02HC-A to count, you need to set the following parameters in DIADesigner-AX. Set the parameters and
then download the settings to AS02HC-A. Refer to section 14.6 for detailed operations in DIADesigner-AX.
Input
Tab Setting Value Setting Option
Interface
A／B phase (2x) (default)

A／B phase (4x)

Pulse Type
CW／CCW

Pulse Input Pulse+direction

Ring counter (default)
Counter Type
Linear counter
Maximum Counter Value 0～2147483647

Minimum Counter Value -2147483648～0

Binary Code (default)
Encoder Coding Method
Gray Code
250 kHz 14
500 kHz
Clock Rate 625 kHz
1 MHz (default)
1.25 MHz
Data Length 7～32 (default: 25)
CH1 Input b0～b31 (default: b24)
Muti-turn MSB Location
Interface
Muti-turn Length 0～32 (default: 12)

Single-turn MSB Location b0～b31 (default: b12)

Single-turn Length 1～32 (default: 13)

Status MSB Location b0～b31 (default: b0)

SSI Input
Status Length 0～15 (default: 0)
None (default)
Parity Check Even parity check
Odd parity check

Parity Bit Location b0～b31 (default: b0)

Parity Check Start b0～b31 (default: b0)

Parity Check Length 0～31 (default: 0)

Absolute Position (default)
Counter Type
Ring counter
Monoflop Time 4～2500, unit: 16us (default: 4)

CH1 Maximum Variation Limit 0～2147483647 (default: 0, disabled)

CH1 Input
Same as the settings in CH1 Setting
Interface

14-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Input
Tab Setting Value Setting Option
Interface
Reset Counter (default)

CH1 Z-Phase Reset Counter＋Yno

Function Capture

Gate Control
CH2 Z-Phase
Same as CH1 Z-Phase Function
Function
Z-Phase Filter
0～200, unit: 100us (default: 0)
Time
CH1 Ring Counter
Default: disabled
Overflow/underflow Detec
CH1 SSI Zero Crossing Detect Default: disabled
Alarm settings
CH2 Ring Counter
Default: disabled
Overflow/underflow Detect
CH2 SSI Zero Crossing Detect Default: disabled

14
Pulse Input Counting
To perform the pulse-input counting, first set the configuration of channels, which includes pulse type and counter type in
DIADesigner-AX. If the counter type is set to the linear counter, the maximum counting value and minimum counting value
need be set. After the configuration setting is completed, use the API instruction DFB_DHCCNT which is special for
AS02HC-A in a program to obtain the counting value, achieve the counter control as well as get the real-time counter state.

1. Pulse Type

Specify the pulse input type, which can be A/B phase (2x), A/B phase (4x), CW/CCW or pulse + direction.
Parameter Setting Unit Default
A/B phase (2x),
A/B phase (4x),
Pulse Type - A/B phase (2x)
CW/CCW,
Pulse + direction

Pulse Type Timing to Count

ϕA

ϕB

A/B phase (2x)

Count Up Count Down

Counting
Value

14-26
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Pulse Type Timing to Count

ϕA

ϕB

A/B phase (4x)

Count Up Count Down

Counting
Value

ϕA

ϕB

CW/CCW

Count Up Count Down

14
Counting
Value

ϕA

ϕB

Pulse + direction

Count Up Count Down

Counting
Vaule

14-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. Using the ring counter

The ring counter value is cyclical in the range of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647. When it is greater than
2,147,483,647, the count value changes to -2,147,483,648 and then the counting continues. When it is less than
-2,147,483,648, the count value changes to 2,147,483,647 and then the counting continues.

2,147,483,647

-2,147,483,648

3. Using the linear counter

The maximum and minimum counter values must be set up. The counter counts up and down between the two
limit counter value. When the count value exceeds the maximum value, the counter state will show the warning of
“The value exceeds the range!” and the count value will be fixed at the maximum counter value. When the count
14 value is below the minimum value, the counter state will show the warning of “The value exceeds the range!” and
the count value will be fixed at the minimum counter value.
When the count value is beyond the allowed range, the counting persists internally in the hardware. The counter
returns to normal and the count value is refreshed when the internal count value comes back within the valid
range.
But when the internal count value in the hardware is beyond the valid range of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647,
the counter state shows linear counter overflow or linear counter underflow, the counting stops and the internal
count value stops at 2,147,483,647 or -2,147,483,648. The counting cannot continue until the count value overflow
state of the counter is cleared.
The methods to clear the states include resetting the counter through phase-Z inputs, executing Reset/Preset via
DHCCNT instruction, disabling DHCCNT instruction or changing the CPU from RUN to STOP.
Parameter Setting Unit Default
Max. counter value
0 ~ 2147483647 - 2147483647
(upper limit)
Min. counter value
-2147483648 ~ 0 - -2147483648
(lower limit)

Linear counter
overflow
2,147,483,647
Maximum
counter value

Minimum
counter value
-2,147,483,648
Linear counter
under flow

14-28
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

4. Ring counter overflow/underflow detection

Enable the Ring Counter Overflow/Underflow Detect function in the Alarm Setting of DIADesigner-AX. When the
overflow or underflow occurs, the alarm will appear.

231-1 231-1
Ring counter
overflow
Counter
0 0
value
Ring counter
underflow
Counting up Counting down
-231 -231

SSI Input Counting

To perform the SSI input counting, first set the configuration of channels in DIADesigner-AX, which includes encoder coding
method, clock rate, SSI data format, monoflop time and maximum variation limit. After the configuration setting is completed,
use the API instruction DFB_DHCCNT, which is special for AS02HC-A in a program to obtain the counting value, achieve
the counter control as well as get the real-time counter state.

1. Encoder Coding Method

14
There are two coding methods, Binary Code and Gray Code for SSI absolute encoder. The Binary Code is the
default coding method. If the Gray Code is selected, the gray-code position data (multi-turn and single-turn data)
transmitted back from the SSI encoder will be converted into the binary-code position data.

2. Clock Rate

The DIADesigner-AX software provides 5 clock rates for option including 250 kHz, 500 kHz, 625 kHz, 1 MHz and
1.25 MHz. Default: 1 MHz.

3. SSI Data Format

Set Multi-turn, Single-turn and Status Data start bit & length as well as Parity Check based on the specifications of
the used SSI absolute encoder. For SSI data format, 12ST, 13ST, 12 MT+13ST and User-Defined are provided for
option. See the descriptions as below for details.
Data Format - 12ST:

MS B LSB
b 11 b1 0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Si ngl e-turn d ata

Data Length (bits): 12

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 12
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b11
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check

14-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Data Format - 13ST:

MSB LSB
b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Single-turn data

Data Length (bits): 13

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b12
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check

Data Format - 12MT+13ST (Default):

MSB LSB
14 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Multi-turn data Single-turn data

Data Length (bits): 25

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 12
Multi-Turn Data Start Bit: b24
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b12
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check

Data Format – User-Defined:

Users can define all parameters based on the illustration in the following diagram.

Data length

Parity Check Length

Multi-turn data length Single-turn data length Status data length

..
........ ........ ........
. b1 b0

Multi-turn Parity check Single-turn Status data Parity check

start bit start bit start bit start bit start bit

Note: For a multi-turn encoder, the multi-turn data and single-turn data should be next to each other without
additional data placed between them.

14-30
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Item Setting Default

Data Length (bits) 7 ~ 32 25
Multi-Turn Data Length (bits) 0 ~ 32 12
Multi-Turn Data Start Bit b0 ~ b31 b24
Single-Turn Data Length (bits) 1 ~ 32 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit b0 ~ b31 b12
Status Data Length (bits) 0 ~ 15 0
Status Data Start Bit b0 ~ b31 b0
No check, odd parity check, even
Parity Check No check
parity check
Parity Check Bit b0 ~ b31 b0
Parity Check Start Bit b0 ~ b31 b0
Parity Check Length (bits） 0 ~ 31 0

Example 1: 25-bit Single-Turn Encoder

MSB LSB
b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
14
Single- turn data

Data Length (bits): 25

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 25
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b24
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: No check

Example 2: Encoder with Status Data

MSB LSB
b27 b26 b 25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b 20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b 11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Status
Multi-turn data Singl e-turn data
data

Data Length (bits): 28

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 12
Multi-Turn Data Start Bit: b27
Single-Turn Data Length (bits): 13
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b15
Status Data Length (bits): 3
Status Data Start Bit: b2
Parity Check: No check

14-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Example 3: Encoder with Parity Check

MSB LSB
b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b 12 b 11 b 10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Si ngl e-turn d ata Parity

Data Length (bits): 18

Multi-Turn Data Length (bits): 0
Single-Turn Data Length (bits):17
Single-Turn Data Start Bit: b17
Status Data Length (bits): 0
Parity Check: Even parity check
Parity Check Bit: b0
Parity Check Start Bit: b17
Parity Check Length (bits): 17

4. Monoflop Time
The Monoflop Time parameter determines the interval time between two SSI data frames. The correct position data
14 can be received as long as the setting value is greater than that specified for the connected encoder. The range is
set as follows.
Monoflop
Time

CLK

MSB LSB MSB

DATA

Parameter Setting Unit Default

Monoflop time 4 ~ 2500 16us 4

5. Maximum Variation Limit

The parameter is used to prevent sudden errors occurring in reading absolute position values due to noise interference.
You can set the limit value for the variation between two consecutive SSI positions.
When the position change exceeds the set limit, the read position value is discarded, the present count value is not
refreshed and the error code is displayed in the counter status. When the position change is back within the set range,
the counting returns to normal and the error code is cleared.
When the maximum position variation limit is set to 0, the function is disabled and no check on the position change
will be done.
Parameter Setting Unit Default
Maximum Variation
0 ~ 2147483647 - 0 (Disabled)
Limit

14-32
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

6. Absolute Position
When the Absolute Position option is selected as the counter type, the counter value will show the absolute position
of the SSI absolute encoder within the range of 0 to 2resolution . The data information including single-turn data, multi-
turn data status, data and counting direction can be displayed independently based on the set data format. The offset
setting of the SSI absolute encoder can be modified as well. Refer to DHCCNT instruction for more.

7. Ring Counter
When Ring Counter is chosen as the counter type, AS02HC-A is used as a 32-bit ring counter by making two read
absolute position variations added up and the count value changes cyclically in the range of -2147483648 to
2147483647. The ring counter value can be cleared to zero through phase Z. The DHCCNT instruction can also be
used to clear and preset the counter value. Refer to DHCCNT instruction for details.

8. Zero Crossing Detection

The SSI Zero Crossing Detect function is enabled on the Alarm Setting tab page of the DIADesigner-AX software.
The alarm will appear if the absolute position of the SSI encoder crosses the zero position. The detection function can
be used for both the absolute position and ring counters. The timing for the zero crossing is illustrated in the following
table.

2R es ol utio n 2R es ol utio n
Zero
crossing
Zero
crossing
14
Counter
Absolute value
Position
counting up counting down
0 0
The absolute position of SSI encoder (original data)
The absolute position of SSI encoder (after offsetting)

231-1 231-1

2R es ol utio n 2R es ol utio n

Counter Zero Zero Zero Zero

value crossing crossing crossing crossing
counting
Ring counting up down
Counter 0 0

The absolute position

of SSI encoder

Ring counter
31 31
-2 -2

14-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

9. Ring Counter Overflow / Underflow Detection

The Ring Counter Overflow/Underflow Detection function is enabled on the Alarm Setting tab page of the
DIADesigner-AX software. The alarm will appear as the counter value overflow/underflow occurs.

31 31
2 -1 2 -1
Ring counter
Counter overflow
val ue
0 0
Ring counter
underflow
31 Counting up 31 Counting down
-2 -2

10. SSI Encoder Rotation Rate Restriction

For the SSI input counting, the rotation rate restriction is influenced by the SSI encoder resolution and monoflop time.
Use the corresponding formula in the following table to calculate the rotation speed of the SSI encoder.

Encoder type Rotation rate (RPM)

60
Single-turn encoder ± (tp: monoflop time, unit: us)
2×tp×10−6
60×2MT data length
14 Multi-turn encoder ±
2×tp×10−6
(tp: monoflop time, unit: us)

See the reference values for the formula above in the following table.
Max. rotation rate Max. rotation rate
Monoflop time
of single-turn encoders of multi-turn encoders
(us)
(RPM) (RPM)
64 468750 468750 ✕ 2MT data length

4000 7500 7500 ✕ 2MT data length

8000 3750 3750 ✕ 2MT data length

12000 2500 2500 ✕ 2MT data length

16000 1875 1875 ✕ 2MT data length

20000 1500 1500 ✕ 2MT data length

24000 1250 1250 ✕ 2MT data length

28000 1071 1071 ✕ 2MT data length

32000 938 938 ✕ 2MT data length

36000 833 833 ✕ 2MT data length

40000 750 750 ✕ 2MT data length

14-34
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Z-Phase Function Setting

AS02HC-A’s two channels, each of which is with one input point (CH1 Z and CH2 Z) should be configured in function by
DIADesigner-AX before they are used to achieve the functions of counter reset, gate control, counter value capture and
digital filtering.
Item name Setting Unit Default
Counter Reset, Counter Reset +Yno,
Phase-Z Function Setting - Counter Reset
Gate Control and Capture

Phase-Z Function Description Remark

The counter is cleared (the counter value is The counter value cannot be cleared if the
Counter Reset
reset to 0 and the counter status is SSI input and the absolute-position
(Default)
cleared.) counter type are selected.
Same to Counter Reset above. Also clears
the output points that are set by the The DHCCMP or DHCCMPT instruction is
Counter Reset +Yno
DHCCMP comparison instruction or table used.
comparison instruction DHCCMPT.
The counter value capture is triggered
Capture through the rising edge and falling edge of The DHCCAP instruction is used.
phase Z. 14
When phase Z is at low level, the counter’s
Gate control counting pauses. When phase Z is at high Applicable to the pulse input only.
level, the counter’s counting continues.

Item name Setting Unit Default

Filter time 0 ~ 200 100us 0 (Disabled)

List of Dedicated API Instructions

The operation of AS02HC-A is realized via dedicated API instructions after the counter configuration setting is done in
DIADesigner-AX. The dedicated API instructions for AS02HC-A include DFB_DHCCNT, DFB_DHCCAP, DFB_DHCCMP,
DFB_DHCCMPT and DFB_DHCMEAS. For details on these instructions and application examples, refer to Chapter 6
Module Read-write Instructions in AX Series- Standard Instructions Manual.

Instruction Symbol
Function
Enable/ disable the counter
Change the count value
Clear the counter
Preset the counter
DFB_DHCCNT
Show current counter value
(Counter control)
Show the counting direction
Show the counter state
Correct SSI offset
Show SSI data

DFB_DHCCAP
Set a capture method
(Count value
Show captured count values
capture)

14-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Instruction Symbol
Function

Enable/disable comparison output

function
DFB_DHCCMP
Set two-point comparison values
(Comparison output)
Set comparison-matched actions
Show comparison-matched status

Enable/disable table comparison

output function
DFB_DHCCMPT
Set comparison values for up to ten
(Table comparison
points
output)
Set comparison-matched action
Show comparison-matched status
Enable/disable measurement
function
DFB_DHCMEAS
Set average times
(Rotation rate
Show measured frequency
14 measurement)
Show measured rotations per
minute

14-36
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

HWCONFIG in ISPSoft
Initial Setting
1. Start ISPSoft and then double-click HWCONFIG.

14

2. Click the Scan button.

14-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. After the scanning is completed, AS02HC-A will appear in the following window.

4. Select AS02HC-A and set module parameters.

14

14-38
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

5. Close the setting page to finish the setting.

14
6. Click Download to download the configuration data. (The download cannot be performed if the CPU is in RUN
state)

14-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Checking Module Version

1. Click Common menu > On-line Mode.

2. Double-click AS02HC module to check the firmware version and hardware version.

14

14-40
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Online Mode
1. Click On-line Mode to enter the online mode.

2. Right-click AS02HC module and select Hardware Configuration or Module State from the context menu. Then the
error code information can be seen in the module state window and module error log can be seen in the diagnosis
area. 14

14-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Import and Export a Parameter File

1. Click Export in the dialog box to save the current parameters as a dep file (.dep).

14

2. Click Import in the dialog box and select a dep file to save parameters.

14-42
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Parameters
1. Select one input interface in CH1 Setting / CH2 Setting.

2. Pulse Input in CH1 Setting / CH2 Setting.

14

3. SSI Input in CH1 Setting / CH2 Setting

14-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4. Z-Phase Function Setting

5. Alarm Setting

14

Normal Exchange Area

The data exchange area between the CPU and a module is in the Device Setting dialog box. The normal exchange areas
for modules are different from one another. Special D registers are corresponded to automatically based on the
configuration data for the convenience of directly reading the values. The error codes of AS02HC-A are configured in the
Normal Exchange Area. The error codes of the module can be known by monitoring D registers.

14-44
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration)

Initial Setting
1. Start DIADesigner-AX, then right-click on Delta_LocalBus_Master and click on Scan for Devices.

14

2. Click the Copy All Devices to Project button in the Scan Devices dialog.

14-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. After that, AS02HC-A appears, as shown in the following window.

14
4. Double-click on AS02HC-A to start setting module parameters.

14-46
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

5. Complete the setup for module parameters.

14
6. Click the Login icon to download the module parameters.

14-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Checking Module Version

1. You can see the module version information from the Module Revision parameter in the following window after
entering the online mode with a click on the Login icon.

14
Online Mode
1. Click the Login icon to enter the online monitoring mode.

14-48
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

2. Click the Status tab to view the status of AS05HC-A.

Parameters
1. Select one input interface in CH1 Input Interface / CH2 Input Interface.
14

2. Pulse input settings in Channel 1 Pulse Input Parameter / Channel 2 Pulse Input Parameter

14-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. SSI input settings in Channel 1 SSI Parameter / Channel 2 SSI Parameter

14

4. Z-Phase Function Setting

14-50
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

5. Alarm Settings

Normal Exchange Area

14
After the variables are declared, AS02HC-A can be monitored in the program and the error codes of the module can be
known by monitoring devices.

14-51
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Troubleshooting
Error Codes
Error ERR
Description Counter action Remark
code LED
Counted result in the latched
16#1605 area is not retainable (major
error)
The counter The error alarm makes the CPU
Module settings in the latched
module stops stop the system. (The module need
16#1606 area is not retainable. (major ON
operating and be set to keep counting or stop for
error)
counting when an error occurs in the module:)
Module setting error
16#1607
(major error)

Linear counter:
Counter value overflow inside the
Counter overflow / underflow
16#1800 Linear counter: hardware
on CH1
Counting stops. Ring counter:
After the Ring Counter
Blinking
Ring counter: Overflow/Underflow Detect function
Counting is enabled in the Alarm Setting of
Counter overflow / underflow
16#1801 continues. HWCONFIG, the alarm will appear
14 on CH2
when the overflow or underflow
occurs.

Linear count exceeding the set The counting value The counting inside the hardware
16#1802
upper/lower limit on CH1 is fixed at the set persists. When the internal counter
Blinking max. counter value value is back within the valid range,
Linear count exceeding the set or the set min. the counter returns to normal and
16#1803
upper/lower limit on CH2 counter value. the counting value is refreshed.
The variation in relation to an
16#1804 SSI encoder position The counting value
The variation between two
exceeding the limit on CH1 is fixed at the most
Blinking consecutive SSI positions exceeds
The variation in relation to an recent correct count
the setting value.
16#1805 SSI encoder position value.
exceeding the limit on CH2
Encoder disconnection/ wiring
Abnormal SSI communication error/no power supply to the
16#1806 The counting value
on CH1 encoder/ data format error/parity
is fixed at the most
Blinking check setting error
recent correct count
Abnormal SSI communication (Error log will not appear unless five
16#1807 value.
on CH2 consecutive abnormal situations
occur.)
SSI absolute position cross After the SSI Zero Crossing Detect
16#1808
zero point on CH1 function is enabled on the Alarm
Setting tab page of the HWCONFIG
Blinking Counting continues.
SSI absolute position cross software, the alarm will appear as
16#1809
zero point on CH2 the absolute position of the SSI
encoder crosses the zero position.

14-52
 Ch a pt er 1 4 H i g h- Sp e ed C o un te r Mo d u le A S 02 HC

Troubleshooting Procedure
Description Solution
Counted data is lost. Switch the module power OFF and ON again. The
Counted result in the latched area is not
error code is cleared by the system. Contact the factory if the problem
retainable (major error)
persists.
Module setting data is lost. Switch the module power OFF and ON
Module settings in the latched area is not
again. Download the HWCONFIG settings again to clear the error code.
retainable. (major error)
Contact the factory if the problem persists.
Module setting error Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent with the actual
(major error) placement. Contact the factory if the problem persists.

Counter overflow / underflow on CH1 Check the counter result. If the alarm is not required, disable the alarm
output function in HWCONFIG. Use any of the followings to clear the
error code: clear, reset, preset the counter, restart the module, or
Counter overflow / underflow on CH2
execute DHCCNT instruction again.
Linear count exceeding the set upper/lower
Check the signal received by channel 1 and 2.
limit on CH1
Hardware counter is still counting; when the number is back within the
Linear count exceeding the set upper/lower
range of the maximum to the minimum, the error code will be cleared.
limit on CH2
The variation in relation to a SSI encoder
position exceeding the limit on CH1 Check if there is any interruption and check the device specification to
The variation in relation to a SSI encoder see if the offset setting is matching with the actual placement. 14
position exceeding the limit on CH2

Abnormal SSI communication on CH1 Check the execution of DHCCNT instruction. If it is parity check, check if
there is any interruption and check if the data format is correct. Check if
Abnormal SSI communication on CH2 the device wiring is secure, and if the encoder power supply is normal.

SSI absolute position cross zero point on Check the SSI absolute encoder specification and modify the setting
CH1 accordingly. If the alarm is not required, disable the alarm output function
in HWCONFIG. Use any of the followings to clear the error code: clear,
SSI absolute position cross zero point on
reset, preset the counter, restart the module, or execute DHCCNT
CH2
instruction again.

14-53
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

MEMO

14

14-54
 15
Chapter 15 High-Speed Analog Input
Module AS02ADH

Table of Contents

15.1 Overview ...................................................................................... 15-2

15.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................. 15-2
15.2 Specifications and Functions ........................................................ 15-3
15.2.1 Specifications .............................................................................. 15-3
15.2.2 Profile......................................................................................... 15-6
15.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................. 15-7
15.2.4 AS02ADH Control Register ............................................................ 15-8
15.2.5 Functions ................................................................................... 15-11
15.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 15-23
15.2.7 LED Indicators ............................................................................ 15-27
15.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ................................................................ 15-28
15.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 15-28
15.3.2 Checking Module Version ............................................................. 15-31
15.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 15-32
15.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 15-34
15.3.5 Parameters Setting ..................................................................... 15-35
15.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration) ................................ 15-39
15.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 15-39
15.4.2 Checking Module Version ............................................................. 15-41
15.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 15-42
15.4.4 Parameters Setting ..................................................................... 15-43
15.5 Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 15-48
15.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 15-48
15.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 15-49

15-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15.1 Overview
The AS02ADH module is a high-speed analog-to-digital module with two built-in channels. The conversion rate

of analog to digital signals can be as fast as 20 µs per channeI. Its two built-in channels are capable of sampling

simultaneously. The channels are designed as isolated to reduce interferences and ensure the accuracy of the

measured results. This chapter mainly introduces the specifications, functions and operation of the module. For

software operation, ISPSoft, DIADesigner or DIADesigner-AX is what you need. If you are using AS Series PLC

CPU, refer to ISPSoft User Manual or DIADesigner Manual for more information. The new software

DIADesigner-AX only supports AX Series PLC CPU and AS Series modules now, refer to AX-3 User Manual for

more information on software operation.

15.1.1 Characteristics
(1) High-speed conversion

The conversion rate of analog to digital signals can be as fast as 20 µs per sampling cycle for two

channels simultaneously.

(2) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: The error range for both voltage input and current input is ±0.1% at ambient

temperature of 25 °C.
_15
(3) Full isolation (isolation between channels included)

Apart from the design of separating the digital and analog signals, the isolation between channels is

included to reduce interferences between channels and ensure stability.

(4) External input points triggering

By triggering the external input points to achieve recording the log in real time.

(5) Record function

With external input points used together, the record function can be enabled immediately to record data

continuously or perform the point logging. The highest recording speed can reach 20 µs per log.

(6) Use the tool software for easy settings

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG of ISPSoft or Hardware Configuration of DIADesigner without spending time writing

programs to set registers to manage functions.

(7) Miscellaneous API instructions

The functions including recording log and peak value can be achieved through dedicated API

instructions.

15-2
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.2 Specifications and Functions

15.2.1 Specifications
 Functional specifications

Module Name AS02ADH-A

Number of input channels 2

Voltage: -10 V to 10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 5 V to -5 V, 0 V to 5 V, 1 V to 5 V
Analog input
Current: -20 mA to 20 mA, 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA
16-bit integer
Digital output
32-bit floating point
Error rate Room temperature: ±0.1% ; full temperature range: ±0.2%

Hardware resolution 16 bits

Voltage: ≧2 MΩ
Input resistance value
Current: 250 Ω

Voltage: ±15 V
Absolute input range*1
Current: ±32 mA

Channel sampling
20 µs, 40 µs and 80 µs
Cycle*2

Bandwidth of analog input

20 kHz
signal 15_
Average function Time average, moving average: 1 to 1000 times
Digital filtering Low-pass filter, band-pass filter
Logging function*3 Digital output value (2000 per channel), peak value
Digital calibration Maximum / minimum digital output value clipping, gain, offset
Abnormal input signal
Limit-exceeding detection, disconnection detection#4
detection
External input triggering 2 points (1 point / channel), rising-edge or falling-edge triggered
Maximum frequency of

external input point 10 kHz

triggering

*1: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.
*2: Two channels are in A/D conversion simultaneously.
*3: Logging function should be used with API instructions.
*4: Disconnection detection can only be used in the modes of 4 mA to 20 mA and 1V to 5 V.

15-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Conversion characteristics - Voltage

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range -10 V to 10 V 0 V to 10 V ±5 V 0 V to 5 V 1 V to 5 V

Rated Conversion K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0

to to to to to
Range K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V
Hardware Input Limit*1 to to to to to
10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V
K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 to to to to to
K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384
*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the
input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a
conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input
signal is 10.15 V, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The
module uses the upper limit value (32384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

 Conversion characteristics - Current

_15
Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA

Rated Conversion K-32000 K0 K0

to to to
Range K+2000 K32000 K32000

Hardware Input
-20.24 mA to 20.24 mA -0.24 mA to 20.24 mA 3.81 mA to 20.19 mA
Limit*1
K-32384 K-384 K-384
Conversion Limit*2 to to to
K32384 K32384 K32384
*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the
input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a
conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input
signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The
module uses the upper limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

15-4
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

 Electrical specifications

Module Name AS02ADH-A

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit.

The analog channels are isolated from one another.

Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VAC

Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VAC

Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC

Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VAC

Rated voltage of
24 VDC
external input point

Rated current of
5 mA
external input point

Resistance value of
3.9 kΩ
external input point

Hardware response 15_

time of external input < 5 µs
point OFF -> ON

Hardware response

time of external input < 5 µs

point ON -> OFF

Weight 154g

15-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15.2.2 Profile
38.2 95

02A DH 1
7 7
X0 .0

X0 .1 PWR

● ● ERR
2

98.3
X0.0
V1 + AG1 X0.1

88
I1 + VI1- AD1

3
SL D SL D

8 V2 + AG2

I2 + VI2-
AD2

4
● 2 4V

0V

9 5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Status of the power supply

POWER LED Indicator ON: the power is on.

OFF: the power is off.

Error status of the module

_15
ON: a serious error exists in the module.
ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

2 Blinking: A minor error exists in the module.

Input point status of the module

Input Point Status Indicator ON: the input point is functioning

OFF: the input point is not functioning

Analog-to-digital conversion status

Analog to Digital Conversion Indicator Blinking: conversion is in process.

OFF: conversion has stopped.

3 Removable Terminal Block Inputs are connected to sensors.

4 Arrangement of the Input/Output Terminals Arrangement of the terminals

5 Terminal Block Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Nameplate

15-6
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

S/S X0.0

02ADH S/S X0.1

● ●

X0.0
V1+ AG1
X0.1 PWR

● ● ERR
X0.0
I1+ VI1-
V1+ AG1 X0.1

VI1-
I1+ AD1 SLD SLD
SLD SLD

V2+ AG2
V2+ AG2
I2+ VI2-
AD2
24V
I2+ VI2-
●

0V

● 24V

0V

15_

15-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15.2.4 AS02ADH Control Register

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed

1: -10 V to +10 V
1 Channel 1 mode setup
2: 0 V to 10 V

3: -5 V to +5 V

4: 0 V to 5 V

5: 1 V to 5 V
R/W 1
6: 0 mA to 20 mA

7: 4 mA to 20 mA
2 Channel 2 mode setup
8: -20 mA to +20 mA
_15 Note: when the format is set as floating point

format, you can NOT change the mode through

TO instruction.

3 Channel 1 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
4 Channel 2 offset

5 Channel 1 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
6 Channel 2 gain

7 0: moving average
Channel 1 filtering method
1: time average
2：50 Hz low-pass filter
3：60 Hz low-pass filter
4：1 kHz low-pass filter (for sampling cycle 40
µs and 80 µs only)
5：3 kHz low-pass filter (for sampling cycle 40 R/W 0
8 Channel filtering method µs and 80 µs only)
6：5 kHz low-pass filter (for sampling cycle 40
µs and 80 µs only)
7：7 kHz low-pass filter (for sampling cycle 40
µs only)
8：9 kHz low-pass filter (for sampling cycle 40
µs only)

15-8
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

9：11 kHz low-pass filter (for sampling cycle

40 µs only)
10：1.5 to 3 kHz band-pass filter (for sampling
cycle 40 µs and 80 µs only)
11：3 to 5.5 kHz band-pass filter (for sampling
cycle 40 µs and 80 µs only)
12：5.5 to 8 kHz band-pass filter (for sampling
cycle 40 µs only)
13：8 to 10.5 kHz band-pass filter (for
sampling cycle 40 µs only)
9 Channel 1 average times Time average, moving average: 1 to 1000
R/W 10
10 Channel 2 average times times

0: 20 µs

11 Channel sampling cycle 1: 40 µs R/W 0

2: 80 µs

Channel 1 maximum digital When the digital output value is out of the
12
output value range (-32384 to 32384), the digital clipping is
R/W 32384
Channel 2 maximum digital used to fix the exceeding value to the
13
output value maximum digital output value.
15_
Channel 1 minimum digital When the digital output value is out of the
14
output value range (-32384 to 32384), the digital clipping is
R/W -32384
Channel 2 minimum digital used to fix the exceeding value to the minimum
15
output value digital output value.

Trigger method of the

16
external input point X0.0 0: rising-edge trigger
R/W 0
Trigger method of the 1: falling-edge trigger
17
external input point X0.1

Digital filtering time of the 0: OFF

18
external input point X0.0 1: 100 µs
R/W 0
2: 200 µs
Digital filtering time of the
19
external input point X0.1 3: 500 µs

0: enable channel alarm

1: disable channel alarm

20 Channel Alarm Setup R/W 3
bit0: channel 1 analog input value exceeding

the range detection

15-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Attr. Default

bit1: channel 2 analog input value exceeding

the range detection

0: warning (minor error)

1: alarm (major error)

bit8: error in the external power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

21 When the format is set to integer in

The minimum scale range HWCONFIG, the scale range is invalid. When
-10.0
for channel 1 the format is set to floating-point, the values
22 are shown in HWCONFIG.

Here you can set the minimum and maximum

23 scale ranges of corresponding floating-point

The minimum scale range values for channels.

-10.0
for channel 2 For example, if the scale range for an analog to
24
digital input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates the
_15 maximum value is +10.0 V and the minimum R

value is -10.0 V.
25
The maximum scale range If the scale range for an analog to digital input
10.0
for channel 1 channel is 4 mA to 20 mA. It indicates the
26
maximum value is 20 mA and the minimum

value is 4 mA.

27 Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP

The maximum scale range (API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use

10.0
for channel 2 floating-point operations when the conversion
28 range needs to edit.

15-10
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.2.5 Functions

Item Function Description

1 Digital output format Integer and floating point formats

2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

3 Average function Conversion values are averaged and filtered for each channel.

Low-pass filtering and band-pass filtering: to screen out unwanted

4 Digital filtering
frequency

The conversion rate of analog to digital signals can be set to 20 µs,

5 Sampling cycle
40 µs or 80 µs per sampling cycle for two channels simultaneously.

External input point

Input point filtering is available to reduce the chance of being triggered
6 trigger for digital
by mistake.
filtering

When the digital output value is out of the range (-32384 to 32384), the
Digital output value
7 digital clipping is used to fix the exceeding value to the maximum /
range
minimum digital output value.

Channel detection If an input signal exceeds the input hardware range, the module
8
and alarm produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable this function. 15_
Used with instruction ADLOG and DADLOG (API 1424) to save the
9 Logging function
analog curves for channels.

Peak records for Used with instruction ADPEAK and DADPEAK (API 1425) to save the
10
channels maximum and minimum values for channels.

Disconnection Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4 mA–
11
Detection 20 mA or 1 V–5 V.

1 5 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1. Digital output format

You can choose integer (16-bits, binary format) or floating-point format for the digital output format. If you

set the format to floating-point, you can set the scale range. The analog output mode of a channel has a

corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For example,

if the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0, and the LSP

scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to +10 V, as the

example below shows.

Analog value

10 V

Rated output range

-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range
2. Calibration

_15 To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

(𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺)
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
1000
Example:

A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The

corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to -

100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100.

Original signals
1 0V S igna ls aft er t he ca libration

-32 000 -31900

3200 0 32100
Digita l v alue (X)

-10V

Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal

15-12
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

3. Average function

There are two kinds of averages, including moving average and time average; the setting range is 1 to 1000.

When the setting value (sampling value) is 1, averaging is not executed. Moving average is to use the lastest

N number of read values to perform averaging and thus the latest digital output values can be obtained. Thus

in moving average, digital value updating cycle = sampling cycle. For time average, it is to accumulate

sampling cycle for a time set and then perform averaging on the total value. Thus in time average, digital value

updating cycle = sampling cycle x times. For example, when the sampling cycle is 20 µs and you set times to

1000, the digital value updating cycle is 200 ms (20 µs x 1000).

Digital value updating
Average Setting range
cycle
Moving average Sampling cycle
1~1000
Time average Sampling cycle ╳ times

4. Digital filtering

AS02ADH-A comes with various digital filters. You can use low-pass filter to screen out some specific

frequency or use the band-pass filter to perform filtering on some specific range of frequency. According to

the sampling cycle, you choose an appropriate digital filter; refer to the table below.

Sampling cycle
20 µs 40 µs 80 µs
Filter
15_
50 Hz low-pass filter ● ● ●

60 Hz low-pass filter ● ● ●

1 kHz low-pass filter – ● ●

3 kHz low-pass filter – ● ●

5 kHz low-pass filter – ● ●

7 kHz low-pass filter – ● –

9 kHz low-pass filter – ● –

11 kHz low-pass filter – ● –

1.5~3 kHz band-pass filter – ● ●

3~5.5 kHz band-pass filter – ● ●

5.5~8 kHz band-pass filter – ● –

8~10.5 kHz band-pass filter – ● –

15-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

50 Hz low-pass filter
Magnitude(dB)
0 dB

-30 dB

-60 dB

50 100 150
Frequency(Hz)

Attenuation Cutoff frequency Realization time

50 Hz low-pass filter Multiples of 50 Hz: > 50dB 22 Hz 20 ms

60 Hz low-pass filter
Magnitude(dB)

0 dB

_15

-30 dB

-60 dB

60 120 180
Frequency(Hz)

Attenuation Cutoff frequency Realization time

60 Hz low-pass filter Multiples of 60 Hz: > 50dB 26 Hz 16.7 ms

15-14
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

Low-pass filter

Magnitude(dB)

Band-pass section Cutoff section

-46 dB

fpass fstop Fs/2

Frequency(Hz)

Sampling cycle fpass fstop Realization time

40 µs 1 kHz 2.5 kHz 1.28 ms

1 kHz low-pass filter
80 µs 1 kHz 1.75 kHz 2.56 ms

40 µs 3 kHz 4.5 kHz 1.28 ms

3 kHz low-pass filter
80 µs 3 kHz 3.75 kHz 2.56 ms

5 kHz low-pass filter

40 µs 5 kHz 6.5 kHz 1.28 ms 15_
80 µs 5 kHz 5.75 kHz 2.56 ms

40 µs 7 kHz 8.5 kHz 1.28 ms

7 kHz low-pass filter
80 µs – – –

40 µs 9 kHz 10.5 kHz 1.28 ms

9 kHz low-pass filter
80 µs – – –

40 µs 11 kHz 12.5 kHz 1.28 ms

11 kHz low-pass filter
80 µs – – –

15-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Band-pass filter

0
Band-pass
Magnitude(dB)

Cutoff section section Cutoff section

-46 dB

fstop1 fpass1 fpass2 fstop2 Fs/2

Frequency (Hz)

Sampling Realization
fstop1 fpass1 fpass2 fstop2
cycle time

1.5~3 kHz 40 µs 0 1.5 kHz 3 kHz 4.5 kHz 1.28 ms

band-pass filter 80 µs 0.75 kHz 1.5 kHz 3 kHz 3.75 kHz 2.56 ms

3~5.5 kHz 40 µs 1.5 kHz 3 kHz 5.5 kHz 7 kHz 1.28 ms

_15 band-pass filter 80 µs 2.25 kHz 3 kHz 5.5 kHz 6.25 kHz 2.56 ms

5.5~8 kHz 40 µs 4 kHz 5.5 kHz 8 kHz 9.5 kHz 1.28 ms

band-pass filter 80 µs – – – – –

8~10.5 kHz 40 µs 6.5 kHz 8 kHz 10.5 kHz 12 kHz 1.28 ms

band-pass filter 80 µs – – – – –

15-16
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

5. Sampling cycle

The conversion rate of analog to digital signals can be set to 20 µs, 40 µs or 80 µs per sampling cycle for two

channels simultaneously. See the framework below.

Hardware Firrmware

X0.0 Input point CH1 ADLOG

Digital input point Digital filtering Record data
instruction

Channel 1
Channel 1 Average /
CH1 ADC Digital output
Analog signal Digital filtering
value

Sampling
cycle setup
for channels

Channel 2
Channel 2 Average /
CH2 ADC Digital output
Analog signal Digital filtering
value
15_
CH2 ADLOG
X0.1 Input point Record data
Digital input point Digital filtering instruction

Example:

The conversion rate of analog to digital signals used in this example is 20 µs per sampling cycle for two

channels simultaneously.

20us

0 t
CH1 Ana log input CH2 Ana log input
CH1 ADC re sul t CH2 ADC re sul t

15-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6. External input point trigger for digital filtering

Input point filtering is available to reduce the chance of being triggered by mistake or interferences: you can

set the digital filtering cycle to 0 (disabled), 100 µs, 200 µs, 500 µs according to your requirement.

The filtering cycle used in this example is 100 µs.

Digital filtering /
sampling cycle
(20 µs)

Digital input
point –
pin signal

After filtered,
the positioning
of digital input
point

7. Digital output range

When the digital output value is out of the range (-32384 to 32384), the digital clipping is used to fix the

exceeding value to the maximum / minimum digital output value.

_15
Digital
output value
-upper limit

Digital
output value
-lower limit

8. Channel detection and alarm

If an input signal exceeds the allowable hardware input range, an error message appears and error LED starts

to blink. You can disable this function in the setting of Channel Detect and Alarm so that the module does not

produce an alarm or a warning when the input signal exceeds the input range.

15-18
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

9. Logging function

AS02ADH can record 10000 pieces of data, if the function is used with instructions ADLOG and DADLOG

(API 1424), you can set up the parameters, enable or disable recording for channels. Refer to section 6.15

(API14 Module Instructions) from AS Series Programming Manual for more information.
Instruction Symbol Functions
ADLOG
En
Group Datalog Enable / disable recording
Record mode: Fixed period, Fixed period + Trigger start,
Module CurNo
Point logging, Fixed period + Trigger position assign
ADLOG ChNo Cmplt Recording cycle: multiples of 1~32000
(16-bit)
Mode Error Total number of all records: 1~2000
Period ErrCode The number of records before/after being triggered:
0~2000
Points
Postrig

DADLOG
En
Group Datalog
Module CurNo When the output value is in floating-point format, you
DADLOG ChNo Cmplt need to use this 32-bit instruction.
(32-bit) The functions for 32-bit instruction are the same as they
Mode Error
are stated for 16-bit instruction above.
Period ErrCode
Points
15_
Postrig

AS02ADH-A can record the shortest time (20 µs) of data and the longest time (2.56 s) of data. It can also
record by external input point triggering or as every single log recording. Up to 2000 pieces of data can be
recorded. And there are four recording modes available.

(1) Fixed period mode: Set Mode=0, the data recording would be performed according to the pre-defined
record period when EN switches to ON. After the recording of a specified number of log points is
complete, the Cmplt flag would be set to High automatically.
Example:
Set Points = 2000

1 2

200 0 poin ts 200 0 poin ts

0 t
EN
CurNo 0 1~1999 2000 0~1999 2000
Cmplt

15-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Fixed period + Trigger start mode: Set Mode=1 and switch instruction EN to ON before the recording
starts. When a trigger signal is detected at the external input point, start recording based on the pre-
defined record period. And the Cmplt flag is set to High automatically when completed. Before the
recording is complete, any operation at the external input points does NOT affect the proceeding of
record. When the recording of log points is complete and the Cmplt flag is High, trigger the external
input points again to start a new cycle of recording; the instruction EN does NOT required to be
turned OFF and then ON again to start another new recording.

Record The signal source corresponding to the external input points

Channel (Set the timing for external input trigger in HWCONFIG）

Channel 1 X0.0 rising-edge or falling-edge triggered

Channel 2 X0.1 rising-edge or falling-edge triggered

Example:
Set Points = 2000, the trigger timing for the external input point is set to rising-edge triggered.

1 2

200 0 poin ts 200 0 poin ts

0 t

_15 EN
External input trigger

CurNo 0 1~1999 2000 0~1999 2000

Cmplt

The feature of Fixed period + Trigger Start is similar to Fixed period. But the start timing of recording
in Fixed period mode would be delayed as a result of PLC scan time and module communication
time, which is shown in the following illustration. It is assumed that M0 is the device to control EN of
ADLOG instruction. We can see when M0 switches from OFF to ON, the module does not start
recording immediately but with a slight delay.

Log points u nder fixe d period mode

Log points u nder fixe d period+trigger
start mode

0 t
Fixed period
M0

Recording starts PLC scan time+

communication delay

Fixed pe riod+Trigger Start

Externa l Input Trigger

Recording Starts

15-20
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

(3) Point Logging mode: Set Mode=2, turn the instruction EN to ON before the recording starts. One log
point would be recorded for each triggering at external input point until it reaches the pre-defined
point number, Cmplt flag would set to High automatically. If you need to the recording to be continued
after the Cmplt flag is set to High, execute the instruction again.
Record The signal source corresponding to the external input points

Channel (Set the timing for external input trigger in HWCONFIG）

Channel 1 X0.0 rising-edge or falling-edge triggered

Channel 2 X0.1 rising-edge or falling-edge triggered

Example:
Set Points = 2000, the trigger timing for external input point is set to rising-edge triggered.

2000 th point
2nd poin t 1999 th point
1st point rd
3 poin t 3rd poin t
1st poin t

2nd poin t 4th poin t

0 t
EN
Exte rnal input trig ger

CurNo 0 1 2 3 1998 2000 0 1 2 3 4

Cmplt 1999

(4) Fixed period + Trigger position Assign mode: Set Mode=3 and set parameters Points and PostTrg
15_
according to your requirements. This mode is to trigger at the external input point and record the pre-
defined number of log points before and after the triggering occurs. When using EN to turn on this
mode, AS02ADH-A would start waiting for signals to be triggered at external input. And the sampling
would start right after, until it reaches the pre-defined point number, and then Cmplt flag would set to
High automatically. The value in CurNo is 0 before triggered, and after triggered, the modules start
to send the before-triggered data log to the PLC CPU . Therefore the value of CurNo would catch up
to the number of accumulated log points.
Record The signal source corresponding to the external input points

Channel (Set the timing for external input trigger in HWCONFIG）

Channel 1 X0.0 rising-edge or falling-edge triggered

Channel 2 X0.1 rising-edge or falling-edge triggered

15-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Example
Set Mode=3, Points = 2000, and PostTrg = 1500 so the position of point 501 (Points – PostTrg）would be the
first record after an external trigger signal is detected.
1 2
The number of all records(Points)：2000 The number of all records(Points)：2000

The number of records after The number of records after being

being triggered(PostTrg)：1500 triggered(PostTrg)：1500
0 t
EN
Exte rnal In put Trigge r

CurNo 0 1~1999 2000 0 1~1999

Cmplt

10. Peak records for channels

AS02ADH can record 10000 pieces of data, if the function is used with instructions ADPEAK and DADPEAK
(API 1425) to save the maximum and minimum values for channels. Refer to section 6.15 (API14 Module
Instructions) from AS Series Programming Manual for more information.
Instruction Symbol Functions
ADPEAK
En
_15 Group MAX
ADPEAK Enable / disable peak data recording
(16-bit) Module MIN
ChNo Error
ErrCode

DADPEAK
En
When the output value is in floating-point format, you
Group MAX
DADPEAK need to use this 32-bit instruction.
(32-bit) Module MIN The functions for 32-bit instruction are the same as they
ChNo Error are stated for 16-bit instruction above.
ErrCode

11. Disconnection detection

Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20 mA or 1–5 V. If a module that can
receive inputs between 4–20 mA or from 1–5 V is disconnected, the input signal exceeds the range of
allowable inputs, so the module produces an alarm or a warning.

15-22
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.2.6 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the

module must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that is

not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable

connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) To wire a terminal block, use single-core cables or multi-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22 AWG
with pin-type connectors smaller than 1 mm in diameter, which are covered with an insulation tube as

below. Moreover, use only copper conducting wires that can withstand temperatures above 60° C-75° C.

< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG

(5) Notes on two-wire, three-wire, and four-wire connections: 15_

 Two-wire connection/three-wire connection (passive transducer): connect the transducer and

the analog input module to the same power circuit.

 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply so

do not connect it to the same power circuit as the analog input module.

(6) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 20 ohm.

15.2.6.1 Digital Input Wiring

Sinking Sourcing

X 0.0 S /S

2 4 V DC 2 4 V DC
5mA 5mA

S /S X 0. 0

15-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15.2.6.2 Analog Input Wiring

 4-wired
Volt age input
*4
-1 0V~ +1 0V Sh ielded c able *1 CHX AG 1
1 MΩ

+2 4V
+ V1+ 25 0Ω CH1
*3 I1 + INA 1 A DC1
0V
- VI1 -
AG 1 1 MΩ
SL D *5
AG 1
A G1
Current input
*4
-20mA ~+ 20 mA Sh ielded c able *1 CHX A G2
1 MΩ

+ *2 V 2+
+ 24 V 250 Ω CH2
I 2+ INA 2 A DC2
0V
- VI 2-
AG 2
1 MΩ
SL D *5
A G2
A G2
+1 5V
24 V DC/ DC
0V Co nv erte r 1 -15V AG 1
+1 5V
DC/ DC
Conv ert er 2
-1 5V A G2

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–2) must be short-circuited.
_15
*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. The wording “CHX” indicates that very channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

*5. If the environment is severe or there is interference in 24 V power supply, short-circuit AGn (n=1-2) and the

input signal.

15-24
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

 3-wired
Voltage input
-10V~ +10 V Sh ielde d cable *1
*4
+ 24V A G1
+ CHX 1MΩ
V1+
0V
- I 1+
2 50 Ω CH1
INA 1 ADC1
VI 1-
AG 1
1MΩ
S LD *5
A G1 A G1
Current input
-20mA ~+2 0mA Sh ielde d cable *1 *4
CHX A G2
1MΩ
+ 24V *2
+ V2+
25 0Ω CH2
I2+ I NA2 A DC2
0V
- V I2-
A G2
S LD *5 1MΩ

A G2
AG 2
+ 15V
2 4V DC/DC
0V Convert er 1
-15V AG 1
+ 15V
DC/DC
Con ve rter 2
-15V AG 2

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–2) must be short-circuited.
15_
*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. The wording “CHX” indicates that very channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

*5. If the environment is severe or there is interference in 24 V power supply, short-circuit AGn (n=1-2) and the

input signal.

15-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 2-wired

Current inp ut
+ 24V 4mA ~+2 0mA
+ S hield ed ca ble *1 *4
CHX A G1
1MΩ

*2 V1+
- I 1+
2 50 Ω
I NA1 ADC1
CH1
VI 1-
A G1
0V *5 1MΩ
S LD
A G1 A G1
Current inp ut
+ 24V 4mA~ +2 0mA
+ *4
S hield ed ca ble *1 CHX A G2
1MΩ
*2 V2+
- I2+
25 0Ω
A DC2
CH2
I NA2
V I2-
A G2
0V S LD *5 1MΩ

A G2
AG 2
+ 15V
2 4V DC/DC
0V Conv ert er 1 -15V A G1
+ 15V
DC/DC
Con ve rter 2
-15V AG 2

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–2) must be short-circuited.
_15
*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. The wording “CHX” indicates that very channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

*5. If the environment is severe or there is interference in 24 V power supply, short-circuit AGn (n=1-2) and the

input signal.

15-26
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.2.7 LED Indicators

Printed
Function Description
as

Power status of the module

PWR Power indicator ON: The power supply is normal.

OFF: No power supply

Error status of the module

ON: a major error occurs in the module.

ERR ERROR indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error occurs in the module.

X0.0 input status ON: The X0.0 input is active.

X0.0
indicator OFF: The X0.0 input is not active.

X0.1 input status ON: The X0.1 input is active.

X0.1
indicator OFF: The X0.1 input is not active.

CH1 analog to digital

AD1 Analog-to-digital conversion status
conversion indicator
Blinking: conversion is in process.
CH2 analog to digital 15_
AD2 OFF: conversion has stopped.
conversion indicator

15-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

15.3.1 Initial Setting
1. Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

_15

2. Click Scan to see the available devices.

15-28
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

3. After the scanning is completed, AS02ADH will appear in the following window.

Select AS02ADH and set module parameters.

15_

15-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Close the setting page to finish the setting.

Click Download to download the configuration data. (The download cannot be performed if the CPU is in RUN

state)

_15

15-30
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.3.2 Checking Module Version

1. Click Common menu > On-line Mode.

2. Double-click AS02ADH module to check the firmware version and hardware version.
15_

15-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15.3.3 Online Mode

1. Click On-line Mode to enter the online mode.

2. Right-click the module and click Module State or Diagnosis. You can find digital output values and error

_15 codes in Module State and the error log can be found in Diagnosis.

15-32
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

(1) View the module state.

15_

15-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

1. Click Export in the dialog box to save the current parameters as a dep file (.dep).

_15

2. Click Import in the dialog box and select a dep file to save parameters.

15-34
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.3.5 Parameters Setting

1. Set up the format for parameter values.

2. The CH1–CH2 (channel 1–channel 2) mode settings

15_

15-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. The CH1-CH2 calibration settings

4. The sampling cycle settings

_15

15-36
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

5. The average filter settings

6. The output clipping settings

15_

15-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7. The external trigger input settings

8. The detect and alarm settings

_15

15-38
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.4 DIADesigner-AX (Hardware Configuration)

15.4.1 Initial Setting
1. Start DIADesigner-AX, then double-click on Hardware Configuration and click Yes button.

2. You can see AS02ADH on the right side of AX-3, and then double-click on 02ADH icon.

15_

15-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. Enter the setting window for module parameters.

4. Complete the setup for the parameters you desire.

_15

15-40
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

5. Download the settings by clicking Online menu > Login.

15.4.2 Checking Module Version

1. Click Online menu > Login to start the online monitoring. 15_

15-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. Check the firmware version of the module from the Module Revision parameter.

15.4.3 Online Mode

1. Click Online menu > Login to start online monitoring.

_15

15-42
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

2. Read current parameter values or status in the AS02ADH-A I/O Mapping tab.

15.4.4 Parameters Setting

1. Set up the format for parameter values.

15_

15-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2. CH1–CH2 mode settings

3. CH1-CH2 calibration settings

_15

15-44
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

4. Sampling cycle settings

5. Average filter settings

15_

15-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6. Output clipping settings

7. External trigger input settings

_15

15-46
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

8. Channel detect and alarm settings

15_

15-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15.5 Troubleshooting
15.5.1 Error Codes

Error A  D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

Run: Blinking
16#1605 Hardware failure ON
Stop: OFF

Run: Blinking
16#1606 The parameter setting is not consistent. (alarm) ON
Stop: OFF

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. (alarm) OFF ON

Run: Blinking
16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. (alarm) ON
Stop: OFF

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

Run: Blinking
16#1802 Hardware failure Blinking
Stop: OFF

Run: Blinking
16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. Blinking
Stop: OFF
_15
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs
16#1808
that the hardware can receive. Run: Blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs Stop: OFF
16#1809
that the hardware can receive.

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

15-48
 Ch a pt er 1 5 H i g h- s p e ed I n pu t M od u le A S 0 2 AD H

15.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Make sure the external 24 V power supply to the module

The external voltage is abnormal.
is functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

15_

15-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

MEMO

_15

15-50
Industrial Automation Headquarters
Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 330477, Taiwan
TEL: +886-3-362-6301 / FAX: +886-3-371-6301

Asia EMEA
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: Sales.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
Post code : 201209 Marketing: Marketing.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
TEL: +86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: +86-21-6872-3996 Technical Support: iatechnicalsupport@deltaww.com
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Customer Support: Customer-Support@deltaww.com
Service: Service.IA.emea@deltaww.com
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. TEL: +31(0)40 800 3900
Industrial Automation Sales Department
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 Automotive Campus 260, 5708 JZ Helmond, The Netherlands
TEL: +81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: +81-3-5733-1255 Mail: Sales.IA.Benelux@deltaww.com
TEL: +31(0)40 800 3900
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc. Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
Mail: Sales.IA.DACH@deltaww.com
TEL: +82-2-515-5305 / FAX: +82-2-515-5302
TEL: +49 2921 987 238
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
TEL: +65-6747-5155 / FAX: +65-6744-9228 Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
Mail: Sales.IA.FR@deltaww.com
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon,
PIN 122001, Haryana, India Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
TEL: +91-124-4874900 / FAX: +91-124-4874945 Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL. TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z), Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, Mail: Sales.IA.Iberia@deltaww.com
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand
TEL: +66-2709-2800 / FAX: +66-2709-2827 Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
Via Meda 2–22060 Novedrate(CO)
Delta Electronics (Australia) Pty Ltd. Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Unit 2, Building A, 18-24 Ricketts Road, Mail: Sales.IA.Italy@deltaww.com
Mount Waverley, Victoria 3149 Australia TEL: +39 039 8900365
Mail: IA.au@deltaww.com
Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
TEL: +61-1300-335-823 / +61-3-9543-3720
Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Americas Mail: Sales.IA.Turkey@deltaww.com
TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Eltek Dubai (Eltek MEA DMCC)
TEL: +1-919-767-3813 / FAX: +1-919-767-3969 OFFICE 2504, 25th Floor, Saba Tower 1,
Jumeirah Lakes Towers, Dubai, UAE
Delta Electronics Brazil Ltd. Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
Estrada Velha Rio-São Paulo, 5300 Eugênio de TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Melo - São José dos Campos CEP: 12247-004 - SP - Brazil
TEL: +55-12-3932-2300 / FAX: +55-12-3932-237

Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V.

Gustavo Baz No. 309 Edificio E PB 103
Colonia La Loma, CP 54060
Tlalnepantla, Estado de México
TEL: +52-55-3603-9200

*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice. AS-0249820-12
2024/04/30